TOPS-20
Commands Reference Manual
| Electronic Distribution
|
|
| July 1990
This manual describes all operating
system commands available to the
nonprivileged user of TOPS-20. For easy
reference, the command descriptions are
arranged alphabetically.
This manual supersedes the manual of the
| same name and order number, AA-FP65B-TM.
Change bars in the margins indicate
material that has been added or changed
since the previous release of this
manual.
OPERATING SYSTEM: TOPS-20 (KL Model B) Version 7.0
SOFTWARE: TOPS-20 EXEC Version 7.0
digital equipment corporation
maynard, massachusetts
First Printing, September 1985
Revised, June, 1988
| Software Update Tape 2, July 1990
The information in this document is subject to change without notice
and should not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment
Corporation. Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for any errors that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license
and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such
license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
affiliated companies.
Copyright C 1985, 1988, 1990 Digital Equipment Corporation.
All Rights Reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:
CI DECtape LA50 SITGO-10
DDCMP DECUS LN01 TOPS-10
DEC DECwriter LN03 TOPS-20
DECmail DELNI MASSBUS TOPS-20AN
DECnet DELUA PDP UNIBUS
DECnet-VAX HSC PDP-11/24 UETP
DECserver HSC-50 PrintServer VAX
DECserver 100 KA10 PrintServer 40 VAX/VMS
DECserver 200 KI Q-bus VT50
DECsystem-10 KL10 ReGIS
DECSYSTEM-20 KS10 RSX d i g i t a l
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 2 COMMAND DESCRIPTION
2.1 ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 ADVISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 APPEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 ARCHIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.5 ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.6 ATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.7 BACKSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.8 BLANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.9 BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.10 BUILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.11 CANCEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.12 CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.13 COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
2.14 CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2.15 CONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
2.16 COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2.17 CREATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.18 CREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.19 CSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
2.20 DAYTIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
2.21 DDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
2.22 DEASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
2.23 DEBUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
2.24 DEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.25 DELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
2.26 DEPOSIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.27 DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
2.28 DIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.29 DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
2.30 DISCARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2.31 DISMOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141
2.32 EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
2.33 ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-155
2.34 END-ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158
2.35 EOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
2.36 ERUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
2.37 EXAMINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
2.38 EXECUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-168
2.39 EXPUNGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-177
2.40 FDIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180
2.41 FORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
2.42 FREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-184
2.43 GET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
iii
2.44 HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188
2.45 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
2.46 KEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-216
2.47 LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-219
2.48 LOGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229
2.49 LOGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-235
2.50 MERGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238
2.51 MODIFY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-241
2.52 MOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
2.53 PERUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-269
2.54 PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-272
2.55 POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-279
2.56 PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281
2.57 PUNCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292
2.58 PUSH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-301
2.59 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-305
2.60 RECEIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-307
2.61 REENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-310
2.62 REFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312
2.63 REMARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-315
2.64 RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-317
2.65 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-320
2.66 RETRIEVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-322
2.67 REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-327
2.68 RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
2.69 SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-331
2.70 SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-333
2.71 SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-337
2.72 SET HOST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-374
2.73 SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-380
2.74 START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-383
2.75 SUBMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-388
2.76 SYSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-401
2.77 TAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-412
2.78 TALK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-415
2.79 TDIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-419
2.80 TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-420
2.81 TRANSLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-434
2.82 TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-436
2.83 UNATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-438
2.84 UNDELETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-440
2.85 UNKEEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-442
2.86 UNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-444
2.87 VDIRECTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-446
APPENDIX A FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
A.1 SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.2 FILE SYSTEM COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.3 DEVICE-HANDLING COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.4 PROGRAM CONTROL COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
iv
A.5 INFORMATION COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.6 TERMINAL COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.7 OUTPUT COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.8 BATCH COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
APPENDIX B ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
APPENDIX C FILE ATTRIBUTES
APPENDIX D CONTROL CHARACTERS
INDEX
FIGURES
2-1 Directories and Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . 2-40
PREFACE
The TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual is an alphabetically-arranged
description of all operating system commands (EXEC commands) available
to the nonprivileged timesharing user of TOPS-20.
In addition, there are two appendixes for quick reference - a list of
commands grouped by function, and an alphabetical summary of commands
showing what variety of argument each uses and whether it calls a
program or otherwise affects memory.
To use the TOPS-20 Commands Reference Manual properly, you should
first read and understand the TOPS-20 User's Guide. The occasional
summary of information you will find here cannot substitute for the
more complete presentations offered in this manual.
In addition, you may need to reference the following manuals for more
information related to operating system commands:
TOPS-20 Operator's Command Language Reference Manual
TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference Manual
TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide
TOPS-20 Operator's Guide
TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide
TOPS-20 Edit Reference Manual
EDT-20 Reference Manual
TOPS-20 LINK Reference Manual
TOPS-10/20 Batch Reference Manual
EXEC Message Manual
vi
Conventions Used in This Manual
Underlined text indicates what the user types in command
examples.
^letter means press the keys labeled CTRL and the
specified letter simultaneously, for example
^C.
Ellipsis ... means that items in a command line can be
optionally repeated.
Carriage return is implied in command examples.
vii
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
COMMANDS AND ARGUMENTS
A complete TOPS-20 command consists of the command name and usually
one or more arguments. In the most general sense, arguments are any
combinations of letters, numerals, punctuation marks and other
characters that you type after the command name itself to complete the
meaning of the command. These arguments can be file specifications,
switches, subcommands, and values for switches and subcommands, as
well as words and numbers (the arguments to the SET and TERMINAL
commands, for example). The following pages contain general
information about each variety of argument.
File Specifications
Information and programs for TOPS-20 are usually stored in uniquely
labeled files. Therefore, file specifications or "filespecs" are the
most common variety of argument to a command. A complete file
specification is of the form:
dev:<dir>name.typ.gen;att;...;att
where:
dev: is a device (usually a file structure)
<dir> is a directory name (enclosed in angle < > or square [ ]
brackets)
name is a filename
.typ is a file type
.gen is a generation number
;att is a file attribute
1-1
INTRODUCTION
You need file attributes in only a few situations and can usually let
dev:, <dir>, and .gen take default values (that is, values defined by
the state of your job - see the Special Features section below), so
you can give most file specifications in the shortened form, name.typ,
without being unclear. In a few cases, an entire file specification
is assumed if you do not supply one when you give the command (for the
CREATE and EDIT commands, for example, and for LOAD-class
commands - COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG).
Whenever you omit the dev: field of the filespec, the system assumes
you mean your connected structure (DSK:). This is the public
structure (usually named PS:), which all users must log in to, unless
you connect to a directory on another structure by using the CONNECT
command. Give the INFORMATION STRUCTURE command if you are unsure of
the name for your connected structure.
Whenever you omit the <dir> field of the filespec, the system assumes
you mean your connected directory. Unless you have given a CONNECT
command, this is your "log-in" directory, the directory on the public
structure that you must log in to and which usually has a name
composed of your surname, or surname and initials, enclosed in angle
or square brackets. You can change your connected directory by giving
a CONNECT command. Use the DIRECTORY command to see the name of your
connected directory.
When you omit the .gen field of the filespec the system usually
assumes you mean the highest generation (largest generation number) of
the file. (A few commands, for example, DELETE, RENAME, and
DIRECTORY, act on all generations of a file unless you specify a
particular generation.) When you create and edit text files, compile
and debug programs, or do anything else to produce another generation
of a file, the system automatically works with the highest existing
generation and labels the changed file with the next higher generation
number. Therefore when you omit the generation number in a filespec
given as argument to a TOPS-20 command, you are assured of using the
most recent version of the file. Although you can override this
default action by specifying particular generations of input and
output files, it is simplest and most straightforward to allow the
defaults to prevail.
Specification of file attributes is optional. You can assign
attributes in order to have a file automatically marked for deletion
when you log out; to associate a file with a valid account; and so
forth. Appendix C lists the available file attributes.
Pressing the ESC key instead of typing a filespec field will usually
cause any default for the remaining fields to be printed on your
terminal.
There are two characters (called "wildcard" characters) that you can
include in any field of a filespec to include all files matching the
rest of the filespec. An asterisk (*) fills in for zero or more
1-2
INTRODUCTION
characters of a field, while a percent sign (%) fills in for a single
character only. (However, only the complete field "DSK*:" is allowed
as wildcard for the device field, and only the complete field "*" is
allowed as wildcard for the generation field.) Therefore you could
give the command DIRECTORY *.CBL to find out what source files written
in COBOL are in your connected directory, or the command DELETE *.Q*
to remove the EDIT program's backup files from your directory.
Switches
Switches are arguments used with LOAD-class (COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE,
and DEBUG) and EDIT-class (CREATE and EDIT) commands, as well as with
Queue-class commands - that is, those affecting entries in processing
queues (CANCEL, DISMOUNT, MODIFY, MOUNT, PLOT, PRINT, PUNCH, and
SUBMIT).
Switches can also be used with the following program-control commands:
DDT, GET, MERGE, R, and RUN. The REWIND command also accepts a
switch.
Switches allow you to quickly give many options chosen from a large
list, and let you specify to which files they apply when you give more
than one filespec in a single command.
Give switches on the same line as the command, typing a slash (/)
before each switch. If your command requires more than one line,
simply keep typing without giving a carriage return. The system will
begin a new line automatically and will read your command as if you
had typed it on a single line. Or you can end your command line at
any point with a hyphen (-) and carriage return, and continue the
command on the next line; the hyphen will not be considered part of
your input.
Keep in mind the way each class of command considers switches.
EDIT-class commands operate on only one file at a time, and the
switches must be given before the input filespec - this is the
simplest case.
Queue-class and LOAD-class commands treat switches according to their
position in the command line. If you give them before any filespecs,
they act as default switches for all filespecs in the command (they
will be in effect unless you override them with later switches
applying to individual files only). If you give them after the first
filespec, they apply only to the preceding file. In addition, there
are a few switches of a different sort for the PLOT, PRINT, and PUNCH
commands - these apply to all files no matter where they appear in the
command line. These are called job switches (because they affect the
entire printing job) and are presented in a separate list in those
command descriptions.
A switch is a default if the system assumes it in the absence of
1-3
INTRODUCTION
others. For example, for LOAD-class commands, /FORTRAN is the default
for all switches that specify which compiler to use (like /MACRO,
/COBOL, and /PASCAL). The /NOCOMPILE switch is the default for
/COMPILE, /NOCOMPILE, and /RELOCATABLE. Most defaults for these
commands apply to only a pair of switches; however, the /BINARY,
/NOSEARCH, and /NOOPTIMIZE switches are assumed, for example, unless
you specify /NOBINARY, /SEARCH, and /OPTIMIZE.
Default switches for the other classes of command operate similarly.
Some are in effect unless you specify their opposite; others are in
effect with a default argument unless you specify another argument;
still others must be specified to be in effect, but are supplied with
a default argument. The list of switches presented with each command
description distinguishes these cases. When you give two or more
switches of the same kind (for example, /BINARY and /NOBINARY), the
last switch given usually prevails.
Subcommands
Subcommands are a variety of arguments used chiefly with
DIRECTORY-class (DIRECTORY, FDIRECTORY, TDIRECTORY, and VDIRECTORY)
commands and with the BUILD command. If you want to give subcommands
to any of the DIRECTORY-class commands, type a comma at the end of the
command line just before pressing the carriage return. After the
system prompts you with a double at sign (@@) you can give
subcommands, one on each line. If you give no subcommands to the
DIRECTORY command, the ALPHABETICAL and HEADING subcommands will be in
effect, giving an alphabetical listing of files. For a few
subcommands, default arguments will be in effect if you give the
subcommands without supplying any. You can give subcommands in any
order, requesting or declining special categories of information and
specifying the format of its presentation. If you give mutually
exclusive subcommands (ALPHABETICAL and CHRONOLOGICAL, for example)
the last-given subcommand prevails. Note that the FDIRECTORY,
TDIRECTORY, and VDIRECTORY commands are equivalent to the DIRECTORY
command with certain subcommands automatically included, and can be
further modified with other subcommands from DIRECTORY's list. To
cancel a DIRECTORY-class command while giving subcommands, type a
CTRL/C.
The BUILD command operates differently from DIRECTORY-class commands
in putting you automatically into subcommand mode without your typing
a final comma on the command line, and in offering a special
subcommand to cancel the command while you are typing subcommands.
See the individual command descriptions for more detailed information
about subcommands.
1-4
INTRODUCTION
Other Arguments
Some command arguments are not introduced by special characters such
as slashes or double at signs, but still are particular words, or
"keywords," having a special meaning to the system. Give these on the
same line as the command itself, leaving at least one space before and
between arguments. Certain of these (for example, the LOGICAL-NAMES
argument to the INFORMATION command) are actually composed of more
than one word, joined by hyphens so that the system will not interpret
them as more than one argument. If the complete command will not all
fit onto one line, simply keep typing: the system automatically
begins a new line when necessary, but interprets the typing as if it
had all appeared on one line. Or you can end a command line at any
point with a hyphen (-) and a carriage return, and continue the
command on the next line; the hyphen will not be considered part of
your input.
A few command arguments must be accompanied by special symbols to be
interpreted correctly. Enclose directory names in angle brackets when
using them with the CONNECT or names (for DEFINE), device names (used
with ASSIGN), and structures and tape sets (used with MOUNT or
DISMOUNT) all require a colon at the end. (But note that when
supplying what look like structure and tape set names to the related
CANCEL command, you are supplying jobnames, and must not include the
colon.) If you punctuate a command argument incorrectly, the system
will usually print a message reminding you of this.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Defaults
The concept of "defaults," or command arguments assumed when you do
not specify a choice, is important for understanding TOPS-20. To
speed processing of commands and to help inexperienced users, the
system uses defaults when necessary for completing commands that you
give. By taking advantage of this defaulting action, you can make the
system work faster and more efficiently for you. This manual displays
prominently the available choices of command arguments and the
established defaults for these.
There are different kinds of default. When you give file
specifications as arguments to, say, the PRINT command, the system
assumes that you are referring to the highest (most recent) generation
of these files in your connected structure and connected directory.
By specifying a different structure, directory, or generation you can
override this default, but only if you already have the right
(established by user membership in a group, perhaps, or by a prior
ACCESS command) to do so.
1-5
INTRODUCTION
When you give the INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS command without further
arguments, you are presented with a listing of all requests in the
batch input queue. The /USER switch allows you to limit this display
to the jobs of the user named. If you give the switch without
supplying a user name, your own user name is used as default. (But
the /USER switch to the related SUBMIT command has meaning for
privileged users only, who can use it to run batch jobs under other
user names; for non-privileged users this switch effectively defaults
to your own user name.) Only a few command arguments behave like the
/USER switch. The /TIME switch to the SUBMIT command is worth noting:
by not giving the switch, you set a time limit of 5 minutes; by giving
the switch without specifying a time limit, you are setting a 1-hour
limit; and you can set any other time limit by supplying it as
argument to the switch.
Note that none of the three switches to INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS and
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS (/ALL, /FAST, and /USER) is used as a
default: each calls for a listing that differs in some respects from
that yielded by the unmodified command. However, the INFORMATION
LOGICAL-NAMES command, which allows keywords ALL, JOB, and SYSTEM, has
JOB as default for these. The list of arguments associated with each
command makes these choices clear.
To discover what default argument (if any) is established for a
switch, subcommand, or other argument, press the ESC key instead of
giving the argument: the default will be printed on your terminal.
"Recognition" input is another feature of the TOPS-20 operating system
that speeds up your input, by finishing the typing of a command or
command argument for you when you have given only part of it and then
prompting your next response.
As soon as you have typed enough of a command or argument to
distinguish it from others, press the ESC key: the system will finish
the word, if possible, and prompt your next input with guidewords
enclosed in parentheses. (Note that this manual does not show
guidewords except in the Format section of each command description.)
By pressing the ESC key without beginning an argument you make the
system print the default argument, if there is one. If the system
cannot help you, either because you have not typed enough characters
to make your intentions clear or because there is no default, your
terminal makes a warning noise - either a ringing bell or high-pitched
beep.
Because the ESC key does not produce a printed character, you may be
unable to remember exactly where you pressed it when later examining
the output from a hard-copy terminal. If you want to avoid this
possibility, use the TERMINAL NO RAISE command to make your terminal
produce lowercase input, to distinguish it from the uppercase printing
of the system.
For TOPS-20 Version 7, recognition has been expanded so that presssing
1-6
INTRODUCTION
the ESC key also shows as much of a command keyword or file
specification as possible. For file specifications, recognition is in
effect only for the file name, extension, and version.
You cannot use recognition for device names or directory names
(including file structures), jobnames (for example, with the MODIFY or
CANCEL command) or logical names.
Abbreviation
By abbreviating commands and command arguments, you can further
increase the speed with which you give instructions to TOPS-20. The
smallest unique abbreviation for a command or argument will stand for
the entire word; if there is a default choice for further arguments,
the system will assume you want this too. (You can determine
sufficient abbreviations by using the ESC key: any correctly
recognized abbreviation will stand for the word.) For example, the
abbreviated command FD stands for the FDIRECTORY command; I L stands
for INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES JOB.
There are a few cases where non-unique abbreviations stand for a
frequently used command. For example, DIS is the abbreviation for
DISABLE even though two other commands begin with the letters DIS -
DISCARD and DISMOUNT.
Special Abbreviation Command
C CONTINUE
D DEPOSIT
DIS DISABLE
E EXAMINE
EX EXECUTE
INFORMATION F INFORMATION FILE-STATUS
LOG (When not logged in) LOGIN
LOG (When logged in) LOGOUT
You cannot use abbreviation (or recognition) in a few cases. The
names of devices (including file structures), and jobnames (given, for
example, as arguments to the MODIFY or CANCEL command) must be typed
in full; and of course passwords cannot be abbreviated or recognized.
1-7
INTRODUCTION
Question Marks
Whenever you type a question mark (?) instead of (or even in the
middle of) a TOPS-20 command or command argument, the system responds
with instructions or a list of possible completions. By using
question marks and recognition when you are unsure of the proper
command or argument, you can have the system help you during your
terminal session.
These features, together with the HELP command, which provides
information on various system programs, are valuable supplements to
the written documentation for TOPS-20.
For TOPS-20 Version 7, new functionality has been added to make the
question mark feature more useful. More possible completions and
choices are now listed. In addition to possible command names listed
in response to a question mark, the system also displays possible
filenames from the system (SYS:) directory. For example:
@L ? Command, one of the following
LOAD LOGOUT
or system program name
LOGIN
LOGOUT
Where the LOGIN and LOGOUT that appear after "or system program name"
are files from the system directory that start with L.
The functionality of the question mark feature has been expanded for
file specifications also. Question mark lists possible file names,
extenstions (including nulls), and file version numbers. For example:
@DIRECTORY E? FILE NAME
EXTRA
EXTUSR
EMACS
@DIRECTORY EMACS.? FILE NAME
INIT
VARS
@DIRECTORY EMACS.INIT.? FILE NAME
1
2
DATE-TIME ARGUMENTS
You can specify date and time arguments to many of the TOPS-20
commands. The following sections describe the formats for these
arguments.
Date
1-8
INTRODUCTION
The examples below show the various formats that are acceptable for
the date argument:
Jun 30 1981 30 Jun 1981
May 1, 82 1/May/1982
January 000005 75 0005-January-000075
F/13-83 5/17/83
If the month and day are both numeric, the first number of the two, if
less than 13, is considered to be the month. Otherwise, the second
number is considered to be the month. For example:
2/15/83 is February 15th
15/2/83 is February 15th
You can abbreviate the month to as few characters as possible without
causing it to be confused with another month. Thus,
O
Jun
Jul
Ja
are acceptable abbreviations for October, June, July, and January.
Many commands allow you to give the day of the week or "today" for the
date.
If you specify the time along with the date, you must separate the two
arguments by at least one space and/or no more than one tab.
For the time argument you can specify:
o time according to a 24-hour clock:
/AFTER:17:00:00
o AM and PM:
@SET ALERT 5:00PM
o the following time zones:
GST, GDT, GMT Greenwich 0
AST, ADT Atlantic 4
EST, EDT Eastern 5
CST, CDT Central 6
MST, MDT Mountain 7
PST, PDT Pacific 8
1-9
INTRODUCTION
YST, YDT Yukon 9
HST, HDT Hawaii/Alaska 10
BST, BDT Bering 11
DAYLIGHT Daylight time
for your zone
STANDARD Standard time
for your zone
Examples
6:00PM-EDT is 5:00PM EST
6:00PM-PST is 9:00PM EST
6:00PM-GMT is 1:00PM EST
Note that a hyphen (-) is required before the zone.
The basic time format is:
hh:mm:ss
where:
hh is hours, must be less than 24, and is optional
mm is minutes, must be less than 60, and is required
ss is seconds, must be less than 60, and is optional
The colon between hours and minutes is optional.
Examples (based on a 24-hour clock):
3 is 00:03:00AM
125 is 1:25AM
14:30 is 2:30PM
25:33 is 00:25:33AM
Relative Date-Time Arguments
Many commands accept relative dates and times. You can specify that
an event is to occur at a certain amount of time from the current
time, from today, or from a certain day of the week. Likewise, you
can specify relative times in the past.
Examples
@SET ALERT +30 sets an alert for 30 minutes from now
@DIRECTORY, produces a listing of files that
@@BEFORE TODAY were created before today's date
1-10
INTRODUCTION
EXEC MESSAGES
The TOPS-20 Command Processor, or EXEC, displays messages in response
to errors or other conditions that arise when using the TOPS-20
Command Language. There are three kinds of EXEC messages: error,
warning, and information.
Error messages begin with a question mark (?). An error message
indicates that a failure has occurred and execution of the command or
program has stopped. If, for example, you type the wrong password in
a LOGIN or CONNECT command, you receive the message ?Incorrect
password, and the command is not executed.
Warning messages begin with percent sign (%). A warning message also
indicates that a failure has occurred, but execution of the command or
program usually continues. For example, suppose you type the command
DIRECTORY *.PAS, *.REL to list all the files with the extensions .PAS
and .REL, and, your connected directory does not contain any .REL
files. The EXEC lists all the files with the .PAS extensions and then
prints the warning message, %No such file type *.REL.
The third type of message you can get from the EXEC (and sometimes
from the system) is an information message. Information messages are
enclosed in square brackets [ ] and inform you about the status of the
system or the result of an EXEC command. For example, the message
[DECSYSTEM-20 continued] indicates that a temporary pause in service
has ended. The message [n pages freed] indicates that your EXPUNGE
command freed n disk pages. Usually information messages require no
response from you.
When you need more information than is provided by an EXEC message,
see the EXEC Message Manual. This manual contains detailed
descriptions of all EXEC messages, plus actions to take for correcting
errors.
NEW AND CHANGED FEATURES
The TOPS-20 EXEC has been enhanced considerably for TOPS-20 Version 7.
The following is a list of new commands, and new arguments,
subcommands and switches to previously existing commands. Changes
affecting the command are shown as bulleted items.
Changes to Commands and New Arguments, Subcommands, and Switches
| ARCHIVE
|
| NORETAIN
| VISIBLE
| BUILD
1-11
INTRODUCTION
| ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
| [NOT]EXPIRATION-OF-PASSWORD
| EXPIRE
| INTERNET-ACCESS
| INTERNET-WIZARD
| NOT SECURE
| SECURE
|
| INFORMATION DIRECTORY
|
| o Displays date and time of last interactive login
|
| o Displays date and time of last non-interactive login
|
| o Displays date and time password expires
|
| o Displays number of interactive login failures since last
| login
|
| o Displays number of non-interactive login failures since
| last login
|
| o Indicates if directory is SECURE
|
|
| INFORMATION INTERNET STATUS
|
| INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS
|
| o Displays number of days for password to expire
|
| o Indicates whether the password dictionary is enabled
|
| MODIFY
|
| /REMOTE-PRINTER:
|
| SET
|
| DIRECTORY NO SECURE
| DIRECTORY SECURE
| FILE [NO] PERMANENT
| FILE [NO] TEMPORARY
| FILE [NO] SAVE-BY-BACKUP-SYSTEM
| FILE [NO] SECURE
| FILE [NO] UNDELETABLE
| PASSWORD
|
| SYSTAT
|
| CONNECT-TIME
1-12
INTRODUCTION
| o Displays remote user name in the origin field
|
1-13
CHAPTER 2
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
2.1 ACCESS
Obtains ownership rights to a directory and the group rights of its
user-group list.
Format
@ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
Password:password
where:
dev:<directory> is the directory that you want to access.
Default dev: - your connected structure
Default <directory> - the directory (on
the specified
structure) of the
same name as your
connected
directory.
password is the password of the directory (not
requested for your log-in directory or a
directory of the same name as your log-in
directory on a domestic structure).
Characteristics
Capabilities
Your capabilities (such as WHEEL, OPERATOR, CONFIDENTIAL)
are associated with your log-in user name only. If you give
the ACCESS command for a directory whose owner has for
example WHEEL capabilities, you do not gain these
2-1
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ACCESS)
capabilities.
Restrictions
One Directory Per Structure
You can access only one directory at a time on each mounted
structure. Each ACCESS command ends any previous ACCESS
command for that structure (including the implicit access
obtained by the LOGIN command). If you access another
directory on the public structure you give up your own group
rights on the public structure. These are restored when you
give an ACCESS command for your log-in directory.
Not For Files-only Directories
Because a files-only directory does not have an owner or
user group rights, you cannot give an ACCESS command for it.
Use CONNECT instead.
Related Commands
CONNECT for making a directory your connected
directory
END-ACCESS for surrendering rights to an accessed
directory
MOUNT STRUCTURE for making a structure available for access,
and ensuring the continued availability of an
accessed structure
Examples
1. Access another user's directory.
@ACCESS <HOLLAND>
Password:___
2. Access another user's directory so you can copy a file from
it to your connected directory.
@ACCESS <HOLLAND>
Password:___
@COPY <HOLLAND>MAX.MEM HOLMAX.MEM
<HOLLAND>MAX.MEM.1 => HOLMAX.MEM.1 [OK]
@END-ACCESS <HOLLAND>
2-2
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ACCESS)
3. Access the login directory of a user whose group rights you
want to borrow.
@COPY <MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC CHKCRF.MAC
?Directory access privileges required - "<MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC"
@ACCESS <HOLLAND>
Password:___
@COPY <MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC CHKCRF.MAC
<MANUALS>CHKCRF.MAC.4 => CHKCRF.MAC.1 [OK]
@END-ACCESS <HOLLAND>
4. Access the directory of a user on another structure. Then
examine the directory and copy a file from it.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: Mounted
@ACCESS SNARK:<HOLLAND>
Password:___
@DIRECTORY SNARK:<HOLLAND>
SNARK:<HOLLAND>
ACCT.MEM.1
ACTGEN..1
COMP.FOR.1
COMPUT.CBL.1
.REL.1
DIFFER.FOR.1
.QOR.1
MAIL.TXT.2
OVERVIEW.MEM.1
Total of 9 files
@COPY SNARK:<HOLLAND>COMP.FOR
SNARK:<HOLLAND>COMP.FOR.1 => COMP.FOR.1 [OK]
@END-ACCESS SNARK:<HOLLAND>
@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: Dismounted
2-3
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ADVISE)
2.2 ADVISE
Links your terminal with another user's terminal so that you can give
commands to that user's job. The advisee can still give commands to
his job.
Format
@ADVISE (USER) argument
where:
argument is either a user name or terminal line number.
Characteristics
Input to Other Job
For as long as the ADVISE command is in effect, the commands
you give affect the advisee's job instead of your own.
Ending Advice
To end an advising link that you have formed between
terminals, you must type CTRL/E. This CTRL/E is not echoed
on either terminal.
Refused Advice
Ordinarily, you cannot advise a job unless its terminal is
set to receive advice. However, if you have WHEEL or
OPERATOR capabilities enabled, you can ADVISE any job,
providing the user has not given the TERMINAL INHIBIT
command.
Special ADVISE Commands
Once you are advising another job, you can give special
commands to send comments or control characters, or to
relink to a terminal that has broken links with yours.
These commands are:
CTRL/E End an ADVISE link
CTRL/~ + Restart an ADVISE link after a BREAK command
is typed at the advised terminal
CTRL/~ ( Start a comment (or use the REMARK command)
2-4
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ADVISE)
CTRL/~ ) End a comment (or use the REMARK command)
CTRL/~ ? Display the list of ADVISE control characters
CTRL/~<CHAR> Send CTRL/CHAR
Note that the tilde character (~) can have
different meanings with various terminal
models. Consult your terminal's manual for
the character equivalent to 36 octal in ASCII
code.
Special Cases
Advisee Has More Than One Job
If more than one job is logged in under the user name you
specify, the system gives you a list of that user's terminal
numbers and associated programs to choose from, then prints
TTY: to prompt your response. Type your choice of terminal
number after the prompt.
Advising a Pseudoterminal (PTY:)
If you try to advise a PTY: the system informs you of this
and asks you to confirm with a carriage return.
Restrictions
Compatible Terminals
Unless the terminals involved in an advising link have
compatible characteristics (such as terminal width, ability
to handle tabs and lowercase letters), some information can
be lost or overprinted. To avoid this problem, the user of
the faster or more capable terminal should adjust his
terminal's characteristics, if possible before the ADVISE
command is given.
Detached Jobs
You cannot advise detached jobs.
Warning
Talking Between a VT100 and a VT52
If links between VT100 and VT52 terminals are established
2-5
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ADVISE)
using an ADVISE (or TALK) command, the VT52 may function
improperly during or after the linked interval (for example,
by requiring frequent CTRL/Q commands to print multiple
lines of output). Turning the terminal off and then on
again (after the linked interval) will correct this problem.
Effect on Terminal
The ADVISE command leaves your terminal at the advisee's
terminal's command level, controlling his job.
Related Commands
RECEIVE ADVICE for allowing other users to advise you
REFUSE ADVICE for preventing other users from advising you
REMARK for sending comments only
TALK for linking terminals so that your commands
affect only your own job
TERMINAL INHIBIT for refusing all types of terminal
communication including advice, links, system
messages, user messages, and notices of new
mail.
Examples
1. Advise a user, then immediately type CTRL/E to end advice.
@ADVISE D.CROWLEY
Escape character is <CTRL>E, type <CTRL>^? for help
D.CROWLEY JOB 51 EXEC
LINK FROM LATTA, TTY 226
[Advising]
^E !Not displayed on terminal
[Advice terminated]
2. Advise a user's job and access a directory for him.
@ADVISE BONSAVAGE
Escape character is <CTRL>E, type <CTRL>^? for help
BONSAVAGE JOB 48 EXEC
LINK FROM LATTA, TTY 226
2-6
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ADVISE)
[Advising]
!I'LL ACCESS THE DIRECTORY FOR YOU, THEN YOU CAN USE IT.
@ACCESS <SARTINI>
Password:
@!OKAY, NOW YOU CAN USE IT.
@!Thank you.
^E
[Advice terminated]
3. Advise another user, demonstrating how to use the FILCOM
program.
@ADVISE D.CROWLEY
Escape character is <CTRL>E, type <CTRL>^? for help
D.CROWLEY JOB 51 EXEC
LINK FROM LATTA, TTY 226
[Advising]
!HERE'S HOW TO COMPARE FILES USING THE FILCOM PROGRAM.
@FILCOM
*=VERCBL.TXT, BAKVER.TXT/A
No differences encountered
*^C
@!SEE? THE SWITCH AT THE END (/A) MEANS TO COMPARE THEM IN ASCII
@!MODE. DON'T FORGET THE CTRL/C WHEN YOU'RE DONE.
@!THANKS.
^E
[Advice terminated]
4. Advise a user who is logged in at more than one terminal.
Choose one of them.
@ADVISE LATTA
TTY25, EXEC
TTY41, EXEC
TTY27, EXEC
TTY: 27
Escape character is <CTRL>E, type <CTRL>^? for help
LATTA Job 22 EXEC
LINK FROM D.CROWLEY, TTY 225
[Advising]
.
.
.
^E
[Advice terminated]
2-7
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(APPEND)
2.3 APPEND
Adds the contents of one or more source files to the end of a new or
existing destination file on disk, leaving the original source files
unchanged.
Format
@APPEND (SOURCE FILE) source filespec(s) (TO) destination filespec,
@@subcommand
where:
source filespec(s) is a single file specification, or a
series of them separated by commas.
destination filespec is the specification of the destination
file on disk; this can be a new file.
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can
type an optional keyword, modifying the
mode or format of information transfer.
APPEND Subcommands
(when used with the paper tape reader - PTR:)
ASCII specifies that the files being appended
are written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit
words each consisting of five 7-bit
bytes and a parity bit; the parity bit
means that the eighth hole of the paper
tape is never punched.
BINARY specifies that the files being appended
are composed of 36-bit words, each
consisting of six 6-bit bytes, with the
seventh hole of the paper tape set
always to 0 and the eighth hole set
always to 1; causes a checksum
calculation.
BYTE n specifies that the byte size of the
destination file is to be n (any decimal
number). If you do not give the BYTE
subcommand, the destination file will
have the same byte size as the source
file.
2-8
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(APPEND)
IMAGE specifies that the files being appended
are composed of 36-bit words, each
consisting of one 8-bit byte; the 28
most significant bits are lost on
output.
IMAGE BINARY same as BINARY, but lacking the
checksum.
APPEND Subcommands
(when used with devices other than the paper tape reader)
ASCII specifies that the files being appended
are written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit
words each consisting of five 7-bit
bytes and a parity bit; the parity bit
means that the least significant bit is
set to 0 on input and is lost on output.
BINARY calls for a direct transfer of data in
36-bit bytes.
BYTE n specifies that the byte size of the
destination file is to be n (any decimal
number). If you do not give the BYTE
subcommand, the destination file will
have the same byte size as the source
file.
IMAGE same as BINARY.
IMAGE BINARY same as BINARY.
Output
As each file is appended, the system prints its specification and
the word [OK]. Also, if recognition is used on the destination
file specification, the system prints its status (Old generation,
New generation, New file, or Superseding, for disk files; or OK,
if the files are appended to a non-disk device).
Characteristics
Files Appended in Order Specified
The APPEND command attaches source files to the destination
file in the order you specify them; the contents of the last
2-9
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(APPEND)
specified source will appear at the end of the destination
file when APPEND is finished.
Subcommands Optional
For most purposes you do not need to use subcommands when
transferring information with the APPEND command. These
subcommands, specifying the format of the appended files,
are required only when using certain devices (for example,
devices of the form MTn: (tape drives) using labeled tapes,
or PTR: (paper tape reader)) or under particular conditions
(for example, when transferring files over network
facilities). If you are appending information from disk
files or from your terminal and you do not use any
subcommands, the data will be appended as written, whether
in a standard format (usually ASCII or binary) or not.
Special Cases
Wildcard Characters
Wildcard characters (* and %) can be used in source file
specifications only. The files are then appended in
alphabetical order.
Appending Information from your Terminal
If you type TTY: in place of source file specifications,
the system appends any characters you then type (after
completing the command itself), until you give a CTRL/Z to
return your terminal to TOPS-20 command level. CTRL/U,
CTRL/R, CTRL/W, and the Delete key can be used to edit the
current line of terminal input.
Restrictions
Source Files With Differing Formats
You can use the APPEND command to transfer data from a
magnetic tape, terminal, card reader, paper tape reader, or
other device to disk files, but if source files written in
differing formats are specified within the same command,
some data can be lost in the transfer.
Mixing Sequenced and Unsequenced Files
Source files created by the EDIT program should not contain
sequence numbers when they are appended. Mixing files that
contain sequence numbers with files that do not will cause
2-10
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(APPEND)
EDIT to function improperly if used on the resulting file.
Appending to Archived Files
You can append the contents of an archived file to another
file, by specifying it as the first (or source) argument of
an APPEND command. You can then edit the resulting file,
because it does not gain archive status although part of its
contents are the same as those of the archived file; the
archived file remains unchanged. However, you cannot give
the specification of an archived file as the second (or
destination) argument of an APPEND command, as this would
change the file's contents.
Related Commands
COPY for making copies of files
Examples
1. Use the APPEND command to join two files.
@APPEND FORT.FOR FIL.FOR
FORT.FOR.8 [OK]
2. Append two files to the end of a third file.
@APPEND FORT.FOR, GORT.FOR GIL.FOR
FORT.FOR.8 [OK]
GORT.FOR.6 [OK]
3. Access a directory and append a file from it to a file in
your connected directory.
@ACCESS <MANUALS>
Password:___
@APPEND <MANUALS>REL3A.MEM REL3A.MEM
<MANUALS>REL3A.MEM.4 [OK]
@END-ACCESS <MANUALS>
4. Use a wildcard character (%) to append several files to the
end of another file.
@APPEND %ORT.FOR HIL.FOR
FORT.FOR.8 [OK]
GORT.FOR.6 [OK]
HORT.FOR.3 [OK]
MORT.FOR.2 [OK]
2-11
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(APPEND)
5. Use a wildcard character with the APPEND command to create a
new file.
@APPEND *.TXT BACKUP.TXT
MAIL.TXT.1 [OK]
NEWRUN.TXT.1 [OK]
NX.TXT.1 [OK]
6. Append a message from your terminal to the beginning of the
file created in Example 5. Use the symbolic generation
number -1 to specify this action.
@APPEND TTY:,BACKUP.TXT BACKUP.TXT.-1
TTY:
!THIS IS A BACKUP FILE FOR ALL TEXT FILES.
^Z
BACKUP.TXT.1 [OK]
2-12
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ARCHIVE)
2.4 ARCHIVE
Asks that a permanent off-line copy of specified files be made on
magnetic tape, and prevents the disk copy (if retained) from being
modified.
Format
@ARCHIVE (FILES) filespec,...,
@@subcommand
where:
filespec is the specification of a file of which you
want a permanent copy.
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can type
the following optional subcommands:
RETAIN which causes the disk copies of the
files being archived to be retained
in your directory, rather than
deleted and expunged.
|
| NORETAIN which sets the file invisible.
|
| VISIBLE which leaves file visible after
| ARCHIVE command.
Output
Notice of Archive Sent to Requestor
Whenever a file is taken off line as a result of your
ARCHIVE command (for example, when you do not also give the
RETAIN subcommand), the operator sends a mail message
notifying you that the file has been archived.
Characteristics
Archived Files Unalterable
You cannot change the contents of files specified in an
ARCHIVE command once the command is given, even if the files
are not immediately copied to tape. This means that you
cannot alter or add to them by using the EDIT or APPEND
command, or overwrite them by using the COPY or RENAME
command. In general, files for which you have requested
2-13
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ARCHIVE)
archival must not be given as the second filespec argument
of these commands.
Archived Files Invisible
The files you specify in an ARCHIVE command ordinarily
become invisible to most TOPS-20 commands as soon as the
ARCHIVE command is given. However, if you include the
RETAIN subcommand when giving the ARCHIVE command, the files
remain visible. See Related Commands, below, for a list of
commands you can use with invisible files.
Related Commands
CANCEL ARCHIVE for canceling archival requests
DELETE, with the ARCHIVE subcommand
for deleting archived files
with the CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand
for deleting only the disk copy of
files that also have a tape copy
DIRECTORY, with the ARCHIVE subcommand
for requesting information on
archived files (visible and
invisible) only
DIRECTORY, with the INVISIBLE subcommand
for requesting information on
invisible files only
DISCARD for giving up the tape copy of
on-line files
INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS
for determining if archival for the
specified files (visible and
invisible) has been accomplished
RETRIEVE for restoring off-line files
(visible and invisible) to on-line
status
SET FILE INVISIBLE for making visible files invisible
SET FILE VISIBLE for making invisible files visible
Examples
2-14
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ARCHIVE)
1. Archive a file.
@ARCHIVE ARTEST.FIL
ARTEST.FIL.1 [Requested]
2. Archive a file, but keep a copy on disk. Check the archive
status of files.
@ARCHIVE ARCHEK.FIL,
@@RETAIN
@@
ARCHEK.FIL.1 [Requested]
@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS
ARCHEK.FIL.1 Archive requested, Retain contents
ARTEST.FIL.1 Archive requested
3. Attempt to use the EDIT editor to edit an archived file
(first you must make it visible). Note that, afterwards, the
unedited backup copy is the archived file, and that the
edited file has no archive status.
@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS ARTEST.FIL
ARTEST.FIL.1 Archive requested
@EDIT ARTEST.FIL
%No such filename, Creating New file
Input: ARTEST.FIL.2
00100 $
*EQ
| @SET FILE VISIBLE ARTEST.FIL.1
ARTEST.FIL.1 [OK]
| @EDIT ARTEST.FIL.1
Edit: ARTEST.FIL.1
*P
00100 !TEST FILE FOR ARCHIVING
*I200
00200 !FIRST MODIFICATION
00300 $
*P^:*
00100 !TEST FILE FOR ARCHIVING
00200 !FIRST MODIFICATION
*EU
[ARTEST.FIL.2]
@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS ARTEST.*
ARTEST.QIL.1 Archive requested
@TYPE ARTEST.QIL
!TEST FILE FOR ARCHIVING
@TYPE ARTEST.FIL
!TEST FILE FOR ARCHIVING
!FIRST MODIFICATION
2-15
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ARCHIVE)
@DIRECTORY ARTEST.*
MISC:<LATTA>
ARTEST.FIL.2
.QIL.1
2-16
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ASSIGN)
2.5 ASSIGN
Reserves a specific input-output device for your job.
Format
@ASSIGN (DEVICE) dev:
where:
dev: is the name of the device you want to assign. The
colon after the device name is optional.
Restrictions
Assigning Magnetic Tape Drives
You can use the ASSIGN command to assign tape drives only if
they are of the form MTAn:. Tape device names of the form
MTn: are logical device names only, and are assigned
automatically at the time of MOUNT TAPE commands.
Related Commands
DEASSIGN for releasing a previously
assigned device
MOUNT for mounting a structure or
magnetic tape set without
assigning a specific drive
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES for finding out which devices
can be assigned or have been
assigned to your job
Examples
1. Assign a tape drive to your job.
@ASSIGN MTA0:
2. Find out which devices are available for timesharing use,
then assign one to your job.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, SNARK, MISC, LANG, MTA1, LPT, LPT0, LPT1
2-17
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ASSIGN)
CDR, PCDR0, CDP FE1-15, PTY20-61, NUL, PLT, PLT0
DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: TTY41
@ASSIGN PCDR0:
2-18
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ATTACH)
2.6 ATTACH
Attaches a job to your terminal.
Format
@ATTACH (USER) name (JOB #) number
PASSWORD: password
where:
name is the user name of the job's owner.
number is the job number
Default the only job, or only detached job,
or only job other than your current
job, logged in under the user name
you give.
password is the associated password (not requested if you
are currently logged in under the same user name
as the job that you are attaching).
Characteristics
Current Job Detached
If you give the ATTACH command while logged in, your current
job is detached. You can use the LOGOUT n command to log
out this detached job.
Hint
Using ATTACH to Restore Phoned-in Jobs
If you log in to the system by telephone lines and service
is interrupted for any reason, use the ATTACH command to
restore the connection. If you do not do this within the
time limit set by the system manager (usually five minutes),
your job will be logged out automatically and you will have
to log in again.
Warning
Attaching Attached Jobs
2-19
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ATTACH)
The system will ask you to confirm your choice with a
carriage return before attaching to your terminal a job that
is attached elsewhere. If you attach an attached job that
is running a program, that program may be sent one or more
CTRL/Cs, which can affect programs that handle CTRL/C
themselves. To avoid this possibility you must give a
DETACH command from the terminal to which the program's job
is attached, then attach this job to your terminal with an
ATTACH command.
Effect on Memory, Terminal, and Job
The ATTACH command affects neither memory nor the job that you
are attaching (but see Warning, above), and leaves your terminal
at TOPS-20 command level unless a program is being run by the
job. If a program is being run, your terminal is left at command
level, if any, in the job. Your terminal's characteristics will
be those established in the job from which you gave the ATTACH
command; if you were not logged in, they will be reset to system
default characteristics.
Related Commands
SYSTAT for finding out the user name and job number
associated with any job
DETACH for disengaging a job from your own terminal
UNATTACH for disengaging a job from any other terminal
Examples
1. Attach your only job, which is presently detached.
@ATTACH LATTA
Password:___
2. Attach one of several detached jobs.
@ATTACH LATTA
| Job 37, Detached, Running DETACH
| Job 54, Detached, Running EXEC
| Job:37
Password:___
3. Check your jobs with the SYSTAT command (your current job is
marked with an asterisk [*]), then attach the only detached
job. Verify the system's action.
2-20
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ATTACH)
@SYSTAT LATTA
37 26 NEWRUN LATTA
58 DET EXEC LATTA
59* 231 EXEC LATTA
@ATTACH LATTA
Detaching job # 59
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
| Host AURORA Job 58, TTY314 kilpa.TOPS20.dec.com(TCP)
| User LATTA, PS:<LATTA>, Account 341
4. Start a program in one job. Then detach and continue it, and
attach another of your jobs.
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
| Host AURORA Job 9, TTY26 kilpa.TOPS20.dec.com(TCP)
| User LATTA, PS:<LATTA>, Account 341
@RUN FFACTOR
^C
@DETACH CONTINUE
Detaching job # 9
^C !Not displayed on terminal
TEDDY, Controller Dept. TOPS-20 Monitor 7(7)
@SYSTAT LATTA
9 DET FFACTO LATTA
45* 41 SYSTAT LATTA
@ATTACH LATTA 45
[Attached to TTY41, confirm]
Password:___
2-21
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BACKSPACE)
2.7 BACKSPACE
Moves a magnetic tape set backward over a specified number of files or
records.
Format
@BACKSPACE (DEVICE) dev: n units
where:
dev: is the name of the tape set or magnetic tape drive that
you want to move backward. The colon after the device
name is optional.
n is the number of files or records over which you want
to backspace.
Default n - 1
units is either FILES or RECORDS.
Default units - FILES
Restrictions
BACKSPACE with Open Files
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has
opened a magnetic tape drive and you then give the BACKSPACE
command for that tape drive, the system will first ask if
you want to close the associated file. You must do so for
BACKSPACE to succeed, but you will probably be unable to
continue the program from that point because the file will
now be closed.
RECORDS Argument Used for Unlabeled Tapes Only
You cannot give the RECORDS argument to the BACKSPACE
command when using a labeled tape, because read and write
operations for labeled tapes always move the tape to the
beginning of a file first.
Related Commands
SKIP for moving a magnetic tape set forward
REWIND for backspacing a tape volume or tape set to its
logical beginning (the beginning of the first file)
2-22
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BACKSPACE)
UNLOAD for completely rewinding a magnetic tape onto the
source reel
Examples
1. Backspace your magnetic tape one file.
@BACKSPACE MTA0: 1 FILE
2-23
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BLANK)
2.8 BLANK
Clears your video terminal screen.
Format
@BLANK (SCREEN)
Characteristics
This command moves the cursor to line 1 of the screen, providing
you with a clean area for typing commands and receiving system
output.
Restriction
The BLANK command functions only if you have set your terminal
type with the TERMINAL command or the unsupported TTYINI program.
2-24
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BREAK)
2.9 BREAK
Breaks the communication link made between terminals with the TALK
command.
Format
@BREAK (LINKS WITH) argument
where:
argument is a user name or line number.
Default - all communication links
Restrictions
Does Not End Advice
The BREAK command, given at either of two terminals joined
by the ADVISE command, does not end advice. To end an
ADVISE link, type CTRL/E.
Related Commands
TALK for establishing communication links with
another terminal
REFUSE LINKS for preventing future communication links with
your terminal
Examples
1. Use the BREAK command to end a TALK session with another
user.
@BREAK
2. Use the TALK command to speak to another user, then use BREAK
to end the conversation.
@TALK PORADA
LINK FROM LATTA, TTY 41
@!HI. CAN YOU TELL ME WHERE THE PROJECT ESTIMATES ARE STORED?
@!SURE: THEY'RE ON TAPE LS2.0 IN THE LIBRARY.
@!THANKS. BYE
@BREAK
2-25
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
2.10 BUILD
Creates, modifies, or deletes a subdirectory to a directory to which
you have write access.
Format
@BUILD (DIRECTORY NAME) str:<directory>
@@subcommand
where
str: is the name of the (mounted) structure
containing the directory you are building.
directory is the name of the directory you are
building. The directory name can contain 39
or fewer alphanumeric characters, including
the following special characters: '_', '-'
and '$'. The name must be enclosed in angle
brackets <> or square brackets [].
@@subcommand indicates that you automatically enter
subcommand mode after completing the BUILD
command line.
Summary of BUILD Subcommands (defaults in boldface)
ABORT
| ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
ACCOUNT-DEFAULT account
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
CONFIDENTIAL
DECNET-ACCESS
DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION octal protection code Default n -
777700
DIRECTORY-GROUP group number
DISABLE
ENABLE
ENQ-DEQ
| EXPIRATION-OF-PASSWORD
| EXPIRE
FILES-ONLY
GENERATIONS n Default n - 1
IPCF
| INTERNET-ACCESS
| INTERNET-WIZARD
KILL
2-26
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
---
| NAME-ONLY
LIST | FAST
| VERBOSE
---
MAINTENANCE
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES n Default n - 0
---
| | ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
| ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
| CONFIDENTIAL
| DECNET-ACCESS
| DIRECTORY-GROUP group number
| ENQ-DEQ
| | EXPIRATION-OF-PASSWORD
| FILES-ONLY
NOT | IPCF
| | INTERNET-ACCESS
| | INTERNET-WIZARD
| KILL
| MAINTENANCE
| OPERATOR
| REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
| | SECURE
| SEMI-OPERATOR
| SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number
| USER-OF-GROUP group number
| WHEEL
---
NUMBER octal directory number
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n Default n - 90
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n Default n - 60
OPERATOR
PASSWORD 1- to 39-character word
---
PERMANENT | pages Default n - 250
| INFINITY
---
PRESERVE
PROTECTION octal protection code Default n -
777700
PUSH
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
| SECURE
SEMI-OPERATOR
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number
TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER n,n
USER-OF-GROUP group number
WHEEL
2-27
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
---
WORKING | pages Default n - 250
| INFINITY
---
BUILD Subcommands
ABORT cancels all work done during current
BUILD command. If directory was new, it
does not exist; if old, it remains
unchanged.
| ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
allows the directory owner to establish
| INTERNET Protocol network connections
| using 32-bit absolute socket numbers;
users with Wheel or Operator
capabilities can also perform this
function. For use only with systems
| that are connected to a TCP/IP network.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
ACCOUNT-DEFAULT account
causes the specified account to be
charged for a terminal session whenever
the user does not include an account in
his LOGIN command.
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
causes on-line files that have expired
to be marked for archiving.
CONFIDENTIAL grants the directory owner confidential
information access capabilities,
allowing him to obtain confidential
information within the system through
certain monitor calls. See the TOPS-20
Monitor Calls Reference Manual for
details. Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR
capabilities.
DECNET-ACCESS allows the directory owner to establish
DECNET network connections. This
subcommand works in conjunction with
pre-established system manager controls.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION octal protection code
assigns this number as default for the
2-28
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
protection code of each file
subsequently placed in the directory.
The protection code is constructed (by
addition) from the octal values shown
below:
77 full access to the file
40 read the file
20 write and delete the file
10 execute the program contained in
the file
04 append to the file
02 list the files specification using
DIRECTORY-class commands
00 no access to the file
Default code - 777700
See the TOPS-20 User's Guide for more
information about protection codes.
DIRECTORY-GROUP group number
places the directory in a group, thereby
allowing users in the same group access
to it according to the middle two digits
of the protection code, and access to
files in the directory according to the
middle two digits of each file's
protection code. You can assign up to
40 directory group numbers to each
directory, with values ranging from 1
through 262143 (2**18 - 1). See the
TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide for a
discussion of groups.
DISABLE suspends any special capabilities that
you may have activated with the ENABLE
subcommand or the ENABLE TOPS-20
command.
ENABLE allows you to activate any privileged
capabilities that the system manager has
given you and that you may need during
the BUILD session.
ENQ-DEQ grants the directory owner the ability
to perform global Enqueue and Dequeue
functions; these are discussed in the
TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference Manual.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
2-29
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
| EXPIRATION-OF-PASSWORD n
| sets the password expiration date for
| the directory. You can specify the date
| and time to expire the password. The
| user can log in again once after the
| password expires and is prompted for a
| new password.
|
| EXPIRE sets the password expiration date to -1,
| which means that the user cannot login
| to the account because the account is
| expired.
FILES-ONLY declares the directory to be a
files-only directory; one not associated
with a user. See Restrictions -
Files-only Directories, below.
GENERATIONS n specifies a default for the number of
successive generations of files to be
retained in the directory. This number
must be from 0 to 15, with 0 meaning an
infinite number.
Default n - 1
IPCF allows the directory owner to execute
all privileged IPCF functions; these are
discussed in the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls
Reference Manual. Requires WHEEL or
OPERATOR capabilities.
| INTERNET-ACCESS allows the directory owner to establish
| INTERNET Protocol network connections.
This subcommand works in conjunction
with pre-established system manager
controls. Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR
capabilities.
| INTERNET-WIZARD allows the directory owner to use
special queues for sending and receiving
| information using the INTERNET Network
| Protocol. For use only with systems
| that are connected to a TCP/IP network.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
KILL eliminates the directory and any files
it contains from the system; you must
confirm this subcommand with an extra
RETURN.
---
2-30
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
| NAME-ONLY
LIST | FAST provides a listing at your terminal of
| VERBOSE parameter values set for the directory
--- by TOPS-20 commands, BUILD subcommands,
or by default. The FAST listing always
includes the subdirectory's name,
working and permanent storage limits,
and, if they have been set, directory
number, account default, maximum number
of subdirectories allowed to this
directory, the date and time of last
log-in, group memberships, and user
group numbers assignable by this
directory. The VERBOSE listing adds the
other values that can be assigned by
BUILD subcommands, while NAME-ONLY
restricts output to the directory name.
Default - FAST
MAINTENANCE allows the directory owner to execute
certain system maintenance functions or
monitor calls; discussed in the TOPS-20
Monitor Calls Reference Manual.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES n
allows the owner of this directory to
build up to n subdirectories of his own,
and subtracts an equal number from the
value of this parameter for the superior
directory.
---
| | ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS
| ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
| CONFIDENTIAL
| DECNET-ACCESS
| DIRECTORY-GROUP group number
| ENQ-DEQ
| | EXPIRATION-OF-PASSWORD
| FILES-ONLY
NOT | IPCF withdraws the specified subcommand
| | INTERNET-ACCESS
| | INTERNET-WIZARD
| KILL
| MAINTENANCE
| TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER
| OPERATOR
| REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES
| | SECURE
| SEMI-OPERATOR
2-31
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
| SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number
| USER-OF-GROUP group number
| WHEEL
---
NUMBER octal directory number
assigns a specific directory number to a
new directory (note: usually the
default is adequate). Directory numbers
1 through 17 must never be assigned by
users, as they are reserved for system
use.
Default directory number - assigned
by system
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n
establishes the tape expiration date for
files that are to go off line because of
migration or archiving. If you specify
"+n", the expiration date will be n days
from the date the files are moved off
line.
The default date cannot exceed the
system maximum. Check the system
maximum with the command INFORMATION
(ABOUT) SYSTEM-STATUS.
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT date or +n
establishes the disk expiration date for
files that are to be created in the
directory. If you specify "+n", the
expiration date will be n days from the
creation date.
OPERATOR grants Operator capabilities to the
owner of the directory; these are
discussed further in the TOPS-20
Operator's Guide. Requires WHEEL or
OPERATOR capabilities.
PASSWORD 1- to 39-character word
assigns a password, consisting of
alphanumeric characters and hyphens (-),
to the directory. You can include any
special characters (except '@', ';', '!'
and '?') in a password by typing CTRL/V
before each special character. Unlike
special characters in file
specifications, CTRL/V is required only
when creating the password, not when
2-32
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
using it.
--- allocates permanent disk storage
PERMANENT | pages capacity (in pages) to the directory,
| INFINITY and subtracts an equal number from the
--- permanent disk storage capacity of the
superior directory. INFINITY allows
users with WHEEL or OPERATOR
capabilities to allocate an unlimited
number of pages to the directory. The
permanent disk storage of the superior
directory must also be INFINITY. The
number of pages that can be used is
limited to the number of free pages on
the structure.
The INFINITY argument is intended for
special system directories; it is not
intended for general users.
Default pages - 250
PRESERVE preserves the values of the superior
directory's PERMANENT, WORKING and
MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES parameters.
PRESERVE stops the PERMANENT, WORKING,
and MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES subcommands
from subtracting the values from the
quotas in the superior directory.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities.
PROTECTION octal protection code
assigns the given directory protection
code to the directory. The protection
code is constructed (by addition) from
the octal values shown below:
77 full access to the directory
40 access to files in the directory
(including expunging individual
files), consistent with the file
protection of the files
10 connect to the directory without
giving a password, undelete files,
expunge the entire directory, and
change times, dates, and accounting
information for files. All other
access is governed by the file
protection of each file.
04 create files in the directory
00 no access to the directory
Default code - 777700
2-33
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
See the TOPS-20 User's Guide for more
information about protection codes.
PUSH creates an EXEC level inferior to the
one from which you issued the BUILD
command and leaves your terminal at this
new level. You can then issue TOPS-20
commands to create conditions or obtain
information that you may need during the
BUILD session. Give the POP command to
return to BUILD. See Example 6.
This subcommand refers to the EXEC
defined by the logical name
DEFAULT-EXEC:. You can use the DEFINE
command to define the job logical name,
DEFAULT-EXEC:, with the name of the EXEC
you want to create each time you PUSH.
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES causes all system messages (mail sent by
privileged users to all users, contained
in the file, PS:<SYSTEM>MAIL.TXT) to be
printed on the user's terminal each time
he logs in to this directory. If this
subcommand is not given, only those
system messages created since the last
time he logged in are printed.
| SECURE sets any new files created in the
| specified directory secure by default.
| When a file is secure, the Access
| Control Job checks to see if the user
| has access to that file before the user
| can read, write, append, rename, delete,
| set secure, or set unsecure that file.
SEMI-OPERATOR creates or modifies directories to
include the SEMI-OPERATOR privileges,
which allows unprivileged users to run
OPR and execute certain OPR commands.
These commands are strictly for
accessing information and controlling
certain devices. See the TOPS-20
Operator's Command Language Manual for
more information on SEMI-OPERATOR.
Requires WHEEL or OPERATOR privileges.
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP group number
allows propagation of any or all of the
group numbers in a directory's user
group list to the subdirectories of that
2-34
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
directory. Issuing this subcommand is
the first step required in establishing
subdirectory group rights. You complete
the process by issuing the USER-OF-GROUP
subcommand for each subdirectory. You
can assign up to 40 subdirectory user
group numbers to each directory, with
values ranging from 1 to 262143
(2**18 - 1).
TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER-NUMBER project number, programmer number
allows TOPS-10 programs that require a
project-programmer number (PPN) to
create subjobs to be compatible with
TOPS-20. The project number is an octal
number in the range 10-377777. The
programmer number is a six-digit octal
number. Separate the project number
from the programmer number with a comma,
for example 17,76.
USER-OF-GROUP number assigns the directory owner to the given
group. You can assign up to 40 group
numbers to each directory, with values
ranging from 1 to 262143 (2**18 - 1).
See the TOPS-20 System Manager's Guide
for a discussion of groups.
WHEEL grants WHEEL capabilities to the owner
of the directory, allowing him to
perform all the privileged functions
available on the system; these are
discussed further in the TOPS-20
Operator's Guide. Requires WHEEL or
OPERATOR capabilties.
--- allocates working disk storage capacity
WORKING | pages (in pages) to the directory, and
| INFINITY subtracts an equal number from the
--- working disk storage capacity of the
superior directory. This working space
is temporary and is allocated to the
directory only while the user is logged
in. Ordinarily, working and permanent
storage limits are equal.
INFINITY allows users with WHEEL or
OPERATOR capabilities to allocate an
unlimited number of pages to the
directory. The working disk storage of
2-35
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
the superior directory must also be
INFINITY. The number of pages that can
be used is limited to the number of free
pages on the structure.
The INFINITY argument is intended for
special system directories; it is not
intended for general users.
Default pages - 250
Characteristics
BUILD and ^ECREATE
The BUILD command is identical in format to the privileged
^ECREATE command. If you use BUILD with WHEEL or OPERATOR
capabilities enabled, it has the same power as ^ECREATE,
namely, to create directories and modify the parameters of
any directory on the system. Without these capabilities,
you can use BUILD to modify a more restricted set of
directories: you can modify a directory if you have write
access to the immediately superior directory. The LOGIN,
CONNECT, or ACCESS command obtains write access to the
superior directory; or, if you have sufficient group rights
to the superior directory, you can use BUILD to modify its
subdirectories.
More Information
For a description of using ^ECREATE to create directories,
see the TOPS-20 Operator's Command Language Reference
Manual.
Quotas Subtracted from the Superior Directory's Allotments
Working and permanent disk storage page limits, and the
maximum number of subdirectories allowed to a subdirectory
are subtracted from the quotas allocated to the immediately
superior directory. This subtraction occurs at the time of
their allotment to a subdirectory. If the superior
directory's quota is not sufficient, the BUILD command will
fail. (Note that if you have enabled WHEEL or OPERATOR
capabilities, you can stop the subtraction of quotas from
the superior directory with the PRESERVE subcommand.)
To increase the superior directory's quota or any of these
quantities you must either kill some of its subdirectories
or reduce their allotments of the quantity. Or you can ask
the system manager to increase the allotment of the superior
directory. Remember that unless you specify working and
2-36
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
permanent page limits, they will assume a default value of
250 pages. The BUILD command will fail in this case if
there are not at least 250 pages free in the immediately
superior directory.
Assigning Infinite Quotas
If you have WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities enabled, you can
assign the maximum storage limit of 34359738367 (2**35-1) to
a directory. This will appear in the response to an
INFORMATION DIRECTORY command as +INF, denoting infinite
storage capacity. If you then use the BUILD command to
construct subdirectories to this directory, any disk storage
capacity assigned, even the maximum, will not be subtracted
from the superior directory. You can use this feature to
assign infinite storage capacity to a number of users
sharing a private structure. Then these users may use
storage space on the structure without limit until the disk
pack fills up.
Hints
Keeping Track of Subdirectories
Subdirectories appear as files of type .DIRECTORY in the
immediately superior directory, so the DIRECTORY *.DIRECTORY
command for the superior directory will indicate any
existing subdirectories. To suppress the listing of these
files you can use the SET FILE PROTECTION command to give
them a protection of 000000, but then you must specify the
files completely (including generation number) to access
them in the future.
If there are two or more levels of subdirectories below a
superior directory, you can do something else to allow a
listing of them: put each subdirectory into a group of
which the owner of the highest-level superior directory is a
member. Then, if you obtain the group rights of this owner
(by using the LOGIN or ACCESS command if the superior
directory is on the public structure, or ACCESS if it is on
another structure), the INFORMATION DIRECTORY <directory.*>
command with the NAME-ONLY subcommand will produce a listing
of subdirectories at every level beneath the superior
directory. For this feature to operate properly the group
field of each subdirectory's protection code must be at
least 40.
Modifying Subdirectories Easily
By following the above procedure, that is, by making
subdirectories at every level members of groups of which the
2-37
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
owner of the highest-level superior directory is also a
member, you make the modification of these subdirectories
much easier. You can use the BUILD command to modify these
subdirectories or read and write to them, as long as you
have the group memberships of this owner. You need not
connect to each subdirectory's immediate superior to make
modifications.
Restrictions
Giving Capabilities to Subdirectory Owners
To give capabilities (WHEEL, OPERATOR, SEMI-OPERATOR,
ABSOLUTE-ARPANET-SOCKETS, ARPANET-WIZARD, CONFIDENTIAL,
ENQ-DEQ, IPCF, or MAINTENANCE) to a subdirectory owner, you
must have these capabilities yourself, and they must be
enabled at the time of the BUILD command. WHEEL and
OPERATOR capabilities allow you to assign any capabilities.
The INFORMATION DIRECTORY command for your log-in directory
tells you which capabilities you have, if any.
Modifying Other Directories
Unless you have WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities enabled, you
can use the BUILD command to modify the parameters of only
those directories subordinate to a directory to which you
have write access. (See Characteristics - BUILD and
^ECREATE, and Hints - Modifying Subdirectories Easily,
above.) If your installation allows it, you can use the SET
DIRECTORY command to change some parameters of these
directories.
Files-only Directories
By giving the FILES-ONLY subcommand you make the directory a
files-only directory (see Figure 1). A files-only directory
is not associated with a user and so should not be given
capabilities or user group memberships. Although a
files-only directory can have subdirectories, none of these
can be a user directory. You cannot give the ACCESS or
LOGIN command for a files-only directory.
Killing Directories
You cannot kill a directory that has subdirectories; first
you must kill those subdirectories one by one. (When you
kill a directory, the files it contains are deleted and
expunged.) Also, you cannot kill a directory if you are
logged into it or connected to it, or there are open files
on it.
2-38
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
Restricted Use of BUILD Command
Your system manager may make the BUILD and SET DIRECTORY
commands available only to users with enabled Wheel or
Operator capabilities.
Related Commands
INFORMATION DIRECTORY for examining the parameters
established for a directory
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE for determining how much of a
directory's disk space is already
assigned to files
SET DIRECTORY for changing certain directory
parameters
2-39
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
--------------
| <CHEM> |
| |
--------------
|
|
-------------------------------
/ / \ \
/ / \ \
/ / \ \
/ / \ \
/ / \ \
/ / \ \
---------------- ---------------- -------------------- ----------------
| <CHEM.ALLEN> | | <CHEM.BLAKE> | | <CHEM.LAB-NOTES> | | <CHEM.TESTS> |
| | | | | (files-only) | | (files-only) |
---------------- ---------------- -------------------- ----------------
| |
| |
V V
-------------------- --------------------
| <CHEM.ALLEN.LAB> | | <CHEM.BLAKE.LAB> |
| (files-only) | | (files-only) |
-------------------- --------------------
Figure 2-1: Directories and Subdirectories
Examples
The examples show how a user with a directory named <CHEM> builds
subdirectories in the pattern shown in Figure 1.
1. Build directories for two of your students or employees,
assigning disk space and passwords and placing them in one of
your directory groups; check their parameters.
@BUILD <CHEM.ALLEN>
[New]
@@WORKING 50
@@PERMANENT 50
@@PASSWORD 619JIM
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391
@@LIST
NAME <CHEM.ALLEN>
Working disk storage page limit 50
Permanent disk storage page limit 50
Account default for LOGIN - none set
Directory groups 2391
@@
2-40
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[New]
@@WORKING 50
@@PERMANENT 50
@@PASSWORD 127BIL
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391
@@LIST
Name <CHEM.BLAKE>
Working disk storage page limit 50
Permanent disk storage page limit 50
Account default for LOGIN - none set
Directory groups 2391
@@
2. Modify Blake's directory to allow him to create two
subdirectories.
@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[Old]
@@MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES 2
3. Build a files-only directory to store examination questions.
@BUILD <CHEM.TESTS>
[New]
@@FILES-ONLY
@@WORKING 10
@@PERMANENT 10
@@PASSWORD MINERVA
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2391
4. Build a files-only directory as a library directory for your
subdirectory owners. Place the directory and these users in
the same group.
@BUILD <CHEM.LAB-NOTES>
[New]
@@FILES-ONLY
@@WORKING 25
@@PERMANENT 25
@@PROTECTION 774000
@@DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION 775200
@@DIRECTORY-GROUP 2392
@@
@BUILD <CHEM.ALLEN>
[Old]
@@USER-GROUP 2392
@@
@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[Old]
@@USER-GROUP 2392
2-41
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(BUILD)
5. User Blake quits. Delete his directory.
@BUILD <CHEM.BLAKE>
[Old]
@@KILL
[Confirm]
6. Modify a subdirectory so that the subdirectory's owner will
have 350 disk pages available.
@BUILD <TUCKER.TEST>
[Old]
@@PERMANENT 350
@@
?Request exceeds superior directory permanent quota.
Please fix incorrect subcommands.
The action above produced an error message. To correct the
error, PUSH out of the BUILD session to learn what the
superior directory's permanent quota is.
@@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(70)
@INFORMATION DISK-USAGE
PS:<TUCKER>
70 Pages assigned
261 Working pages, 261 Permanent pages allowed
7546 Pages free on PS:, 144454 pages used.
Then return to the BUILD session, and specify a permanent
quota that is less than the superior directory's quota of 261
disk pages.
@POP
[Continuing BUILD of directory PS:<TUCKER.TEST>]
@@PERMANENT 170
@@
2-42
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
2.11 CANCEL
Cancels requests made with a queue-class command.
Format
@CANCEL (REQUEST TYPE) queue (ID) identifier/switch(es)
where:
queue is the name of the queue, chosen from the
following list:
ARCHIVE for requests made using the
ARCHIVE command
BATCH for requests made using the SUBMIT
command
CARDS for requests made using the PUNCH
CARDS command
MOUNT for requests made using the MOUNT
STRUCTURE or MOUNT TAPE command
PAPER-TAPE for requests made using the PUNCH
PAPER-TAPE command
PLOT for requests made using the PLOT
command
PRINT for requests made using the PRINT
command
RETRIEVE for requests made using the
RETRIEVE command
request ID number
the unique identifier assigned
by the system to your request.
This is the number appearing
under the heading "Req#" in
the list of requests shown by
the appropriate INFORMATION
command (see Related Commands,
below). To cancel archival
requests, use "filespec"
argument instead.
jobname the jobname of the request,
2-43
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
either:
o the first six characters
of the first filename in
the request or the
argument you supplied to a
/JOBNAME switch when
making the request (for
output and batch
requests), or
o the first six characters
of each filename in the
request (for retrieval
requests), or
o the first six characters
of the structure alias or
tape set n. This is the
name appearing under the
heading "Name", "Req
Name", or "Job Name" in
the list of requests shown
by the appropriate
INFORMATION command (see
Related Commands, below).
filespec the specification of a file.
Use this argument to cancel
archival requests.
* the asterisk identifier
cancels all your requests in
the specified queue.
/switch is one or more of the following switches:
/DESTINATION-NODE:node
which lets you cancel a print
request to a remote printer in
the same TOPS-20 cluster as
the requesting node. This
switch cancels only the print
requests that were made from
the local node. Other print
requests made on the remote
node are not affected.
/JOBNAME:jobname
which gives the jobname of the
request you want to cancel.
2-44
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
See Special Cases - /JOBNAME
Switch, below.
/SEQUENCE:n which gives the sequence
number of the batch or output
request you want to cancel.
The INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS
or INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS
command with the /ALL switch
gives the sequence number
assigned to these requests.
Use this switch in CANCEL
commands placed within batch
jobs; then you can cancel
requests made earlier in the
batch job even though you do
not know the request ID
number.
/USER:user name
which cancels the specified
request entered under the
given user name. Use an
asterisk (*) both for request
ID number and as argument to
this switch to cancel all
requests of all users in the
specified queue. For
| privileged users only. /USER
| is required to modify or
| cancel requests from users
| other than yourself.
Output
When you complete a CANCEL command removing a request, the system
responds with "[1 Job Canceled]" and makes the appropriate
deletion from the indicated queue. If the job is being
processed, the response is "[1 Job Canceled (1 was in
progress)]", but if the job is already finished, it is simply
"[No Jobs Killed]".
Characteristics
Request ID or Jobname as Argument to CANCEL
You can cancel a single queue request (those made with
Queue-class commands - MOUNT, PLOT, PRINT, PUNCH, RETRIEVE,
or SUBMIT) by giving either its request ID number or its
jobname as the second argument of a CANCEL command. This
2-45
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
argument is interpreted as a request ID number unless it
includes one or more non-numeric characters. If the
argument includes non-numeric characters it is interpreted
as a jobname. By giving a jobname as the second argument of
a CANCEL command, you cancel all your requests of that
jobname in the specified queue. But see also Special
Cases - /JOBNAME Switch, below.
Special Cases
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT Switch
You can give the special switch, /SPOOLED-OUTPUT, after the
CARDS, PAPER-TAPE, PLOT, or PRINT argument to the CANCEL
command. By doing so you cause any accumulated requests in
the spooler queue for the appropriate output device (CDP:,
PTP:, PLT:, or LPT:, respectively) to be canceled, rather
than filled when you log out. Do not give any further
arguments to a "CANCEL queue /SPOOLED-OUTPUT" command.
If any spooled file print requests have been routed to a
remote node, use the /DESTINATION-NODE switch to cancel
them.
/JOBNAME Switch
In the singular case when you want to cancel several queue
requests of the same jobname using a single command, and
that jobname is purely numerical (for example, 5045), you
must use the /JOBNAME:jobname switch as the second argument
to the CANCEL command. Do not also give the request ID or
jobname as a command argument if you give the
/JOBNAME:jobname switch.
Restrictions
Cannot Cancel Filled Tape-mount Requests
You cannot use the CANCEL command to withdraw a MOUNT TAPE
request once the first volume of tape has been mounted (once
you have received a message of the form, [setname defined as
MTn:]). Use the DISMOUNT command to give up your tape
resource in this case. Note that the DEASSIGN or LOGOUT
command will also dismount the tape set.
Cannot Cancel Certain Archival Requests
You cannot use the CANCEL command to withdraw an archival
request once the operator has initiated archival procedures.
Thus, even though files remain on disk between the
2-46
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
operator's first and second archive runs, you cannot cancel
a request during this time. If you try to cancel a request
after archiving has begun, you receive the error message:
?File has archive status: filename
Note that this error does not terminate a multifile CANCEL
ARCHIVE command (for example, CANCEL ARCHIVE *.*); the
TOPS-20 command processor continues processing each
remaining filename in the request. Cancel requests for
these remaining files are judged individually.
Related Commands
ARCHIVE for requesting archival of a file
INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS for finding out the archival
status of files
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS for examining requests in the
batch input queue
INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS for examining requests in the
structure- and tape-mount queue
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS for examining requests in the
line printer, plotter, card
punch, and paper tape punch
queues
INFORMATION RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS for examining requests in the
retrieval queue
MODIFY for changing requests without
removing them
MOUNT for placing requests in the
structure- or tape-mount queue
PLOT for placing requests in a plotter
queue
PRINT for placing requests in a line
printer queue
PUNCH for placing requests in the
card- or paper-tape-punch queue
RETRIEVE for placing requests in the
retrieval queue
2-47
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
SUBMIT for placing requests in the batch
input queue
Examples
1. Cancel a specific print request.
@CANCEL PRINT REMAX
[1 Job canceled]
2. Cancel all your batch requests.
@CANCEL BATCH *
[3 Jobs canceled]
3. Find out what line printer requests you have made, then
cancel one of two jobs bearing the same jobname.
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- -------
MYCOPY 142 81 LATTA /Lower /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
MYCOPY 143 81 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
MYCOPY 144 81 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
HOLMAX 141 200 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-79 17:00
HOLMAX 140 200 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
There are 5 Jobs in the Queue (None in Progress)
@CANCEL PRINT 141
[1 Job Canceled]
4. Get a list of your printing jobs (and some of the switches
you gave), then cancel three of them.
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- -------
MYCOPY 142 81 LATTA /Lower /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
/Prio:20 /Seq:1728
MYCOPY 143 81 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
/Seq:1729
MYCOPY 144 81 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
/Seq:1730
HOLMAX 140 200 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-79 18:00
/Seq:1726
There are 4 Jobs in the Queue (None in Progress)
2-48
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
@CANCEL PRINT MYCOPY
[3 Jobs Canceled]
5. Cancel a plotter request.
@CANCEL PLOT 94
[1 Job Canceled]
6. Cancel a mount request for a structure or a tape set.
@CANCEL MOUNT 24
[1 mount request canceled]
7. Find out what requests are in the mount queue. Cancel your
structure mount request.
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- ------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- ----------
MARK MTA1 Tape Enabled MARK 126 60 HOVSEPIAN
TAPE MTA3 Tape Enabled TAPE 148 13 WALLACE
LATB Waiting Disk LATB 157 65 LATTA
There are 3 Requests in the Queue
@CANCEL MOUNT 157
[1 mount request canceled]
8. Find out what requests are in the mount queue. Cancel a
mount request that has not yet been filled, and dismount a
tape that has been mounted.
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- ------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- ----------
MARK MTA1 Tape Enabled MARK 29 15 HOVSEPIAN
DBL02 MTA0 Tape Enabled LAT 31 24 LATTA
NCV19 Waiting Tape Enabled NCV 32 24 LATTA
There are 3 Requests in the Queue
@CANCEL MOUNT 32
[1 mount request canceled]
@DISMOUNT TAPE LAT:
[Tape dismounted, logical name LAT: deleted]
9. Cancel a remote print request.
@CANCEL PRINT SUM7/DESTINATION-NODE::LEZAH
2-49
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CANCEL)
[1 print request canceled]
2-50
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CLOSE)
2.12 CLOSE
Closes open files in your job and releases their JFNs.
Format
@CLOSE (JFN) n
where:
n is the JFN (Job File Number) of a file.
Default n - all JFNs for open and closed files
Output
When the CLOSE command is completed, the system prints a message
on your terminal for each JFN that it has closed or attempted to
close.
Characteristics
CLOSE Usually Unnecessary
The CLOSE command is used to preserve the contents of a file
after the abnormal termination of the program that opened
it. Under ordinary conditions you do not need to use the
CLOSE command.
Special Cases
CLOSE For Closed Files
If you give the CLOSE command for an existing but closed
JFN, the JFN is released.
Restrictions
Closing Mapped Files
You cannot close files that are mapped into memory; in this
case you may give the RESET command, which clears memory.
(Note, however, that RESET will delete and expunge a mapped
file if the file is new, rather than save it as CLOSE would.
To save a new mapped file, give the SET PAGE-ACCESS 0:777
NONEXISTENT command, and follow this with CLOSE.) If RESET
by itself does not close the file, you may first have to
2-51
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CLOSE)
give the POP command to return to a higher level of the
TOPS-20 command processor; then give the RESET command.
Once memory has been cleared, all files are closed for processes
at the current and lower levels of TOPS-20.
Related Commands
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS for determining which files are open
in your job
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for determining which files are
mapped
RESET for closing mapped files and clearing
memory
SET PAGE NONEXISTENT for removing specified pages from
memory
Examples
1. Close an open file.
@CLOSE 4
4 EDIT-BUFFER.OUT.100036 [OK]
2. Try to close all your open files. Give the RESET command to
close those that are mapped. (Note that the file EXEC.EXE,
containing the TOPS-20 command processor, cannot be closed.)
@CLOSE
3 TEST1.CBL.1 [OK]
2 PS:<TEST>EDIT.EXE.4 Can't close file - File still mapped
1 PS:<SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.3 Can't close file - File still mapped
@RESET
@CLOSE
1 PS:<SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.3 Can't close file - File still mapped
2-52
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
2.13 COMPILE
Translates source files into object (relocatable binary) files.
Format
@COMPILE (FROM) /switch(es) source/switch(es) object,...
where:
switches are keywords chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of COMPILE command options.
They have different effects depending on their
position in the command line: placed before all
files in the command, they act as defaults for
all; otherwise, they affect only the nearest
preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
source is the file specification of a source program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type of 3 or fewer characters; you cannot
use a generation number.
Default - arguments you gave in your last
LOAD-class command
object is the filename you choose for the object file; it
must be of 6 or fewer characters.
Default - filename of the source file (file
type is .REL)
Summary of COMPILE Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
/10-BLISS
/36-BLISS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT
/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE
/DDT
/DEBUG
/FAIL
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
/FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
2-53
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
/LIBRARY
/LIST
/MAC
/MACHINE-CODE
/MACRO
/MAP
/NOBINARY
/NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
/NODBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
/NOLIST
/NOLIBRARY
/NOMACHINE-CODE
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSEARCH
/NOSTAY
/NOSYMBOLS
/NOWARNINGS
/OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL
/RELOCATABLE
/SAIL
/SEARCH
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/STAY
/SYMBOLS
/WARNINGS
Descriptions of these switches are given below. Although the
system will not reject switches described under any of the
LOAD-class commands, only those switches commonly associated with
COMPILE are described here.
COMPILE Command Switches
/10-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-10 compiler.
Default for files of type .B10 and .BLI
/36-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-36 compiler.
Default for files of type .B36
/68-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-68 compiler.
Default for files of type .C68 or .68C
/74-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-74 compiler.
Default for files of type .C74 or .74C
2-54
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
/ABORT stops a compile if a fatal error is detected and
returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level.
/ALGOL compiles the file using the ALGOL compiler.
Default for files of type .ALG
/BINARY allows generation of an object (binary) file for
each source file given. Use this switch to cancel
a /NOBINARY switch.
Default
/COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL compiler, either
COBOL-68 or COBOL-74, that your installation has
stored in the file SYS:COBOL.EXE.
Default for files of type .CBL
/COMPILE forces compilation of the source file even if a
current object file already exists. Use this
switch along with the /LIST or /CREF switch to
obtain listings when you have current object
files. (See also the /NOBINARY switch.)
/CREF same as /CROSS-REFERENCE
/CROSS-REFERENCE
creates a file containing cross-reference
information for each compilation. The filename is
that of the object file; the file type is .CRF.
Use the CREF command to obtain a listing of the
file. (For COBOL files, this switch automatically
produces a cross-reference listing.) See the
TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide for information about
the CREF program.
/DDT loads the DDT debugging program along with your
object file.
/DEBUG produces an object file containing debugging
information beyond what is usually inserted during
a compilation. (For FORTRAN programs only, and
only if you have not given the /OPTIMIZE switch.)
/FAIL compiles the file using the FAIL compiler.
Default for files of type .FAI
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
indicates non-standard syntax in file.
/FORTRAN compiles the file using the FORTRAN compiler
Default in the absence of a standard source
file type and a language switch
2-55
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
Default for files of type .FOR
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler that
will process the file(s) to which this switch
applies. You must include the switches in double
quotation marks (" ").
/LIBRARY same as /SEARCH.
/LIST prints a listing of the program in ASCII format;
the name of this listing is the filename of the
object file. The /CREF switch overrides /LIST
when they both apply to the same file.
/MAC same as /MACRO
/MACHINE-CODE produces a file containing the generated machine
code. The filename is that of the object file;
the file type is .LST. For high-level languages.
Default
/MACRO assembles the file using the MACRO assembler.
Default for files of type .MAC
/MAP produces a loader map and stores it in the file
object.MAP, where object is the name of the module
containing the start address, or (if no start
address) nnnLNK.MAP, where nnn is your job number.
/NOBINARY prevents generation of an object (binary) file.
Use this switch along with /LIST or /CREF to allow
these switches to take effect without producing a
new object file.
/NOCREF same as /NOCROSS-REFERENCE.
/NOCOMPILE prevents compilation if the associated object file
is current; otherwise it forces compilation.
Cancels /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE. See
Characteristics - Compiling New Sources Only,
below.
Default
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
prevents the creation of a cross-reference file.
Default
/NODEBUG excludes special debugging information from your
object file. (For FORTRAN programs only.)
Default
2-56
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
prevents the flagging of nonstandard syntax in the
file.
Default
/NOLIBRARY same as /NOSEARCH.
/NOLIST prevents a line printer listing of the program.
Default
/NOMACHINE-CODE
prevents generation of a file containing machine
code.
Default
/NOOPTIMIZE prevents the generation of a globally optimized
object file. (For FORTRAN programs only.)
Default
/NOSEARCH requires all modules in the object file library
(the file accompanied by this switch in the
command line) to be loaded, even if they are not
called by your program. Cancels the /SEARCH
switch.
Default
/NOSTAY stops the compiler from being placed in a
background fork. Use when /STAY is set as a
default for the compiler.
/NOSYMBOLS prevents a symbol table from being loaded along
with the object file.
/NOWARNINGS prevents display of warnings for nonfatal errors.
/OPTIMIZE calls for generation of a globally optimized
object file, that is, one that runs as quickly as
possible. (For FORTRAN programs only, and only if
you have not given the /DEBUG switch.)
/PASCAL compiles the file using the PASCAL compiler.
Default for files of type .PAS
/RELOCATABLE identifies the input file as an object file
(regardless of its extension) and prevents
compilation of the source file, forcing use of an
existing object file even if the object file is
out of date.
Default for files of type .REL
/SAIL compiles the file using the SAIL compiler.
2-57
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
Default for files of type .SAI
/SEARCH requires that the object file library (the file
accompanied by this switch in the command line) be
searched for modules called by your program or by
a program subroutine. Only these modules are
loaded, along with modules called from the system
libraries, which are always searched.
/SIMULA compiles the file using the SIMULA compiler.
Default for files of type .SIM
/SNOBOL compiles the file using the SNOBOL compiler
Default for files of type .SNO
/STAY returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level so
that you can perform other work while the system
continues to compile your program. You
immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or $),
and can then issue any user command. Be careful
not to send incorrect data to programs expecting
terminal input. (See the CONTINUE command,
Restrictions: Programs Competing for Terminal
Input.)
This switch saves you from having to: issue a ^T
to make sure the compiler has begun; give a ^C to
halt compilation; and issue a CONTINUE /STAY
command to remain at command level during
compilation.
/SYMBOLS loads a symbol table along with the object file;
helpful for debugging a program.
Default
/WARNINGS displays warnings for nonfatal errors.
Default
Characteristics
Compiling New Sources Only
The system usually compiles only those sources for which
there are no current object files, that is, sources whose
write dates are more recent than those of the object files
of the same name.
However, sources for which you supply a new object filename
are compiled even if there are current object files. You
can always force compilation with the /COMPILE switch.
2-58
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
Default Switches Not Passed to Compiler
Only switches specified in a LOAD-class command are passed
to the compiler; default switches are not passed. Instead,
the system assumes that the defaults for the compiler are
the same as the defaults for the LOAD-class command.
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL, or .ALG) in a COMPILE command, the system
automatically calls the appropriate compiler when
compilation is necessary. If you specify source files by
filename only, the system searches your connected directory
in the above order for a file of this name and a standard
type. To compile programs from sources that have
nonstandard file types, give a switch to indicate the proper
compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or /ALGOL). A switch
will take precedence over a standard file type if they
indicate different languages. If no compiler is indicated
with either a switch or a standard file type, the FORTRAN
compiler is used.
Hints
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by plus signs
(+) as arguments to COMPILE, they are compiled together as
if they were a single file. Their object module is stored
under any filename given as the "object" argument of the
command, or (if none) under the last filename in the group
and file type .REL.
Indirect Files as Arguments
You can store the arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of a COMPILE command in an indirect file, and
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespec as a
COMPILE command argument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to
set up default global arguments to the COMPILE command.
Insert this SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change
your own defaults permanently.
Wildcards Illegal with COMPILE
2-59
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
The COMPILE command does not accept wildcard characters (*
and %) in a file specification.
Effect on Memory
The COMPILE command clears any unkept forks from memory and loads
the appropriate compiler.
Related Commands
LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG other LOAD-class commands for
performing related functions
Examples
1. Compile a FORTRAN program.
@COMPILE RSD2.FOR
FORTRAN: RSD2
MAIN.
2. Do the same thing, using a switch to indicate the proper
compiler. Use the /STAY switch to return immediately to
TOPS-20 command level.
@COMPILE RSD2/FORTRAN/STAY
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(1015)
@EDIT LOGIN.CMD
3. Create an indirect file using the EDIT editor. Use it to
compile several programs, forcing a compilation of the last
one and storing its object file under a new name.
@CREATE UPDATE.CMD
Input: UPDATE.CMD.1
00100 /COBOL FSTQ, SNDQ, THDQ, FTHQ/COMPILE ANNUAL
00200 $
*E
[UPDATE.CMD.1]
@COMPILE @UPDATE.CMD
COBOL: DMN [FSTQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [SNDQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [THDQ.CBL]
COBOL: DMN [FTHQ.CBL]
2-60
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COMPILE)
EXIT
@DIRECTORY,
@@CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE
@@REVERSE
@@
PS:<LATTA>
ANNUAL.REL.1
THDQ.REL.1
SNDQ.REL.1
SNDQ.CBL
FSTQ.CBL
Total of 5 files
4. Produce a cross-reference (.CRF) file for a FORTRAN program
although you already have a current object file; prevent the
generation of a new object program. Check for the output
file.
@COMPILE /CREF/FORTRAN/COMPILE/NOBINARY RSD2
FORTRAN: RSD2
MAIN.
@DIRECTORY,
@@CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE
@@REVERSE
@@
PS:<LATTA>
RSD2.CRF.1
017CRE.TMP.100017;T
RSD2.REL.1
RSD2.FOR
Total of 4 files
2-61
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONNECT)
2.14 CONNECT
Connects your job to a directory.
Format
@CONNECT (TO DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
PASSWORD:password
where:
dev:<directory> is the directory to which you want to
connect.
Default dev: - your connected structure
Default <directory> - the directory (on
the specified structure) of the
same name as your connected
directory
Default (if no arguments are given) -
your log-in directory on the
public structure
password is the password of the directory (not
requested for your log-in directory or a
directory to which you already have ownership
or sufficient group rights).
Characteristics
Capabilities
Your capabilities (WHEEL, OPERATOR, SEMI-OPERATOR,
CONFIDENTIAL) are associated with your log-in user name
only. If you connect to a directory whose owner has Wheel
capabilities, you do not gain these capabilities.
Hints
Obtaining Group Rights
You can obtain group rights equal to those of the owner of a
directory by giving the ACCESS command instead of, or in
addition to, CONNECT for that directory.
2-62
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONNECT)
Restrictions
Features Not Affected
For some system features, CONNECT does not affect the
directory used:
System Accounting
The SET ACCOUNT command allows arguments valid for your
log-in user name only. Generally, charges for system use
are made to your log-in user name.
Queue-class Commands
The Queue-class commands charge processing requests to your
log-in user name only.
Related Commands
ACCESS for obtaining group as well as ownership rights equal
to those of the owner of a directory
MOUNT for making a structure available for connecting and
ensuring the continued availability of the structure
Examples
1. Connect to another user's directory.
@CONNECT <HOLLAND>
Password:___
2. Try to access a directory. Discovering that it is a
files-only directory, connect to it instead.
@ACCESS <MANUALS>
?Directory is "files-only" and cannot be accessed
@CONNECT <MANUALS>
Password:___
3. Connect to another user's directory on a different file
structure and then to your directory on that structure; then
return to your log-in directory on PS:. Give INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS commands as you go along to check which is your
connected directory.
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host AURORA
2-63
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONNECT)
Job 36, TTY207, User LATTA
Account 341
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@CONNECT SNARK:<HOLLAND>
Password:___
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host AURORA
Job 36, TTY207, User LATTA, SNARK:<HOLLAND>
Account 341
@CONNECT <LATTA>
@INFORMATION JOB
Host AURORA
Job 36, TTY207, User LATTA, SNARK:<LATTA>
Account 341
@CONNECT
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host AURORA
Job 36, TTY207, User LATTA
Account 341
@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: dismounted
4. Connect to your directory on another structure and obtain
your full rights to it. After giving an INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS command to verify your connected directory, give a
command that depends on these rights. Then return to your
log-in directory on PS:.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@ACCESS SNARK:
@CONNECT SNARK:
@INFORMATION JOB
Host AURORA
Job 36, TTY207, User LATTA, SNARK:<LATTA>
Account 341
@INFORMATION DIRECTORY <LATTA.*>,
@@NAME-ONLY
@@
Name SNARK:<LATTA.ALLEN>
Name SNARK:<LATTA.BLAKE>
Name SNARK:<LATTA.LAB-NOTES>
Name SNARK:<LATTA.TESTS>
@END-ACCESS SNARK:<LATTA>
@CONNECT
@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: dismounted
2-64
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
2.15 CONTINUE
Continues execution of a fork that was halted.
Format
@CONTINUE (FORK) argument /switch
where:
argument is the fork name or fork number.
Default - the current fork
/switch is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of CONTINUE command
options.
CONTINUE Command Switches
/BACKGROUND keeps your terminal at TOPS-20 command level and
continues execution of the program in a
"background" fork. When the program attempts to
do terminal input or output, it halts and displays
the message [FORK-NAME wants the TTY].
/NORMALLY restores your terminal to command level (if any)
within the program.
Default
/STAY keeps your terminal at TOPS-20 command level and
continues execution of the program in a
"background" fork. Output from the program is
sent to the terminal and is intermixed with
whatever output is currently displayed. When the
program attempts to read from the terminal, it can
randomly intercept input intended for the EXEC or
another program. Therefore, use this switch with
programs that, once started, do not request
further terminal input.
Characteristics
Continuing a Noncurrent Fork
When you continue a noncurrent fork, by including the
fork-name argument in a CONTINUE command, the specified fork
becomes your current fork.
2-65
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
Hints
Stopping a Background Program
To stop a background program, give the FREEZE command.
Providing Input to a Background Program
A background program, continued with CONTINUE /BACKGROUND,
sends the message [FORK-NAME wants the TTY] when it wants
input. A background program, continued with CONTINUE /STAY,
prints the program prompt, for example PASCAL>, when it
wants input. To (provide input to a program that is running
in a background fork, return to program command level with
CONTINUE /NORMALLY. (Some programs require you to type an
extra RETURN after CONTINUE /NORMALLY to display the program
prompt). Then, type the required program input. (See
below, Restrictions, Programs Competing for Terminal Input.)
Monitoring your Program
CONTINUE /STAY and CONTINUE /BACKGROUND, by keeping your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level (EXEC), let you use
TOPS-20 commands to monitor the progress of your program
while it is running. Use the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
command to display the CPU time used and the kept and RUN
status of each fork belonging to the current EXEC level.
More commands for monitoring your programs are listed below
in Related Commands.
Running Multiple Programs Simultaneously
To simultaneously run multiple programs in background forks
or use commands that affect memory, use one or a combination
of the following methods after placing a fork in the
background with CONTINUE /STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND:
PUSHing to an Inferior EXEC Level
Type the PUSH command to create an inferior EXEC level
and a fresh copy of memory (address space). Then run
another program and return to EXEC command level with
CONTINUE /STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND. The new
program does not affect the background program since
both programs are at a different EXEC level. However,
see Restrictions below. PUSH to a new EXEC before
running each new program.
KEEPing the Fork
Type the KEEP command to give the background fork a
2-66
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
"kept" status. (A kept fork is not cleared from memory
when another program is loaded.) Then run another
program and return to EXEC command level with CONTINUE
/STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND. KEEP each background
fork before running another program. Check the status
of your forks with INFORMATION FORK-STATUS.
Continuing Forks Using the Fork Name
You can continue a fork by typing the fork name as if it
were the CONTINUE command. To function as the CONTINUE
command, the fork must be "kept" with the KEEP or the SET
PROGRAM KEEP command. For more information, refer to the
descriptions of these commands.
More Information
The CONTINUE command is one of the TOPS-20
multiforking-class commands. For more information about
multiforking, see the section named, Running Multiple
Programs, in the TOPS-20 User's Guide.
Restrictions
Similar Programs Competing for Files
If you have two similar programs running simultaneously,
they may try to access the same files at the same time (for
example, temporary files labeled by job number, used by
compilers). This may cause unpredictable situations to
develop. To avoid the possibility, run different kinds of
programs.
Programs Competing for Terminal Input
If you use CONTINUE /STAY to run a program in a background
fork, the program can request input from the terminal while
you are giving input to the EXEC or another program. This
input can be randomly intercepted by the background program
when it requests terminal input. Usually though, the EXEC
or the current program receives the input.
When terminal input is intercepted by the background
program, the program will usually type input error messages.
To give input to the program, stop the program by typing two
CTRL/Cs or the program's exit command. Then, if the
background program is at a higher EXEC command level, give
POP commands to return to the EXEC level that holds the
background program. (POP terminates the current EXEC and
erases programs in its memory.) Finally, give the CONTINUE
2-67
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
/NORMALLY command; this puts you at program command level so
that you can give the requested input.
Remember, input is intercepted by the background program
randomly. Therefore, you may have to type extra CTRL/Cs,
program exit commands, and POPs. To reduce confusion about
the direction of terminal input, it is recommended that you
use CONTINUE /STAY only when you plan to work at the current
EXEC level while a program runs in a background fork. You
should also CONTINUE /STAY programs that simply end without
requesting terminal input. Use CONTINUE /BACKGROUND when
you plan to work at a lower EXEC level or at another program
command level.
When a program started with CONTINUE /BACKGROUND requests
terminal input, it sends the message, [FORK-NAME wants the
TTY]. No input is taken by the background program until you
return to program command level with CONTINUE /NORMALLY.
You should CONTINUE /BACKGROUND programs that request
terminal input.
Maintaining Access to Directories
While a fork is running in the background, use caution in
using the CONNECT, ACCESS and END-ACCESS commands. Changing
your directory access could leave the fork unable to
reference certain files.
No I/O Control with Some Programs
Most programs read and write data to the terminal through
standard input and output designators. Some programs
however, use different methods of communicating with the
terminal. Therefore, when you use /BACKGROUND and /STAY to
control terminal input and output from a background fork,
the input and output behavior of programs with nonstandard
designators can be unpredictable.
Continued Programs Do Not Prompt for input
When you continue a program, the program continues from
exactly where it was interrupted. If the program was
waiting for input, it will simply continue to wait for
input; it won't prompt you again. For example, assume you
are running the DECmail/MS program and you press CTRL/C at
the MS> prompt. Next, you CONTINUE MS. The cursor moves to
the next line but no MS> prompt appears. This is because MS
has continued to do the last thing it was doing when you
interrrupted it with CTRL/C - waiting for a command at the
MS> prompt. MS does not know that its prompt is no longer
displayed before the cursor.
2-68
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
So, when you continue a program and nothing happens,
consider what you were doing when you CTRL/C'd the program.
If you were at the MS> prompt, type an MS command or, press
RETURN again to redisplay the MS> prompt. If you had typed
a portion of and MS command, press CTRL/R to redisplay the
command. If you had typed a portion of a mail message,
press CTRL/K to redisplay the message.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The CONTINUE /NORMALLY command resumes processing the program in
memory, and leaves your terminal at program command level (if
any). The CONTINUE /BACKGROUND and CONTINUE /STAY commands
resume processing the program in memory, but leave your terminal
at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
DETACH CONTINUE for disengaging your current job
from your terminal and continuing
the program that the job is
running
FORK for changing the current fork
FREEZE for halting a program in a
background fork
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS for monitoring files being written
by your program
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for displaying the number and the
status of each fork in your job
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for monitoring your program's use
of memory
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for monitoring your program's use
of CPU time
KEEP for giving a fork a kept status
PUSH for obtaining a lower TOPS-20
command level (and a fresh copy of
memory)
REENTER for starting your current program
at its alternate entry point (if
any)
2-69
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
START for starting your current program
at the beginning
RESET, SET NAME, other multiforking-class commands
SET PROGRAM, UNKEEP for performing related functions
Examples
1. Display the fork status with the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
command. Notice that the arrow points to the current fork.
Then, give the CONTINUE command to continue the program in
the current, halted fork.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6253, 0:02:54.4
=> DUMPER (2): HALT at 700304, 0:01:19.3
@CONTINUE
DUMPER>
2. Run the DSR program and then halt it by typing two CTRL/Cs.
Give the CONTINUE /BACKGROUND command to continue DSR in a
background fork and return to EXEC command level. Then, give
the KEEP command so that you can load another program without
clearing the running, background, DSR fork. Check the status
of DSR with the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS command.
@RUN DSR
DSR>TEST.RNO
^C
@CONTINUE /BACKGROUND
@KEEP
[Keeping DSR]
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> DSR (1): Kept, Background, Running at 413160, 0:00:00.8
Now begin editing a file with the EDIT program. During your
editing session the system notifies you that the background
fork wants input. To return to DSR command level, first exit
the edit program. Then check the fork status with the
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS command. Notice that DSR is in a
terminal I/O wait state and that EDIT is now the current
fork. Since the fork you want to continue is not the current
fork, you must specify the fork name with the CONTINUE
command. Now type CONTINUE DSR.
@EDIT COMAND.CMD
Edit: COMAND.CMD.2
*P
00100 SET DEFAULT PRINT /NOHEADER /NOTIFY:YES
00200 SET PROGRAM MS KEEP START
2-70
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
00300 SET PROGRAM HOST KEEP CONTINUE
00400 SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWTICHES PAS /NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
00500 INFO MAIL
00600 TAKE
*I350
00350 SET PROGRAM DUMPER KEEP CONTINUE
DSR>[DSR: wants the TTY]
*E
[COMAND.CMD.3]
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6253, 0:00:51.4
DSR (1): Kept, Background, TTY I/O wait at 4404426,
0:00:00.8
@CONTINUE DSR
DSR>
3. Begin editing a long file, giving the F (find) command to
EDIT. Give a CTRL/C and then the M command to return to
TOPS-20 command level. Give the CONTINUE /STAY command and
then INFORMATION FILE-STATUS commands to check the progress
of EDIT as it searches through the file. (Notice that the
byte position shown in response to successive INFORMATION
FILE-STATUS commands grows larger.) Finally, give the
CONTINUE command to return to EDIT so you can give more EDIT
program commands.
@EDIT DOC-PLAN.MEM
Edit: DOC-PLAN.MEM.1
*FABCD$
Yes? (Type H for help): M
@CONTINUE /STAY
@INFORMATION FILE-STATUS
Connected to PS:<LATTA>, JFNS:
4 <LOADTEST>EDIT.EXE.4 Read, Execute
3 EDIT-BUFFER.OUT.100046 Read, Write, 0.(7)
2 DOC-PLAN.MEM.1 Read, 43520.(7)
1 <SYSTEM>EXEC.EXE.153 Read, Execute
Device assigned to/opened by this job: TTY222
@INFORMATION FILE-STATUS 2
2 DOC-PLAN.MEM.1 Read, 112640.(7)
@INFORMATION FILE-STATUS 2
2 DOC-PLAN.MEM.1 Read, 130560.(7)
@CONTINUE
*
2-71
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CONTINUE)
4. Start compiling a long file. After compilation has begun,
type two CTRL/Cs to stop the compilation and return to the
EXEC command level. Use the CONTINUE /STAY command to resume
compilation, and then PUSH to a new EXEC command level. Edit
a text file at this lower level, then give the POP and
CONTINUE commands to return to the compilation in progress.
The compiler finishes, in this case, after you have done so.
@COMPILE DUMPER.MAC
MACRO: DUMPER
^C
@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(55)
@EDIT PROFIL.TXT
Edit: PROFIL.TXT.2
*SAPRIL$JUNE$^:*
00100 JUNE 19, 1987
00500 JUNE 12
00750 JUNE 5
00900 JUNE 18
01400 JUNE 21
*E
[PROFIL.TXT.3}
@POP
@CONTINUE
EXIT
2-72
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COPY)
2.16 COPY
Creates a copy of a file.
Format
@COPY (FROM) source filespec (TO) destination filespec,
@@subcommand
where:
source filespec is the specification of the file or
device whose contents you want to copy.
destination filespec is the specification of the file or
device in which you want to store a copy
of the file.
Default - same as source filespec
but in your connected
directory, if necessary
using the next higher
generation number
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can
specify the mode and format of the
transfer with one of the following
subcommands:
COPY Subcommands
(when used with the paper tape reader
or paper tape punch - PTR: or PTP:)
ASCII specifies that the file being copied is
written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit words each
consisting of five 7-bit bytes and a parity
bit; the parity bit means that the eighth
hole of the paper tape is never punched.
BINARY specifies that the file being copied is
composed of 36-bit words, each consisting of
six 6-bit bytes with the seventh hole of the
paper tape set always to 0 and the eighth
hole set always to 1; causes a checksum
calculation.
BYTE n specifies that the byte size of the
destination file is to be n (any decimal
number). If you do not give the BYTE
2-73
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COPY)
subcommand, the destination file will have
the same byte size as the source file. See
also Hints - Viewing Display Screen Data
below.
IMAGE specifies that the file being copied is
composed of 36-bit words, each consisting of
one 8-bit byte; the 28 most significant bits
are set to 0 on input and are lost on output.
IMAGE BINARY same as BINARY, but lacking the checksum
calculation.
COPY Subcommands
(when used with devices other than the paper
tape reader or paper tape punch)
ASCII specifies that the file being copied is
written in ASCII mode, with 36-bit words each
consisting of five 7-bit bytes and a parity
bit; the parity bit means that the least
significant bit is set to 0 on input and is
lost on output.
BINARY calls for a direct transfer of data in 36-bit
bytes.
BYTE n specifies that the byte size of the
destination file is to be n (any decimal
number). If you do not give the BYTE
subcommand, the destination file will have
the same byte size as the source file. See
also Hints - Viewing Display Screen Data,
below.
IMAGE same as BINARY.
IMAGE BINARY same as BINARY.
---
| ALWAYS
SUPERSEDE | NEVER sets the condition under which COPY
| NEWER overwrites the destination file of the same
| OLDER name.
---
ALWAYS allows the source file to be copied to the
destination file.
Default for COPY command
2-74
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COPY)
NEVER does not copy the file if the destination
file already exists.
OLDER allows the source file to be copied to the
destination file if
o no version of the destination file
exists, or
o the generation number is less than or
equal to the generation number specified
in the destination file and the file's
write date is older than the source file.
NEWER same as OLDER except allows the copy if the
file's write date is "newer" than the source
file.
Output
As each file is copied, the system prints the specifications of
the source and destination files and the word [OK]. The delay
before you see this [OK] indicates how long it took to copy the
file. If you use recognition on the destination file
specification, the system prints, !New Generation!, !New File!,
or !Superseding!, to indicate the status of disk files, or !OK!,
if the file is copied to a non-disk device.
Characteristics
Optional Subcommands With Paper Tape
Each subcommand, when used to copy information from the
paper tape reader (PTR:), specifies an interpretation of
eight-bit bytes, represented as eight-hole lines on paper
tape. When used with the paper tape punch (PTP:), each
subcommand specifies a mapping of information to the
eight-bit bytes of paper tape.
Optional Subcommands With Other Devices
Each subcommand can be used under particular conditions, for
example, when transferring files over network facilities
(using DCN: and SRV:),to specify the byte size of
information being copied. In general, you can use COPY
command subcommands whenever you need to specify the byte
size of information being copied.
2-75
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COPY)
Hints
RENAME Faster Than COPY for Transferring Files
For moving a set of files from one directory to another on
the same structure, the RENAME command is a faster and more
efficient means than COPY. This is because RENAME only
changes the file specifications; it does not copy the
contents of the files. Also, a file transfer with the
RENAME command leaves only one set of files, while a
transfer with the COPY command leaves two sets: the
original copies and the destination copies. The original
copies are often unnecessary and must be deleted.
Using Devices as Source and/or Destination Filespecs
By specifying a device as the source and/or destination
filespec, you can use the COPY command to transfer
information between card- or paper-tape-handling devices,
magnetic tape drives, line printers, terminals, or other
output devices. However, the PLOT, PRINT, PUNCH and TYPE
commands, and appropriate utility programs (such as DUMPER
and EDIT), offer more flexibility for most applications.
Copying To or From TTY:
You can simulate the action of the CREATE command for
creating files by copying from device TTY: to a new
filespec, ending your input with a CTRL/Z; use CTRL/U,
CTRL/R, CTRL/W, and the DELETE key to edit the current
line of terminal input. You can simulate the action of
the TYPE command for displaying files by copying from
an existing filespec to device TTY:.
Viewing Display Screen Data
If you specify TTY: as the destination filespec and
then give the BYTE 8 subcommand, characters in the
source file will be sent literally to your terminal.
Do this to examine special display screen data (for
8-bit ASCII files only).
Erasing the Contents of a File While Keeping the Filespec
You can erase the contents of a file by copying from
device NUL: to the file. NUL: is a receptacle for
unwanted program output and a supplier of null input.
Spooled Output Action
If you send information to output devices using the
2-76
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COPY)
COPY command, your request is processed according to
the status of the SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION parameter,
which you set with the SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION
command.
Using Wildcards in Source and/or Destination Filespecs
You can use wildcard characters (* and %) in source
and/or destination filespecs to copy many files at a
time. Default values will be assumed for filespec
fields you do not specify. Note that if you use
wildcard characters to copy more than one source file
into a single destination file on disk, the contents of
each source file will appear in a different generation
of the destination file; the highest generation will
contain a copy of the last source file only. Use the
APPEND command to put the contents of several files
into a single file.
Specifying a New Account or Protection Number
The COPY command lets you specify the new file's
protection number, and the account to which storage
fees for it will be charged. Follow the new file
specification with a semicolon (;) and the letter P
before giving a new 6-digit protection number, and with
a semicolon and the letter A before giving a new
account (which must be valid for your user name). If
you do not specify an account for a new file, it will
take as a default the account you gave in your most
recent LOGIN or SET ACCOUNT command. However,
non-default protection numbers will be maintained for
higher generations of existing files, unless you
specify otherwise in the COPY command that creates that
higher generation.
Restrictions
Copying Archived Files
You can make a copy of an archived file by specifying it as
the first (or source) argument in a COPY command, and
specifying a file of different name or type as destination.
You can edit the new file, because it does not have archive
status although it has the same contents as the original
file. However, you cannot give the specification of an
archived file as the second (or destination) argument of a
COPY command, as this would replace the file's contents. If
you attempt to do so, whatever source argument you supply
will be copied into the next higher generation of the
2-77
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COPY)
archived file, leaving the archived file intact. And, if
you include the generation number when specifying an
archived file as the second argument of a COPY command, the
command will fail.
Warning
Destroying the Previous Contents of Files
If you give a destination file specification that includes a
generation number, the source file will be copied into that
file, replacing any previous contents if that generation of
the file already exists. Those contents cannot be
recovered. But see Restrictions - Copying Archived Files,
above.
Related Commands
APPEND for adding information to a file or
putting the contents of many files
into a single file
RENAME for changing only the specification
of a file
SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION for changing the setting of the
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION parameter,
which determines when files copied
to output devices are processed
DIRECTORY with the TIMES for displaying the date and time
WRITE subcommand and VD that the file was written
Examples
1. Make an extra copy of a file in your connected directory.
@COPY FORT.TXT BACKUP.TXT
FORT.TXT.1 => BACKUP.TXT.3 [OK]
2. Copy a file from your directory into another user's
directory, allowing the destination file to be labeled with
default file specification (the source file specification).
@ACCESS <SARTINI>
Password:___
@COPY TEST1.CBL <SARTINI>
TEST1.CBL.2 => <SARTINI>TEST1.CBL.2 [OK]
2-78
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(COPY)
@END-ACCESS <SARTINI>
3. Use a wildcard character to copy several files from your
directory on another structure to magnetic tape.
@ACCESS SNARK:
@COPY SNARK:NA*.TST MT2:
SNARK:NACCESS.TST.2 => MT2:NACCESS.TST [OK]
SNARK:NADVISE.TST.2 => MT2:NADVISE.TST [OK]
SNARK:NAPPEND.TST.2 => MT2:NAPPEND.TST [OK]
SNARK:NASSIGN.TST.2 => MT2:NASSIGN.TST [OK]
SNARK:NATTACH.TST.2 => MT2:NATTACH.TST [OK]
@END-ACCESS SNARK:
4. Use the COPY command to create a short text file.
@COPY TTY: NEW-FILE.TXT
TTY: => NEW-FILE.TXT.2
THIS FILE WAS CREATED USING THE COPY COMMAND.
^Z
@
@TYPE NEW-FILE.TXT
THIS FILE WAS CREATED USING THE COPY COMMAND.
5. Copy a file from your directory into another user's
directory. Give the SUPERSEDE NEVER subcommand to cancel the
COPY command if the other user already has a copy of the
file.
@ACCESS <STEVENS>
Password:___
@COPY STATS.TXT <STEVENS>,
@@SUPERSEDE NEVER
@@
STATS.TXT.1 => <STEVENS>STATS.TXT.3
%Not superseding current file
2-79
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
2.17 CREATE
Invokes your defined editor to create a file.
Format
@CREATE (FILE) /switch(es) filespec
where:
switches are keywords, chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of CREATE command options.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
filespec is a specification for the file you want to create.
Default - the last file specification and
associated switches you gave in a
CREATE or EDIT command during the
current terminal session
Summary of CREATE Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
NOTE
These switches are valid only if you have defined
logical name EDITOR: to be the EDIT program.
/BAK
/C128
/C64
/DECIDE
/DPY
/EXPERT
/INCREMENT:n Default n - 100
/ISAVE:n
/LOWER
/M33
/M37
/NOBAK
/NODECIDE
/NONSEPARATORS
/NONUMBER
/NOVICE
/NUMBER
/OLD
/OPTION:name
/PLINES:n Default n - 16
2-80
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
/R
/READONLY
/RONLY
/RUN:filespec Default file type - .EXE
/SAVE:n
/SEPARATORS
/SEQUENCE
/START:n Default n - argument of /INCREMENT switch
/STEP:n Default n - 100
/UNSEQUENCE
/UPPER
/WINDOW:n Default n - 10
CREATE Command Switches
/BAK causes an unedited copy of the file to be saved
at the end of an editing session under
specification name.Qyp, where name.typ is the
file's original specification.
Default
/C128 calls for a 128-character alphabet, allowing
insertion of control characters in an alternate
format. See the TOPS-20 EDIT Reference Manual
for details.
/C64 calls for a 64-character alphabet, disallowing
use of an alternate format for insertion of
control characters.
Default
/DECIDE lets you decide whether to accept or reject each
change caused by the operation of the S
(substitute) command of the EDIT program.
/DPY has no effect in the current monitor.
/EXPERT tells the EDIT program that you need only
abbreviated error messages, and fewer warnings
and reminders.
/INCREMENT:n specifies the value to add to each line number
of the file to obtain the next line number.
Default n - 100
/ISAVE:n instructs the EDIT program to update the backup
file of specification name.Qyp after every n
lines you insert.
2-81
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
/LOWER specifies that all alphabetic characters you
type should be considered lowercase characters;
give uppercase characters by preceding the
corresponding lowercase character with a single
quotation mark (').
/M33 has no effect in the current monitor.
/M37 has no effect in the current monitor.
/NOBAK prevents an unedited copy of the file from being
saved at the end of an editing session under
specification name.Qyp, where name.typ is the
file's original specification.
/NODECIDE ensures the automatic operation of the S
(substitute) command of the EDIT program.
Default
/NONSEPARATORS specifies that the characters . (period), $
(dollar sign), and % (percent sign) are ordinary
textual characters and not field delimiters
(separators) in the accompanying file.
Default
/NONUMBER suppresses the printing of line numbers with
each line of a file.
/NOVICE tells the EDIT program that you want to see
complete error messages and all appropriate
warnings; opposite of /EXPERT switch.
Default
/NUMBER prints a line number for each line of the file.
Default
/OLD causes the first backup file to be saved under
the specification name.Zyp, where name.typ is
the file's original specification.
/OPTION:name sets any EDIT switches contained in lines of the
SWITCH.INI file in your log-in directory labeled
with name (of 6 or fewer characters). See the
TOPS-20 EDIT Reference Manual for more
information about SWITCH.INI files.
/PLINES:n specifies how many lines to print in response
to each P (print) command of the EDIT program.
Default n - 16
/R same as /READONLY.
2-82
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
/READONLY prevents any changes to the file during the
current session of the EDIT program, i.e., makes
it a read-only session. This switch cannot be
given in the SWITCH.INI file.
/RONLY same as /READONLY
/RUN:filespec specifies an executable program to be run when
you end the current session of the EDIT program
with the G command.
Default file type - .EXE
/SAVE:n instructs the EDIT program to update the backup
file (of specification name.Qyp) after every n
EDIT program commands that modify the file.
/SEPARATORS notifies the EDIT program that the characters .
(period), $ (dollar sign), and % (percent sign),
are not ordinary textual characters but are
field separators in the accompanying file.
/SEQUENCE tells the EDIT program not to strip the line
numbers from the file when the EDIT session
ends.
Default
/START:n specifies the first line number for the EDIT
program to use when numbering the file.
Default n - argument of /INCREMENT switch
/STEP:n same as /INCREMENT
/UNSEQUENCE tells the EDIT program to strip the line numbers
from the file when the EDIT session ends.
/UPPER specifies that all alphabetic characters you
type should be considered uppercase characters;
give lowercase characters by preceding the
corresponding uppercase character with a single
quotation mark (').
Default
/WINDOW:n specifies the number n (between 10 and 99) of
pages to be held in memory during the EDIT
session.
Default n - 10
Characteristics
Input Mode and Edit Mode
2-83
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
The CREATE command runs the EDIT system program, first in
Input mode and then in Edit mode. (However, see also
Special Cases, below.) Input mode automatically begins each
line with a line number (unless you have given the /NONUMBER
switch), and allows you to put any alphabetic or numeric
information into the file. When you have finished doing
this and press the ESCAPE key, the EDIT program puts you
into Edit mode and prompts you with an asterisk (*), just as
if you had typed the EDIT command with the specifications of
the newly-created file as argument. If you want to save the
file in its present state, give the E (for end) command to
the EDIT program. Otherwise, you can give any other EDIT
command to change or add to the file before saving it.
Hints
Saving Backup Files Periodically
Give the /ISAVE:n switch to save an updated copy of the file
you are creating after every n lines inserted. Then you
will lose only a few lines of input in the event of a system
failure. The similar /SAVE:n switch is useful for the
CREATE command only in Edit mode, where it saves an updated
copy of the file after every n EDIT program commands that
modify the file.
SWITCH.INI File
If there is a group of CREATE command switches that you
always or often use with CREATE or EDIT commands, put them
into a file of specification SWITCH.INI in your log-in
directory, in a line of that file beginning with EDIT:abc,
where abc is any set of characters you choose to identify
the line. Then if you include the single switch /OPTION:abc
when you give a CREATE or EDIT command, all these switches
will be in effect.
Further Information
For more information about the EDIT program, see the TOPS-20
EDIT Reference Manual.
Special Cases
Using an Editor Other than EDIT
The CREATE, EDIT, and PERUSE command descriptions in this
manual assume that these commands call on the EDIT program
for their action. If your job uses another editing program,
2-84
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
for example EDT, the switches and examples shown here will
not be applicable.
The editor used by CREATE, EDIT, and PERUSE is specified by
logical name EDITOR:, so you can find out the name of this
program by giving the command, INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES
EDITOR:. The job-wide definition (if any) will be given
first, followed by the system-wide definition; the job-wide
definition prevails if both exist. If the definition of
EDITOR: is SYS:EDIT.EXE, the CREATE, EDIT and PERUSE
commands will function as described in this manual.
Otherwise, you must consult the appropriate manual (for
example, the EDT-20 Reference Manual) for information.
You can use the DEFINE command to define logical name
EDITOR: to be any editing program available at your
installation. Then this editor will be in effect when you
give the CREATE or EDIT command.
Effect on Memory
The CREATE command clears any unkept forks from memory, then
loads the editor program defined by the logical name EDITOR.
Related Commands
DIRECTORY-class commands for getting lists of existing files
EDIT for modifying existing files
PERUSE for reading existing files (same as
EDIT/READONLY)
2-85
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
Examples
1. Create a file.
@CREATE FILE1.TXT
Input: FILE1.TXT.1
00100 !THIS IS A SHORT TEXT FILE.
00200 $
*E
[FILE.TXT.1]
2. Create and edit (using the P and R commands to the EDIT
system program) another file.
@CREATE FILEB.TXT
Input:FILEB.TXT.1
00100 !THIS IS ANOTHER SHORT TEXT FILE.
00200 $
*P
00100 !THIS IS ANOTHER SHORT TEXT FILE.
*R100
00100 !THIS IS A SECOND TEXT FILE.
00200 $
1 Lines (00100/1) deleted
*P
00100 !THIS IS A SECOND TEXT FILE.
*E
[FILEB.TXT.1]
3. Create, then execute, a FORTRAN program.
@CREATE FILEE.FOR
Input: FILEE.FOR.1
00100 C THIS IS A SHORT TEST PROGRAM.
00200 TYPE 101
00300 101 FORMAT ( ' THIS IS ONLY A FORTRAN TEST.')
00400 END
00500
*E
[FILEE.FOR.1]
@EXECUTE FILEE.FOR
FORTRAN: FILEE
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT FILEE Execution]
THIS IS ONLY A FORTRAN TEST.
2-86
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREATE)
END OF EXECUTION.
CPU TIME: 0.04 ELAPSED TIME: 0.44
EXIT
2-87
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREF)
2.18 CREF
Runs the CREF program, which produces cross-reference listings from
files of type .CRF.
Format
@CREF destination-filespec=source-filespec /switch(es)
where:
destination-filespec is the name of the file or device to
which you want to send the processed
contents of the .CRF file.
Default - LPT:
source-filespec is the name of the .CRF file you want to
process.
Default - the names of all files of
type .CRF produced during
the current terminal
session
/switch is one or more keywords from the following list.
CREF Program Switches
/A Advances magnetic tape reel by one file. You can
type this switch more than once in the command
string.
/B Backspaces magnetic tape reel by one file. You
can type this switch more than once in the command
string.
/C Cancels the processing of any switches in your
SWITCH.INI file.
/D Restores the processing of any default switches in
your SWITCH.INI file.
/H Types the CREF help file. /H is illegal in a
SWITCH.INI file.
/K Suppresses Regular Symbol Table in the CREF
listing.
/M Suppresses OPDEF/Macro Table in the CREF listing.
2-88
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREF)
/O Includes the Op Code Table in the CREF listing.
/P Preserves an input file with the file type .CRF or
.LST. These types of input files are normally
deleted.
/R Requests the line number at which the CREF listing
is to start. CREF types out "RESTART LISTING AT
LINE:", after which you type the line number and
press RETURN. If you use an indirect file, CREF
looks for the number in the indirect file. /R is
most useful for physical (non-spooled) line
printers, and is illegal in a SWITCH.INI file.
/S Suppresses the program listing and lists only the
tables you select.
/T Skips to the logical end of the magnetic tape.
/W Rewinds the magnetic tape.
/Z Zeroes the DECtape directory. This is a
historical switch, and is illegal.
Characteristics
Current .CRF Files
If you have files of type .CRF produced by LOAD-class
commands during the current terminal session, the unmodified
command CREF produces listings of them and deletes the
files. By supplying an argument of the form shown in the
Format section above, you can copy the listing for a current
.CRF file to another file or device. To run the CREF
program yourself when you have current .CRF files, give the
command R CREF instead.
.CRF Files From a Previous Session
If your only files of type .CRF (created by the CREF program
or one of the LOAD-class commands) were produced during a
previous terminal session, the command CREF puts your
terminal at command level in the CREF program, symbolized by
an asterisk (*). Thus it is equivalent to the command R
CREF in this case. See Hints - Further Information, below,
for advice on how to proceed.
2-89
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREF)
Hints
Producing .CRF Files
You can produce cross-reference files by including the /CREF
switch in any LOAD-class command that actually causes a
compilation (i.e., is not prevented from doing so by a
/RELOCATABLE switch or by the existence of current object
files).
Preserving .CRF Files After Processing
Give the /P switch immediately after the CREF command to
preserve .CRF files. Ordinarily they are deleted after
being sent to an output device or copied into another file.
Further Information
For a brief on-line description of the CREF program, give
the HELP CREF command. For more detailed information, see
the TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The CREF command replaces the contents of any unkept forks in
memory with the CREF program and leaves your terminal at TOPS-20
command level, or at command level within CREF (denoted by an
asterisk prompt [*]).
Related Commands
LOAD-class commands for producing .CRF files
Examples
1. Give the CREF command to obtain a listing of your .CRF file.
@CREF
CREF: TESTF1
2. Compile two FORTRAN programs, using the /CREF switch to
produce .CRF files. Then give the CREF command to obtain
listings of these, and use the /P switch to preserve the .CRF
files.
@COMPILE /CREF TESTF1.FOR, TESTF2.FOR
FORTRAN: TESTF1
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TESTF2
2-90
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CREF)
MAIN.
@CREF/P
CREF: TESTF1
CREF: TESTF2
3. Determine what .CRF files you have, then mount a tape. Give
the CREF command, and once within the CREF program, have the
cross-reference listing produced from one of these files
copied onto tape. (The .CRF files are not processed
automatically when you give the CREF command because they
were produced during a previous terminal session.)
@DIRECTORY *.CRF
PS:<LATTA>
TESTM1.CRF.2
TESTM2.CRF.1
Total of 2 files
@MOUNT TAPE CRFMAC:/WRITE-ENABLED
[Mount Request CRFMAC Queued, Request-ID 128]
[Tape set CRFMAC, volume CRFMAC mounted]
[CRFMAC defined as MT3:]
@CREF
*MT3:=TESTM2
[CRFXKC 4K core]
*^C
@DISMOUNT TAPE CRFMAC:
[Tape dismounted, logical name CRFMAC: deleted]
2-91
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CSAVE)
2.19 CSAVE
Makes a non-sharable copy of the program in memory and stores it in a
file, in compressed executable format.
Format
@CSAVE (ON FILE) filespec (WORDS FROM) loc1 (TO) loc2, loc3 loc4,...
where:
filespec is the file specification under which you want to
store the program.
Default filespec - program name.EXE
loc1 loc2, are pairs of octal numbers or symbolic
loc3 loc4, expressions that specify the span(s) of
... memory locations you want to save.
Default loc1 loc2 - 20 to last location
occupied by program
Caution
Inefficiency of CSAVE Compared to SAVE
The CSAVE command saves in a compressed-formatted file
whatever program the system finds in memory. When the file
is returned to memory, this format prevents other users from
sharing the in-memory copy of the file. Therefore you
should ordinarily use the SAVE command instead for storing
programs in executable format.
Related Commands
GET for putting a saved file into memory
LOAD for putting source or output files into memory
RUN for running executable programs
SAVE usual command for saving programs in executable format
2-92
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(CSAVE)
Examples
1. Save your currently loaded program in compressed executable
format.
@CSAVE
DMN.EXE.1 SAVED
2. Mount a magnetic tape set. Then load an ALGOL program and
save it in three places in executable format: once in a disk
file under the same filename, again in a disk file under a
new filename, and once on magnetic tape.
@MOUNT TAPE TAPBAK: /WRITE-ENABLED
[Mount Request TAPBAK Queued, Request-ID 140]
[Tape set TAPBAK, volume TAPBAK mounted]
[TAPBAK defined as MT2:]
@LOAD TESTA1
LINK: Loading
EXIT
@CSAVE
TESTA1.EXE.1 Saved
@CSAVE BAK
BAK.EXE.1 Saved
@CSAVE MT2:
MT2:BAK Saved
@DISMOUNT TAPE TAPBAK:
[Tape dismounted, logical name TAPBAK: deleted]
2-93
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DAYTIME)
2.20 DAYTIME
Displays the current day, date, and time on your terminal.
Format
@DAYTIME
Hints
Using DAYTIME
The DAYTIME command, which does not require you to be logged
in, lets you check the system's clock against your own. If
you are saving the output from a hard-copy terminal, use
this command to make a record of the date and time.
Examples
1. Give the DAYTIME command.
@DAYTIME
Friday, April 20, 1984 09:21:19
2-94
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DDT)
2.21 DDT
Loads or merges a debugging program into memory (unless one is already
there), then starts it.
Format
@DDT/switch(es)
where:
/switch is one or more of the following:
/OVERLAY allows pages of the DDT program to
be loaded over pages occupied by
the existing program in memory
/USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from
0 to 37 octal) into which the
debugging program is to be loaded,
run, or merged
Characteristics
If a Debugging Program is Already Loaded
If you have already loaded a debugging program into memory
along with your program, the DDT command starts the
debugging program.
If Your Program, But Not a Debugging Program, is Already Loaded
If a program containing symbols is in memory without a
debugging program, the DDT command merges SYS:XDDT.EXE into
memory, then starts this debugging program. However, if
some of XDDT's pages include some of the same pages as the
existing program in memory, then the DDT program is not
placed into memory, and you receive the error message,
"?Illegal to overlay existing pages." To force the pages to
be overlaid, reissue the DDT command using the /OVERLAY
switch.
If There is No Current Program
If you do not have a program in memory, or if no program in
memory is in the current fork, or if your program does not
contain symbols, the DDT command puts SYS:XDDT.EXE into
memory and starts it.
2-95
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DDT)
Compatibility with Previous DDT Versions
The UDDT program run by the DDT command has been replaced by
the XDDT program. For compatibility with programs that
reference UDDT, a stub program named UDDT references the
XDDT program.
Hints
Using DDT to Create a Program
You can use DDT to begin typing instructions directly into
memory, without first putting the instructions into a file
for later compilation and loading. Give a RESET . (period)
command to clear the current fork, then the DDT command.
This will load the SYS:XDDT.EXE program. Then you can give
commands within XDDT to create your own program. When using
the XDDT program, you can use all the symbols in the system
parameter file MONSYM.MAC.
See the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference Manual for more
information about MONSYM.MAC. This method of writing a
program is most useful for testing special cases, or for
learning to use TOPS-20 monitor calls.
Special Cases
Using COBDDT
If you put COBDDT into memory along with a COBOL program,
the DDT command starts the UDDT program, not COBDDT. Use
the REENTER command to start COBDDT in this case.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The DDT command merges the SYS:UDDT.EXE program into the current
fork and starts it, or loads and starts SYS:XDDT.EXE. If you
have already loaded a debugging program, the DDT command starts
this program.
Related Commands
DEBUG for loading your program along with a
particular debugging program (such as
FORDDT or COBDDT).
FORK for selecting the current fork.
2-96
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DDT)
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
for displaying the numbers of pages
occupied by the program in memory.
2-97
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DDT)
Examples
1. Give the DDT command to begin debugging a program in the
current fork in memory.
@DDT DDT
2. Give the DEBUG command to debug a FORTRAN program; type a
CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20 command level so you can find out
the current load averages and number of jobs for the system.
Return to your debugging program (FORDDT in this case) by
giving the DDT command.
@DEBUG TESTF1
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT Execution]
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>> ^C
@SYSTAT SYSTEM
Fri 20-Apr-79 13:50:01 Up 36:47:55
35+14 Jobs Load av (class 0) 0.72 0.81 1.33
@DDT
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>> START
THIS IS A TEST.
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.04 ELAPSED TIME: 0.33
EXIT
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
66. pages, Entry vector loc 0 len 254000
0-12 Private R, W, E
400 Private R, W, E
401-466 <SUBSYS>FOROTS.EXE.3 3-70 R, CW, E
3. Display the programs in memory with the INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS command. Then use the FORK command to make the
CLIP program the new current fork. Verify this with
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS and then merge the UDDT program with
the CLIP program.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EMACS (1): Kept, HALT at 50340, 0:00:03.6
CLIP (2): Kept, HALT at 70363, 0:00:00.2
2-98
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DDT)
=> UNITS (3): HALT at 162, 0:00:00.9
@FORK CLIP
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EMACS (1): Kept, HALT at 50340, 0:00:03.6
=> CLIP (2): Kept, HALT at 70363, 0:00:00.2
UNITS (3): HALT at 162, 0:00:00.9
@DDT
DDT
2-99
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEASSIGN)
2.22 DEASSIGN
Releases a device from your job and places the device back in the pool
of available devices.
Format
@DEASSIGN (DEVICE) dev:
where:
dev: is the name of the device you want to deassign; an
asterisk (*) deassigns all devices (except your log-in
terminal) assigned to your job. The colon after the
device name is optional.
Restrictions
Open Files
The DEASSIGN command will not deassign a device that is
accessing an open file. An error is generated, and the
device is not deassigned until that file is closed or until
you log out. When you log out, all devices are deassigned.
Related Commands
ASSIGN for assigning a particular device
to your job
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES for finding out which devices are
available, and which ones have
already been assigned to your job
MOUNT for mounting a structure or
magnetic tape and assigning the
first available disk drive or
tape drive to your job
2-100
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEASSIGN)
Examples
1. Deassign a device (in this case a card reader).
@DEASSIGN PCDR0:
2. Find out which devices are assigned to your job, then
deassign all of these. Verify that this was done. (Note
that your terminal, in this case TTY222:, is never
deassigned.)
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, SNARK, PACK, FTN20, MTA2, MT0, LPT, LPT0, LPT1
CDR, PCDR0, CDP, FE1-15, PTY15-61, NUL, PLT, PLT0, DCN
SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: MTA2, MT0, PCDR0
TTY222, PTY15
@DEASSIGN *
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, SNARK, PACK, FNT20, MTA2, LPT, LPT0, LPT1
CDR, PCDR0, CDP, FE1-15, PTY15-61, NUL, PLT, PLT0
DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: TTY222
2-101
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
2.23 DEBUG
Loads your program into memory along with a debugging program,
compiling the source file first if necessary. Then it starts the
debugging program.
Format
@DEBUG (FROM) /switch(es) source/switch(es) object,...
where:
switches are keywords chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of DEBUG command options.
They have different effects depending on their
position in the command line: placed before all
files in the command, they act as defaults for
all; otherwise, they affect only the nearest
preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
source is the file specification of the source program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type of 3 or fewer characters; you cannot
use a generation number. This argument is not
necessary if you supply an object filespec.
object is the file specification of the object program.
The filename must be of six or fewer characters,
and the file type must be .REL; you cannot use a
generation number. This argument is not necessary
if you supply a source filespec.
Default (if you give neither source nor
object filespecs) - last filespecs
and associated switches you gave in a
LOAD-class command
Summary of DEBUG Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
/10-BLISS
/36-BLISS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT
/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE
2-102
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
/DDT
/DEBUG
/FAIL
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
/FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
/LIBRARY
/LIST
/MAC
/MACHINE-CODE
/MACRO
/MAP
/NOBINARY
/NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
/NODEBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
/NOLIBRARY
/NOLIST
/NOMACHINE-CODE
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSEARCH
/NOSTAY
/NOSYMBOLS
/NOWARNINGS
/OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL
/RELOCATABLE
/SAIL
/SEARCH
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/STAY
/SYMBOLS
/WARNINGS
DEBUG Command Switches
/10-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-10 compiler.
Default for files of type .B10 and .BLI
/36-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-36 compiler.
Default for files of type .B36
/68-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-68 compiler.
Default for files of type .C68
2-103
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
/74-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-74 compiler.
Default for files of type .C74
/ABORT stops a compile if a fatal error is detected and
returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level.
/ALGOL compiles the file using the ALGOL compiler.
Default for files of type .ALG
/BINARY allows generation of an object (binary) file for
each source file given.
Default
/COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL compiler,
either COBOL-68 or COBOL-74, that your
installation has stored in the file
SYS:COBOL.EXE.
Default for files of type .CBL
/COMPILE forces compilation of the source file even if a
current object file already exists. Use this
switch along with a /LIST or /CREF switch to
obtain listings when you have current object
files.
/CREF same as /CROSS-REFERENCE.
/CROSS-REFERENCE
creates a file containing cross-reference
information for each compilation. The filename
is that of the object file; the file type is
.CRF. Use the CREF command to obtain a listing
of the file. (For COBOL files, this switch
automatically produces a cross-reference
listing.) See the TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide
for more information about the CREF program.
/DDT loads the DDT debugging program along with your
object file.
/DEBUG produces an object file containing debugging
information beyond what is usually inserted
during compilation. (For FORTRAN programs only,
and only if you have not given the /OPTIMIZE
switch).
/FAIL compiles the file using the FAIL compiler.
Default for files of type .FAI
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
indicates nonstandard syntax in file.
2-104
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
/FORTRAN compiles the file using the FORTRAN compiler.
Default in the absence of a standard source
file type and a language switch
Default for files of type .FOR
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler
that will process the file(s) to which this
switch applies. You must include the switches
in double quotation marks (" ").
/LIBRARY same as /SEARCH.
/LIST prints a line printer listing of the program in
ASCII format; the name of this listing is the
filename of the object file. The /CREF switch
overrides /LIST when they both apply to the same
file.
/MAC same as /MACRO.
/MACHINE-CODE produces a file containing the generated machine
code. The filename is that of the object file;
the file type is .LST. For high level
languages.
Default
/MACRO assembles the files using the MACRO assembler.
Default for files of type .MAC
/MAP produces a loader map and stores it in the file
object.MAP, where object is the name of the
module containing the start address; or (if no
start address) nnnLNK.MAP, where nnn is your job
number.
/NOBINARY prevents generation of an object (binary) file.
Use this switch along with /LIST or /CREF to
allow these switches to take effect without
producing a new object file.
/NOCOMPILE prevents compilation if the associated object
file is current; otherwise it forces
compilation. Cancels the /COMPILE or
/RELOCATABLE switch.
Default
/NOCREF same as /NOCROSS-REFERENCE.
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
prevents the creation of a cross-reference file.
2-105
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
Default
/NODEBUG excludes special debugging information from your
object file. (For FORTRAN programs only.)
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
prevents a line printer listing of a
cross-reference file.
Default
/NOLIBRARY same as /NOSEARCH.
/NOLIST prevents a line printer listing of the program.
Default
/NOMACHINE-CODE prevents generation of a file containing machine
code.
Default
/NOOPTIMIZE prevents the generation of a globally optimized
object file (for FORTRAN programs only).
Default
/NOSEARCH requires all modules in the object file library
(the file accompanied by this switch in the
command line) to be loaded even if they are not
called by your program. Cancels the /SEARCH
switch.
Default
/NOSTAY stops the compiler from being placed in a
background fork. Use when /STAY is set as a
default for the compiler.
/NOSYMBOLS prevents a symbol table from being loaded along
with the object file.
/NOWARNINGS prevents display of warnings for nonfatal
errors.
/OPTIMIZE calls for generation of a globally optimized
object file, that is, one that runs as quickly
as possible. (For FORTRAN programs only, and
only if you do not also give the /DEBUG switch).
/PASCAL compiles the file using the PASCAL compiler.
Default for files of type .PAS
/RELOCATABLE identifies the input file as an object file
(regardless of its extension) and prevents
compilation of the source file, forcing use of
2-106
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
an existing object file even if the object file
is out of date.
Default for files of type .REL
/SAIL compiles the file using the SAIL compiler.
Default for files of type .SAI
/SEARCH requires that the object file library (the file
accompanied by this switch in the command line)
be searched for modules called by your program
or by a program subroutine. Only these modules
are loaded, along with modules called from the
system libraries, which are always searched.
/SIMULA compiles the file using the SIMULA compiler.
Default for files of type .SIM
/SNOBOL compiles the file using the SNOBOL compiler.
Default for files of type .SNO
/STAY returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level
so that you can perform other work while the
system continues executing the DEBUG command.
You immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or
$) and can then issue any user command. Be
careful not to send incorrect data to programs
expecting terminal input. (Refer to the
CONTINUE command, Restrictions: Programs
competing for terminal input.)
This switch saves you from having to: issue a
^T to make sure the debugger has begun; give a
^C to halt debugging; and issue a CONTINUE /STAY
command to remain at command level during
debugging.
/SYMBOLS loads a symbol table along with the object file;
helpful for debugging a program.
Default
/WARNINGS displays warnings for nonfatal errors.
Default
Characteristics
Compiling New Sources Only
Before debugging programs, the system ordinarily compiles
any source (and only those sources) whose write date is more
recent than that of the object file of the same name. You
2-107
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
can override this action with the /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE
switch. Note that the DDT debugging program is used when
/RELOCATABLE prevents a new compilation.
Default Switches Not Passed to Compiler
Only switches specified in a LOAD-class command are passed
to the compiler; default switches are not passed. Instead,
the system assumes that the defaults for the compiler are
the same as the defaults for the LOAD-class command.
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL, or. ALG) in a DEBUG command, the system automatically
calls the appropriate compiler when compilation is
necessary. If you specify source files by filename only,
the system searches your connected directory in the above
order for a file of this name and a standard type. To debug
programs from sources that have nonstandard file types, give
a switch to indicate the proper compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO,
/COBOL, or /ALGOL). A switch will take precedence over a
standard file type if they indicate different languages. If
no compiler is indicated with either a switch or a standard
file type, the FORTRAN compiler is used.
Name of Debugging Program Loaded by DEBUG
Ordinarily the DEBUG command causes the appropriate
debugging program to be loaded along with your program
(FORDDT with FORTRAN programs. COBDDT with COBOL programs,
DDT with MACRO and ALGOL programs). Use the /DDT switch to
specify that DDT be used.
Hints
Commas Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by commas as
arguments to DEBUG, the loaded programs exist in memory at
the same time and will act as a single program. You can use
this feature to substitute one module for another under
varying conditions or for different applications.
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by plus signs
(+) as arguments to DEBUG, they are treated as a single file
by compilers. Their object module is stored under any
filename given as the "object" argument of the command, or
2-108
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
(if none) under the last filename in the group and file type
.REL.
Indirect Files as Arguments
You can store the arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of a DEBUG command in an indirect file, and
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespec as a
DEBUG command argument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to
set up default global arguments to the DEBUG command.
Insert this SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change
your own defaults permanently.
Including all FORTRAN Debugging Information
If you are debugging a FORTRAN program and you wish to
examine line numbers or DO loops, or use statement tracing
or array dimension checking, give the /DEBUG and /COMPILE
switches with the DEBUG command to include the necessary
information.
Running LINK Directly
The DEBUG command automatically runs LINK, the system's
loader program, but if you require control of the loading
process you can run LINK directly. See the TOPS-20 LINK
Reference Manual.
Wildcards Illegal with DEBUG
The DEBUG command does not accept wildcard characters (* and
%) in a file specification.
Effect on Memory
The DEBUG command clears any unkept forks from memory, loads the
appropriate compiler if necessary, then loads your program and a
compatible debugging program.
Related Commands
COMPILE, LOAD, and EXECUTE other LOAD-class commands for
performing related functions
DDT for loading and starting the DDT
2-109
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
debugging program, or for starting
the debugging program you have
already loaded
Examples
1. Debug a FORTRAN program.
@DEBUG FORT.FOR
FORTRAN: FORT
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FOR DDT Execution]
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>>
2. Debug a FORTRAN program using the /COMPILE switch to force
compilation and the /DEBUG switch to generate additional
debugging information.
@DEBUG /COMPILE /DEBUG FORT.FOR
FORTRAN:FORT
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT Execution]
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>>
3. Using incompatible switches, try to debug a program. (The
system ignores one of them and continues.)
@DEBUG/COMPILE/OPTIMIZE/DEBUG FORT
FORTRAN: FORT
%ERROR IS GLOBAL OPTIMIZATION NOT SUPPORTED WITH
/DEBUG - /OPT IGNORED
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB FORDDT Execution]
STARTING FORTRAN DDT
>>
4. Get a time-ordered list of TEST1 files in your directory.
Debug an old version of it.
@TDIRECTORY TEST1.*
WRITE
2-110
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEBUG)
PS:<LATTA>
TEST1.CBL.2 5-Jan-85 13:10:57
.LST.1 6-Jan-85 14:22:00
.REL.1 6-Dec-84 10:08:17
Total of 3 files
@DEBUG TEST1/RELOCATABLE
LINK: Loading
[LNKDEB DDT Execution]
DDT
2-111
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEFINE)
2.24 DEFINE
Establishes or cancels logical names for your job.
Format
@DEFINE (LOGICAL NAME) name: list
where:
name: is any combination of up to 39 alphanumeric
characters that you want to use as a logical name.
Use an asterisk (*) for this argument to withdraw
all logical names. The colon after the logical name
is optional.
list is a series of devices, file structures,
directories, file specifications, and/or other
logical names; each item should be separated from
the others by commas.
Default - not specifying a list withdraws the
logical name definition
Characteristics
Colon Designates a Logical Name
Normally, when you give a logical name to an EXEC command in
the place of a file specification, structure, or directory
name, a colon must follow the logical name. However, for
the DEFINE and INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES commands, where the
argument can only be a logical name, a colon after the
logical name is optional.
Hints
DEFINE in LOGIN.CMD File
Your DEFINE command is valid for the current terminal
session only. If there are logical names that you always
want to use, put DEFINE commands into a LOGIN.CMD (or, for
batch jobs started by SUBMIT commands within the control
files of other batch jobs, a BATCH.CMD) file in your log-in
directory.
Redefining System Logical Names
You can use the DEFINE command to redefine any system
2-112
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEFINE)
logical name for your own job. By repeating a system
logical name in its own search list you expand its
definition to include the other items, in the order you
specify. Consider the system logical name SYS:, which is
searched whenever you give a program name in place of a
TOPS-20 command. If you redefine SYS: to be
str:<directory>, SYS: you can run programs in
str:<directory> by typing just their names. This will work
as long as the program names are not the same as TOPS-20
commands.
Logical Names as Dummy File Specifications
You can use logical names as dummies for file specifications
or devices when writing programs. Then, just before running
such a program, use the DEFINE command to define these as
real file specifications or devices, without changing the
program itself.
More Information
For more information about using logical names, see the
TOPS-20 User's Guide.
Special Cases
Using Recognition in the File Specifications
Normally, when you attempt to use recognition in a
nonexistent filename, the system rings the terminal bell.
However, for the DEFINE command, instead of ringing the
terminal bell, the system may append part(s) of the default
file specification, .0 or ..0, to the logical name
definition. This is because DEFINE allows you to define a
directory or file specifications that may not yet exist.
Note that a logical name definition that includes .0 or ..0
may not work for your use of the logical name; it is
recommended that you specify the complete directory name or
file specifications.
Restriction
Adding Comments to a DEFINE Command Line
You can add a comment to the end of any TOPS-20 command by
preceding the comment with one of the comment characters:
an exclamation point (!) or a semicolon (;). However, only
the exclamation point can be used with the DEFINE command.
2-113
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEFINE)
Using Short Logical Names Only
Although logical names can be up to 39 characters long and
can include dollar signs ($), hyphens (-), and underlines
(_), some commands and programs (such as programs originally
written for the TOPS-10 operating system) accept a more
limited set of logical names. These can be no more than 6
characters long and cannot include any special symbols. If
all your logical names are of this kind, they will be
acceptable to any TOPS-20 programs and commands.
Related Commands
INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES for finding out the current
definitions of logical names
Examples
1. Define a logical name for your job.
@DEFINE LGN: <MANUALS>, <SARTINI>
2. Withdraw the logical name.
@DEFINE LGN:
3. Define a logical name to be a set of directories to which you
have access. Then use the logical name to copy a file from
one of them into your connected directory.
@DEFINE MSM: <MANUALS>, <SARTINI>, <MCELMOYLE>
@COPY MSM:4-UPED.TXT
<MCELMOYLE>4-UPED.TXT.1 => 4-UPED.TXT.1 [OK]
4. Add one of your own directories to the definition of SYS: so
that you can run .EXE files in that directory by typing just
the program name.
@DEFINE SYS: SYS:,AURORA:<WHITING.TOOLS>
2-114
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DELETE)
2.25 DELETE
Marks a file(s) for eventual erasure.
Format
@DELETE (FILES) filespec,...,
@@subcommand
where:
filespec is the specification of a file that you want
to delete.
Default .gen - all generations of
the specified files
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can give
one of the following subcommands:
DELETE Subcommands
ARCHIVE both deletes the disk copy (if any) and gives
up the tape copy of specified archived files.
BEFORE deletes the specified files that were created
prior to the time and date indicated.
CONTENTS-ONLY deletes and immediately expunges only the
disk copy of files that also have a tape
copy. Note that you must use the RETRIEVE
command, not UNDELETE, to restore such files
to disk.
DIRECTORY deletes and immediately expunges a
subdirectory without making the disk space
available to the files of other users.
Subdirectories appear as files with the type
.DIRECTORY in the immediately superior
directory. For users with enabled WHEEL or
OPERATOR capabilities only.
EXPUNGE immediately and permanently erases the
specified files from the directory.
FORGET deletes and immediately expunges the
specified files without making their disk
space available to the files of other users;
for users with enabled WHEEL or OPERATOR
2-115
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DELETE)
capabilities only.
KEEP n saves the n most recent generations of the
specified files while deleting the rest.
Default n - 1
LARGER n deletes the specified files that are larger
than n number of pages.
SINCE deletes the specified files that were created
since the time and date indicated.
SMALLER n deletes the specified files that are smaller
than n number of pages.
Output
Notice of Deleted Archived Files
Whenever an archived file is completely expunged as a result
of your DELETE command (that is, when you also give the
ARCHIVE subcommand), the operator sends a mail message
notifying the owner of the directory from which the file was
taken.
Characteristics
Privileged Subcommands to DELETE
The DIRECTORY and FORGET subcommands to the DELETE command
are intended for privileged users only, and only as a last
resort, because they withhold freed disk space from system
use. Users with enabled WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities can
run the CHECKD program to recover this disk space.
DIRECTORY should not be used unless the KILL subcommand to a
BUILD command fails to delete the directory. FORGET is for
removing damaged files from directories, and should not be
used unless DELETE without subcommands fails to delete the
file.
Hints
Removing Open Files
If DELETE with the EXPUNGE subcommand fails to erase a file,
it may be that some job in the system has opened it. The
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS command tells whether your own job
2-116
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DELETE)
has done so. If it has, give the CLOSE or (if the file is
mapped) RESET command before repeating DELETE and EXPUNGE.
Recovering Deleted Archived Files
If you have given the DELETE command with the ARCHIVE
subcommand to delete an archived file, and the disk copy has
already been expunged, you may still be able to recover the
tape copy. The operator will send a MAIL message (see
Output, above) concerning the discarded tape copy of the
deleted file. Use this information, along with
Hints - Undoing DISCARD, in the DISCARD command description,
to attempt recovery of the deleted file.
Special Cases
Files With the "Permanent" Attribute
The system erases only the contents of any files that have
the Permanent attribute (for example, MAIL.TXT in your
log-in directory) when you include them in a DELETE command.
Their file specifications remain among your deleted files,
and cannot be removed by TOPS-20 commands.
Restrictions
Using Logical Names When Specifying Files for Deletion
If you include a logical name when specifying arguments to a
DELETE command, the system will search for the specified
file in only the first directory of the logical name's
definition. This restriction prevents the accidental
deletion of another file if the file you intended to delete
has already been deleted.
Using the LARGER/SMALLER and BEFORE/SINCE Subcommands Together
You can use size-related and time-related subcommands
together. However, error messages are displayed if you use
the LARGER/SMALLER pairing and the SMALLER number of pages
exceeds the LARGER number, or you use the BEFORE/SINCE
pairing and the SINCE date is later than the BEFORE date.
Warning
Erasure of Deleted Files
Ordinarily an UNDELETE command given during the same
2-117
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DELETE)
terminal session as an original deletion will recover the
deleted files, unless you included the EXPUNGE subcommand to
DELETE or gave a subsequent EXPUNGE command. However, if
any user or a batch job logs out while connected to your
directory, all deleted files are permanently erased. Also,
if available disk space is low on the system, the operator
or the system itself may expunge all deleted files from a
structure even though you have not logged out. A warning
message is usually sent before this happens.
Related Commands
DIRECTORY, with the for displaying a list of deleted
DELETED subcommand files
DISCARD for giving up only the tape copy of
on-line files
EXPUNGE for permanently removing deleted
files
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE for finding out how much disk space
is available, and how much is
associated with deleted files
UNDELETE for recovering deleted files
Examples
1. Delete two of your files.
@DELETE TTY.SCM, VERCBL.BAT
TTY.SCM.1 [OK]
VERCBL.BAT.2 [OK]
2. Delete all your object files and all your backup files
produced by the EDIT program. Then log out (this will
expunge them).
@DELETE *.REL, *.Q*
TESTA1.REL.1 [OK]
TESTF1.REL.1 [OK]
TESTC1.QBL.2 [OK]
TESTF1.QOR.4 [OK]
@LOGOUT
Killed Job 32, User J.L.PAGE, Account 341, TTy 41
at 25-Apr-84 10:15:51, Used 0:1:46 in 1:23:59
2-118
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DELETE)
3. Delete some files, and check what files are currently deleted
in your connected directory. Give the UNDELETE command for
two of these, then expunge the remaining deleted files and
verify that they are gone.
@DELETE *.QXT
4-UPED.QXT.7 [OK]
MAIL.QXT.1 [OK]
REMARK.QXT.3 [OK]
@DIRECTORY,
@@DELETED
@@
PS:<J.L.PAGE>
4-UPED.QXT.1,2,3,4,5,6,7
.TXT.7,8,9
MAIL.QXT.1
MEMO.QMD.1
REMARK.QXT.1,2,3
TTY.SCM.1
VERCBL.BAT.2
Total of 17 files
@UNDELETE TTY.SCM, VERCBL.BAT
TTY.SCM.1 [OK]
VERCBL.BAT.2 [OK]
@EXPUNGE
PS:<J.L.PAGE> [8 pages freed]
@DIRECTORY,
@@DELETED
4. Delete the files with the .MAC extension that were created
between 2-Feb-87 and 3-Mar-87.
@DELETE *.MAC,
@@BEFORE 3-MAR-87 11:00:04
@@SINCE 2-FEB-87 23:30
@@
@
5. Delete the files named MYFILE.MEM that are between 50 and 150
pages.
@DELETE MYFILE.MEM,
@@LARGER 50
@@SMALLER 150
@@
@
2-119
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEPOSIT)
2.26 DEPOSIT
Modifies the contents of a specific memory location.
Format
@DEPOSIT (MEMORY LOCATION) address (CONTENTS) data
where:
address is an octal number or a symbol.
data is a symbolic or numerical expression.
Output
Status of Pages
When you complete a DEPOSIT command, the system gives you a
message indicating the status of the page you are trying to
change: "[New]" for previously nonexistent pages,
"[Shared]" for those having Copy-on-Write status, or "?Can't
write that page" for other pages. (See also Hints - Setting
the Page-access of Memory Pages, below.) However, no
message is printed for deposits made to private pages.
Hints
Using Symbols
For symbols that are defined in multiple modules of a
program, you can be specific by giving the module name
followed by an ampersand (&) and the symbol name.
Using DDT Instead
Usually the DEPOSIT command is unnecessary, as the DDT
program provides more powerful methods for modifying the
contents of memory.
Abbreviating DEPOSIT Arguments
The contents of each memory location are represented as two
6-digit octal numbers. By inserting a pair of commas
between these two numbers, you can abbreviate them. For
example, to deposit 000004000050 into memory location
151003, use the command
2-120
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEPOSIT)
@DEPOSIT 151003 4,,50
This is the same as
@DEPOSIT 151003 4000050
Note that you can also insert commas between expressions.
For example, the command
@DEPOSIT 1 1+3,, 5+7
deposits 000004000014 into memory location 1. (Expressions
are considered to be octal unless they contain an 8 or a 9,
in which case they are considered to be decimal and are
translated to octal.)
The DEPOSIT command itself can be abbreviated by the single
letter D.
Deposit Address Defaults to the One Examined, and Vice Versa
The first argument of a DEPOSIT command defaults to the
address examined by your most recent EXAMINE command. (You
must press the ESCAPE key to take this default.) The
argument of an EXAMINE command defaults to the address whose
contents were modified by your most recent DEPOSIT command.
Therefore you can examine a memory location, deposit a new
value in it, and verify your action, while specifying the
location only once. If you give DEPOSIT commands without
intervening EXAMINE commands (or vice versa), the default
address increases by 1 for each subsequent command.
Setting the Page-access of Memory Pages
If the system responds to a DEPOSIT command with an error
message of the form, "?Can't write that page", give the SET
PAGE-ACCESS COPY-ON-WRITE command for the page. Then give
DEPOSIT again. If the system allows it, you will be given
your own copy of the page to modify.
Using DEPOSIT With Inferior Processes
To modify memory for a process inferior to the one
immediately below the TOPS-20 command processor, you must
give the FORK command to specify this process before using
DEPOSIT. Remember that for an inferior process to run, all
superior processes must be running too. INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS tells you which processes these are.
2-121
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEPOSIT)
Effect on Memory
The DEPOSIT command changes one location in memory.
Related Commands
DDT for calling a debugging program,
allowing more efficient modification
of memory
EXAMINE for displaying the contents of a
specific memory location
FORK for selecting the process whose
memory you want to modify
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for displaying a list of memory
pages, their contents and status
SET PAGE-ACCESS for making it possible to write to
specified pages
Examples
1. Deposit a value in a memory location.
@DEPOSIT 1500 21
2. Modify a memory location, using symbols. Then examine the
location.
@DEPOSIT T3+1 P+2
@EXAMINE T3+1
T3+1/ P+2 (4/ 21)
3. Try to deposit a number into a page of memory that does not
allow it. Examine memory, set the page to Copy-on-Write
status, and try again (succeeding this time).
@DEPOSIT 716505 0
?Can't write that page
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
216. pages, Entry vector loc 462207 len 254000
Section 0 R, W, E, Private
0-11 Private R, W, E
20 Private R, W, E
400-401 Private R, W, E
2-122
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DEPOSIT)
402-660 <FIELD-IMAGE>FORTRA.EXE.3 13-271 R, CW, E
700-730 <NEXT-RELEASE>PA1050.EXE.4 1-31 R, E
731-733 Private R, W, E
@SET PAGE-ACCESS 716 COPY-ON-WRITE
@DEPOSIT 716505 0
[Shared]
@EXAMINE 716505
716505/ 0
4. Check your program status (the arrow [=>] indicates your
current process [fork]). Select an inferior process, deposit
a value into a memory location, and verify that memory for
the superior process is not changed to this.
@INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
Used 0:00:05 in 0:10:11
TOPS-20: 0:00:03.5
SET UUO-SIMULATION (FOR PROGRAM)
SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (OF PROGRAM)
=> MACRO (1): ^C from IO wait at 775701, 0:00:00.3
Fork 2: HALT at 472052, 0:00:00.1
@FORK 2
@DEPOSIT 3500 12
@EXAMINE 3500
3500/ 12
@FORK 1
@EXAMINE 3500
3500/ 202200,,1136
2-123
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DETACH)
2.27 DETACH
Disconnects your job from your terminal.
Format
@DETACH (AND) argument
where:
argument can be one of these:
CONTINUE - directs the current program to proceed,
just as if you had typed the CONTINUE
command.
REENTER - reenters the current program, just as
if you had typed the REENTER command.
START - starts the current program, just as if
you had typed the START command.
Default - the program is left in its present
state
Characteristics
Effects of Detached Jobs
Detached jobs use scarce system resources (such as swapping
space, process slots, job slots) and can prevent new users
from logging in.
Warning
Programs Writing to the Controlling Terminal (Device TTY:)
If a program running in a detached job attempts to write to
device TTY:, the job will wait until it is again attached to
a terminal.
Effect on Terminal
The DETACH command leaves your terminal detached from the system
in the state before log-in.
| If the system manager enables the hangup-on-DETACH feature, then
2-124
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DETACH)
| if a user DETACHes from a DECSYSTEM-20, the system hangs up the
| terminal line that user was connected to. The job still remains
| detached, but the user no longer retains a terminal line.
Related Commands
ATTACH for joining a detached job to your terminal
SYSTAT for finding out which jobs are detached
SUBMIT for running independent jobs
UNATTACH for disengaging another job from its terminal
Examples
1. Detach your job.
@DETACH
Detaching job # 16
2. Detach your job while starting the program in memory, then
log in again.
@DETACH START
Detaching job # 45
BOSTON, TOPS-20 Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@LOGIN LATTA 341
3. Log in and put a program in memory; detach the job while
starting this program, and repeat the entire procedure. Log
in a third time and begin execution of a third program.
Interrupt this execution with CTRL/C, then detach this third
job while continuing its program. Now you have three jobs
running at once. Instead of logging in again, attach the
first job (specifying the job number) and verify the system's
action.
@LOGIN LATTA 341
Job 5 on TTY230 26-Mar-87 14::09, Last Login 26-Mar-87 11:36:12
@GET DMN
@DETACH START
Detaching job # 5
BOSTON, TOPS-20 Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@LOGIN LATTA 341
Job 22 on TTY222 26-Mar-87 14:42:03, Last Login 26-Mar-87 14:38:09
2-125
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DETACH)
@GET TESTA1
@DETACH START
Detaching job # 22
BOSTON, TOPS-20 Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@LOGIN LATTA 341
Job 53 on TTY222 26-Mar-87 14:44:02, Last Login 26-Mar-87 14:42:03
@EXECUTE TESTF1
FORTRAN: TESTF1
MAIN.
LINK: Loading
[LNKXCT TESTF1 Execution]
^C
@DETACH CONTINUE
Detaching job # 53
BOSTON, TOPS-20 Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@ATTACH LATTA
| Job 22, Detached, Running DETACH
| Job 53, Detached, Running DETACH
| Job: 5
Password:___
EXIT
@SYSTAT LATTA
5* 222 EXEC LATTA
22 DET TESTA1 LATTA
53 DET TESTF1 LATTA
2-126
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
2.28 DIRECTORY
Displays information about the files in a directory.
Format
@DIRECTORY (OF FILES) filespec,...,
@@subcommand
where:
filespec is the specification of a file about
which you want information.
Default filespec - *.*.*
@@subcommand means that, after a final comma, you can
give one or more subcommands on
successive lines.
Summary of DIRECTORY Subcommands (defaults in boldface)
ACCOUNT
ALPHABETICALLY
ARCHIVED
BEFORE date and/or time
---
| BY-PAGES
CHECKSUM | SEQUENTIALLY
---
---
| WRITE
CHRONOLOGICAL | CREATION
| READ
| TAPE-WRITE
---
COMPLETE
CRAM
---
| WRITE
| CREATION
DATES | OFFLINE-EXPIRATION
| ONLINE-EXPIRATION
| READ
| TAPE-WRITE
---
DELETED
2-127
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
DOUBLESPACE
EVERYTHING
FIND number of generations Default number - 1
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
HEADING
INVISIBLE
LARGER number of pages
LENGTH
LPT
---
| ACCOUNT
| CHECKSUM
| CRAM
| DATES
| DOUBLESPACE
| FILE-LINES
| GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
| HEADING
NO | LENGTH
| LPT
| PROTECTION
| REVERSE
| SEPARATE
| SIZE
| SUMMARY-LINES
| TIMES
| USER
---
OFFLINE
ONLINE
OUTPUT filespec Default filespec - DIR.DIR
PROHIBIT-MIGRATION
PROTECTION
RESIST-MIGRATION
REVERSE
SEPARATE
SINCE date and/or time
SIZE
SMALLER number of pages
---
| WRITE
| CREATION
TIMES | OFFLINE-EXPIRATION
| ONLINE-EXPIRATION
| READ
| TAPE-WRITE
---
2-128
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
---
USER | WROTE
| CREATED
---
DIRECTORY Subcommands
ACCOUNT prints the account to which
storage fees for the files are
charged.
ALPHABETICALLY lists the files in alphabetical
order.
Default
ARCHIVED restricts the listing to archived
files only, visible and invisible,
offline and online.
BEFORE date and time or restricts listing to files last
day of week (or written before the date and time
TODAY) and time given.
---
| SEQUENTIALLY
CHECKSUM | BY-PAGES computes and prints 6-digit octal
--- checksums for the files, either
sequentially and without going
beyond the EOF (end-of-file) mark,
or by pages on disk, accounting
for holes in files and pages
beyond the EOF mark; output will
be followed by letter P in this
case.
Default - BY-PAGES
---
| CREATION
CHRONOLOGICAL | WRITE lists files in order (oldest
| READ first) according to
| TAPE-WRITE o date of creation, or
--- o date they were last changed, or
o date they were last read, or
o date their tape copy was
created,
2-129
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
Default - WRITE
COMPLETE prints the complete file
specification, which includes the
structure and directory names.
CRAM compresses formats to reduce
printing space and time.
---
| CREATION
| WRITE
DATES | READ lists for the specified files, the
| TAPE-WRITE following:
| OFFLINE-EXPIRATION o date of creation, or
| ONLINE-EXPIRATION o date they were last changed, or
--- o date they were last read, or
o date the tape copy was created,
or
o date of expiration
Default - WRITE
DELETED limits descriptions to deleted
files that have not yet been
expunged.
DOUBLESPACE double-spaces the DIRECTORY
command output.
EVERYTHING prints, in this order, the
following information about the
files:
o file specification
o protection
o account number
o size in pages and in bytes
(and associated byte size)
o generation retention count
o date and time of creation, of
last change (Write), last time
read, and of the creation of
any tape copy
o the name of the user who
created the file, and of the
2-130
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
user who last wrote in the
file.
FIND n prints the specifications of all
but the n most recent generations
of the files, omitting any files
having n or fewer generations.
Default n - 1
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT tells the number of generations of
each file the system will retain
in the given directory.
HEADING prints a headline labeling each
category of information supplied
by the command.
Default
INVISIBLE restricts the listing to invisible
files only, both on-line and
off-line.
LARGER n lists only files of size greater
than n pages.
LENGTH gives the file length in bytes and
the associated byte size.
LPT directs the command output to LPT:
instead of to your terminal.
---
| ACCOUNT
| CHECKSUM
| CRAM
| DATES
| DOUBLESPACE
| FILE-LINES
| GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
| HEADING suppresses the action or
NO | LENGTH information associated with the
| LPT specified subcommand. (FILE-
| PROTECTION LINES refers to the information
| REVERSE pertaining to the individual
| SEPARATE files, which is the bulk of
| SIZE the DIRECTORY command output.
| SUMMARY-LINES SUMMARY-LINES refers to the
| TIMES information following the file
| USER lines, giving a total file-count,
--- and total page-count and total
checksum if required by
2-131
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
subcommands.)
Default - HEADING
OFFLINE restricts the listing to (visible)
off-line files only, both archived
and not archived.
ONLINE restricts the listing to on-line
files.
OUTPUT filespec directs the command output to the
specified file rather than to your
terminal.
Default filespec - DIR.DIR
PROHIBIT-MIGRATION restricts the listing to files
that are never migrated, because
they were specified in a SET FILE
PROHIBIT command.
PROTECTION prints the protection code
(protection number) of the file.
RESIST-MIGRATION restricts the listing to files
that the system considers last for
migration. These files were
specified in a SET FILE RESIST
command.
REVERSE causes an ordering subcommand,
such as ALPHABETICALLY or
CHRONOLOGICAL, to arrange its
output in reverse.
SEPARATE lists the complete specification
for each file on a separate line
(instead of listing successive
generation numbers of the file on
the same line, separated by
commas; and instead of listing
files of the same name and
different type by file type only,
indented under the first complete
file specification).
SINCE date and time or limits listing to files last
day of week (or written after the date (or day
TODAY) and time of week) and time given.
SIZE prints the size of the files in
pages.
2-132
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
SMALLER n lists only files of size less than
n pages.
---
| CREATION
TIMES | WRITE lists, for the specified files,
| READ the following:
| TAPE-WRITE
| OFFLINE-EXPIRATION o time and date of creation, or
| ONLINE-EXPIRATION o time and date they were last
--- changed, or
o time and date they were last
read, or
o time and date the tape copy was
created, or
o time and date of expiration
Default - WRITE
--- gives the name of the user who
| CREATED created the file, or changed
USER | WROTE the file last.
--- Default - WRITE
Hints
Listing Unneeded Files
In preparation for deleting files so that your directory
will fall within disk quotas, you can get a list of your
largest files by using the LARGER and/or SIZE subcommands,
and of your oldest or least-used files with DATES, TIMES,
and BEFORE. With FIND you can discover extra generations of
files.
Finding Files of a Particular Age or Size
To examine only files of a certain age or size, give the
pair of subcommands BEFORE and SINCE, or LARGER and SMALLER,
with appropriate arguments.
Comparing Checksums of Files
You can use the numbers reported by the CHECKSUM subcommand
to compare two files: if they have differing contents they
will almost certainly yield different values; and identical
files will have the same checksums. The CHECKSUM subcommand
causes a checksum of checksums as well.
Special Cases
2-133
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
Asterisks Appearing Before Filespecs
An asterisk (*) appearing before a filename in the response
to a DIRECTORY command indicates a possible hardware-related
error, one caused by a read operation at a marginally
functional area of disk. To test whether there actually is
an error in the file, use the COPY command to copy the file
to a new specification. If the COPY command succeeds, there
is no error in the file, and no asterisk will precede the
new file specification. If the COPY command fails, you
should move the disk to another drive and repeat the
command. If it still fails, you may have to write your own
program to recover everything but the missing part of the
file (usually, just one page).
DIRECTORY-class Commands for Labeled Magnetic Tapes
The FDIRECTORY, TDIRECTORY, and VDIRECTORY commands for
labeled magnetic tapes are equivalent to the DIRECTORY
command for labeled magnetic tapes. All these commands
rewind the tape set to the beginning of the first volume,
print a directory of files, then rewind the set again. You
can give only these subcommands when using DIRECTORY-class
commands with labeled magnetic tapes: ALPHABETICALLY,
DOUBLESPACE, HEADING, LPT, NO, OUTPUT, REVERSE, and
SEPARATE.
Related Commands
---
FDIRECTORY (Full DIRECTORY) | other DIRECTORY-class
|
TDIRECTORY (Time-ordered DIRECTORY) | commands for performing
| related functions
VDIRECTORY (Verbose DIRECTORY) |
---
Examples
1. Obtain a listing of your files.
@DIRECTORY
PS:<HERRICK>
4-UPED.TXT.13
ACCT20.FOR.1
DUMPER.MAC.1
F-O.DIRECTORY.1
FORD.CTL.2,3,4,5,6
2-134
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
MEMO.CMD.1
.FIL.1
.FRM.2
MULTIP.FOR.2
Total of 13 files
2. Use a DIRECTORY command with a filespec consisting of
wildcard characters and the account attribute (;A) to find
out which files' storage fees are being charged to account
MONITOR.
@DIRECTORY *.*;AMONITOR
PS:<HERRICK>
FORD.CTL.2
MEMO.FRM.2
Total of 2 files
3. Find out what files of type .TXT there are in your connected
directory and in one to which you have group rights.
@DIRECTORY *.TXT, <SARTINI>*.TXT
PS:<HERRICK>
4-UPED.TXT.13
MAIL.TXT.1
REMARK.TXT.4
Total of 3 files
PS:<SARTINI>
CHAP21.TXT.33
CHAPT2.TXT.16
CHAPT3.TXT.8
PRIVATE.TXT.1
TEST.TXT.1
Total of 5 files
Grand total of 8 files
4. Give a DIRECTORY command with the BEFORE and SINCE
subcommands to find out which files were changed during the
week of March 6, 1985.
@DIRECTORY,
@@BEFORE 3-12-85
@@SINCE 3-5-85
@@
2-135
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DIRECTORY)
PS:<HERRICK>
DIVIDE.FOR.4
MULTIP.FOR.2
QUOTNT.EXE.1
SQUARE.EXE.1
Total of 4 files
5. Give the DIRECTORY command to list all the files in a
directory that you have access to.
@DIR WORK:<HERRICK>
WORK:<HERRICK>
CALENDAR.TXT.26
COMAND.MIC.3
QUERY.DAVE.1
.GENE.2
RESULT.SCM.1
WEEKLY.STA.15
Total of 6 files
2-136
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISABLE)
2.29 DISABLE
Disables any special capabilities, such as those of WHEEL or OPERATOR,
that you have enabled.
Format
$DISABLE (CAPABILITIES)
@
Characteristics
Resumption of Standard Prompt
The DISABLE command causes the system to resume the standard
at sign prompt (@) in place of the dollar sign prompt ($),
which indicated enabled capabilities.
Warning
Disabling Promptly
Be sure to disable your capabilities as soon as you have
finished using them, so that you or a program you run cannot
accidentally damage the system.
Related Commands
ENABLE for activating any capabilities that the system
manager has given you
Examples
1. Disable your capabilities.
$DISABLE
@
2. Try copying a file from a directory to which you have no
access. Then enable your capabilities (assuming you have
been granted capabilities), copy the file, and give up your
capabilities with the DISABLE command.
@COPY <MON-SPCS>FFE.SPC
?Directory access privileges required
@ENABLE
2-137
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISABLE)
$COPY <MON-SPCS>FFE.SPC
<MON-SPCS>FFE.SPC.1 => FFE.SPC.2 [OK]
$DISABLE
@
2-138
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISCARD)
2.30 DISCARD
Gives up the tape copy of specified on-line files.
Format
@DISCARD (TAPE INFORMATION FOR FILES) filespec,...
where:
filespec is the specification of a file whose tape
copy you want to discard.
Characteristics
Action of DISCARD
The DISCARD command causes the tape pointer in the FDB (File
Descriptor Block) of the specified file to be deleted. It
does not actually destroy the tape copy of the file. The
tape copy is destroyed when the tape is recycled by the
operator. (See also Hints - Undoing DISCARD, below.)
Withdrawing Archive Status of Files
When you give the DISCARD command for an on-line archived
file, you withdraw archive status from the disk copy of the
file. That is, the file becomes an ordinary disk file,
which you can edit or delete if you wish.
DISCARD for Non-archived Files
You can also use the DISCARD command to give up the tape
copy of files that have been migrated to tape
(automatically, by the system) and then retrieved using the
RETRIEVE command.
Hints
Undoing DISCARD
You receive a mail message from the operator for every file
whose tape copy you discard. The message gives the tape
number, saveset number, and file number within the saveset
of each tape copy. If you have given the DISCARD command
for a file and later wish to use the tape copy, you may be
able to recover it using this information, as long as the
tapes have not yet been recycled.
2-139
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISCARD)
Related Commands
ARCHIVE for requesting that a permanent tape
copy of specified files be made
DELETE (with CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand)
for deleting only the disk copy of files
that also have a tape copy
RETRIEVE for requesting that an off-line file be
restored to disk
Examples
1. Discard the tape copy of a file.
@DISCARD TESTER.EXE
TESTER.EXE.1 [OK]
2. Attempt to alter an archived file. When you find out it has
archive status, discard its tape copy (this revokes its
archive status) and perform the alteration. Archive the
resulting file and check its status.
@APPEND FOO.LOG DRCHIVE.TXT
FOO.LOG.1
?File has archive status, modification is prohibited:
DRCHIVE.TXT.1
@DISCARD DRCHIVE.TXT
DRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
@APPEND FOO.LOG DRCHIVE.TXT
FOO.LOG.1 [OK]
@ARCHIVE DRCHIVE.TXT
DRCHIVE.TXT.1 [Requested]
@INFORMATION ARCHIVE-STATUS DRCHIVE.TXT
DRCHIVE.TXT.1 Archive requested
2-140
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISMOUNT)
2.31 DISMOUNT
Gives up access to the specified structure or tape set.
Format
@DISMOUNT medium (NAME) dev: /switch(es)
where:
medium is one of the following optional arguments:
STRUCTURE - for dismounting file structures (disk
packs)
TAPE - for dismounting magnetic tapes
dev: is either the structure identification (or alias),
or a logical name referring to the tape set (the
tape setname specified in your previous MOUNT
command), or a logical device name of the form
MTn:. The colon after the device name is
optional.
/switches are keywords, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of DISMOUNT command
options.
DISMOUNT Command Switches
(for use with argument STRUCTURE only)
/NOWAIT tells the system to return your terminal
to TOPS-20 command level as soon as you
give the DISMOUNT command, and to send a
message to your terminal when the
request has been processed. Otherwise,
your terminal waits for the message.
/REMARK:"remark"
sends the specified remark (of 119 or
fewer characters, which must be enclosed
in quotation marks [" "]) to the
operator when he is notified of your
request. The remark is sent only if you
also include the /REMOVE switch.
2-141
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISMOUNT)
/REMOVE tells the operator that you want him to
physically dismount the structure from
the drive; makes the structure
unavailable for further mount requests.
See also Hints - Action of DISMOUNT
Command Including /REMOVE Switch, below.
/STRUCTURE-ID:structure identification
gives the name of the structure as
recorded in the disk(s); used when you
give some alias as argument dev:, above.
See Hints - Using the /STRUCTURE-ID
Switch, below.
Characteristics
Action of DISMOUNT STRUCTURE Command
Ordinary DISMOUNT STRUCTURE
The DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command reduces by 1 the mount
count of the specified structure (the number of users
who have given a MOUNT but not a DISMOUNT command for
the structure) if you had given a previous MOUNT
command for it. An ordinary DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command
does not withdraw the structure from system use.
Including /REMOVE Switch
If you include the /REMOVE switch when giving the
DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command, the specified structure is
made unavailable for further mount requests. The
operator is informed of your dismount request, and any
further action depends on him. If he denies your
request, the structure is again made available to other
users; if he grants your request, the structure remains
unavailable for further mount requests, and is taken
off line and physically removed. Under extreme
conditions the operator may take a structure off line
and physically remove it even though some users have
not dismounted the structure. Before doing so, he will
usually send a message to such users to allow them to
close their files.
Action of DISMOUNT TAPE Command
The DISMOUNT TAPE command unloads the currently mounted
volume of the specified tape set (i.e., rewinds it
completely onto its source reel) so that it can be
2-142
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISMOUNT)
physically removed by the operator, and returns the tape
drive to the pool of available resources. (Note that if the
/NOUNLOAD switch was given in your original MOUNT command,
no volumes are unloaded by the system or removed by the
operator, even after your DISMOUNT command is completed.) If
a logical name (such as the setname of the tape set) is used
in the DISMOUNT command to specify the tape set, the system
also withdraws the definition of the logical name. Use
DISMOUNT TAPE only for tape drives having device names of
the form MTn:; drives obtained using the MOUNT command. Use
UNLOAD to unload tapes from drives having device names of
the form MTAn:.
Hints
Omitting "medium" Argument
If the dev: argument of your DISMOUNT command will be
unambiguous (for example, you do not have both a structure
and a tape set mounted using the same device name), you need
not specify the medium. The shortened command, DISMOUNT
dev:/switch(es), is sufficient.
Using the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch
The /STRUCTURE-ID switch gives the name of the structure as
recorded in the disk(s) of the pack itself, where it is used
by the system for identification. You may use this switch
to dismount a structure that had been mounted using an alias
different from its structure identification. (See Hints -
Using the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch, in the MOUNT command
description.)
Using INFORMATION VOLUMES before DISMOUNT TAPE
If you give the INFORMATION VOLUMES command before
dismounting a tape set, the system will respond with a list
of the volids for mounted volumes, including volids for any
volumes newly added to the set. You should keep an
up-to-date record of these for use with further MOUNT
commands.
Effect on Terminal
The DISMOUNT command with the /NOWAIT switch, leaves your
terminal at TOPS-20 command level. If you have not given the
/NOWAIT switch, your terminal waits until the system has
processed your request, or until you give a CTRL/C to return to
TOPS-20 command level. This CTRL/C does not cancel your request.
2-143
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISMOUNT)
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing mount requests before they are
processed
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
for finding which tape devices (if any) have been
assigned to your job
INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS
for finding out information about pending mount
requests for structures and tape sets, and
currently mounted tape sets
INFORMATION STRUCTURE
for finding out information about the specified
mounted structure, including its mount count and
the names of users who have given the MOUNT,
CONNECT, and ACCESS commands for the structure
INFORMATION VOLUMES
for finding out the volids of all mounted volumes
(including newly created volumes) of a tape set
Examples
1. Dismount a magnetic tape set you have been using.
@DISMOUNT TAPE MT3:
[Tape dismounted]
2. Dismount the same tape set, referring to it by its setname.
@DISMOUNT TAPE LAT:
[Tape dismounted, logical name LAT: deleted]
3. Find out the volids of your tape set before dismounting it,
in case the tape set has been extended to another volume.
@INFORMATION VOLUMES MT3:
Volumes of tape set LAT: LAT,00J16
@DISMOUNT MT3
[Tape dismounted]
4. Find out if you have any mount requests pending or any
currently mounted tape sets. Dismount a currently mounted
tape set (these display the actual device name (here, MTA0)
in the column headed, Status).
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUEST/USER
2-144
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISMOUNT)
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- ------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- ------
UNLBLD MTA0 Tape Locked UNLBLD 128 55 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@DISMOUNT TAPE UNLBLD:
[Tape dismounted, logical name UNLBLD: deleted]
5. Dismount a structure you have mounted named SNARK.
@DISMOUNT SNARK
Structure SNARK: dismounted
6. Find out whether your mount request for a structure has been
satisfied yet (it has not). Use the CANCEL command to
withdraw this request.
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- ------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- ----------
MARK MTA1 Tape Enabled MARK 126 60 HOVSEPIAN
TAPE MTA3 Tape Enabled TAPE 148 13 WALLACE
LATB Waiting Disk LATB 157 65 LATTA
There are 3 Requests in the Queue
@CANCEL MOUNT 157
[1 mount request canceled]
7. Find out whether you can safely dismount and remove a
structure you have mounted. Use the SEND command to ask
another user to dismount the structure; then enable your
capabilities and give a DISMOUNT command that will physically
remove it.
@INFORMATION STRUCTURE LATB:
Status of structure LATB:
Mount count: 2, open file count: 0, units in structure: 1
Foreign
Users who have MOUNTed LATB: LATTA, GBLAINE
Users ACCESSing LATB: LATTA, GBLAINE
No users CONNECTed to LATB:
@SEND GBLAINE PLEASE DISMOUNT LATB: AS SOON AS CONVENIENT. -
I MUST REMOVE THE STRUCTURE. THANKS.
@INFORMATION STRUCTURE LATB:
Status of structure LATB:
Mount count: 1, open file count: 0, units in structure: 1
Foreign
Users who have MOUNTed LATB: LATTA
Users ACCESSing LATB: LATTA
No users CONNECTed to LATB:
2-145
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(DISMOUNT)
@END-ACCESS LATB:<OPERATOR>
@ENABLE
$DISMOUNT STRUCTURE LATB: /REMOVE/REMARK:"PLEASE LEAVE LATB: -
ON RP06 CABINET"
[Mount Request LATB Queued, Request-ID 164]
Structure LATB: removed
$DISABLE
@
2-146
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
2.32 EDIT
Invokes your defined editor to modify a file.
NOTE
This manual assumes that you are using the EDIT
program to edit. See the Special Cases section below
for information relating to other editors.
Format
@EDIT (FILE) /switch(es) input filespec (OUTPUT AS) output filespec
where:
switches are keywords, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of EDIT command
options.
Defaults are shown in the list of
switches
input filespec is the specification of the file you want to
edit.
Default - last file specification and
associated switches you gave
in a CREATE or EDIT command
during the current terminal
session
output filespec is the specification with which you want to
name the edited file.
Default - the input file specification,
but with a generation number 1
higher than the highest
existing generation number
Summary of EDIT Command Switches (Defaults in boldface)
NOTE
These switches are applicable only if you are using
the EDIT editor.
/BAK
/C128
/C64
/DECIDE
2-147
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
/DPY
/EXPERT
/INCREMENT:n Default n - 100
/ISAVE:n
/LOWER
/M33
/M37
/NOBAK
/NODECIDE
/NONSEPARATORS
/NONUMBER
/NOVICE
/NUMBER
/OLD
/OPTION:name
/PLINES:n Default n - 16
/R
/READONLY
/RONLY
/RUN:filespec Default file type - .EXE
/SAVE:n
/SEPARATORS
/SEQUENCE
/START:n Default n - argument of INCREMENT switch
/STEP:n Default n - 100
/UNSEQUENCE
/UPPER
/WINDOW:n Default n - 10
EDIT Command Switches
/BAK causes an unedited copy of the file to be
saved at the end of an editing session under
the specification name.Qyp, where name.typ is
the file's original specification.
Default
/C128 specifies a 128-character alphabet, allowing
insertion of control characters in an
alternate format. See the TOPS-20 EDIT
Reference Manual for details.
/C64 specifies a 64-character alphabet, disallowing
use of an alternate format for insertion of
control characters.
Default
/DECIDE lets you decide whether to accept or reject
each change caused by the operation of the S
2-148
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
(substitute) command of the EDIT program.
/DPY has no effect in the current monitor.
/EXPERT tells the EDIT program that you need only
abbreviated error messages, and fewer warnings
and reminders.
/INCREMENT:n specifies the value that will be added to each
line number of the file to obtain the next
line number.
Default n - 100
/ISAVE:n instructs the EDIT program to update the
backup file of specification name.Qyp after
every n lines you insert, instead of only at
the end of the EDIT session.
/LOWER specifies that all alphabetic characters you
type should be considered lowercase
characters; give uppercase characters by
preceding the corresponding lowercase
character with a single quotation mark (').
/M33 has no effect in the current monitor.
/M37 has no effect in the current monitor.
/NOBAK prevents an unedited copy of the file from
being saved at the end of an editing session
under specification name.Qyp, where name.typ
is the file's original specification.
/NODECIDE ensures the automatic operation of the S
(substitute) command of the EDIT program.
Default
/NONSEPARATORS notifies the EDIT program that the characters
. (period), $ (dollar sign), and % (percent
sign) are to be regarded as ordinary textual
characters and not as field delimiters
(separators) in the file being edited.
Default
/NONUMBER suppresses the printing of line numbers with
each line of a file.
/NOVICE tells the EDIT program that you want to see
complete error messages and all appropriate
warnings and reminders; opposite of /EXPERT
switch.
2-149
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
Default
/NUMBER prints a line number for each line of the
file.
Default
/OLD causes the first backup file to be saved under
the specification name.Zyp, where name.typ is
the file's original specification.
/OPTION:name sets any EDIT switches contained in lines of
your SWITCH.INI file labeled with name (of six
or fewer characters). The system expects this
file to be in your log-in directory.
/PLINES:n specifies how many lines to print in response
to each P (print) command of the EDIT program.
Default n - 16
/R same as /READONLY.
/READONLY prevents any changes to the file during the
current session of the EDIT program, that is,
makes it a read-only session. This switch
cannot be given in the SWITCH.INI file.
/RONLY same as /READONLY.
/RUN:filespec specifies the program to be run when you end
the current session of the EDIT program with
the G command.
Default file type - .EXE
/SAVE:n instructs the EDIT program to update the
backup file of specification name.Qyp after
every n EDIT program commands that modify the
file.
/SEPARATORS notifies the EDIT program that the characters
. (period), $ (dollar sign), and % (percent
sign) are not ordinary textual characters but
are field separators in the accompanying file.
/SEQUENCE tells the EDIT program not to strip the line
numbers from the file when the EDIT session
ends.
Default
/START:n specifies the first line number for the EDIT
program to use when numbering the file.
Default n - argument of /INCREMENT switch
2-150
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
/STEP:n same as /INCREMENT.
/UNSEQUENCE tells the EDIT program to strip the line
numbers from the file when the EDIT session
ends.
/UPPER specifies that all alphabetic characters you
type should be considered uppercase
characters; give lowercase characters by
preceding the corresponding lowercase
character with a single quotation mark (').
Default
/WINDOW:n specifies the number n (between 10 and 99) of
pages to be held in memory during the EDIT
session.
Default n - 10
Characteristics
Edit Mode or Input Mode
The EDIT command runs the EDIT system program in Edit mode,
which uses an asterisk prompt (*). (However, see also
Special Cases - Using an Editor Other than EDIT, below.) In
Edit mode you can use any EDIT program commands to modify
the specified file. If the EDIT program starts by printing
the word Input instead of Edit, the specified file does not
yet exist. You are then in Input mode, just as if you had
used the CREATE command instead of EDIT. See the CREATE
command description for details.
Saving Backup Files Periodically
Whenever you use EDIT, be sure to keep an extra copy of the
file you are modifying, in case of a system failure. By
default the system renames the unedited copy of your file to
name.Qyp at the end of an editing session. By using the
/SAVE:n switch you can have this backup file updated
periodically during the editing session to reflect your
edits.
SWITCH.INI File
If there is a group of EDIT command switches that you always
or often use with EDIT or CREATE commands, put them into a
file named SWITCH.INI in your log-in directory, in a line of
that file beginning with "EDIT:abc", where abc is any set of
characters you choose to identify the line. Then if you
include the single switch /OPTION:abc when you give an EDIT
2-151
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
or CREATE command, all these switches will be in effect.
Hints
Debugging Your Programs and Editing the Sources
You can use EDIT to modify files containing source programs
written in a programming language. The DDT and DEBUG
commands run system programs that offer more efficient and
powerful techniques for testing temporary corrections to
your programs, but you should use the EDIT command to make
final changes to the source files.
Further Information
For more information about the EDIT program, see the TOPS-20
EDIT Reference Manual.
Special Cases
Using an Editor Other than EDIT
The CREATE, EDIT, and PERUSE command descriptions in this
manual assume that these commands call on the EDIT program
for their action. If your job uses another editing program,
for example EDT, the switches and examples shown here will
not be applicable.
The editor used by CREATE, EDIT, and PERUSE is specified by
logical name EDITOR:, so you can find out the name of this
program by giving the command, INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES
EDITOR:. The job-wide definition (if any) will be given
first, followed by the system-wide definition; the job-wide
definition prevails if both exist. If the definition of
EDITOR: is SYS:EDIT.EXE, the CREATE and EDIT commands will
function as described in this manual. Otherwise, you must
consult the appropriate manual (for example, the EDT-20
Reference Manual) for information.
You can use the DEFINE command to define logical name
EDITOR: to be any editing program available at your
installation. Then this program will be in effect when you
give the CREATE or EDIT command.
Attempting to Edit Archived Files
If you attempt to edit an on-line archived file, the system
will let you produce an edited version of the archived file,
but will retain the original (archived) file unchanged under
2-152
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
the specification name.Qyp (or name.Zyp if you included the
/OLD switch in the EDIT command), where name.typ is the
file's original specification. See also Hints - Editing
Files of Type .Qyp, below.
Editing Files of Type .Qyp
If you edit a file of type .Qyp (any file whose type begins
with the letter Q), the EDIT program does not save the
unedited copy as a backup file. In such cases, give the
/OLD switch to retain the unedited copy under file type
.Zyp. If the file of type .Qyp is an archived file, you
will not be allowed to produce an altered version using the
EDIT command unless you include the /OLD switch.
Effect on Memory
The EDIT command clears any unkept forks from memory, then loads
the editor program defined by the logical name EDITOR:.
Related Commands
CREATE for creating new files
DIRECTORY-class commands for getting lists of existing files
PERUSE for editing files in read-only mode
Examples
1. Edit a file.
@EDIT FILE.FOR
Edit: FILE.FOR.1
*
2. Edit a file using the EDIT editor, requesting that an updated
copy of the file be saved after every three EDIT program
commands; ask that the first such backup file be saved under
specification FILE.ZOR. @EDIT /SAVE:3/OLD FILE.FOR
Edit: FILE.FOR.1
*
3. Edit a large text file, adjusting several EDIT program
parameters as you begin, and give new specifications for the
output file.
@EDIT /EXPERT/DECIDE/PLINES:50/WINDOW:99 REMARK.TXT REVISION.TXT
2-153
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EDIT)
Edit: REMARK.TXT.18
*
4. Use the EDIT editor to create a SWITCH.INI file with one line
for the switches used in Example 2, and one line for those in
Example 3. Use this file to repeat Example 3.
@CREATE SWITCH.INI
Input: SWITCH.INI.1
00100 EDIT:ABC/SAVE:3/OLD
00200 EDIT:DEF/EXPERT/DECIDE/PLINES:50/WINDOW:99
00300
*E
[SWITCH.INI.1]
@EDIT /OPTION:DEF REMARK.TXT REVISION.TXT
Edit: REMARK.TXT.18
*
2-154
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ENABLE)
2.33 ENABLE
Enables any special capabilities you may have.
Format
@ENABLE (CAPABILITIES)
$
Characteristics
Dollar Sign Prompt
The ENABLE command causes the system to print a dollar sign
prompt ($), indicating enabled capabilities, in place of the
standard at sign prompt (@). The dollar sign prompt is
printed after ENABLE even if you have not been granted any
capabilities.
Capabilities of Log-In Directory Only
The ENABLE command activates only those capabilities that
have been granted to the owner of your log-in directory.
You do not receive any capabilities as a result of CONNECT
or ACCESS commands or group memberships.
Hints
Displaying Capabilities
Capabilities are defined by your login directory but are a
characteristic of your job and can be enabled in any
directory to which you connect. To list your capabilities,
give the INFORMATION DIRECTORY command for your login
directory.
More Information
Capabilities are assigned with the BUILD command. See the
BUILD command subcommands in this manual for brief
descriptions of special capabilities.
Special Cases
Dollar Sign Prompt in Batch Jobs
Because a dollar sign placed in the location of a TOPS-20
2-155
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ENABLE)
prompt could be confused with a batch command, the system
precedes the enabled prompt with a space for batch jobs.
Capabilities Changed While Logged In
Capabilities are given to your job when you log in. If your
capabilities are changed while you are logged-in, you must
log out and log in again for the change to take effect.
Warning
Disabling Capabilities Promptly
Because your commands are much more powerful if you have
capabilities enabled, you should disable them as soon as you
have finished using them. Otherwise you or a program that
you run could accidentally damage the system.
Related Commands
DISABLE for suspending any capabilities
that the system manager has given
you
INFORMATION DIRECTORY (for for finding out which capabilities,
the login directory) have been granted to you.
Examples
1. Enable your capabilities.
@ENABLE
$
2. Try to assign a tape drive to your job before taking it off
line for repairs. But it is already assigned to another
user, whose terminal is set to refuse links. Enable your
capabilities and ask him to deassign the tape drive. Then
disable capabilities.
@ASSIGN MTA2:
?MTA2: Already assigned to job 29
@SYSTAT 29
29 53 EXEC R.SCHNEIDER
@TALK R.SCHNEIDER
?Refused, send mail to the user instead
@ENABLE
$TALK R.SCHNEIDER
2-156
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ENABLE)
LINK FROM F.DOMINO, TTY 221
$;ROBIN - PLEASE DEASSIGN MTA2:. IT MUST BE TAKEN OFF LINE
$;FOR MAINTENANCE. USE MTA3: INSTEAD. THANKS.
@;OKAY, SURE.
@DEASSIGN MTA2:
@
$BREAK
$DISABLE
@
2-157
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(END-ACCESS)
2.34 END-ACCESS
Terminates your ownership rights to an accessed directory, as well as
group rights borrowed from its owner.
Format
@END-ACCESS (TO DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
where:
dev:<directory> is the directory to which you want to end
access.
Default dev: - your connected structure
Default <directory> - the directory (on
the specified
structure) of the
same name as your
connected
directory
Hints
Implicit END-ACCESS
You can access only one directory at a time on each mounted
structure. Each ACCESS command ends access obtained by any
previous ACCESS command for a directory on the specified
structure. Therefore you do not need to give the END-ACCESS
command if you access another directory on the structure, or
if the structure is dismounted.
Restoring Previous Rights
END-ACCESS does not restore owner and group rights obtained
by a previous ACCESS command for the specified structure.
Give another ACCESS command to regain these. (Note that you
must access your log-in directory to regain group rights
obtained by the LOGIN command, lost by accessing another
directory on the public structure.
Related Commands
ACCESS for obtaining ownership rights to a directory and
the group rights of the owner
2-158
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(END-ACCESS)
DISMOUNT for decrementing the mount count of a previously
accessed structure
INFORMATION STRUCTURE
for finding out who is accessing a structure
Examples
1. Give up your access rights to another user's directory.
@END-ACCESS <HOLLAND>
2. Access another user's directory, copy a file from it, and
give up your rights to it. Then give a command that depends
on your own group rights. (It fails.) Access your own
directory to establish these, and repeat the command,
successfully this time.
@ACCESS <HOLLAND>
Password:___
@COPY <HOLLAND>DIST.LST
<HOLLAND>DIST.LST.2 => DIST.LST.2 [OK]
@END-ACCESS <HOLLAND>
@INFORMATION DIRECTORY <LATTA.*>,
?No such directory
@ACCESS <LATTA>
@INFORMATION DIRECTORY <LATTA.*>,
@@NAME-ONLY
@@
Name PS:<LATTA.A>
Name PS:<LATTA.A.F-O>
3. Mount a structure, and access a user's directory there. Get
a listing of his files of type .TXT. End the access and
dismount the structure.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@ACCESS SNARK:<HOLLAND>
Password:___
@DIRECTORY SNARK:<HOLLAND>*.TXT
SNARK:<HOLLAND>
ACCT.TXT.1
MAIL.TXT.2
REMARKS.TXT.1
SYSTEM.TXT.1
Total of 4 files
2-159
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(END-ACCESS)
@END-ACCESS SNARK:<HOLLAND>
@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: dismounted
2-160
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EOF)
2.35 EOF
Writes an end-of-file mark on the specified magnetic tape. Use this
command for unlabeled tapes only.
Format
@EOF (DEVICE) dev:
where:
dev: is the name of the magnetic tape drive on which you
want to write an end-of-file mark. The colon after the
device name is optional.
Hints
EOF Seldom Needed
Because tape-writing programs and commands automatically
write end-of-file marks in the appropriate places, you do
not ordinarily need the EOF command. But it can be useful
if such a program is interrupted (by your CTRL/C or by a
system failure and restart) and you want to preserve the
information already written. Also, you can shorten files on
an existing tape by giving an EOF command at the desired
point.
Restrictions
EOF With Open Files
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has
opened a magnetic tape drive and you then give the EOF
command for that tape drive, the system will first allow you
to close the associated file. You must do so for the EOF
command to succeed, but you will probably be unable to
continue the program from that point, because the file will
now be closed.
2-161
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EOF)
Related Commands
---
BACKSPACE |
|
REWIND |
| other TOPS-20 commands for controlling magnetic
| tape drives
SKIP |
|
UNLOAD |
---
Example
1. Put an end-of-file mark (EOF) on your magnetic tape.
@EOF MTA0:
2-162
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ERUN)
2.36 ERUN
Runs a system program without disturbing the program already in memory
by placing the program in an ephemeral fork.
Format
@ERUN (PROGRAM) filespec
where:
filespec is the file specification of a system program.
Default dev:<directory> - SYS:
Default .typ - .EXE
Characteristics
Characteristics of an Ephemeral Fork
The ERUN command runs a program in an ephemeral fork. A
program that runs in an ephemeral fork acts like an EXEC
command (excluding those EXEC commands that run programs or
otherwise affect memory). Ephemeral forks and EXEC commands
share these characteristics:
o They do not affect programs in memory. For example, if
you exit a program and issue a SYSTAT command, or run a
program in an ephemeral fork, neither the command nor
the ephemeral fork will disturb the program in memory.
A program that runs ephemerally is always placed in a
new fork.
o They disappear when interrupted or when processing
completes. For example, if you stop execution of a
SYSTAT command or an ephemeral fork with CTRL/C, neither
the command nor the ephemeral fork can be continued.
Whenever you stop or exit an ephemeral fork, the fork is
automatically reset (cleared from memory).
Good candidates for ephemeral forks are programs that may
have short execution times and simply display information in
a manner similar to the INFORMATION and SYSTAT commands.
2-163
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(ERUN)
Related Commands
INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES for examining the definition of
SYS:
R for running executable programs
stored on SYS:
RUN for running executable user
programs
SET FILE EPHEMERAL for giving a file a permanent
ephemeral attribute
SET PROGRAM EPHEMERAL for running a program in an
ephemeral fork
Example
1. Display the status of the fork in memory with the INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS command. Then, run a program in an ephemeral
fork in order to preserve the state of your job's memory.
Redisplay the fork status and note that the ephemeral program
has been reset and has not replaced the original fork.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EMACS (1): HALT AT 50340, 0:00:03.6
@ERUN TERMSTAT
TERMSTAT>SHOW FREE TERMINALS
Lab Terminals in use Free terminals
--- ---------------- --------------
A 17 0
B 12 4
TERMSTAT>EXIT
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EMACS (1): HALT at 50340, 0:00:03.6
2-164
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXAMINE)
2.37 EXAMINE
Displays the contents of a memory location.
Format
@EXAMINE (MEMORY LOCATION) octal or symbolic address
Output
Contents of Memory Location or Message
When you complete an EXAMINE command, the system prints the
memory address examined, followed by a slash (/) and its
contents. If you previously used the SET TYPEOUT MODE
SYMBOLIC command, this information is both in symbolic and,
in parentheses, numeric (octal) format. (The numeric
information will always appear for this setting of the
command; symbolic information will appear if the system
finds that it is different from the numeric.)
Generally the numeric format shows two 6-digit octal numbers
separated by a pair of commas (,,). If you do not see this
pair of commas, only the right half of the memory location
is being displayed; as the left half is 0. However, if you
are not permitted to examine this location, the system
prints only a message telling you of the restriction.
Hints
Using Symbols
For symbols that are defined in multiple modules of a
program, you can be specific by giving the module name
followed by an ampersand (&) and the symbol name.
Abbreviating EXAMINE
The EXAMINE command can be abbreviated by the single letter
E.
Default Argument for EXAMINE
The argument of your current EXAMINE command defaults to a
value greater by 1 than the last address examined, allowing
you to inspect a section of memory with only a minimum of
typing. But if you gave a more recent DEPOSIT command, the
argument of your current EXAMINE command defaults to that
address, allowing you to verify the deposit.
2-165
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXAMINE)
Using EXAMINE With Noncurrent and Inferior Forks
The EXAMINE command displays memory locations of the current
fork. To examine the memory of noncurrent or inferior
forks, make the fork the current fork by giving the FORK
command with the fork name or number as an argument.
To run an inferior fork after examining it, you must ensure
that all superior forks are running too. Give the CONTINUE
command with the superior fork name or number as an argument
to let the superior fork continue its inferiors.
Related Commands
DDT for calling a debugging program,
allowing more efficient examination
of memory
DEPOSIT for changing the contents of a
specific memory location
FORK for selecting the fork whose memory
you want to examine
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for displaying a list of memory
pages, their contents and status
SET TYPEOUT MODE for displaying information in
symbolic or numeric format
Examples
1. Examine location 550 of the current fork.
@EXAMINE 550
550/ 74473,,414155
2. Examine location 20, first in numeric typeout mode, then in
the symbolic mode.
@SET TYPEOUT MODE NUMERIC
@EXAMINE 20
20/ 104000,,56
@SET TYPEOUT MODE SYMBOLIC
@EXAMINE 20
P+1/ 104000,,.JBBLT+11 (20/ 104000,,56)
3. Put a program into memory and find out what pages it
occupies. Examine a location on page 2, and then (using the
2-166
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXAMINE)
abbreviated form of the EXAMINE command) one on page 400.
@GET DMN
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
5. pages, Entry vector loc 400010 len 254000
Section 0 R, W, E, Private
0-3 DMN.EXE.1 1-4 R, CW, E
400 DMN.EXE.1 5 R, CW, E
@EXAMINE 2550
2550/ 600170
@E 400550
400550/ 0
2-167
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
2.38 EXECUTE
Loads your program into memory, compiling the source file first if
necessary. Then it starts the program.
Format
@EXECUTE (FROM) /switch(es) source/switch(es) object,...
where:
switches are keywords chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of EXECUTE command options. They have
different effects depending on their position in the
command line: placed before all files in the
command, they act on defaults for all; otherwise
they affect only the nearest preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
source is the file specification of the source program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type of 30 fewer characters; you cannot use
a generation number. This argument is not necessary
if you supply an object filespec.
object is the file specification of the object program.
The filename must be of six or fewer characters, and
the file type must be .REL; you cannot use a
generation number. This argument is not necessary
if you supply a source.
Default (if you give neither source nor object
filespecs) - last filespecs and
associated switches you gave in a
LOAD-class command
Summary of EXECUTE Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
/10-BLISS
/36-BLISSS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT
/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE
/DDT
2-168
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
/DEBUG
/FAIL
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
/FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
/LIBRARY
/LIST
/MAC
/MACHINE-CODE
/MACRO
/MAP
/NOBINARY
/NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
/NODEBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
/NOLIBRARY
/NOLIST
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSEARCH
/NOSTAY
/NOSYMBOLS
/NOWARNINGS
/OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL
/RELOCATABLE
/SAIL
/SEARCH
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/STAY
/SYMBOLS
/WARNINGS
Descriptions of these switches are given below. Although the
system will not reject switches described under any of the
LOAD-class commands, only those switches commonly associated with
EXECUTE are described here.
EXECUTE Command Switches
/10-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-10 compiler.
Default for files of type .B10 and .BLI
/36-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-36 compiler.
Default for files of type .B36
/68-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-68 compiler.
2-169
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
Default for files of type .C68 or .68C
/74-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-74 compiler.
Default for files of type .C74 or .74C
/ABORT stops a compile if a fatal error is detected
and returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command
level.
/ALGOL compiles the file using the ALGOL compiler.
Default for files of type .ALG
/BINARY allows generation of an object (binary) file
for each source file given.
Default
/COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL compiler,
either COBOL-68 or COBOL-74, that your
installation has stored in the file
SYS:COBOL.EXE.
Default for files of type .CBL
/COMPILE forces compilation of the source file even if a
current object file already exists. Use this
switch along with a /LIST or /CREF switch to
obtain listings when you have current object
files.
/CREF same as /CROSS-REFERENCE.
/CROSS-REFERENCE
creates a file containing cross-reference
information for each compilation. The file
name is that of the object file; the file type
is .CRF. Use the CREF command to obtain a
listing of the file. (For COBOL files this
switch automatically produces a cross-reference
listing.)
Default
/DDT loads the DDT debugging program along with your
object file.
/DEBUG produces an object file containing debugging
information beyond what is usually inserted
during compilation. (For FORTRAN programs
only, and only if you have not given the
/OPTIMIZE switch).
/FAIL compiles the file using the FAIL compiler.
Default for files of type .FAI
2-170
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
indicates nonstandard syntax in a file
/FORTRAN compiles the file using the FORTRAN compiler.
Default in the absence of a standard
source file type and a language
switch
Default for files of type .FOR
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler
that will process the file(s) to which this
switch applies. You must include the switches
in double quotation marks (" ").
/LIBRARY same as /SEARCH.
/LIST prints a line printer listing of the program in
ASCII format; the name of this listing is the
filename of the object file. The /CREF switch
overrides /LIST when they both apply to the
same file.
/MAC same as /MACRO.
/MACHINE-CODE produces a file containing the generated
machine code. The filename is that of the
object file; the file type is .LST. For
high-level languages.
/MACRO assembles the file using the MACRO assembler.
Default for files of type .MAC
/MAP produces a loader map and stores it in the file
object.MAP, where object is the name of the
module containing the start address; or (if no
start address) nnnLNK.MAP, where nnn is your
job number.
/NOBINARY prevents generation of an object (binary) file.
Use this switch along with /LIST or /CREF to
allow these switches to take effect without
producing a new object file.
/NOCOMPILE prevents compilation if the object file is
current; otherwise it forces compilation.
Cancels the /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE switch.
/NOCREF same as NOCROSS-REFERENCE.
2-171
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
prevents the creation of a cross-reference
file.
Default
/NODEBUG excludes special debugging information from
your object file.
Default
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
prevents the flagging of non-standard syntax in
the file.
Default
/NOLIBRARY same as /NOSEARCH.
/NOLIST prevents a line printer listing of the program.
Default
/NOMACHINE-CODE prevents generation of a file containing
machine code.
Default
/NOOPTIMIZE prevents the generation of a globally optimized
object file (for FORTRAN programs only).
Default
/NOSEARCH requires all modules in the object file library
(the file accompanied by this switch in the
command line) to be loaded even if they are not
called by your program. Cancels the /SEARCH
switch.
Default
/NOSTAY stops the compiler from being placed in a
background fork. Use when /STAY is set as a
default for the compiler.
/NOSYMBOLS prevents a symbol table from being loaded along
with the object file.
/NOWARNINGS prevents display of warnings for nonfatal
errors.
/OPTIMIZE generates a globally optimized object file; one
that runs as quickly as possible. (For FORTRAN
programs only, and only if you do not also give
the /DEBUG switch (see the DEBUG command
description).)
/PASCAL compiles the file using the PASCAL compiler.
2-172
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
Default for files of type .PAS
/RELOCATABLE identifies the input file as an object file
(regardless of its extension) and prevents
compilation of the source file, forcing use of
an existing object file even if the object file
is out of date.
Default for files of type .REL
/SAIL compiles the file using the SAIL compiler.
Default for files of type .SAI
/SEARCH requires that the object file library (the file
accompanied by this switch in the command line)
be searched for modules called by your program
or by a program subroutine. Only these modules
are loaded, along with modules called from
system libraries, which are always searched.
/SIMULA compiles the file using the SIMULA compiler.
Default for files of type .SIM
/SNOBOL compiles the file using the SNOBOL compiler.
Default for files of type .SNO
/STAY returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level
so that you can perform other work while the
system continues to execute your program. You
immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or
$), and can then issue any user command. Be
careful not to send incorrect data to programs
expecting terminal input. See the CONTINUE
command, Restrictions: Programs Competing for
Terminal Input.)
This switch saves you from having to: issue a
^T to make sure execution has begun; give a ^C
to halt the job; and issue a CONTINUE /STAY
command to remain at command level during
execution.
/SYMBOLS loads a symbols table along with the object
file (helpful for debugging a program).
Default
/WARNINGS displays warnings for nonfatal errors.
Default
2-173
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
Characteristics
Compiling New Sources Only
Before executing programs, the system ordinarily compiles
any source (and only those sources) whose write date is more
recent that that of the object file of the same name. You
can override this action with the /COMPILE or /RELOCATABLE
switch.
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
.CBL, or .ALG) in an EXECUTE command, the system
automatically calls the appropriate compiler when
compilation is necessary. If you specify source files by
filename only, the system searches your connected directory
in the above order for a file of this name and a standard
type. To execute programs from sources that have
nonstandard file types, give a switch to indicate the proper
compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or /ALGOL). A switch
will take precedence over a standard file type if they
indicate different languages. If no compiler is indicated
with either a switch or a standard file type, the FORTRAN
compiler is used.
Default Switches Not Passed to Compiler
Only switches specified in a LOAD-class command are passed
to the compiler; default switches are not passed. Instead,
the system assumes that the defaults for the compiler are
the same as the defaults for the LOAD-class command.
Hints
Commas Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by commas as
arguments to EXECUTE, the loaded programs exist in memory at
the same time and will act as a single program. You can use
this feature to substitute one module for another under
varying conditions or for different applications.
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by plus signs
(+) as arguments to EXECUTE, they are treated as a single
file by compilers. Their object module is stored under any
filename given as the "object" argument of the command, or
(if none) under the last filename in the group and file type
2-174
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
.REL.
Indirect Files as Arguments
You can store the arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of an EXECUTE command in an indirect file, and
specify them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespec as an
EXECUTE command argument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to
set up default global arguments to the EXECUTE command.
Insert this SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change
your own defaults permanently.
Running LINK Directly
The EXECUTE command automatically runs LINK, the system's
loader program, but if you require control of the loading
process you can run LINK directly. See the TOPS-20 LINK
Reference Manual.
Wildcards Illegal with EXECUTE
The EXECUTE command does not accept wildcard characters (*
and %) in a file specification.
Effect on Memory
The EXECUTE command clears any unkept forks from memory, loads
the appropriate compiler if necessary, then loads and starts your
program.
Related Commands
COMPILE, LOAD, and DEBUG other LOAD-class commands for
performing related functions
RUN for running executable programs
Examples
1. Execute a program, indicating the language with a standard
file type.
@EXECUTE CAFN.FOR
FORTRAN: CAFN
2-175
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXECUTE)
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT CAFN EXECUTION]
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.04 ELAPSED TIME: 0.89
EXIT
2. Execute a program, indicating the language with a switch.
Specify the /STAY switch to return immediately to TOPS-20
command level.
@EXECUTE CAFN/FORTRAN/STAY
3. Execute two programs, requesting a cross-reference file for
one of them.
@EXECUTE CAFN, TAFN/CREF
FORTRAN: CAFN
MAIN.
FORTRAN: TAFN
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT TAFN EXECUTION]
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.04 ELAPSED TIME: 0.15
EXIT
4. Combine two source programs into a single object program, and
run this program.
@EXECUTE CAFN+TAFN
FORTRAN: CAFN
MAIN.
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
[LNKXCT TAFN EXECUTION]
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.04 ELAPSED TIME: 0.16
EXIT
5. Execute an ALGOL program, ensuring that the compilation
includes required modules only; request a map.
@EXECUTE /COMPILE/MAP CALEND/ALGOL, ALGMOD.LBR/SEARCH
ALGOL: CALEND
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
2-176
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXPUNGE)
2.39 EXPUNGE
Permanently erases all the deleted files from a directory.
Format
@EXPUNGE (DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>,
@@subcommand
where:
dev:<directory> is the name of the directory you wish to
expunge; you may use wildcard characters to
expunge more than one directory.
Default dev: - your connected structure
Default <directory> - the directory (on
the specified
structure) of the
same name as your
connected
directory
Default (if no arguments - your
are given) connected
directory
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can give
one or more optional subcommands on
successive lines.
DELETE deletes and expunges temporary files (those with the
Temporary (;T) attribute) created by some system
programs to hold interim data. Do not use if you
will have any further need of these files.
PURGE expunges all files which you have opened but not
closed.
REBUILD rebuilds the symbol table of the directory named.
Output
After a successful EXPUNGE command, the system reports the number
of disk pages freed with the message [n pages freed]. If deleted
files are mapped, they will not be expunged, and so will not
contribute to the number of pages freed. Occasionally the system
2-177
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXPUNGE)
will report a negative number. This can mean that files were
being written in the directory during the EXPUNGE, or (especially
if you include the REBUILD subcommand) that previous computations
of directory size had not adequately accounted for some files,
for example, files written near the time of a system crash and
reload.
Hints
Using the REBUILD Subcommand
The REBUILD subcommand is not needed under usual conditions,
as the system performs this action automatically. Use
REBUILD if a message is printed on your terminal advising
you to rebuild the symbol table of a directory.
Using the PURGE Subcommand
The PURGE subcommand is useful chiefly for removing the
remains of files that were being created at the time of a
system crash or a structure dismount. Do not give it while
anyone might be using the directory, because that user's
program might be deprived of necessary files as a result.
| Cannot CTRL/C
|
| You cannot use <CTRL/C> to interrupt an EXPUNGE once it is
| started.
Special Cases
Files With the "Permanent" Attribute
The system erases only the contents of any files that have
the Permanent attribute, for example your MAIL.TXT file,
when you try to expunge them. The file specifications of
permanent files remain among your deleted files, and cannot
be removed by TOPS-20 commands.
Related Commands
DELETE for marking files to be later expunged
DIRECTORY-class commands for obtaining lists of file
specifications
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE for finding out the size of a
directory
2-178
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(EXPUNGE)
UNDELETE for recovering deleted files
Examples
1. Expunge all deleted files from your directory.
@EXPUNGE
PS:<LATTA> [6 pages freed]
2. Find out how much of your disk space is in use and how much
is occupied by deleted files. Delete some of your backup
files, then give the EXPUNGE command to erase all of these.
@INFORMATION DISK-USAGE
PS:<LATTA>
154 Pages assigned, 101 in use, 53 deleted
590 Working pages, 590 Permanent pages allowed
33371 Pages free on PS:
@DELETE *.Q*
BLUE.QAR.1 [OK]
REMARK.QXT.1 [OK]
RIMOUSKI.QXT.1 [OK]
@EXPUNGE
PS:<LATTA> [56 pages freed]
2-179
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(FDIRECTORY)
2.40 FDIRECTORY
The FDIRECTORY (Full DIRECTORY) command is equivalent to the DIRECTORY
command with the subcommands CRAM, EVERYTHING, and NOHEADING. Use the
same format and subcommands with FDIRECTORY as with DIRECTORY. For
further information, see the DIRECTORY command description.
When used with magnetic tapes, the FDIRECTORY command is equivalent to
DIRECTORY for magnetic tapes.
Examples
1. Get a "Full DIRECTORY" listing, on your terminal, for one of
your files.
@FDIRECTORY TESTF1.FOR
MISC:<LATTA>
TESTF1.FOR.17;P777700;A341 1 162(7) 1 25-Oct-85 11:17:46
25-Oct-85 11:17:46 Never Never LATTA LATTA
2. Give the FDIRECTORY command for a file, this time requesting
the only piece of information about current files not
ordinarily supplied by the command. Ask for a heading also.
@FDIRECTORY TESTF1.FOR,
@@HEADING
@@CHECKSUM
@@
MISC:<LATTA>
PGS Bytes(SZ) Ret Creation
Write Read Tape-write Creator Writer
Checksum
TESTF1.FOR.17;P777700;A341 1 162(7) 1 25-Oct-85 11:17:46
25-Oct-85 11:17:46 Never Never LATTA LATTA 566101P
2-180
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(FORK)
2.41 FORK
Makes the specified fork your current fork. The current fork is the
fork to which TOPS-20 commands are applied.
Format
@FORK (IS) fork
where:
fork is one of the following: Fork name
Fork number
Default - the fork with the
highest fork number
Characteristics
Default Fork
If you do not specify a fork name or number with the FORK
command, the fork with the highest fork number (usually the
last fork created) becomes your current fork, and the fork
name is printed in brackets, [FORK-NAME].
Fork Name and Number
Forks are named after the program they contain and are
numbered in the order that they are created. In
multiforking class commands, the fork name and number are
interchangeable.
Hints
More Information
The FORK command is one of the TOPS-20 multiforking-class
commands. For more information about multiforking, see the
section named, Running Multiple Programs, in the TOPS-20
User's Guide.
Special Cases
Fork 0
If you are a user with enabled WHEEL privileges you can give
the command, FORK 0. This references the command processor
2-181
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(FORK)
(EXEC) itself.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining memory of the
current process
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for finding out the number and
status of each fork in your job
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS for finding what fork attributes
have been set with the SET PROGRAM
command and the number and status
of each fork in your job
CONTINUE, FREEZE, other multiforking-class
KEEP, RESET, SET NAME, commands
SET PROGRAM, and UNKEEP
Examples
1. Make the first fork you created your current fork.
@FORK 1
2. Display the fork status, and make the last fork you created
your current fork. Then, redisplay the fork status to check
the result. (In the FORK-STATUS display, an arrow (=>)
indicates the current fork).
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:12.8
DUMPER (2): Kept, HALT at 6065, 0:00:30.1
HOST (3): Kept, HALT at 67543, 0:00:09.3
@FORK
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:12.8
DUMPER (2): Kept, HALT at 6065, 0:00:30.1
=> HOST (3): Kept, HALT at 67543, 0:00:09.3
3. Make the FORK named DUMPER your current fork; then display
the fork status.
@FORK DUMPER
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:12.8
=> DUMPER (2): Kept, HALT at 6065, 0:00:30.1
HOST (3): Kept, HALT at 67543, 0:00:09.3
2-182
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(FORK)
4. Find out which forks exist in your job. Look at memory for
the first fork, then examine a particular location. Make the
second inferior fork current, and do the same thing there.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> QUILL (1): Kept, HALT at 50340, 0:00:04.5
Fork 2: HALT at 21010, 0:00:00.4
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
124. pages, Entry vector loc 4570 len 3
Section 0 R, W, E, Private
0-5 Private R, W, E
6-55 RANDOM:<QUILL>TECPUR.EXE.1120 1-50 R, E
56-77 Private R, W, E
116-123 Private R, W, E
620-637 RANDOM:<QUILL>ABBRE.:EJ.614 0-17 R, E
640-643 RANDOM:<QUILL>TYPE.:EJ.27 0-3 R, E
644-645 RANDOM:<QUILL>INIT.:EJ.17 0-1 R, E
646-661 RANDOM:<QUILL>LSTSQ.:EJ.424 0-13 R, E
662-663 RANDOM:<QUILL>SYSTEM.:EJ.1 0-1 R, E
@EXAMINE 6400
6400/ 200040,,4636
@FORK 2
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
95. pages, Entry vector loc 15710 len 3
Section 0 R, W, E, Private
0-11 Private R, W, E
13-15 Private R, W, E
16-110 RANDOM:<TOOLS>DEFFNA.3 3-75 R, CW, E
117 Private R, W, E
166 Private R, W, E
170 Private R, W, E
172 Private R, W, E
174 Private R, W, E
224 Private R, W, E
226 Private R, W, E
231-250 Private R, W, E
@EXAMINE 2600
2600/ 0
2-183
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(FREEZE)
2.42 FREEZE
Halts execution of a fork.
Format
@FREEZE (FORK) fork
where:
fork is one of the following: Fork name
Fork number
Default - the current fork
Characteristics
Same Function as CTRL/C
The FREEZE command stops running background forks while you
are at EXEC command level. The effect is the same as if you
typed two CTRL/Cs while at the fork's program level.
Hints
More Information
The FREEZE command is one of the TOPS-20 multiforking-class
commands. For more information about multiforking, see the
section named, Running Multiple Programs, in the TOPS-20
User's Guide.
Related Commands
CONTINUE/BACKGROUND for continuing a halted fork in the
background
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for displaying the fork status
FORK, other multiforking-class commands
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
KEEP, RESET, SET NAME,
SET PROGRAM, and UNKEEP
2-184
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(FREEZE)
Examples
1. Give the FREEZE command to stop the current running
background fork. Then, display the fork status. The arrow
points to the current fork.
@FREEZE
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> BLISS (1): ^C from RUNNING at 500000, 0:00:13.1
EDIT (2): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.5
2. Display the fork status and give the FREEZE command to stop a
running background fork. Then, redisplay the fork status to
check the result.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
BLISS (1): Background, RUNNING at 500000, 0:00:13.1
=> EDIT (2): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.5
@FREEZE BLISS
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
BLISS (1): ^C from RUNNING at 500000, 0:00:13.1
=> EDIT (2): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.5
2-185
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(GET)
2.43 GET
Places an executable program into memory.
Format
@GET (PROGRAM) filespec /switch
where:
filespec is the specification of any file containing an
executable program.
Default file type - .EXE
/switch is /USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37
octal) into which your program is to be
loaded. You can use this switch only if your
program can be contained in one section.
Effect on Memory
The GET command clears any unkept forks, puts the specified
program into memory.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining the contents of
memory
KEEP for making the specified fork a
kept fork
LOAD for loading a source or object
program into memory
MERGE for putting an executable program
into memory without first clearing
memory
SAVE for storing a copy of the program
in memory in a file in executable
format
START for starting the program in the
current fork
2-186
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(GET)
Examples
1. Put an executable program into memory.
@GET TESTF1.EXE
2. Verify that you have a magnetic tape drive assigned to your
job. Get one of your executable programs, save a copy of it
on tape, and then start it.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, SNARK, MISC, LANG, REL3, DX20, MTA0
LPT, LPT0, LPT1, CDR, PCDR0, CDP, FE0-15
PTY23-61, NUL, PLT, PLT0, DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: MT0, TTY230
@GET TESTF1
@SAVE MT0:
MT0:TESTF1 Saved
@START
THIS IS A TEST.
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.03 ELAPSED TIME: 0.72
EXIT
2-187
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(HELP)
2.44 HELP
Displays explanatory text for many TOPS-20 system features.
Format
@HELP (ON SUBJECT) name
where:
name is the name of a topic chosen from the list given in
response to the command HELP ?
Default name - HELP
Sample of HELP Command Arguments
ACCT20 ACCTPR ACTGEN APL APLSF BLIS10 CHECKD CHKPNT
COBDDT COBOL CONV20 CREF DAEMDB DBINFO DBMEND DIRTST
DLUSER DUMPER EDIT FE FILCOM FORDDT FORDML FORMAT
FORTRA HELP ISAM LIBARY LINK LPTSPL MACRO MAIL
MAKLIB MAKRAM MAKVFU OPLEAS PLEASE PTYCON QUEUE RDMAIL
RERUN RSXFMT RUNINP RUNOFF SCHEMA SORT SYSERR SYSJOB
TRANSL ULIST USAG20 USAH20 WATCH
Characteristics
Other HELP Command Arguments
Note that some of the HELP command arguments shown here may
be omitted if the associated topics are not available at
your site. The list may include other texts inserted by
your system administrator to describe features special to
your system. Also, this list is revised frequently to
reflect improvements and additions to standard TOPS-20
programs.
Hints
Printing HELP Files on the Line Printer
The texts displayed by the HELP command are stored in system
logical name HLP: under the name of the topic and file type
.HLP. Use the PRINT command to request your own copy.
2-188
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(HELP)
Examples
1. Ask for information about the FILCOM program.
@HELP FILCOM
FILCOM V21B(60)
FILCOM compares two files in either ASCII mode
or binary depending upon switches or file name extensions.
All standard binary extensions are recognized as binary by
default.
Switches are :-
/A compare in ASCII mode
.
.
.
/W compare the Word mode but don't expand files
/X expand files before word mode compare
2. Use the DIRECTORY command to search system logical name HLP:
for any text involving mail. (Note the use of wildcard
characters here.) Then, print a copy of one of the help
files.
@DIRECTORY HLP:*MAIL*.HLP
PS:<HELP>
MAIL.HLP.2
RDMAIL.HLP.2
Total of 2 files
@PRINT /AFTER:1700 HLP:MAIL.HLP
[Printer job APLSF queued, request #131, limit 174]
2-189
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
2.45 INFORMATION
Displays information about system and job parameters.
Format
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) argument
where:
argument is a keyword, chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of INFORMATION command options.
Summary of INFORMATION Command Arguments (defaults in boldface)
ADDRESS-BREAK
ALERTS
ARCHIVE-STATUS filespecs
---
| LINES
AVAILABLE | DEVICES
---
---
| /ALL
BATCH-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /PROCESSING-NODE:node name
| /USER:user name Default user name - your user
| name
---
CLUSTER
COMMAND-LEVEL
DECNET node-name
2-190
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
---
| ALL
| CARDS
| COMPILE-SWITCHES
| DECLARE
| PAPER-TAPE
DEFAULTS | PLOT
| PRINT
| PROGRAM
| SUBMIT
| TAKE
---
DIRECTORY dev:<directory>, Default dev:<directory> - your
@@VERBOSE connected directory
@@FAST
@@NAME-ONLY
DISK-USAGE dev:<directory> Default dev:<directory> - your
connected directory
FILE-STATUS octal JFN Default JFN - all JFNs in your
job
FORK-STATUS
| INTERNET STATUS
JOB-STATUS
---
| SYSTEM
LOGICAL-NAMES | JOB
| ALL
| logical name:
---
---
MAIL | user name Default user name - your user
| SYSTEM name
---
MEMORY-USAGE
MONITOR-STATISTICS
---
| /ALL
MOUNT-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /USER:user name Default user name - your user
| name
---
2-191
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
---
| /ALL
| /DESTINATION-NODE:node name
OUTPUT-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /USER:user name Default user name - your user
| name
---
PROGRAM-STATUS
PSI-STATUS
REMOTE-PRINTING
---
| /ALL
RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /USER:user name Default user name - your
| user name
---
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION
STRUCTURE dev: Default dev: - your connected
structure
SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS
SUPERIORS
SYSTEM-STATUS
TAPE-PARAMETERS
TERMINAL-MODE number Default number - your terminal
line number
VERSION
VOLUMES
INFORMATION Command Arguments
ADDRESS-BREAK gives the location (in numeric or
symbolic format - depending upon
previous specification of the SET
TYPEOUT MODE command) and mode of any
address breaks for the program currently
in memory. Set with SET ADDRESS-BREAK.
ALERTS lists the dates and times that the
system is to signal you at the terminal.
The last line of the display indicates
whether alerts are to be sent
unconditionally to your terminal
(depending upon previous specification
of the SET AUTOMATIC command). Set with
SET ALERT.
ARCHIVE-STATUS filespecs prints the archive status of all
2-192
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
specified files for which archival has
been requested or for which migration
has been prohibited.
Default filespec - *.*.* in your
connected directory
---
| LINES
AVAILABLE | DEVICES lists the devices or terminal lines
--- available to you or already assigned to
your job. Use ASSIGN to obtain devices
(use MOUNT for structures).
Default - DEVICES
---
| /ALL
BATCH-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /PROCESSING-NODE:node name::
| /USER:user name
---
lists the jobs being processed and
waiting to be processed by the batch
system. The list includes:
o the jobname and request ID number of
the request (an asterisk (*) appears
before the jobname if the job is
currently being processed)
o the scheduled run time of the request
o the name of the user who initiated
the request
o the values of the switches /AFTER and
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT, if values were
given in the original SUBMIT or
subsequent MODIFY command
Use SUBMIT, MODIFY, or CANCEL to change
this list.
The /ALL switch adds the switches
/ASSISTANCE, /PRIORITY, /RESTARTABLE,
/SEQUENCE, and /UNIQUE to this list,
while /FAST eliminates the display of
all switches and column headings;
/PROCESSING-NODE specifies the DECnet
network node about whose batch jobs you
want information; /USER restricts
2-193
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
descriptions to jobs of the user named,
and can be given with any of the other
three switches.
Default user name - your user name
CLUSTER displays the names of the systems in a
Common File System (CFS) cluster:
o local cluster node (the system you
are logged in on).
o accessible CFS nodes (the other
systems in the CFS cluster).
o accessible HSC servers (the HSC50
device controllers in the cluster).
COMMAND-LEVEL prints the status of the
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD parameter, which
prevents you from giving another TOPS-20
command until any error message
resulting from a previous command has
been printed. Set with SET
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD.
DECNET node-name tells whether the specified DECnet
network node is accessible to your
system. If you do not specify a node
name, the system prints the name of your
host system, the total number of
reachable nodes, and the names of all
reachable nodes.
Default node-name - all accessible
nodes
---
| ALL
| CARDS
| COMPILE-SWITCHES
| PAPER-TAPE
DEFAULTS | PLOT displays, in a format suitable for
| PROGRAM entering them, default arguments
| PRINT established at the current level of
| SUBMIT TOPS-20 for the specified command.
| TAKE CARDS and PAPER-TAPE refer to the PUNCH
--- CARDS and PUNCH PAPER-TAPE commands,
respectively. COMPILE-SWITCHES refers
to LOAD-class commands and PROGRAM
refers to the SET PROGRAM command. The
ALL argument displays the defaults for
all these categories. Set with SET
2-194
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
DEFAULT. This argument displays the
default for every SET DEFAULT command
given, even if duplicate setting are
made.
Default - ALL
DIRECTORY dev:<directory>,
@@FAST lists the current parameter values set
@@VERBOSE for the indicated directory (with the
@@NAME-ONLY exception of the directory password) by
the SET DIRECTORY or BUILD commands, or
by default. The subcommands call for
either a short list of non-default (that
is, user-determined) values only (FAST),
or a complete list including defaults
(VERBOSE), or a listing of directory
names only (NAME-ONLY). If you use
NAME-ONLY, specify a directory in the
form <directory.*>, <*directory*>, or
<*>. The categories of information
include:
o the name of the directory
o working and permanent storage limits
o capabilities (assigned or withheld)
o whether you can establish DECnet or
| INTERNET network connections
o whether expired files should be
automatically archived
o directory number
o default file protection
o default account for login
o directory protection
o default number of generations
maintained for files
o maximum number of subdirectories
allowed
o date and time that you started the
current terminal session with LOGIN
2-195
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
(for log-in directory only)
| o date and time of last interactive
| login
|
| o date and time of last non-interactive
| login
|
| o date and time password expires
|
| o number of interactive login failures
| since last login
|
| o number of non-interactive login
| failures since last login
o off-line and on-line expiration
defaults
o group memberships
o user group numbers assignable to
subdirectories
o TOPS-10 project-programmer number
Set with SET DIRECTORY or (for
subdirectories) BUILD.
Default dev:<directory> - your
connected
directory
Default subcommand - FAST
DISK-USAGE dev:<directory>
prints, for the indicated directory, the
following:
o the name of the directory
o the number of pages of assigned disk
storage, and the number of deleted
pages, if any
o working and permanent page limits
o total number of unused pages on the
file structure containing the
directory
The wildcard characters, * and % can be
2-196
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
included in the <directory> field. For
example, type <%directory*>,
<directory.*>, or <*> to get information
about all matching directories or
subdirectories.
Default dev:<directory> - your
connected
directory
FILE-STATUS octal JFN gives, for the specified JFN (an
internal number identifying each file
opening), the following:
o the JFN
o the associated file specification
o the mode of access (Append, Execute,
Read, or Write) for which the JFN is
open (or was opened last, if NOT
OPENED precedes the access mode)
o special access conditions, namely
DATA ERROR if an error is made in
accessing the file, or EOF if the
file pointer is at the end of the
file
o if appropriate, byte pointer and byte
size, which tell the number of bytes
transferred to or from the file, and
o a list of devices currently assigned
to or opened by this job But if a
file has been opened by another
process for its sole use, you see
only the message, "Restricted JFN".
Default JFN - all JFNs for your job
FORK-STATUS gives a summary of the status of each
fork belonging to your current copy of
the TOPS-20 command processor, including
Kept status, RUN status, and total CPU
time used so far. An arrow (=>)
indicates your current fork.
| INTERNET STATUS displays, if the system is a member,
| information about Internet networks,
| including INTERNET, Milnet and Local
| Area Networks. The display includes:
2-197
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
| o the name of the local host system
| followed by its Internet name and its
Internet address
o the status of the network interface
o whether network interface output is
enabled
o whether network service is enabled
o the date and time of the last network
interface online transition, offline
transition, and cycle transition
JOB-STATUS prints your
o host system (Displayed only if your
| host system is part of a DECnet or
| INTERNET network.)
o job number
o user name
o connected directory (if not your
log-in directory)
o account; session remark (if any)
o terminal number
| o terminal access descriptor
o network node to which your output
device, requests are sent.
(Displayed only if not your host
node.) Set with the command, SET
LOCATION.
You can set some of these parameters
with CONNECT, SET ACCOUNT, SET LOCATION,
and SET SESSION-REMARK.
---
| ALL
LOGICAL-NAMES | JOB
| SYSTEM
| logical name:
---
prints the logical names and definitions
2-198
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
which have been established for your
job, for the system, or for both; or
prints the job-wide and system-wide
definitions of the specified logical
name. Establish and withdraw logical
names with DEFINE.
For the DEFINE and INFORMATION
LOGICAL-NAMES commands, a colon
following the logical name is optional.
However, in INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES
the logical name SYS: must always be
followed by a colon. Otherwise, the
system interprets SYS as an abbreviation
for the SYSTEM argument.
The wildcard characters, * and % can be
included in the logical name. For
example, type A* to list all logical
names that begin with the letter 'A'.
See example 6.
Default - JOB
---
MAIL | user name tells whether there is unread mail for
| SYSTEM the user, if you have read access to
--- the user's mailbox; otherwise, you see
only the message, "Mailbox protected."
Also, displays any system messages since
your last login when you type SYSTEM
instead of user-name. Send mail with
one of the two mail programs, MAIL and
DECmail/MS. Read mail with the RDMAIL
or DECmail/MS program.
Default user name - your user name
MEMORY-USAGE prints, for the current process of your
job, the following:
o the number of pages of memory
assigned
o location (in numeric or symbolic
format - depending upon previous
specification of the SET TYPEOUT MODE
command) and length of the current
program's entry vector (see with SET
ENTRY-VECTOR)
and on each succeeding line
2-199
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
o the page numbers of pages occupied by
a file or program
o the file specification if the pages
are file pages; the process
specification if the pages are mapped
from another process; PRIVATE
otherwise.
o the page numbers of file pages or
process pages. If a page is mapped
by indirect pointers, the file
specification is printed to which it
is mapped; "Fork n" means that these
pages are mapped indirectly through
another process (process n) of the
job; "No page" can mean either of
these conditions, when the
destination page does not yet exist.
o the permitted accesses to the pages
(set with SET PAGE-ACCESS):
R - Read access
W - Write access
CW - Copy-on-Write access
E - Execute access
See Example 4 at the end of this command
description for obtaining information on
pages assigned to extended sections of
memory.
MONITOR-STATISTICS gives you the following:
o the length of time (in hours,
minutes, and seconds) since the
monitor was reloaded
o an analysis of monitor overhead
time, by percentages
o the number of swap-reads and
-writes, and file-reads and -writes
o the number of pages of memory
available to user programs
2-200
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
o the number of terminal wake-ups
(occasions when a program "wakes up"
after waiting for terminal input or
output to finish, and of terminal
interrupts (occasions when a program
is interrupted by a CTRL/C, CTRL/O,
or CTRL/T (or other, user-enabled
control characters) typed at a
user's terminal)
o the average number of processes in
the balance set (NBAL, a subset of
the run set - these are runnable,
and each receives a share of total
CPU time) and in the remainder of
the run set (NRUN - these are
waiting to be run)
o the number of seconds of CPU time
given to each of the scheuler queues
(where the leftmost listing
describes the highest priority
queue, for interactive processes,
and the rightmost listing is for
CPU-bound processes)
o if class scheduling is enabled, the
allotted share and actual use of the
system (expressed as a percentage of
total CPU time) by each class, and
the 1-, 5-, and 15-minute load
averages of each class
All averages and totals are computed for
the time since system start-up.
---
| /ALL
MOUNT-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /USER:user name
---
prints a list, at your terminal, of
pending structure-mount and tape-mount
requests, and of tape-mount requests
currently being satisfied. The list
includes:
o the volid of the first volume of
tape that will be mounted, or the
volid of the mounted tape, or the
2-201
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
structure identification of each
disk pack that will be mounted
o the status of each volume of tape
(either the number of the tape
drive, in the form, MTAn, on which
it is mounted, or Waiting)
o the type of request (either Disk or
Tape)
o the tape density specified in the
tape-mount request
o the mode (either Enabled, if the
/WRITE-ENABLED switch was specified
or assumed in the original
MOUNT-TAPE command, or Locked if
/READ-ONLY applies) in which each
volume of tape is to be mounted
o the request number (i.e., request ID
number) of each request
o the number of the job that made the
request
o the user name of the owner of the
job that made the request
Use the MOUNT, CANCEL (for pending
requests), and DISMOUNT (for satisfied
requests) commands to change this list.
The /ALL switch adds the following to
the display: the /ASSISTANCE,
/PRIORITY, /RESTARTABLE/, /NOTE,
/SEQUENCE, /UNIQUE, and /REMARK
switches, whether a tape mount request
is for a labeled tape, and the tape
volume-set name. The /FAST switch
eliminates column headings and the sum
of the number of requests; /USER
restricts descriptions to jobs of the
user named, and can be given with either
of the other two switches.
Default user name - your user name
2-202
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
---
| /ALL
| /DESTINATION-NODE:node name
OUTPUT-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /USER:user name
---
prints a listing, at your terminal, of
the requests being sent or waiting to be
sent to an output device. The list
includes:
o the name of the node (for remote
line printer requests)
o the name of the queue (card punch,
paper tape punch, plotter, or line
printer)
o the jobname and request ID number of
the request (an asterisk (*) appears
before the jobname if the request is
currently being processed)
o the output limit, in appropriate
units (number of pages, minutes of
plotter time, feet of paper tape, or
number of cards)
o the name of the user who initiated
the request, and
o values of the switches /AFTER,
/FORMS, and /UNIT, if given
non-default values in the original
PRINT, PLOT, PUNCH, or subsequent
MODIFY command.
Use PRINT, PLOT, PUNCH, MODIFY, or
CANCEL to change this list.
The /ALL switch adds the /NOTE and
/SEQUENCE switches to this list, while
the /FAST switch eliminates the display
of all switches and column headings;
/USER restricts descriptions to jobs of
the user named, and can be given with
either of the other two switches. The
/DESTINATION-NODE switch displays the
print requests on remote nodes in the
same TOPS-20 cluster as the local node.
Default user name - your user name
2-203
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
PROGRAM-STATUS gives the following information for the
current level of the TOPS-20 command
processor (EXEC):
o the amount of CPU time you have
used, and total elapsed time since
you logged in
o the amount of TOPS-20 command
processor time used
o SET UUO-SIMULATION (set with SET
UUO-SIMULATION) if the TOPS-10
compatibility package is enabled to
simulate TOPS-10 monitor calls
issued by a program you are running
o SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY (set with
SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY) if your
program is allowed to handle CTRL/C
interrupts itself
o the settings established with the
SET TRAP and SET TYPEOUT commands
o the settings established with the
SET DEFAULT PROGRAM command
o the settings established with the
SET PROGRAM command
o a summary of the status of each fork
belonging to the current copy of the
TOPS-20 command processor, including
kept status, RUN status, and total
CPU time used so far
An arrow (=>) indicates your current
fork.
PSI-STATUS tells you:
o whether the PSI (Programmed
Software-Interrupt) system is in use
(ON) or not (OFF)
o the memory address of the level
table and of the channel table - 0
if none was set
2-204
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
o the numbers of the priority levels
for which there are interrupts in
progress (1 and/or 2 and/or 3),
where 1 is the highest priority
o the numbers of channels enabled
(ready) to accept interrupts, and of
channels with pending interrupts
For further discussion of the interrupt
system see the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls
Reference Manual.
REMOTE-PRINTING displays system definitions and
characteristics for remote line
printers.
---
| /ALL
RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS | /FAST
| /USER:user name
---
prints a list, at your terminal, of
pending retrieval requests. Each file
for which you request retrieval
constitutes a separate request, even if
specified within a single RETRIEVE
command. The list includes:
o the name of the request (the first
six characters of the filename)
o the request ID number
o the volids of each tape containing
the file
o the name of the user who made the
request
The /ALL switch includes the complete
specification (up to 49 characters of
the file, while the /FAST switch
eliminates column headings; /USER
restricts descriptions to requests of
the user named and can be used with
either of the other two switches.
Note that the /ALL switch does not
2-205
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
display the complete file specification
unless you have Wheel or Operator
privileges.
Default user name - your user name
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION tells you whether the system processes
your spooled output requests
immediately, or defers them until you
log out. Set with SET
SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION.
STRUCTURE dev: gives, for each structure named, the
following:
o information as to whether the system
performs checking operations while
writing to the data or swapping
areas of the structure. The system
would perform this checking by
immediately reading the data that it
has just written. If the system
manager has enabled these functions,
the following lines appear at the
top of the display: "Write
verification for data", and "Write
verification for swapping".
o the number of users who have mounted
the structure, the number of open
files on the structure, and the
number of disks in the structure
o kind of structure - Public or
Private, Domestic or Foreign (see
the TOPS-20 User's Guide)
o names of users who have mounted the
structure
o names of users who have accessed the
structure
o names of users who have connected to
the structure
o whether or not the structure is
offline
The colon after the structure name is
optional. Use an asterisk * for dev:
to specify all mounted structures.
2-206
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
Mount and dismount structures with the
MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands.
Default dev: - your connected
structure
SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS gives, for each subsystem (any name
specified by the SETSN JSYS), the
following information:
o its name and total runtime since the
system last started - SNAMES, STIMES
o the average number of page faults
per second it has caused - SPFLTS
o the number of long-term waits it has
caused - SNBLKS
o its average working-set size (the
number of pages it occupies in
memory)-SSIZE
o the number of times a SETSN JSYS has
been executed for it (excluding the
EXEC subsystem)
See the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference
Manual for more information.
SUPERIORS tells you the number of forks that are
superior to the current EXEC level.
This number is equal to the number of
times you gave the PUSH command without
intervening POP commands.
Note that many programs have PUSH
commands and that some programs
automatically do a PUSH. These PUSHes
also change the number of superior forks
reported by this command.
SYSTEM-STATUS tells you:
o whether the operator is present
o what kinds of logins are allowed -
local, remote, pseudo-terminal,
DECnet, Arpanet, or console
o whether accounting (assessing and
recording charges for system use) is
2-207
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
being done
o whether account validation (checking
accounts against lists of authorized
users) is enabled
o whether working set preloading is
enabled (Working set preloading is
discussed in the System Manager's
Guide and in the Software
Installation Guide.)
o whether sending of level zero system
| messages is enabled. System level 0
| messages inform users about resource
| problems, such as:
|
| - [GIDNEY: Caution, Swapping
| space low]
|
| - [CLOYD: Caution, SPT space low]
|
| - [THEP: Caution, Disk space low
| on system structure THEP:]
o whether sending of level one system
| messages is enabled. System level 1
| messages inform users of
| operationsal type messages, such as:
|
| - [RONCO: Deleted files will be
| expunged from system structure
| RONCO: in 30 seconds]
|
| - [RONCO: Expunge of structure
| RONCO: completed]
o whether sending of operator messages
(like BUGCHK, BUGINF, and "RESOURCE
LOW") to the CTY (central terminal)
is enabled
o whether tape-drive allocation
(automatic assignment of tape
drives) is enabled
o whether automatic file
retrieval-waits (the delaying of a
command's execution until specified
off-line files are [automatically]
retrieved) are enabled
2-208
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
o the system's expiration default date
for off-line files
o the current setting of the scheduler
bias control
o whether class scheduling is enabled,
and, if it is enabled, the special
class (if any) for batch jobs, and
the default class (if any)
o off-line structures timeout interval
o status of cluster information
o status of cluster sendalls
o minimum password length
|
| o number of days for password to
| expire
|
| o whether the password dictionary is
| enabled
TAPE-PARAMETERS gives the default settings of these
parameters for magnetic tapes:
o tape density, in bits per inch
o tape parity (ODD or EVEN)
o format (ANSI-ASCII, CORE-DUMP,
INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE, or
SYSTEM-DEFAULT), and
o tape record length, in bytes
Set with SET TAPE.
TERMINAL-MODE number gives the following information about
the specified terminal:
o its type (for example, LA36, VT52,
or SYSTEM-DEFAULT)
o its speed (baud rate), in bits per
second. If the terminal is
connected to the system through
another node, such as a
DECserver-100 or another TOPS-20
2-209
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
system, the terminal speed cannot be
determined by this command. This is
indicated in the display by the
message !Terminal speed
indeterminate!.
o whether all output that does not
originate from your own job is
inhibited.
o whether it is set to receive or
refuse links, advice, and system
messages
o whether it is set to pause in
printing output when you type the
pause character, and/or at the end
of each full page of output
o the pause and continue characters
that you may have set with the
TERMINAL PAUSE CHARACTER command
(only if TERMINAL PAUSE END-OF-PAGE
and TERMINAL PAUSE COMMAND are in
effect, and if CTRL/S and CTRL/Q
were not the specified characters)
o the length (in number of lines) and
width (in number of characters) of
its page
o whether it is capable of printing
lowercase characters, whether it is
set to raise lowercase letters you
type to uppercase, and whether it
will mark (flag) capital letters
with a single quotation mark (')
o whether it has a formfeed mechanism,
and whether it is set to only
indicate formfeeds or to perform
them
o whether it has mechanical tab stops,
whether it is set to immediately
echo input you type
o whether it is operating in
FULLDUPLEX or HALFDUPLEX mode
Set with TERMINAL. The SYSTAT command
2-210
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
displays terminal numbers.
VERSION tells you:
o the name of the host system
o the TOPS-20 operating system's name
and octal version number
o the octal version of the TOPS-20
command processor (EXEC) in use
o the name (and decimal or octal
version number, if any) of the
program in the current fork for
which program data vectors (PDVs)
exist and that are associated with
the current process. (See the
TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference
Manual and the description of the
/PVBLOCK switch in the TOPS-20 LINK
Reference Manual for information on
PDVs.) See Example 5.
o the decimal version of the UUO
simulation package in use (if a
TOPS-10 program is in memory)
The format of a version number is:
a.b(c)-d
where: (1) a and b are respectively
incremented for major and minor changes
in the software (2) c gives a rough
indication of the number of times the
software component has been edited (3)
d, a holdover from earlier versions of
TOPS-20 which is now rarely used,
identifies the programmer(s) responsible
for the software component.
VOLUMES setname: gives the volids of currently mounted
and newly created volumes in the
specified tape set. A colon after the
tape set name is optional.
Hints
Specifying the Current Fork of TOPS-20
2-211
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
Use the FORK command to specify the fork to be described by
the ADDRESS-BREAK, FILE-STATUS, MEMORY-USAGE and VERSION
arguments. Find out your current fork with INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS.
Restrictions
Using the INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /DESTINATION-NODE switch
For non-privileged users, the local node's GALAXY must know
if the remote node has printers. If the user is privileged,
then the print request queue of the node specified is
displayed, regardless of whether the local GALAXY knows if
the node has printers or not. The user specified node must
be a node in the cluster known to the local GALAXY.
If the node specified by the /DESTINATION-NODE switch is the
local node, then the print request queue of the local node
is displayed.
You cannot use an * as an argument in the /DESTINATION-NODE
switch.
Related Commands
SYSTAT for printing information about the current state
of the system.
Examples
1. Use an INFORMATION command to determine your current terminal
settings.
@INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE
TERMINAL VT100
TERMINAL SPEED 9600
.
.
.
TERMINAL NO IMMEDIATE
TERMINAL FULLDUPLEX
2. Mount a structure and access your directory on the structure.
Compare the disk space available in this directory and in
your connected directory. (Note that there are many more
pages free on your connected structure (MISC:) as a whole
than on structure SNARK:; this is likely to make your use of
the system more efficient if you work only within MISC:.)
2-212
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@ACCESS SNARK:
@INFORMATION DISK-USAGE SNARK:
SNARK:<LATTA>
198 Pages assigned
400 Working pages, 400 Permanent pages allowed
2836 Pages free on SNARK:
@INFORMATION DISK-USAGE
MISC:<LATTA>
119 Pages assigned
590 Working pages, 590 Permanent pages allowed
33172 Pages free on MISC:
3. Print a file, ordering several copies and supplying a note to
be attached to it. Use an INFORMATION command to verify that
your request is in the output queue. Modify the date on
which the job will be printed, and use the INFORMATION
command again to confirm this action.
@PRINT TESTF1.FOR /AFTER:17:00/COPIES:20/FORMS:NARROW/NO -
TE:"T-TH LAB"
[Printer job TESTF1 queued, request-ID 219, Limit 54]
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------
TESTF1 219 54 LATTA /Forms:NARROW
/After: 8-Nov-85 17:00 /Note:T-TH LAB /Seq:1791
There is 1 job in the queue (none in progress)
@MODIFY PRINT 219 /AFTER:15-NOV-85 17:00
[1 Job modified]
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------
TESTF1 219 54 LATTA /Forms:NARROW
/After:15-Nov-85 17:00 /Note:T-TH LAB /Seq:1791
There is 1 job in the queue (none in progress)
4. Request to print a file on a remote node, then use the
INFORMATION command to verify that your request is in the
remote output queue.
@PRINT VENUS.TXT/DESTINATION-NODE:HENSON
[Printer job VENUS queued on node HENSON, request-ID 39,
Limit 12]
2-213
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
@INFORMATION OUTPUT/DESTINATION-NODE:HENSON
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------
VENUS 200 54 ANDERSON
There is 1 job in the queue (none in progress)
5. Place a program in memory section 17. Then give the
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE command to verify that the program
was appropriately placed. The page numbers, beginning at
17000, indicate that section 17 is in use, because a section
comprises 1000 (octal) pages. Also, the left half of the
entry vector location contains 17.
@GET GRADES.EXE.1 /USE-SECTION:17
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
64. pages, Entry vector loc 17,,542 len 254000
Section 0 R, W, E, Private
Section 17 R, W, E, Private
17000-17002 GRADES.EXE.1 1-3 R, CW, E
17374-17425 GRADES.EXE.1 4-35 R, CW, E
17600-17637 GRADES.EXE.1 36-75 R, CW, E
17643-17645 GRADES.EXE.1 76-100 R, CW, E
6. Issue the INFORMATION VERSION command for information on
programs in your memory area that have program data vectors
associated with them. Note that the merging of such programs
yields consolidated information.
@GET IOLIB
@INFORMATION VERSION
BOSTON TOPS-20 System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(163)
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(10)
Program is IOLIB
PDVs: Program name IOPAK, version 1.1(420)
@GET MATHLB
@INFORMATION VERSION
BOSTON TOPS-20 System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(163)
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(10)
Program is MATHLB
PDVs: Program name MATHLB, version 3.33(360)
@MERGE IOLIB
@INFORMATION VERSION
BOSTON TOPS-20 System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(163))
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(10)
Program is MATHLB
PDVs: Program name MATHLB, version 3.33(360)
2-214
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(INFORMATION)
Program name IOPAK, version 1.1(420)
@MERGE RPTGEN
@INFORMATION VERSION
BOSTON TOPS-20 System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(163)
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(10)
Program is MATHLB
PDVs: Program name REPORT, version 3.1(156)
Program name MATHLB, version 3.33(360)
Program name IOPAK, version 1.1(420)
7. Use the INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES command with the * wildcard
to list all the job-wide and system-wide logical names that
begin with the letter 'P'.
@INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES P*
Job-wide:
PAS: => PUB:<DBONIN.PASCAL>
PB: => PUB:PHONE.BOOK
PUB: => PUBLIC:<DBONIN>
System-wide:
PCL: => RANDOM:<PCL>
POBOX: = PUBLIC:
POST-OFFICE: => PUBLIC:<OPERATOR>
PS: => GIDNEY:
|
| 8. Use the INFORMATION INTERNET STATUS command to display the
| status of INTERNET nodes.
|
| @ INFORMATION INTERNET STATUS
|
| Local dec-internet host name is gidney.tops20.dec.com
| Network interface type is IPNI, Internet address is 16.34.0.2
| Network interface is up, output is enabled
| Network service is enabled
| Last network interface up transition: 4-May-90 23:16:04
|
| Local dec-mrnet host name is gidney.mrnet.dec.com
| Network interface type is IPNIA, Internet address is 192.5.5.4
| Network interface is up, output is enabled
| Network service is enabled
| Last network interface up transition: 4-May-90 23:16:02
|
| Local dec-mrrad host name is mrdale.mrrad.dec.com
| Network interface type is IPCI, Internet address is 192.5.6.12
| Network interface is up, output is enabled
| Network service is enabled
| Last network interface up transition: 4-May-90 23:16:02
2-215
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(KEEP)
2.46 KEEP
Protects a fork from being cleared from memory.
Format
@KEEP (FORK) fork
where:
fork is one of the following: Fork name
Fork number
Default - the current fork
Characteristics
Characteristics of Kept Forks
The KEEP command gives a fork a "kept" status. A kept fork
has these characteristics:
o A kept fork is not reset when another program is brought
into memory. Normally, when a program is run, it
replaces the fork currently in memory. However, if the
program in memory is in a kept fork and a new program is
run, the new program is placed in a new fork. This
allows you to have several programs in memory.
o A kept fork is not cleared from memory with the RESET
command unless one of these RESET arguments is
specified: the fork name, a period or an asterisk.
o A kept fork can be restarted by typing the kept fork
name as an EXEC command. The kept fork name can be
abbreviated to the point where it is unique from EXEC
commands and other kept fork names. ESCAPE recognition
and question mark help also function with kept fork
names.
The KEEP command sets the kept fork to restart at its
starting address when the kept fork name is given as a
command. For information on changing the fork's restart
address see Hints, Setting the Kept Fork's Restart
Address.
o A kept fork is named after the program it contains.
Forks are numbered in the order in which they were
created. In multiforking-class commands the fork name
and number are interchangecable.
2-216
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(KEEP)
Inferior Forks
Any inferior forks created by a kept fork are also kept.
Hints
Keeping Forks Automatically
Place SET PROGRAM KEEP commands in your LOGIN.CMD or
COMAND.CMD file for programs that you normally place in kept
forks. Then when you load the program, the system
automatically keeps the fork and notifies you with the
message [Keeping FORK-NAME].
The SET PROGRAM command applies only to the current EXEC
level. If you want your SET PROGRAM commands to be in
effect after a PUSH command, put the commands into your
COMAND.CMD file. The COMAND.CMD file is executed
automatically after every PUSH command.
Kept Forks Continued Using the Fork Name
The KEEP command sets the fork to be restarted at its
starting point when the fork name is given as a command.
So, if a program that was kept with the KEEP command is
running in a background fork, and you type the kept fork
name, execution of the program is canceled and the program
returns to its start address, which is usually the program's
prompt.
With the SET PROGRAM KEEP command, you to specify the point
at which the fork will restart when the fork name is given
as a command. The starting point can be the program's
continue, reentry, or start address. The command SET
PROGRAM KEEP CONTINUE gives the fork name the same function
as the CONTINUE /NORMALLY command. So, if a program that
was kept with the SET PROGRAM KEEP CONTINUE command is
running in a background fork, and you type the kept fork
name, execution of the program continues and your terminal
is placed at program level.
More Information
The KEEP command is one of the TOPS-20 multiforking-class
commands. For more information about multiforking, see the
section named, Running Multiple Programs, in the TOPS-20
User's Guide.
2-217
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(KEEP)
Restrictions
Limited Number of Forks
There is a limited number of forks available on a system.
When all forks are in use, existing users cannot add forks
and new users cannot log in. Therefore, KEEP only necessary
forks and return idle forks to the system with the UNKEEP or
RESET commands.
Related Commands
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for displaying the fork status
RESET for clearing forks from memory
UNKEEP for changing a kept fork to an
unkept fork
CONTINUE, FORK, FREEZE, other multiforking-class
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS, commands
SET NAME, and SET PROGRAM
Examples
1. Display the fork status with the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
command. Then, give the KEEP command to make the current
fork a kept fork and redisplay the fork status.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.5
FILCOM (2): ^C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.3
@KEEP
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.5
FILCOM (2): ^C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.3
2. Display the fork status, and KEEP the FILCOM fork. Then
verify the new fork status.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.5
FILCOM (2): ^C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.3
@KEEP FILCOM
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.5
FILCOM (2): Kept, ^C from IO wait at 776721, 0:00:00.3
2-218
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
2.47 LOAD
Loads your program into memory, compiling the source file first if
necessary.
Format
@LOAD (FROM) /switch(es) source/switch(es) object,...
where:
switches are keywords chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of LOAD command options.
They have different effects depending on their
position in the command line: placed before all
files in the command, they act as defaults for
all; otherwise they affect only the nearest
preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
source is the file specification of the source program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type of 3 or fewer characters; you cannot
use a generation number. This argument is not
necessary if you supply an object filespec.
object is the file specification of the object program.
The filename must be of 6 or fewer characters, and
the file type must be .REL; you cannot use a
generation number. This argument is not necessary
if you supply a source filespec.
Default (if you give neither source nor
object filespecs) - last filespecs
and associated switches you gave in a
LOAD-class command
Summary of LOAD Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
/10-BLISS
/36-BLISS
/68-COBOL
/74-COBOL
/ABORT
/ALGOL
/BINARY
/COBOL
/COMPILE
/CREF
/CROSS-REFERENCE
/DDT
/DEBUG
2-219
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
/FAIL
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
/FORTRAN
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"switch(es)"
/LIBRARY
/LIST
/MAC
/MACHINE-CODE
/MACRO
/MAP
/NOBINARY
/NOCOMPILE
/NOCREF
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
/NODEBUG
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
/NOLIBRARY
/NOLIST
/NOMACHINE-CODE
/NOOPTIMIZE
/NOSEARCH
/NOSTAY
/NOSYMBOLS
/NOWARNINGS
/OPTIMIZE
/PASCAL
/RELOCATABLE
/SAIL
/SEARCH
/SIMULA
/SNOBOL
/STAY
/SYMBOLS
/WARNINGS
LOAD Command Switches
/10-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-10 compiler.
Default for files of type .B10 and .BLI
/36-BLISS compiles the file using the BLISS-36 compiler.
Default for files of type .B36
/68-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-68 compiler.
Default for files of type .C68 or .68C
/74-COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL-74 compiler.
Default for files of type .C74 or .74C
/ABORT stops a compile if a fatal error is detected
2-220
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
and returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command
level.
/ALGOL compiles the file using the ALGOL compiler.
Default for files of type .ALG
/BINARY allows generation of an object (binary) file
for each source file given.
Default
/COBOL compiles the file using the COBOL compiler,
either COBOL-68 or COBOL-74, that your
installation has stored in the file
SYS:COBOL.EXE.
Default for files of type .CBL
/COMPILE forces compilation of the source file even if a
current object file already exists. Use this
switch along with a /LIST or /CREF switch to
obtain listings when you have current object
files.
/CREF same as /CROSS-REFERENCE.
/CROSS-REFERENCE
creates a file containing cross-reference
information for each compilation. The file
name is that of the object file; the file type
is .CRF. Use the CREF command to obtain a
listing of the file. (For COBOL files, the
switch automatically produces a cross-reference
listing.) See the TOPS-20 User Utilities Guide
for more information about the CREF program.
/DDT loads the DDT debugging program along with your
object file.
/DEBUG produces an object file containing debugging
information beyond that usually provided during
a compilation (for use with FORTRAN programs
only, and only if you have not given the
/OPTIMIZE switch).
/FAIL compiles the file using the FAIL compiler.
Default for files of type .FAI
/FLAG-NON-STANDARD
indicates nonstandard syntax in file.
/FORTRAN compiles the file using the FORTRAN compiler.
Default in the absence of a standard source
file type and a language switch
2-221
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
Default for files of type .FOR
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES:"/switch(es)"
passes the specified switches to the compiler
that will process the file(s) to which the
switch applies. You must include the switches
in double quotation marks (" ").
/LIBRARY same as /SEARCH.
/LIST prints a line printer listing of the program in
ASCII format. The name of this listing is the
filename of the object file. The /CREF switch
overrides /LIST when they both apply to the
same file.
/MAC same as /MACRO.
/MACHINE-CODE produces a file containing the generated
machine code. The filename is that of the
object file; the file type is .LST. For
high-level languages.
/MACRO assembles the file using the MACRO assembler.
Default for files of type .MAC
/MAP produces a loader map and stores it in the file
object.MAP, where object is the name of the
module containing the start address; or (if no
start address) nnnLNK.MAP, where nnn is your
job number.
/NOBINARY prevents generation of an object (binary) file.
Use this switch along with /LIST or /CREF to
allow these switches to take effect without
producing a new object file.
/NOCOMPILE prevents compilation if the associated object
file is current; otherwise it forces
compilation. Cancels the /COMPILE or
/RELOCATABLE switch.
Default
/NOCREF same as /NOCROSS-REFERENCE.
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE
prevents the creation of a cross-reference
file.
Default
/NODEBUG excludes special debugging information from
2-222
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
your object file.
Default
/NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD
prevents the flagging of non-standard syntax in
the file.
Default
/NOLIBRARY same as /NOSEARCH.
/NOLIST prevents a line printer listing of the program.
Default
/NOMACHINE-CODE prevents generation of a file containing
machine code.
Default
/NOOPTIMIZE prevents the generation of a globally optimized
object file (for FORTRAN programs only).
Default
/NOSEARCH requires all modules in the object file library
(the file accompanied by this switch in the
command line) to be loaded even if they are not
called by your program. Cancels the /SEARCH
switch.
Default
/NOSTAY stops the compiler from being placed in a
background fork. Use when /STAY is set as a
default for the compiler.
/NOSYMBOLS prevents a symbol table from being loaded along
with the object file.
/NOWARNINGS prevents display of warnings for nonfatal
errors.
/OPTIMIZE calls for generation of a globally optimized
object file, that is, one that runs as quickly
as possible (for FORTRAN programs only, and
only if you do not also give the /DEBUG
switch).
/PASCAL compiles the file using the PASCAL compiler.
Default for files of type .PAS
/RELOCATABLE identifies the input file as an object file
(regardless of its extension) and prevents
compilation of the source file, /RELOCATABLE
switch forcing use of an existing object file
2-223
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
even if the object file is out of date.
Default for files of type .REL
/SAIL compiles the file using the SAIL compiler.
Default for files of type .SAI
/SEARCH requires that the object file library (the file
accompanied by this switch in the command line)
be searched for modules called by your program
or by a program subroutine. Only these modules
are loaded, along with modules called from the
system libraries, which are always searched.
/SIMULA compiles the file using the SIMULA compiler.
Default for files of type .SIM
/SNOBOL compiles the file using the SNOBOL compiler.
Default for files of type .SNO
/STAY returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level
so that you can perform other work while the
system continues to load your program. You
immediately receive the TOPS-20 prompt (@ or
$), and can then issue any user command. Be
careful not to send incorrect data to programs
expecting terminal input. (Refer to the
CONTINUE command, Restrictions: Programs
Competing for Terminal Input. This switch
saves you from having to: issue a ^T to make
sure loading has begun; give a ^C to halt the
job; and issue a CONTINUE /STAY command to
remain at command level during loading.
/SYMBOLS loads a symbol table along with the object file
(helpful for debugging a program).
Default
/WARNINGS displays warnings for nonfatal errors.
Default
Characteristics
Compiling New Sources Only
Before loading programs, the system ordinarily compiles any
specified source (and only those sources) whose write date
is more recent than that of the object file of the same
name. You can override this action with the /COMPILE or
/RELOCATABLE switch.
2-224
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
Using Standard File Types
If you specify source files with standard types (.FOR, .MAC,
for example) in a LOAD command, the system automatically
calls the appropriate compiler when compilation is
necessary. If you specify source files by filename only,
the system searches your connected directory for a file of
this name and a standard type. To load programs from
sources that have nonstandard file types, give a switch to
indicate the proper compiler (/FORTRAN, /MACRO, /COBOL, or
/ALGOL). A switch will take precedence over a standard file
type if they indicate different languages. If no compiler
is indicated with either a switch or a standard file type,
the FORTRAN compiler is used.
Default Switches Not Passed to Compiler
Only switches specified in a LOAD-class command are passed
to the compiler; default switches are not passed. Instead,
the system assumes that the defaults for the compiler are
the same as the defaults for the LOAD-class command.
Hints
Commas Between Filespecs
If you give two or more filespecs separated by commas as
arguments to LOAD, the loaded programs exist in memory at
the same time and will operate as a single program. You can
use this feature to substitute one module for another under
varying conditions or for different applications.
Plus Signs Between Filespecs
If you give two or more source filespecs separated by plus
signs (+) as arguments to LOAD, they are compiled together
as if they were a single file. Their object module is
stored under any filename given as the "object" argument of
the command, or (if none) under the last filename in the
group and file type .REL.
Indirect Files as Arguments
You can store arguments (source and object filespecs,
switches) of a LOAD command in an indirect file, and specify
them by typing an at sign (@) and its filespec as a LOAD
command argument.
Establishing Default Arguments with the SET Command
2-225
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
You can issue the SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES command to
set up default global arguments to the LOAD command. Insert
this SET command in your COMAND.CMD file to change your own
defaults permanently.
Running Link Directly
The LOAD command automatically runs LINK, the system's
linking loader, but if you require more control of the
loading process you can run LINK directly. See the TOPS-20
LINK Reference Manual.
Using GET Instead of LOAD
If you have used the SAVE command to save your programs in
executable format, you can use the GET command instead of
LOAD to place them in memory. This is a faster and less
expensive means of loading programs into memory.
Wildcards Illegal with LOAD
The LOAD command does not accept wildcard characters (* and
%) in a file specification.
Warning - Generation Numbers, Long Filespecs
You must not give generation numbers when specifying source or
object files; the system automatically uses the highest
generation. Also, most compilers require filenames of 6 or fewer
characters and file types of 3 or fewer characters.
Related Commands
COMPILE, EXECUTE, and DEBUG other LOAD-class
commands for performing
related functions
SAVE for saving the loaded
program in an .EXE file
START for starting the loaded
program
SET DEFAULT COMPILE-SWITCHES for establishing
default switches for
LOAD-class commands
2-226
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
INFORMATION DEFAULTS COMPILE-SWITCHES for examining default
switches established
for LOAD-class commands
Examples
1. Load an object file into memory.
@LOAD LSTSQ.REL
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
2. Load the same program, allowing the system to update the
object file if necessary.
@LOAD LSTSQ/FORTRAN
FORTRAN: LSTSQ
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
3. Load a MACRO program and request a loader map or memory map.
(Notice the filename of this map.)
@LOAD TEST2/MAP
MACRO: FT
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
@TDIRECTORY
WRITE
PS:<LATTA>
FT.MAP.1 6-APR-85 15:23:17
TEST2.REL
4. Load a COBOL program, forcing a new compilation that includes
only the required modules. Request a map.
@LOAD /MAP TEST1/COMPILE, COBLIB/SEARCH
COBOL: DBL [TEST1.CBL]
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
5. Compile a program. Then load it, requesting a
cross-reference listing this time. Finally, save the program
2-227
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOAD)
in executable format.
@COMPILE TEST1/COBOL
COBOL: DBL [TEST1.CBL]
@LOAD /COMPILE/CREF
COBOL: DBL [TEST1.CBL]
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
@SAVE
TEST1.EXE.1 SAVED
6. Combine two FORTRAN sources into an object program under a
new name. Start this program.
@LOAD LSTSQ+ABRR REGRES
FORTRAN: LSTSQ
MAIN.
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
@START
7. Create an indirect file, and use it to load several modules
at once. Request cross-reference files, then give the CREF
command to turn these into listings.
@CREATE SERVTT.CMD
INPUT: PS:SERVTT.CMD.1
00100 HJRAD/COMPILE, FORLIB/SEARCH
00200 HJVTT/COMPILE, FORLIB/SEARCH
00300 HJINI/RELOCATABLE
00400 $
*E
[SERVTT.CMD.1]
@LOAD /CREF @SERVTT.CMD
FORTRAN:HJRAD
MAIN.
FORTRAN: HJVTT
MAIN.
LINK: LOADING
EXIT
@CREF
CREF: HJRAD
CREF: HJVTT
@
2-228
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGIN)
2.48 LOGIN
Begins your timesharing job and connects you to your log-in directory.
Format
@LOGIN /FAST (USER) name (PASSWORD) password (ACCOUNT)account -
(SESSION REMARK) remark
where:
name is your user name.
pwd is your secret password (which is not printed on
your terminal).
acc is an account name or number that you are authorized
to use.
remark is an optional remark of up to 39 characters that
identifies the terminal session for accounting
purposes. Check with INFORMATION JOB-STATUS.
Change with SET SESSION-REMARK.
/FAST is an optional switch that prevents the following:
processing of your LOGIN.CMD and COMAND.CMD files
and the system's LOGIN.CMD and COMAND.CMD files,
printing of system mail, and printing of the notice
of new mail. (Your system manager may remove this
switch from your system.)
Output
Acknowledgement of Valid Login
The system acknowledges a valid LOGIN command by printing
your job number, terminal number, and the current date and
time. In addition, it prints the date and time of your last
login. You can use this information to determine if another
user has learned your password and logged in to your account
since the last time you logged out.
Note that a batch job automatically logs in and logs out of
your account. The batch login sets the date and time of
your last login and should not be confused with illegal
access to your account.
Notice of User Mail and System Mail
2-229
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGIN)
When you log in, the system notifies you if another user has
sent you a message with one of the system mail programs.
The system then lists any system mail (mail sent by
privileged users to all users) that has accumulated since
your last login. Note that this mail appears in the log
file if a batch job is run for you between the time the mail
was sent and the time you logged in.
Output from Command Files
After a successful LOGIN, the system processes the LOGIN.CMD
and COMAND.CMD files in the directory defined by logical
name SYSTEM: and the command files in your login directory.
The files are processed in this order:
1. SYSTEM:LOGIN.CMD
2. LOGIN.CMD
3. SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD
4. COMAND.CMD
The system displays any output from the commands in these
files on your terminal. After execution of each command
file, the system displays the message "End of
file-name.CMD". If the last command in the command file is
a TAKE command with no arguments, this message is not
displayed.
Characteristics
Getting the Attention of the System
Before logging in, you may have to press any alphanumeric or
special character to display the system herald or greeting
and the @ prompt necessary for typing the LOGIN command.
If you are dialing in by telephone to a line declared
autobaud by the system manager, this initial character
enables the system to determine your terminal's speed
setting, as long as the speed is 300, 1200, 1800, 2400,
4800, or 9600. Type a second character if the terminal's
speed is 110 or 150. If your initial character(s) fails to
get the system identification message, press the BREAK key
twice, followed by another character(s).
Rights, Capabilities, and Charges
The LOGIN command gives you ownership rights to your log-in
directory, and any group rights established for you on the
public structure (usually named PS:). In addition, you are
granted whatever capabilities (for example, Maintenance,
2-230
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGIN)
Wheel) have been awarded to you, and can be sure that any
charges you incur for the use of system resources, such as
CPU time or the batch and printing systems, will be recorded
to your user name.
Hints
Commands in Files Executed at Log-in Time
For Affecting Entire Session or Current Level Only
Commands that affect your entire job, for example,
TERMINAL and DEFINE, belong in LOGIN.CMD. Commands
that affect only the current level of TOPS-20, for
example, many SET commands, must be put into COMAND.CMD
if you want them to be executed automatically after
every PUSH command as well as after LOGIN.
For Affecting Batch Jobs
As soon as one of your batch jobs logs in, the system
processes the command files in the directory defined by
logical name SYSTEM: and the command files in your
login directory. The files are processed in this
order:
1. SYSTEM:BATCH.CMD
2. BATCH.CMD
3. SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD
4. COMAND.CMD
Note that certain parameters of the batch job, for
example, its time limit and the name of its log file,
have already been set before these commands are
executed. Such parameters are set either to values
specified by switches in the SUBMIT command that starts
the batch job, or to default values in effect for the
job issuing this SUBMIT command. See also Hints - For
Affecting Nested Batch Jobs, below.
Avoiding Duplicate Commands in Command Files
After executing a SYSTEM: command file, the system
executes the file of the same name in your login
directory. The SYSTEM: command files may contain
commands that you already have in your own command
files. To avoid executing the same commands twice,
remove duplicate commands from your command files. To
display a SYSTEM: command file, give the command TYPE
SYSTEM:file-name.CMD.
2-231
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGIN)
For Affecting Nested Batch Jobs
By placing a SET DEFAULT SUBMIT command in your
BATCH.CMD file, you cause these defaults to be in
effect for a nested batch job, (a batch job started by
a SUBMIT command within the control file of another of
your batch jobs).
A Final TAKE Command
To suppress the display of the message "End of
file-name.CMD" after execution of a command file, make
the last command in the file a TAKE command with no
arguments.
Simplifying Log-ins
By using the SET DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT command you
cause subsequent LOGIN commands to require just your
user name and password.
Special Cases
Commands You Can Issue Before Log-in
You can give these commands and arguments before logging in:
Command Arguments
ATTACH
BREAK
DAYTIME
INFORMATION AVAILABLE
COMMAND-LEVEL
MAIL
TERMINAL-MODE
VERSION
LOGOUT
SET LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD
TIME-LIMIT
SYSTAT (except with subcommands LPT or OUTPUT)
TERMINAL
UNATTACH
Logging in to PTYs
You do not need to give a password when logging in under
your own user name to a PTY (pseudo-terminal).
Must Log In Within Five Minutes
2-232
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGIN)
If you do not log in within five minutes of your initial
CTRL/C, your job will be logged out automatically and you
will have to type CTRL/C again.
Logging in to Last Available Job Slot
If you attempt to log in to the last available job slot, the
system will not log you in but will send you an error
message instead. This job slot is intended for users who
wish to attach detached jobs using the ATTACH command. To
log in a new job you must wait until a current user logs
out.
Related Commands
ATTACH for joining to your terminal a
job that has already been
logged in
INFORMATION DIRECTORY for displaying the date and
time that you started the
current terminal session with
LOGIN.
LOGOUT for ending your timesharing job
SET ACCOUNT for changing your account
during a terminal session
SET DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT for specifying a default
account for subsequent log-ins
SET SESSION-REMARK for making or changing your
session remark during a
terminal session
Examples
1. Log in, using account 341 and automatically executing the
system LOGIN.CMD file and your LOGIN.CMD file.
@LOGIN C.RYDER ___ 341
| Job 39 on TTY41 GIDNEY:: C.RYDER (CTM) 8-Mar-89 11:04:21,
| Last interactive login 7-Mar-89 08:32:15
| Last non-interactive login 7-Mar-89 08:32:15
End of SYSTEM:LOGIN.CMD.1
End of LOGIN.CMD.1
2-233
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGIN)
2. Log in using the default account number and the /FAST switch.
@LOGIN /FAST C.RIDER ___
| Job 39 on TTY41 LAT1:LAT127(LAT) 8-AUG-88 11:10:34
| Last interactive login 8-Aug-88 11:04:21
| Last non-interactive login 8-Aug-88 11:04:21
3. Type a character to get the TOPS-20 herald, then log in,
using account 341 and inserting a session remark. Give
INFORMATION JOB-STATUS as your first command, to see this
session remark.
| Unauthorized Access is Prohibited
BOSTON (KL2871), Development System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(10)
@LOGIN URQUHART ___ 341 DEBUG ACCOUNT.PAS
| Job 42 on TTY29 LAT64:242(LAT) 8-Mar-90 09:15:15
| Last interactive login 7-Mar-90 09:20:32
| Last non-interactive login Never
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
| Host AURORA, Job 42, TTY29 LAT64:242(LAT)
| User URQUHART, FTN:<URQUHART>
Account 341 Session Remark:DEBUG ACCOUNT.PAS
2-234
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGOUT)
2.49 LOGOUT
Ends a timesharing job.
Format
@LOGOUT /FAST n
where:
/FAST is an optional switch that prevents processing of your
LOGOUT.CMD and the system's LOGOUT.CMD files.
n is an optional job number. Specify n only when logging out
a job other than your attached job.
Output
System Use Under Current Account
The system acknowledges a valid LOGOUT command by printing
your job number, user name, current account, terminal
number, and the current date and time. Then it shows the
total amount of CPU time you used during the terminal
session and the total length of time you were logged in,
followed by the account of CPU time used under the current
account and the length of time you were logged in under this
account.
LOGOUT.CMD Output
Before logging you out, the system processes the commands in
your login directory's LOGOUT.CMD file and the system's
LOGOUT.CMD file and displays any output from these commands.
Then, after execution of each file, the system displays the
message "End of LOGOUT.CMD", unless the last command in the
file is a TAKE command.
Characteristics
Expunging Your Log-in and Connected Directories
Before logging you out, the system expunges any deleted
files from your log-in and connected directories, and prints
a message if either directory is still exceeding its
assigned permanent disk quota.
Logging Out Other Jobs
2-235
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGOUT)
By specifying a job number you can log out any other job
logged in under the same user name as your attached job. A
user with Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled can log out
any job on the system. Whenever you log out another job,
the system prints the job's user name, terminal number, and
current program. You must then confirm the LOGOUT command
with an extra RETURN.
When a job is logged out by another job, the logout command
files are not processed.
Hints
A Final TAKE Command
To suppress the display of the message "End of LOGOUT.CMD"
after execution of your LOGOUT.CMD file, make the last
command in the file a TAKE command with no arguments. Be
sure the file contains only one RETURN after the TAKE
command.
Errors in LOGOUT.CMD
If there is an error in a command in your LOGOUT.CMD file,
the system processes the commands up to the one in error and
cancels the LOGOUT command. To log out, correct the error
in the command file or give the LOGOUT command with the
/FAST switch.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The LOGOUT command clears memory and leaves your terminal in the
state before log-in. LOGOUT n does not affect memory and leaves
your terminal at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
DETACH for disengaging a job from your terminal without
ending the job
LOGIN for beginning your timesharing job
UNATTACH for disengaging a job from another terminal without
ending the job
2-236
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(LOGOUT)
Examples
1. Log out your job.
@LOGOUT
End of SYSTEM:LOGOUT.CMD.2
End of LOGOUT.CMD.5
Killed Job 18, User C.RYDER, Account 341, TTY 233,
at 8-Mar-84 16:25:46, Used 0:0:5 in 1:2:16
2. Log out your job, receiving a warning message that your
directory is over its storage quota.
@LOGOUT
<URQUHART> Over permanent storage allocation by 8 page(s).
Killed Job 39, User URQUHART, Account 341, TTY 41
at 8-Mar-84 16:33:12, Used 0:0:1 in 0:1:5
3. Check what jobs are logged in under your user name. Log out
a detached job and verify that it is gone, then log out your
attached job.
@SYSTAT WALKER
18 DET EXEC WALKER
21* 31 SYSTAT WALKER
@LOGOUT 18
User WALKER, Detached, running EXEC
[Confirm]
@SYS WALKER
21* 31 SYSTAT WALKER
@LOGOUT
Killed Job 43, User WALKER, Account 341, TTY 226,
at 8-Mar-84 16:35:16, Used 0:0:1 in 0:1:1
2-237
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MERGE)
2.50 MERGE
Places an executable program into the current fork, combining it with
whatever program (if any) is already there.
Format
@MERGE (PROGRAM) filespec /switch
where:
filespec is the file specification of any executable program.
Default file type - .EXE
/switch is one or more of the following:
/OVERLAY allows pages of the DDT program
to be loaded over pages occupied
by the existing program in
memory.
/USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section
(from 0 to 37 octal) into which
your program is to be merged.
You can use this switch only if
your program can be contained in
one section.
Characteristics
Executable Files Only
If a program you try to merge is not in executable format,
you may get an immediate error message (that is,
"?UNEXPECTED END-OF-FILE TRAP...") or a delayed one (that
is, "?ENTRY VECTOR LENGTH IS NOT LESS THAN 1000") after the
merge. In either case, be sure that you have specified an
executable program before investigating further. The MERGE
command does not alter the entry vector if the file being
merged is in the proper .EXE format.
Existing Pages Not Overlaid
If there is a program already in memory when you give the
MERGE command, and pages of the new program overlay it, the
new program is not placed into memory, and the system prints
the error message, "?Illegal to overlay existing pages." To
force the existing pages to be overlaid, reissue the MERGE
2-238
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MERGE)
command using the /OVERLAY switch.
Effect on Memory
The MERGE command combines the specified program with the program
in the current fork. It does not affect the contents of the
current fork unless you specify the /OVERLAY switch.
Related Commands
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for examining the contents of
memory
GET for putting a saved (executable)
file into memory
SAVE for storing a copy of the program
in the current fork in a file in
executable format
START for starting the program in memory
Examples
1. Merge an executable program into memory.
@MERGE TESTF1.EXE
2. Place an executable system program in memory, then merge a
system debugging program with it. Give INFORMATION
MEMORY-USAGE commands to verify that both programs are
intact.
@GET SYS:DUMPER
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
34. pages, Entry vector loc 4715 len 3
Section 0 R, W, E, Private
0 RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE 4 1 R, CW, E
4-44 RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE.4 2-42 R, CW, E
@MERGE SYS:UDDT
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
45. pages, Entry vector loc 4715 len 3
Section 0 R, W, E, Private
0 RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE.4 1 R, CW, E
2-239
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MERGE)
4-44 RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>DUMPER.EXE.4 2-42 R, CW, E
764-767 RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>UDDT.EXE.1 1-4 R, CW, E
770-776 RANDOM:<NEXT-RELEASE>UDDT.EXE.1 5-13 R, E
2-240
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
2.51 MODIFY
Adds or changes switches for a request placed in a batch or output
queue.
Format
@MODIFY (REQUEST TYPE) queue (ID) identifier /switch(es)
where:
queue is the waiting list in which you placed the original
request, chosen from the following list:
BATCH for requests made using the SUBMIT
command
CARDS for requests made using the PUNCH
CARDS command
PAPER-TAPE for requests made using the PUNCH
PAPER-TAPE command
PLOT for requests made using the PLOT
command
PRINT for requests made using the PRINT
command
In the switch summary and descriptions, the word
Output in the column headed Applicable Queues means
all queues except the batch queue.
identifier is one of the following:
request ID number the unique identifier assigned by
the system to your request. This
is the number appearing under the
heading "Req#" in the list of
requests shown by the INFORMATION
BATCH-REQUESTS or INFORMATION
OUTPUT-REQUESTS command.
jobname the jobname of the request, either
the first six characters of the
first filename in the request, or
the argument you supplied to a
/JOBNAME switch when making the
2-241
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
original request. This is the name
appearing under the heading "Job
Name" in the list of requests shown
by the INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS
or INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS
command.
/JOBNAME:jobname switch showing the jobname of the
request to modify. You can specify
a particular jobname when making
the original request. See Special
Cases - /JOBNAME Switch, below.
/SEQUENCE:sequence number
switch showing the sequence number
of the request to modify. You can
specify a particular sequence
number when making the original
request.
Use an asterisk (*) as identifier to modify all your
requests in the specified queue.
/switches are keywords, chosen from the list
below, specifying the parameter you want
to change (and, where applicable, the
new value of this parameter)
Summary of MODIFY Command Switches
Switch Applicable Queues
/AFTER:date and/or time All
/BEGIN:n All
/CARDS:n BATCH
/COPIES:n Output
/DELETE PRINT BATCH
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n BATCH
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name:: All
/FEET:n BATCH
ASCII PRINT
COBOL PRINT
/FILE:ELEVEN PRINT
FORTRAN PRINT
/FORMS:forms name Output
/GENERIC Output
/HEADER Output
/JOBNAME:jobname All
/LIMIT:n PRINT
2-242
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
/LOWERCASE PRINT
/MODE:output mode Output
/NOHEADER Output
/NOTE:12-character message Output
ALWAYS BATCH
/OUTPUT ERRORS BATCH
NOLOG BATCH
/PAGES:n BATCH
/PRIORITY:n All
/PRESERVE All
/PROCESSING-NODE:node name BATCH
| /REMOTE-PRINTER: PRINT
/REPORT:title PRINT
NO
/RESTARTABLE:YES BATCH
Switch Applicable Queues
/SEQUENCE:n All
SINGLE
/SPACING:DOUBLE PRINT
TRIPLE
/TIME:hh:mm:ss All
/TPLOT:n BATCH
0 or NO
/UNIQUE:1 or YES BATCH
/UNIT:octal number Output
/UPPERCASE PRINT
/USER:user name All
MODIFY Command Switches
Applicable Queues
/AFTER:date and/or time, or ensures that the request
day of week (or TODAY) All will not be processed
and/or time until after he revised
date and/or time
specified. NOV-12-79,
and 18:00 illustrate two
arguments to this
switch. If you give
both date and time,
separate them with a
space. When given
alone, the time may be
preceded by a plus sign
2-243
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
(+), which will delay
processing by the
indicated length of time
from the present.
Alternatively, you can
give a day of the week
(for example, MONDAY) or
TODAY as argument; then
the job will not be
printed until the
beginning of the
following day. If you
follow this argument
with a plus sign and a
time, the job will be
further delayed by this
amount.
/BEGIN:n All gives the decimal line
number of the control
file at which processing
is to begin (for BATCH),
or the decimal page
number of the file at
which the output is to
begin (for CARDS,
PAPER-TAPE, PLOT, and
PRINT)
/CARDS:n BATCH specifies the decimal
number of spooled cards
the job is allowed to
punch
/COPIES:n Output tells how many copies of
the file to produce
/DELETE All deletes the file after
processing. Opposite of
/PRESERVE.
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n BATCH sets the request's
dependency count to the
new value n. This
switch can also be
followed by a signed
value, such as +n or -n,
which will increase or
decrease the old value
by the specified amount.
2-244
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
A batch request is not
processed until its
dependency count is 0.
See the TOPS-10/20 Batch
Reference Manual for
more information about
dependency counts.
/DESTINATION-NODE:node-name specifies the node on
All whose line printer the
log file of your batch
job is to be printed
(for BATCH), or the node
on whose line printer or
other output device your
request is to be
processed (CARDS,
PAPER-TAPE, PLOT, and
PRINT). Two colons (::)
following the node name
are optional.
/FEET:n BATCH specifies the decimal
number of feet of
spooled paper tape the
job is allowed to punch.
ASCII
COBOL
/FILE:ELEVEN PRINT specifies that the file
FORTRAN consists of ASCII text,
or COBOL SIXBIT text; or
(ELEVEN) contains four
eight-bit bytes in each
36-bit word; or is
FORTRAN ASCII text,
where column 1 of each
line is interpreted as a
carriage control
character.
/FORMS:forms name Output specifies, in six or
fewer characters, new
forms (determining the
size of banner, header,
and trailer sections;
the paper color, width,
and weight; vertical
format, carriage control
tape, the number of
plotter steps per inch,
2-245
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
etc.) to use with the
job
/GENERIC Output allows the output to be
produced on any
available device. Use
along with argument
PRINT to cancel the
/LOWERCASE or /UPPERCASE
switch, or with PLOT,
PRINT, CARDS, or
PAPER-TAPE to cancel the
/UNIT switch.
/HEADER Output causes a header section
containing the jobname
to be plotted, printed,
or punched before the
file itself is produced.
/JOBNAME:jobname All does not change the
jobname, but specifies
which job to modify.
Same as jobname in
"identifier" argument.
/LIMIT:n Output places a new limit of n
cards, feet, or pages on
the output of the job.
/LOWERCASE PRINT specifies that the file
is to be produced on a
line printer capable of
printing lowercase
characters.
ASCII
BCD
/MODE:BINARY CARDS designates the mode for
IMAGE punching the file onto
cards. See the /MODE
switch in the PUNCH
command description for
details.
ASCII
BINARY
/MODE:IMAGE PAPER-TAPE designates the mode for
IMAGE-BINARY punching the file onto
paper tape. See the
/MODE switch in the
2-246
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
PUNCH command
description for details.
ASCII
/MODE:BINARY PLOT designates the mode for
IMAGE plotting the file. See
the /MODE switch in the
PLOT command description
for details.
ARROW
ASCII
/MODE:OCTAL PRINT designates the mode for
SUPPRESS printing the file. See
the /MODE switch in the
PRINT command
description for details.
/NOHEADER Output prevents a header
section containing the
jobname from being
produced before the file
is produced.
/NOTE:message Output labels the header
section of output (the
section displaying the
jobname) with a message
or notation of up to 12
characters. The message
must be enclosed in
double quotation marks
if it contains spaces or
punctuation characters.
ALWAYS
/OUTPUT:ERRORS BATCH says whether you want
NOLOG the log file to be
printed always, or only
in the case of unhandled
errors occurring within
the job, or never. No
matter which option you
choose, the log file is
always created.
/PAGES:n BATCH specifies the decimal
number of spooled line
printer pages the job is
allowed to print.
2-247
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
/PRESERVE All saves the file after it
is processed. Opposite
of /DELETE.
/PRIORITY:n All assigns a new number n
reflecting the urgency
of the request. This n
must be from 1 to 63,
with larger numbers
receiving earlier
treatment.
/PROCESSING-NODE:node name::
BATCH specifies the IBM host
system on whose CPU the
JCL batch job is to be
run. The node name must
be of six or fewer
characters and must be
followed by two colons
(::).
| /REMOTE-PRINTER: n PRINT specifies the name of a
| remote print queue to
| print the file.
/REPORT:title PRINT scans your files and
processes only those
lines whose first
characters are the title
you give. This title
can contain up to 12
characters (including
the quotation marks that
must enclose the title
if it contains spaces).
The switch is used along
with the COBOL report
writer.
NO
/RESTARTABLE:YES BATCH specifies whether the
job should be started
again if the system
crashes and restarts.
/SEQUENCE:n All does not change the
sequence number of the
job but rather specifies
which job to modify.
Giving this switch is an
2-248
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
alternative to supplying
a request ID as the
request identifier when
you have several jobs
with the same jobname
(if you supply only the
jobname to identify the
job, the MODIFY command
affects all of them).
DOUBLE
/SPACING:SINGLE PRINT determines the spacing
TRIPLE between printed lines.
/TIME:hh:mm:ss BATCH revises the limit for
the maximum amount of
CPU time available to
the job; given in hours,
minutes, and seconds.
/TPLOT:n BATCH limits to n the maximum
number of minutes of
spooled plotter time
allowed for the job.
NO or 0
/UNIQUE:YES or 1 BATCH changes your
declaration, if two or
more jobs are submitted
from the same connected
directory, whether they
must run at separate
times.
/UNIT:octal number Output directs your request to
the line printer of the
specified octal unit
number.
/UPPERCASE PRINT specifies that the file
is to be produced on a
line printer that uses
uppercase characters
only.
/USER:user name PRINT, BATCH specifies the user whose
request is to be
modified; for privileged
| users only. This switch
| is required to modify a
| request from a user
2-249
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
| other than yourself.
Characteristics
MODIFY Effective Only Before Processing
The MODIFY command affects a batch or output request only
before processing has begun. After processing has begun,
you can only cancel the request with the CANCEL command, and
then make a new request.
Hints
Using the /DEPENDENCY-COUNT Switch
You can use the /DEPENDENCY-COUNT switch to specify the
order in which your batch jobs are processed. Set the
dependency count of all but the first job to some positive
value when you submit them, and include MODIFY commands in
each job's control file to bring the next job's dependency
count to 0 at the appropriate time. See Example 4.
Special Cases
/JOBNAME Switch
In the singular case when you want to modify several queue
requests of the same jobname using only one command, and
that jobname is purely numerical (for example, 5045), you
must use the /JOBNAME:jobname switch as second argument to
the MODIFY command. Do not also give the request ID or
jobname as a command argument if you give the
/JOBNAME:jobname switch.
Related Commands
CANCEL for removing batch and output
requests
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS for examining entries in the
batch queue
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS for examining entries in the
output queues
PLOT for placing requests in a plotter
output queue
2-250
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
PRINT for placing requests in a line
printer output queue
PUNCH for placing requests in a card
punch or paper tape punch output
queue
SUBMIT for placing requests in the batch
input queue
Examples
1. Modify a batch request (of jobname ARTIFI) to make it start
more quickly.
@MODIFY BATCH ARTIFI /PRIORITY:63
[1 Job modified]
2. Modify a print request (of jobname PHIAL) to include a note
on the header page.
@MODIFY PRINT PHIAL /NOTE:"DUE: 11/4"
[1 Job modified]
3. Modify one job of several having the same jobname.
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------
PRTSK 226 27 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-84 17:00
PRTSK 236 27 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-84 17:00
PRTSK 237 27 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-84 17:00
PRTSK 238 27 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-84 17:00
TESTF1 219 54 LATTA /Forms:NARROW
/After:8-Nov-84 17:00
There are 5 jobs in the queue (none in progress)
@MODIFY PRINT 237 /AFTER:18:00
[1 Job modified]
/new
4. Use the TYPE command to examine some of your control files.
(Notice the use of the MODIFY command within these files to
ensure that they are processed in a certain order when
submitted together.) Submit these three control files and
verify their placement in the batch input queue.
@TYPE ARVM%.CTL
2-251
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MODIFY)
ARVM1.CTL.2
@RUN TESTF1
@PRINT TESTF1.RSM
@MODIFY BATCH ARVM2 /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:0
ARVM2.CTL.2
@RUN TESTF2
@PRINT TESTF2.RSM
@MODIFY BATCH ARVM3 /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:0
ARVM3.CTL.2
@RUN TESTF3
@PRINT TESTF3.RSM
@PRINT SUMJOB.RSM
@SUBMIT /AFTER:17:00 ARVM1
[Batch job ARVM1 queued, request-ID 240, limit 0:05:00]
@SUBMIT /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:1 ARVM2
[Batch job ARVM2 queued, request-ID 241, limit 0:05:00]
@SUBMIT /DEPENDENCY-COUNT:1 ARVM3
[Batch job ARVM3 queued, request-ID 242, limit 0:05:00]
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ---- -------- ------------------------
ARVM1 240 00:05:00 LATTA /After: 8-Nov-84 17:00
/Uniq:Yes /Restart:No /Assist:Yes /Seq:1804
ARVM2 241 00:05:00 LATTA /Dep:1 /Uniq:Yes /Restart:No
/Assist:Yes /Seq:1805
ARVM3 242 00:30:00 LATTA /Dep:1 /Uniq:Yes /Restart:No
/Assist:Yes /Seq:1806
There are 3 jobs in the queue (none in progress)
2-252
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
2.52 MOUNT
Requests that a specified file structure or magnetic tape set be made
available for your job's use.
Format
@MOUNT medium (NAME) dev: /switch(es)
where:
medium is one of the following:
STRUCTURE - for mounting file structures (disk
packs)
TAPE - for mounting magnetic tapes
dev: is either the structure identification (or alias),
or the tape setname. The colon after the device
name is optional.
/switches are keywords, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of MOUNT command options.
Summary of MOUNT Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
/CHECK-SETNAME
200
556
800
/DENSITY:1600
6250
SYSTEM-DEFAULT
7-TRACK
/DRIVE-TAPE:9-TRACK
ANSI
BYPASS
/LABEL-TYPE:EBCDIC
TOPS-20
UNLABELED
/NEW
/NOUNLOAD
/NOWAIT
2-253
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
/OPERATOR
/PROTECTION:octal protection code Default code - 770000
/READ-ONLY Default - unless /NEW or
/SCRATCH specified
/REMARK:119-character remark
/SCRATCH
NUMBER number
/START:VOLID volid Default number - 1
/STRUCTURE-ID:structure identification
/VOLIDS:list of volids
/WRITE-ENABLED Default - if /NEW or /SCRATCH
specified
The switches /NOWAIT and /REMARK are useful with either the
STRUCTURE or TAPE medium, while /STRUCTURE-ID is for STRUCTURE
only; the other switches are for TAPE only.
MOUNT Command Switches
/CHECK-SETNAME ensures that the setname of the
mounted tapes matches the setname
you specify as the "dev:" argument
to the MOUNT command; otherwise an
error will be generated. For
labeled tapes only.
200
556
800 specifies the density, in bits per
/DENSITY:1600 inch, at which the tape set is to
6250 be read or written. Densities 200
SYSTEM-DEFAULT and 556 are for unlabeled tapes
only. SYSTEM-DEFAULT, one of the
values shown (usually 1600), is
established at system start-up
time.
7-TRACK
/DRIVE-TYPE:9-TRACK specifies the type of drive on
which the tape set is to be
mounted. Labeled tapes must be
mounted on 9-track drives.
ANSI
BYPASS
/LABEL-TYPE:EBCDIC tells the system to read and write
TOPS-20 the tape set according to the
2-254
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
UNLABELED specified label standard: ANSI;
EBCDIC - IBM TYPES (IN READ-ONLY
MODE); TOPS-20 - a superset of ANSI
used in TOPS-20 systems; UNLABELED
- for unlabeled tapes only. BYPASS
(for privileged users only) lets
you read and write any tape,
labeled or unlabeled, without any
label processing.
/NEW tells the system that you are
creating a new file set on an
existing tape set, whose setname is
then changed to be the name you
specify as the dev: argument to
the MOUNT command. (If the tape
set has more than one volume,
remember to specify their volids
using the /VOLIDS or /OPERATOR
switch.) The /CHECK-SETNAME and
/READ-ONLY switches are ignored if
present, and /WRITE-ENABLED is
assumed. Do not give the /START
switch if you give /NEW.
/NOUNLOAD asks the system not to unload a
volume (reel) of tape from its tape
drive when the drive is released by
a volume switch (change of volumes
required by a read or write
operation) or DISMOUNT command.
Use this switch to facilitate
processing when sufficient drives
are available.
/NOWAIT tells the system to return your
terminal to TOPS-20 command level
as soon as you give the MOUNT
command, and to send a message to
your terminal when the request has
been processed. Otherwise, your
terminal waits for the message.
/OPERATOR asks the operator to specify to the
system the volids of the tape set
you wish to mount. Do not use if
you have given the /VOLIDS switch.
2-255
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
/PROTECTION:code specifies a 6-digit octal
protection code for new volumes of
tape written during the current
mount request. The owner always
has full access to his tapes, so
the first two digits are always
interpreted as "77"; also, user
groups and directory groups have no
effect on tape access, so the
middle two digits are always
interpreted as "00". Therefore,
although six digits can be
specified, only the last two digits
affect the tape's protection code.
(If you specify only two digits,
these will be used as the last two
digits of the protection code.)
These two digits should be the sum
of the values corresponding to the
modes of access you want to allow,
chosen from the following list:
40 - read files in the file set
10 - overwrite or modify files
in the file set
04 - append files to the end of
the file set
For tapes of label-type TOPS-20
only.
Default code - 770000
/READ-ONLY ensures that all volumes in the
tape set will be mounted without
write rings, to prevent accidental
erasures.
Default except when /NEW or
/SCRATCH is specified
/REMARK:"remark" sends the specified remark to the
operator when he is notified of
your mount request. The text of
the remark must be enclosed in
quotation marks (" ") and can be up
to three, 80-character lines long
(including the MOUNT command line).
Note that while the entire remark
is displayed on the operator's
terminal, only the first line
appears in the INFORMATION
MOUNT-REQUESTS display.
2-256
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
For structures, the remark will be
sent only if the structure must be
put on line or physically mounted
to satisfy your mount request.
/SCRATCH same as /NEW, except that the
volumes in the file set you create
will be drawn from the pool of
scratch tapes (tapes not presently
owned by a particular user), rather
than from volumes you specify. Use
this switch to create a new file
set when you are not supplying the
volumes of tape to be used.
NUMBER number
/START:VOLID volid tells the system which volume
(reel) of tape to mount first when
satisfying your request. (You must
also give the /VOLIDS switch,
specifying the group of volumes you
will be using.) Use the NUMBER
argument to give the order of this
volume within the group (e.g., 1
for first, 2 for second), or give
the VOLID argument to repeat the
volid explicitly. You can use this
switch to save time and expense
when you know which volume you will
be using first.
Default - NUMBER 1
/STRUCTURE-ID:structure
identification gives the name of the structure as
recorded in the disk(s); used when
you gave an alias different from
the structure identification as
argument "dev:", above. See
Hints - Using the /STRUCTURE-ID
Switch, below. For privileged
users only.
/VOLIDS:volid, volid,... specifies the volids (volume
identifiers) of the volumes (reels)
of tape you want to access. These
must be consecutive volumes,
usually of the tape set specified
as the "dev:" argument to the MOUNT
command. Although you need not
specify every volume in the set,
any volume not specified will not
2-257
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
be accessible. Do not use this
switch if you have given the
/OPERATOR switch. See also
Characteristics - Using the /VOLIDS
Switch, below.
/WRITE-ENABLED ensures that all volumes in the
tape set will be mounted with write
rings.
Default when /NEW or /SCRATCH
is specified
Characteristics
Action of MOUNT STRUCTURE Command
If the Structure Has Already Been Mounted
If the structure for which you give the MOUNT command
is currently mounted, the system simply increases by 1
the mount count (the number of users who have given the
MOUNT but not the DISMOUNT command for the structure),
and returns your terminal to TOPS-20 command level. A
structure is not ordinarily dismounted until its mount
count is 0.
If the Structure Has Not Yet Been Mounted
If the structure for which you give the MOUNT command
is not currently mounted, your request stays in the
mount request queue until it is acted upon by the
operator or until you cancel the request.
Setnames (File Set Identifiers)
The setname, or file set identifier of a set of tapes, is
part of the label information written into each volume of
the set. It is rewritten every time the /NEW or /SCRATCH
switch is included in a MOUNT command. The "dev:" argument
of the MOUNT command becomes the setname in this case. If
you add volumes to an existing tape set, the system uses the
setname of the old volumes as the setname of the new ones.
Using the /CHECK-SETNAME Switch
If you give the MOUNT command to use an existing file
set (you do not specify the /NEW or /SCRATCH switch),
you can give the /CHECK-SETNAME switch to be sure that
the setname written on the tapes matches the setname
you specify as the "dev:" argument to the MOUNT
2-258
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
command. However, because more than one set of tapes
can have the same setname, the /CHECK-SETNAME switch
does not ensure that the correct tape set will be
mounted. For information about ensuring that the
correct tapes are mounted, see Characteristics - Using
the /VOLIDS Switch, below.
Volids (Volume Identifiers)
The volid, or volume identifier of a volume (reel) of
labeled tape, is part of the label information written into
each volume of tape. It is written only once, by the
operator during the tape's initialization procedure, and is
not changed during the life of the tape. (You should also
affix a paper label displaying the volid onto each reel of
tape.) You can get a list of volids for previously specified
or newly written volumes in any mounted tape set by giving
the INFORMATION VOLUMES command for that set.
Using the /VOLIDS Switch
If you give the MOUNT command to use an existing
multi-volume tape set (you do not specify the /SCRATCH
switch), you can give the volid of each volume you want
to use as an argument to the /VOLIDS switch. The
system ensures that the correct volumes of a labeled
tape will be mounted for your job as long as you use
the /VOLIDS switch to specify them. (If the tape set
does not consist of labeled tapes, the system does not
ensure that the correct tapes are mounted.)
The volids must represent consecutive volumes and must
be specified in the order written (oldest first). Note
that in general you cannot rely on any apparent
alphanumerical order when specifying the volids but
must maintain your own list of the volids in each tape
set. (See Hints - Keeping Track of Volids, below.) You
need not specify every volid in the tape set, but any
volume not specified will not be accessible through the
current MOUNT command. See also Characteristics -
Using the /OPERATOR Switch, and Special Cases -
Single-volume Tape Sets, below.
Using the /OPERATOR Switch
You can use the /OPERATOR switch instead of the /VOLIDS
switch when asking the system to mount a multi-volume
set of tapes. The /OPERATOR switch sends a message to
the operator asking him to specify the volid of each
volume himself. You must be sure to supply the
operator with a list of the volids you want him to
2-259
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
specify before giving a MOUNT command that contains the
/OPERATOR switch.
Hints
Checking Whether Operator is Present
You can give the INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command to find
out whether the operator is in attendance and can process
your mount request. Even if the operator is not in
attendance, your request remains valid until he returns and
deals with it in some way.
Using the /STRUCTURE-ID Switch
The /STRUCTURE-ID switch (available only to users with
enabled WHEEL or OPERATOR capabilities) gives the name of
the structure as recorded in the disk(s) of the structure
itself, where it is used by the system for identification.
Be sure that the structure identification is also written
with a felt-tip marker on the upper surface of each disk
pack, and on a gummed label on the pack cover.
Unless you give this switch, the system mounts the structure
with its structure identification as alias. (The alias is
the name you use when specifying the structure in file
specifications and commands; the INFORMATION STRUCTURE and
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES commands list structures by
alias only.) The /STRUCTURE-ID switch allows an enabled
WHEEL or OPERATOR to mount a structure under a name
different from the one recorded in the structure.
Use this switch for mounting a structure whose structure
identification is the same as the alias of a currently
mounted structure. In such cases give the MOUNT STRUCTURE
command with any unique alias as the "dev:" argument, and
specify the structure identification with the /STRUCTURE-ID
switch. In subsequent file specifications and commands
referring to the structure, use the alias only.
Dummy "dev:" Arguments for Mounting Tapes
If you want to use different tape sets on successive
runnings of a single program, you can refer to those tape
sets as a logical name in the program, and use this logical
name as the "dev:" argument of your MOUNT command when
mounting tapes. As long as you also specify the volid of
each volume of tape with the /VOLIDS switch (or use the
/OPERATOR switch to ask the operator to do so), you need not
give the actual setname of the tape set as the "dev:"
2-260
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
argument to the MOUNT command. The system considers the
"dev:" argument you supply to be a logical name defined as
the mounted tape set. Therefore, your program can access
the tape set using this logical name.
Keeping Track of Volids
Unless your site has a tape cataloging facility, you must
keep your own record of the volids in each of your tape
sets. After creating a file set on a new tape set, i.e, one
not previously owned by you (by giving the MOUNT command and
including the /SCRATCH switch), you should give the
INFORMATION VOLUMES command for the set before giving the
DISMOUNT command. The system will respond by printing a
list at your terminal of the volids of all volumes in the
tape set. Similarly, if you mount an old tape set and then
perform write operations, you should give INFORMATION
VOLUMES before giving DISMOUNT to learn the volids of any
volumes added to the set. Keep an ordered list of these
volids in a disk file in your directory, for use in
subsequent MOUNT commands when you give the /VOLIDS switch.
Special Cases
Single-volume Tape Sets
If the tape set you want to mount consists of a single
volume of tape, you need not give the /VOLIDS or /OPERATOR
switch to specify its volid. You can give the volid as the
"dev:" argument to the MOUNT command.
Structures Unavailable for Mounting
If the operator has given the OPR program command, SET
STRUCTURE UNAVAILABLE for a specified structure, the system
sends an error message including the phrase, "Structure
unavailable for mounting" in response to subsequent MOUNT
commands for the structure.
Restrictions
Using SET TAPE Commands
The TOPS-20 SET TAPE DENSITY and SET TAPE PARITY commands
are applicable to unlabeled tapes only (but see also
Warnings - /DENSITY Switch Has Limited Effect for Unlabeled
Tapes, below). The SET TAPE FORMAT and SET TAPE
RECORD-LENGTH commands are applicable to both labeled and
unlabeled tapes, but to labeled tapes only if they are
2-261
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
mounted using the /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI or /LABEL-TYPE:TOPS-20
switch. In addition, the files that you read from or write
to such a labeled tape must be in 36-bit format, and they
must not have the ;FORMAT attribute as part of their
specification.
Warnings
POP Command Cancels Unsatisfied Mount Requests
If you have given a PUSH command to obtain a new level of
TOPS-20 and then give a MOUNT command within that new level,
a subsequent POP command will cancel your mount request.
However, if the specified structure or tape set has already
been mounted, it will remain mounted despite your POP
command.
/DENSITY Switch Has Limited Effect for Unlabeled Tapes
The /DENSITY switch, when given in a MOUNT command for an
unlabeled tape, ensures only that your tape set will be
mounted on a drive that supports the specified density. It
does not ensure that the tape set will be read or written at
this density. To specify the density at which unlabeled
tapes are to be read and written, give the SET TAPE DENSITY
command.
Effect on Terminal
The MOUNT command with the /NOWAIT switch, leaves your terminal
at TOPS-20 command level. If you have not given the /NOWAIT
switch, your terminal waits until the system has processed your
request, or to return to TOPS-20 command level. This CTRL/C does
not cancel your request.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing mount requests
before they are processed
DISMOUNT for giving up access to a
particular tape drive or disk
drive
INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES for finding out just the names
of structures available for
mounting (these are listed
after DSK and PS, and before
2-262
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
the line printers (LPT, LPT0,
etc.))
INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS for finding out information
about pending mount requests
for structures and tape sets,
and about currently mounted
tape sets
INFORMATION STRUCTURE for finding out information
about currently mounted
structures
INFORMATION VOLUMES for finding out the volids of
all mounted volumes (including
newly created volumes) of a
tape set
SET TAPE commands for establishing job-wide
defaults for tape density,
format, parity, and record
length
Examples
1. Mount a structure (it is already physically mounted).
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
2. Mount a structure that is not yet physically mounted. After
completing the command, give CTRL/Cs to return to TOPS-20
command level.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE PYBL:
[Mount Request PYBL Queued, Request-ID 205]
[MOUNT request remaining in queue]
^C
3. Mount a structure, then give CTRL/Cs to return to TOPS-20
command level and cancel the mount request.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE PYBL:
[Mount Request PYBL Queued, Request-ID 136]
[MOUNT request remaining in queue]
^C
@CANCEL MOUNT 136
[1 mount request canceled]
2-263
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
4. Find out what structures are available for mounting (these
are listed after DSK and PS and before the line printers),
and mount one of these.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, LANG, TYM, MISC, SNARK, REL4, LPT, LPT0
LPT1, CDR, CDP, PCDP0, FE0, FE4-15, PTY7-10
PTY23-61, NUL, PLT, PLT0, DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: TTY220
@MOUNT STRUCTURE REL4: /NOWAIT
Structure REL4: mounted
5. Ask that a new tape set be created for you from scratch
tapes, and copy some files to it. Before dismounting the
tape set, find out the volids of the tape volumes you were
assigned.
@MOUNT TAPE LAT: /SCRATCH/LABEL-TYPE:TOPS-20
[Mount Request LAT Queued, Request-ID 104
[Tape set LAT, volume LAT mounted]
[LAT: defined as MT3:]
DN20A-11A.SYS.1 => MT3:DN20A-11A.SYS.131071 [OK]
DN20A-11B.SYS.1 => MT3:DN20A-11B.SYS.131071 [OK]
DN20A-11C.SYS.1 => MT3:DN20A-11C.SYS.131071 [OK]
@INFORMATION VOLUMES LAT:
Volumes of tape set LAT: 01P02,00L16
@DISMOUNT TAPE LAT:
[Tape dismounted, logical name LAT: deleted]
6. Find out if any tape drives can be used without giving the
MOUNT command (any such drives will be of the form MTAn).
Assign one of these and use the PLEASE program to ask the
operator to mount your (unlabeled) tape on this drive. Set
the necessary tape parameters, position the tape, and copy a
file from tape to the line printer. Then give up the
resources you have been using.
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, LANG, TYM, MISC, SNARK, REL4, MTA5, LPT, LPT0, LPT1
CDR, CDP, PCDP0, FE0, FE4-15, PTY23-61, NUL, PLT
PLT0, DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: TTY220
@ASSIGN MTA5:
@PLEASE
Enter text, terminate with CTRL/Z to wait for response,
or ESCape to send message and exit
PLEASE MOUNT MY TAPE NAMED UNLBLD IN READ-ONLY MODE ON MTA5:,
WHICH I HAVE ASSIGNED TO MY JOB. MTA5: IS A 7-TRACK
2-264
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
DRIVE THAT SUPPORTS TAPE DENSITIES OF 800 BPI, CORRECT?
[PLSOPN Operator at GIDNEY has been notified at 14:34:26]
@SET TAPE DENSITY 800
@SET TAPE RECORD-LENGTH 128
@REWIND MTA5:
@SKIP MTA5: 4 FILES
@COPY MTA5: LPT:
MTA5: => LPT: [OK]
@UNLOAD MTA5:
@DEASSIGN MTA5:
7. Perform the same task using the same volume of tape as in the
previous example by using the MOUNT command. Note that you
still cannot specify a particular tape file by name when the
tape is an unlabeled tape.
@MOUNT TAPE UNLBLD: /LABEL-TYPE:UNLABELED/DENSITY:800/DR -
I'VE-TYPE:7-TRACK
[Mount Request UNLBLD Queued, Request-ID 128]
[Tape set UNLBLD, volume UNLBLD mounted]
[UNLBLD: defined as MT3:]
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS/USER
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- ------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- -----
UNLBLD MTA4 Tape Locked UNLBLD 128 55 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@REWIND UNLBLD:
@SKIP UNLBLD: 4 FILES
@COPY UNLBLD: LPT:
MT3:..4 => LPT: [OK]
@DISMOUNT TAPE UNLBLD:
[Tape dismounted, logical name UNLBLD: deleted]
8. Mount a labeled tape containing the same files as in the
previous two examples, and perform the same task. Note that
you need not specify tape parameters in this MOUNT command,
as this information is present in the tape labels and is read
automatically. Also, the system ensures that the correct
volume of tape is used. Finally, you can specify the tape
file by name when using labeled tapes.
@MOUNT TAPE LBLD: /LABEL-TYPE:ANSI/VOLIDS:00115
[Mount Request LBLD Queued, Request-ID 133]
[Tape set LBLD, volume 00115 mounted]
[LBLD: defined as MT3:]
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS/USER
2-265
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- ------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- -----
00115 MTA0 Tape Locked LBLD 133 55 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@REWIND LBLD:
@COPY LBLD:COMPR.BRN LPT:
MT3:COMPR.BRN.13107 => LPT:COMPR [OK]
@DISMOUNT TAPE LBLD:
[Tape dismounted, logical name LBLD: deleted]
9. Mount a two-volume tape set (using the NOUNLOAD switch to
simplify volume changes) and overwrite any existing files
with new files. Then rewind the tape set. Give various
INFORMATION commands as you proceed, to verify logical name
and device assignments and to determine whether new volumes
have been written.
@MOUNT TAPE LAT: /WRITE-ENABLED/NOUNLOAD/NOWAIT/VOL-
IDS:DBL01, DBL02
[Mount Request LAT Queued, Request-ID 19]
[Tape set LAT, volume DBL01 mounted]
[LAT: defined as MT0:]
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS /USER
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- -------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- -----
DBL01 MTA1 Tape Enabled LAT 19 7 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@INFORMATION AVAILABLE DEVICES
Devices available to this job:
DSK, PS, LANG, SNARK, NTWORK, REL4, MISC, PACKAG, MTA5
MT0, LPT, LPT0, LPT1, CDP, PCDP0, FE0, FE2-15, PTY13-61
NUL, PLT, PLT0, DCN, SRV
Devices assigned to/opened by this job: MT0, TTY217
@INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES JOB
LAT: => MT0:
SYS: => DSK:,SYS:
@REWIND LAT: /ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
PS:<HELP>ACCT20.HLP.1 => MT0:ACCT20.HLP.131071 [OK]
PS:<HELP>ACCTPR.HLP.1 => MT0:ACCTPR.HLP.131071 [OK]
.
.
.
PS:<HELP>WAIT.HLP.2 => MT0:WAIT.HLP.131071 [OK]
PS:<HELP>WATCH.HLP.6 => MT0:WATCH.HLP.131071 [OK]
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS /USER
2-266
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- -------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- -----
DBL02 MTA3 Tape Enabled LAT 19 7 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@INFORMATION VOLUMES LAT:
Volumes of tape set LAT: DBL01,DBL02
@REWIND LAT: /ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS /USER
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- -------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- -----
DBL01 MTA1 Tape Enabled LAT 19 7 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
10. (For privileged users only.) Enable your capabilities and
call the OPR program, then give the PUSH command to OPR.
(This action puts you at TOPS-20 command level, but allows
you also to see the OPR messages caused by your TOPS-20
commands.) Repeat the write operations of the previous
example, then dismount the tape set and exit from the OPR
program. Notice that, because of the /NOUNLOAD switch in
your original MOUNT command, both volumes of your tape set
remain mounted on their drives. Therefore, you can mount the
tapes again without operator assistance.
@ENABLE
$OPR
OPR>PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(7)
@REWIND LAT: /ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
PS:<HELP>ACCT20.HLP.1 => MT0:ACCT20.HLP.131071 [OK]
PS:<HELP>ACCTPR.HLP.1 => MT0:ACCTPR.HLP.131071 [OK]
.
.
.
PS:<HELP>CHKPNT.HLP.1 => MT0:CHKPNT.HLP.131071
15:11:55 --Tape Drive Released By User--
MTA1: Volume DBL01 Remaining mounted on drive
15:11:57 --MTA3: Given to Request 19--
Volume DBL02 now in use by
User LATTA, Job 7, Terminal 217
[OK]
PS:<HELP>COBDDT.HLP.6 => MT0:COBDDT.HLP.131071 [OK]
.
.
2-267
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(MOUNT)
.
PS:<HELP>WAIT.HLP.2 => MT0:WAIT.HLP.131071 [OK]
PS:<HELP>WATCH.HLP.6 => MT0:WATCH.HLP.131071 [OK]
@INFORMATION VOLUMES LAT:
Volumes of tape set LAT: DBL01,DBL02
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS /USER
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- -------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- -----
DBL02 MTA3 Tape Enabled LAT 19 7 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
@REWIND LAT: /ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
15:14:51 --Tape Drive Released By User--
MTA3: Volume DBL02 Remaining mounted on drive
15:14:51 --MTA1: Given To Request 19--
Volume DBL01 now in use by
User LATTA, Job 7, Terminal 217
@DISMOUNT TAPE LAT:
[Tape dismounted, logical name LAT: deleted]
15:15:21 --Tape Drive Released By User--
MTA1: Volume DBL01 Remaining mounted on drive
@POP
OPR>EXIT
$DISABLE
11. Mount the same tape set as in the previous examples, but ask
the operator to specify the volids. Use the PLEASE program
to help you.
@MOUNT TAPE LAT: /WRITE-ENABLED/NOUNLOAD/NOWAIT/OPERATOR
[Mount Request LAT Queued, Request-ID 197]
@PLEASE
Enter text, terminate with CTRL/Z to wait for response,
or ESCape to send message and exit
PLEASE ENTER THE VOLIDS OF MY TAPE SET LAT: FOR
REQUEST 197. THEY ARE RECORDED IN YOUR TAPE
LIBRARY CATALOG. THANKS.
[PLSOPN Operator at GIDNEY has been notified at 14:34:26]
@INFORMATION MOUNT-REQUESTS /USER
Tape/Disk Mount Queue:
Volume Status Type Write Req Name Req# Job# User
------- -------- ---- ------- -------- ---- ---- -----
DBL01 Waiting Tape Enabled LAT 197 65 LATTA
There is 1 Request in the Queue
2-268
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PERUSE)
2.53 PERUSE
Allows you to read a file using read-only editor commands.
Format
@PERUSE (FILE) /switch(es) filespec
where:
/switch(es) are keywords that apply to the EDIT editor. For
descriptions of these switches, see the /CREATE or
EDIT commands.
filespec is the name of the file you want to read.
Default - the last file specification and
associated switches you gave in a
CREATE, EDIT, or PERUSE command
during the current terminal session
Characteristics
The PERUSE command runs the EDIT system program in read-only
mode. (However, see Special Cases - Using an Editor Other than
EDIT, below.) PERUSE is actually the same as the EDIT /READONLY
command. In EDIT /READONLY mode you can use only EDIT program
switches and commands that do not modify the file.
Hints
Avoid Accidental File Modification
Use PERUSE when it is important to avoid the risk of
accidentally modifying a file.
PERUSE Line in SWITCH.INI
Add a line to your SWITCH.INI file for use with the PERUSE
command. (See Example 3.)
Special Cases
Using an Editor Other than EDIT
The CREATE, EDIT and PERUSE commands in this manual assume
that these commands call on the program EDIT. If your job
uses another editing program, for example, EDT, the switches
2-269
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PERUSE)
and examples shown here will not be applicable.
The Editor used by the CREATE, EDIT and PERUSE commands is
specified by the logical name EDITOR:. You can find out the
name of this program by giving the command, INFORMATION
LOGICAL-NAMES EDITOR:. The job-wide definition (if any)
will be given first, followed by the system-wide definition;
the job-wide definition prevails if both exist. If the
definition of EDITOR: is SYS:EDIT.EXE, the CREATE, EDIT and
PERUSE commands will function as described in this manual.
Otherwise, you must consult the appropriate manual (for
example, the EDT-20 Reference Manual) for information.
Restrictions
Listing Available EDIT Read-Only Switches and Commands
Many of the EDIT switches and commands that are displayed in
response to a ? modify the file and do not function with
PERUSE. If you give a file-modifying switch, the switch is
ignored but no error message is displayed. If you give a
file-modifying EDIT command, you receive the message
%ILLEGAL COMMAND.
For further information on these switches and commands see
the EDIT Reference Manual.
Effect on Memory
The PERUSE command clears any unkept forks from memory, then
loads your edit program.
Related Commands
CREATE for creating new files
DIRECTORY-class commands for getting lists of existing files
EDIT for modifying files
TYPE for printing files on your terminal
2-270
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PERUSE)
Examples
1. PERUSE a file
@PERUSE FILEX.FOR
Read: FILEX.FOR.1
*P
00100 !THIS IS FILEX.FOR
2. PERUSE a file, ten lines at a time, and begin at line 100.
@PERUSE /PLINES:10 FIND.BAS
Read: FIND.BAS
*P 100
00100 ! ADD ROUTINE
00200 FOR X = 0 TO 400
00300 IF X$(X) = "XXX" THEN GOTO 2050
00400 NEXT X
00500 PRINT STRING$(10,10);"FILE FULL"\SLEEP 4\GOTO 199
00600 PRINT E$ \LINPUT"ENTER THE NAME ";M$
00700 IF M$ <> "" THEN LET X$(X) = M$ ELSE GOTO 199
00800 PRINT E$ \LINPUT"ENTER THE NUMBER ";O$
00900 IF O$ <> "" THEN LET Y$(X) = O$ ELSE GOTO 199
01000 PRINT E$\INPUT"MORE NAMES TO ENTER ";D$
*E
2-271
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PLOT)
2.54 PLOT
Places requests in a plotter output queue.
Format
@PLOT (FILES) /switch(es) filespec/switch(es),...
where:
switches are keywords, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of PLOT command options.
These switches are of two kinds: job switches and
file switches.
Job switches apply to all files specified in the
command, no matter where you give the switches.
File switches have different effects depending on
their positions in the command line: placed
before all files in the command, they act as
defaults for all; otherwise they affect only the
nearest preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
filespec is the specification of a file you wish to plot.
You can use wildcard characters (% and *) to
specify more than one file.
Summary of PLOT Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
Job Switches
(affecting the entire command)
/ACCOUNT:account Default account - your current
account
/AFTER:date and/or time
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name
/FORMS:forms name Default forms name - NORMAL
/GENERIC
/JOBNAME:6-character name Default name - first six
characters of first
filename in request
/LIMIT:n Default n - calculated from length
of files
/NOTE:12-character message
YES
2-272
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PLOT)
/NOTIFY:NO
/PRIORITY:n Default n - 10
/SEQUENCE:n
/UNIT:octal number
/USER:user name
File Switches
(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all filespecs)
/COPIES:n Default n - 1
/DELETE Default for files of type .LST
/HEADER
ASCII
/MODE:BINARY
IMAGE
/NOHEADER
/PRESERVE Default for all files except those
of type .LST
PLOT Command Switches
Job Switches
(affecting the entire command)
/ACCOUNT:account specifies the account of 39 or
fewer characters to charge for your
plotting request. This account
must be valid for your user name.
Default account - your current
account.
Check with
INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS.
/AFTER:date and/or time, or ensures that the job will not be
plotted until after the date
day of week (or TODAY) and/or time specified. NOV-12-79
and/or time and 18:00 illustrate two arguments
to this switch. If you give both
date and time, separate them with a
space. When given alone, the time
may be preceded by a plus sign (+),
which will delay processing by the
indicated length of time from the
2-273
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PLOT)
present.
Alternatively, you can give a day
of the week (such as MONDAY) or
TODAY as argument; then the job
will not be plotted until the
beginning of the following day. If
you follow this argument with a
plus sign and a time, the job will
be further delayed by this amount.
/DESTINATION-NODE:node-name specifies the remote node on whose
plotter your request is to be
satisfied. Two colons (::)
following the node name are
optional.
/FORMS:forms name specifies, in six or fewer
characters, the forms (determining
the size of banner, header, and
trailer sections; the paper color,
width, and weight; the number of
plotter steps per inch, location of
the origin for plotted data, and so
on.) to use for the plotting job.
Using this switch may delay
processing until the operator can
mount the proper forms. Note that
your installation may provide a
different default argument to this
switch.
Default forms name - NORMAL
/GENERIC allows any plotter to be used for
filling the request; use this
switch to override a previous /UNIT
switch.
Default
/JOBNAME:name assigns a name (of six or fewer
characters) to the plotting job.
Default name - first six
characters of
first filename
in the request
/LIMIT:n places a limit of n minutes of
plotter time on the output of the
plotting job.
Default limits, usually
adequate, are computed
2-274
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PLOT)
from the size of the
files you want plotted
/NOTE:message labels the header section of output
(the section displaying the
jobname) with a message or notation
of up to 12 characters. The
message Must be enclosed in double
quotation marks if it contains
spaces or non-alphanumeric
characters.
YES
/NOTIFY:NO tells the system whether to send a
message to your terminal when the
request has been satisfied.
Default argument - NO
Default argument (if switch is
given) - YES
/PRIORITY:n assigns a number n, reflecting the
urgency of the plot request. This
n must be from 1 to 63, with larger
numbers receiving earlier
treatment. Note that for
non-privileged users the maximum
priority that can be specified is
lower (usually 20), and that your
installation may provide a
different value both for this
maximum and for the default
priority.
Default n - 10
/SEQUENCE:n specifies sequence number n for the
printing request, which you can use
when modifying or canceling the
request.
/UNIT:octal number directs your request to the plotter
of the specified octal unit number.
/USER:user name specifies the user who is to be the
owner of the plot request. For
privileged users only.
2-275
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PLOT)
File Switches
(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all file specifications)
/BEGIN:n starts the plotting at page n of
the file.
Default n - 0
/COPIES:n requests that n copies of the file
be plotted; n must be less than or
equal to 62.
Default n - 1
/DELETE deletes the file after plotting.
Default for files of type .LST
/HEADER causes a header section containing
the jobname to be produced before
the file itself is plotted.
Default
ASCII
/MODE:BINARY designates the mode for plotting
IMAGE the file. ASCII treats each word
of a disk file as five seven-bit
bytes, and truncates each byte to
six bits before plotting it.
BINARY treats each word as six
six-bit bytes, each of which is
plotted without modification.
IMAGE is the same as BINARY.
/NOHEADER prevents the production of a header
section before the file.
/PRESERVE saves the file after plotting.
Default for all files except
those of type .LST
Output
Jobname, Request ID, Limit, Number of Input Files
As soon as you complete a valid PLOT command, the system
responds by printing, on your terminal, the jobname, request
ID number, the limit in minutes of plotter time assigned to
the request, and the number of input files in the request.
2-276
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PLOT)
Characteristics
Ordinary Operation - No Switches
For most purposes you can use the PLOT command with just a
series of filespecs for arguments.
Switch Defaults Set by System Manager
The defaults shown in the list of switches are correct for
most user sites. However, your system manager can change
some of those default settings. The switches most commonly
affected are: /FORMS, /HEADER and /NOHEADER, /LIMIT, and
/PRIORITY.
Hints
Using SET DEFAULT PLOT
If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
using PLOT, give the SET DEFAULT PLOT command to establish
them as defaults (at the current TOPS-20 command level) for
the remainder of your terminal session. The switches will
then behave as if you had typed them directly after the
command name. You can supersede any of these default
switches by actually supplying the switch, with another
value, when you give the PLOT command. Put SET DEFAULT PLOT
into a file of specification COMAND.CMD in your log-in
directory if you want these default switches to be in effect
for all levels of future terminal sessions as well.
Special Cases
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT Switch
You can give the special switch, /SPOOLED-OUTPUT, as sole
argument to the PLOT command. This causes any spooled
output accumulated so far during your terminal session to be
placed in a plotter queue immediately, rather than at
log-out time. The/SPOOLED-OUTPUT switch is useful only if
the SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT DEFERRED command is in effect.
Programs that you run (especially FORTRAN programs) may
create spooled output for the plotter, or you can create it
directly by giving the command, COPY filespec PLT:.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing PLOT requests
2-277
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PLOT)
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS for examining requests in the
output queues
MODIFY for changing PLOT requests
before processing has begun
SET DEFAULT PLOT for establishing default
switches for subsequent PLOT
commands.
Examples
1. Plot a file.
@PLOT CNTR.MED
[Plotter job CNTR queued, request-ID 91, limit 2]
2. Send all files having a four-character file type ending in
"CTH" to the plotter. Assign a jobname to the request, and
ensure they are not plotted until tomorrow. Check for the
request in the output queues, and then cancel it.
@PLOT *.CTH /JOBNAME:HATCH/AFTER:TODAY
[Job HATCH Queued, Request-ID 94, Limit 3, 3 Files]
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS
Plotter Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- -----------
CNTR 91 2 LAUDERDALE
HATCH 94 3 ASHLEY /After:21-Jul-79 00:00
There are 2 jobs in the queue (none in progress)
@CANCEL PLOT 94
[1 Job canceled]
2-278
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(POP)
2.55 POP
Terminates the current level of TOPS-20 and returns you to its
superior process.
Format
@POP (COMMAND LEVEL)
Characteristics
POP the Opposite of PUSH
You can do one and only one POP command for every previous
PUSH command. Giving too many POP commands will cause an
error message to be printed on your terminal.
Job Parameters Affected by POP
As soon as you complete a valid POP command at some level of
TOPS-20, you give up the copy of memory for that level of
TOPS-20 and any program you were running. Any defaults
established at that level (such as default filespecs for
LOAD-class and EDIT-class commands, defaults specified by
SET DEFAULT commands) are cancelled as well. If POP returns
you to a higher level of TOPS-20, all these parameters
revert to any values established at that higher level.
Special Cases
Returning to Other Programs With POP
The POP command usually returns you to the level of TOPS-20
from which you gave a previous PUSH command. But a few
system programs such as PTYCON and OPR, also allow you to
give PUSH to get a new level of TOPS-20. Giving the POP
command to this level of TOPS-20 returns you to that
program.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The POP command clears memory, terminates the current level of
TOPS-20, and returns your terminal to the previous TOPS-20
command level (but see Special Cases, above). Memory for the
previous TOPS-20 command level is not affected by this action.
2-279
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(POP)
Related Commands
CONTINUE for resuming execution of a program in
memory
INFORMATION SUPERIORS for information on the number of forks that
are superior to the current EXEC level
PUSH for obtaining a new level of TOPS-20
Examples
1. Give the POP command to return to a higher level of the
TOPS-20 command processor (EXEC).
@POP
2. Run a program and halt it with CTRL/Cs. Give a CONTINUE STAY
command to resume its execution, and then the PUSH command
for a new level of TOPS-20. Run another program at this
lower level, then use the POP command to return to the first
level; in this case you return before receiving the final
message of the first program.
@RUN DMN
^C
@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(7)
@RUN TESTF1
THIS IS A TEST.
CPU time: 0.03 Elapsed time: 0:72
EXIT
@POP
EXIT
2-280
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
2.56 PRINT
Places requests in a line printer output queue.
Format
@PRINT (FILES) /switch(es) filespec/switch(es),...
where:
switches are keywords, chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of PRINT command options. These
switches are of two kinds: job switches and file
switches.
Job switches apply to all files specified in the
command, no matter where you give the switches.
File switches have different effects depending on
their positions in the command file: placed before
all files in the command, they act as defaults for
all; otherwise they affect only the nearest
preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
filespec is the specification of a file you wish to print.
You can use wildcard characters (% and *) to specify
more than one file.
Summary of PRINT Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
Job Switches
(affecting the entire command)
/ACCOUNT:account Default account - your current
account
/AFTER:date and/or time
/CHARACTERISTIC:characteristic value
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name
/FORMS:forms name Default forms name - NORMAL
/GENERIC
/JOBNAME:6-character name Default name - first six
characters of first
filename in request
/LIMIT:n Default n - calculated from length
of files
2-281
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
/LOWERCASE
/NOTE:12-character message
YES
/NOTIFY:NO
/PRIORITY:n Default n - 10
/REMOTE-PRINTER:type
/SEQUENCE:n
/UNIT:octal number
/UPPERCASE
/USER:user name
File Switches
(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all filespecs)
/BEGIN:n Default n - 0
/COPIES:n Default n - 1
/DELETE Default for files of type .LST
ASCII
COBOL
/FILE:ELEVEN
FORTRAN Default for files of type .DAT
only
/HEADER
ARROW
ASCII
/MODE:OCTAL
SUPPRESS
/NOHEADER
/PRESERVE Default for all files except those
of type .LST
/REPORT:12-character title
SINGLE
/SPACING:DOUBLE
TRIPLE
PRINT Command Switches
Job Switches
(affecting the entire command)
2-282
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
/ACCOUNT:account specifies the account of 39 or fewer
characters to charge for your
printing request. This account must
be valid for your user name.
Default account - your current
account (check
with
INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS)
/AFTER:date and/or time, or
day of week (or TODAY)
and/or time ensures that the job will not be
printed until after the date and/or
time specified. NOV-12-79 and 18:00
illustrate two arguments to this
switch. If you give both date and
time, separate them with a space.
When given alone, the time may be
preceded by a plus sign (+), which
will delay processing by the
indicated length of time from the
present.
Alternatively, you can give a day of
the week (such as MONDAY) or TODAY as
argument; then the job will not be
printed until the beginning of the
following day. If you follow this
argument with a plus sign and a time,
the job will be further delayed by
this amount.
/CHARACTERISTIC:characteristic value
specifies an alphanumeric string that
communicates print features, such as
layout or lettering type, to the
remote system for DQS remote print
requests. The user can specify one
or more characteristic keywords;
multiple values are separated by
commas. You can also specify numeric
bit values, which must be separated
by commas and enclosed in
parentheses. The keywords to the
/CHARACTERISTIC switch are defined by
the SET REMOTE-PRINTING
CHARACTERISTICS command. The maximum
length of each characteristic keyword
is 14 characters, and the name must
2-283
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
begin with an alphabetic character.
You must use the /CHARACTERISTIC
switch in conjunction with the
/REMOTE-PRINTER switch not with the
/UNIT switch, which applies only to
local and cluster printers.
/DESTINATION-NODE:node-name
specifies the remote node on whose
line printer your request is to be
printed. The remote node can be
either an IBM remote station, a node
in a TOPS-20 cluster, a DQS server
node, or LATserver. Two colons (::)
following the node name are optional.
You can use this switch either to
send output to a remote node or to
redirect it from a remote node.
/FORMS:forms name specifies, in six or fewer
characters, the forms (determining
the number of banner, header, and
trailer pages; the paper color,
width, and weight; vertical format,
carriage control tape, and so on) to
use for the printing job. Using this
switch may delay processing until the
operator can mount the proper forms.
Note that your installation may
provide a different default argument
to this switch.
Default forms name - NORMAL
/GENERIC allows any printer, either upper or
lowercase, and of any unit number, to
be used for satisfying the request.
Use this switch to override a
previous /UPPERCASE, /LOWERCASE, or
/UNIT switch.
Default
/JOBNAME:name assigns a name (of six or fewer
characters) to the printing job.
Default name - first six
characters of
first filename in
the request
/LIMIT:n places a limit of n pages on the
output of the printing job.
2-284
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
Default limits, usually
adequate, are computed
from the size of the
files you want printed
/LOWERCASE directs the job to a line printer
that can print both uppercase and
lowercase characters.
/NOTE:message labels the header page of output (the
page displaying the jobname) with a
message or notation of up to 12
characters. The message must be
enclosed in double quotation marks if
it contains spaces or
non-alphanumeric characters.
YES
/NOTIFY:NO tells the system whether to send a
message to your terminal when the
request has been satisfied.
Default argument - NO
Default argument (if switch is
given) - YES
/PRIORITY:n assigns a number n, reflecting the
urgency of the print request. This n
must be from 1 to 63, with larger
numbers receiving earlier treatment.
Note that for non-privileged users
the maximum priority that can be
specified is lower (usually 20), and
that your installation may provide a
different value both for this maximum
and for the default priority.
The system acknowledges this switch
by displaying the message [Priority
has been modified].
Default n - 10
/REMOTE-PRINTER:type directs a print request to a remote
destination. The destination is
either a remote printer queue for DQS
printers or a LATserver PORT or
SERVICE for LAT printers. The type
refers to an actual remote queue name
or an alias of a remote printer queue
name for DQS printers, or to an
application terminal on a reachable
2-285
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
LATserver. Aliases are set up with
the SET REMOTE-PRINTER command.
You can use the /REMOTE-PRINTER
switch with the /DESTINATION-NODE
switch, but not with the /UNIT
switch.
/SEQUENCE:n specifies sequence number n for the
printing request, which you can use
when modifying or canceling the
request.
/UNIT:octal number directs your request to the line
printer with the specified octal unit
number. This switch only applies to
local or TOPS-20 cluster print
requests.
/UPPERCASE directs the job to a line printer
that uses only uppercase characters.
/USER:user name specifies the user who is to be the
owner of the print request. For
privileged users only.
File Switches
(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all file specifications)
/BEGIN:n starts the printing at page n of the
file.
Default n - 0
/COPIES:n requests that n copies of the file be
printed; n must be less than or equal
to 62.
Default n - 1
/DELETE deletes the file after printing.
Default for files of type .LST
ASCII specifies that the file consists of
COBOL ASCII text, or COBOL SIXBIT text; or
/FILE:ELEVEN (ELEVEN) contains four eight-bit
FORTRAN bytes in each 36-bit word - for
emulating paper tape punch only; or
is FORTRAN ASCII text, where column 1
of each line is interpreted as a
2-286
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
carriage control character.
Default - ASCII (except for
files of type .DAT,
for which the default
is FORTRAN)
/HEADER causes header pages containing the
jobname to be printed before the file
itself.
Default
ARROW designates the mode for printing the
ASCII file. ARROW prints the file
/MODE:OCTAL literally; but denotes each control
SUPPRESS character by an up-arrow (^) and the
character, except for the following,
which are reproduced literally (that
is, the control characters perform
their normal actions): carriage
return, line feed, horizontal tab,
vertical tab, form feed, ^P, ^Q, ^R,
^S, and ^T. ASCII prints the file
literally, without omissions or
substitutions, except for the escape
character (^[) which is represented
as a dollar sign.
OCTAL prints each word in the file as
unsigned octal integers; 3 groups of
128 words (8 rows of 16 columns each)
appear on a standard line printer
page. SUPPRESS prints the file
without any blank lines, causing all
vertical format characters (CTRL/K,
CTRL/L, CTRL/Q, CTRL/R, CTRL/S, and
CTRL/T) to be converted to CRLFs
(carriage return/linefeeds), and then
interpreting multiple occurrences of
CRLFs as a single CRLF.
Default - ARROW
/NOHEADER prevents the printing of header pages
before the file.
/PRESERVE saves the file after printing.
Default for all files except
those of type .LST
/REPORT:title scans your files and prints only
those lines whose first characters
are the title you give. This title
2-287
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
may contain up to 12 characters
(including the quotation marks that
must enclose the title if it contains
spaces). The switch is used along
with the COBOL report writer.
SINGLE
/SPACING:DOUBLE determines the spacing between lines
TRIPLE in the printout.
Default - SINGLE
Output
Jobname, Request ID, Limit, Number of Files
As soon as you complete a valid PRINT command, the system
responds by printing, on your terminal, the jobname, the
node name (if printed on remote node), request ID number,
the limit in pages of output assigned to the request, and
the number of files in the request.
Characteristics
Ordinary Operation - No Switches
For most purposes you can use the PRINT command with just a
series of filespecs for arguments.
Switch Defaults Set by System Manager
The defaults shown in the list of switches are correct for
most user sites. However, your system manager can change
some of those default settings. The switches most commonly
affected are: /FORMS, /HEADER and /NOHEADER, /LIMIT, and
/PRIORITY.
Restrictions
Using /UNIT, /REMOTE-PRINTER, and /CHARACTERISTICS
You must use the /CHARACTERISTICS switch in conjunction with
the /REMOTE-PRINTER switch and not with the /UNIT switch,
which applies only to local and cluster printers. If you
use the /UNIT switch in conjunction with the /REMOTE-PRINTER
switch, it is ignored. The /CHARACTERISTICS switch is
ignored if used in a local or cluster print job.
2-288
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
NOTE
The /CHARACTERISTICS switch does not apply to
LATprinters.
Hints
Using SET DEFAULT PRINT
If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
using PRINT, give the SET DEFAULT PRINT command to establish
them as defaults (at the current TOPS-20 command level) for
the remainder of your terminal session. The switches will
then behave as if you had typed them directly after the
command name. You can supersede any of these default
switches by actually supplying the switch, with another
value, when you give the PRINT command. Put SET DEFAULT
PRINT into a file of specification COMAND.CMD in your log-in
directory if you want these default switches to be in effect
for all levels of future terminal sessions as well.
Special Cases
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT Switch
You can give the special switch, /SPOOLED-OUTPUT, as sole
argument to the PRINT command. This causes any spooled
output accumulated so far during your terminal session to be
placed in a line printer queue immediately, rather than at
log-out time. The /SPOOLED-OUTPUT switch is useful only if
the SET SPOOLED-OUTPUT DEFERRED command is in effect.
Programs that you run (especially FORTRAN programs) may
create spooled output for the printer, or you can create it
directly by writing to device LPT: (by giving the command,
COPY filespec LPT:), or giving a CREF command.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing PRINT
requests
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS for examining requests in
the output queues
MODIFY for changing PRINT requests
before processing has begun
SET DEFAULT PRINT for establishing default
2-289
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
switches for subsequent
PRINT commands
SET REMOTE-PRINTING CHARACTERISTICS for setting up a string to
be used as input to the
/CHARACTERISTICS switch
SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER for setting up a string to
be used as input to the
/REMOTE-PRINTER switch
SET REMOTE-PRINTING SYSTEM-DEFINITIONS for setting up remote
printing information for a
job based on input in
SYSTEM:REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD
Examples
1. Print two of your files.
@PRINT 4-UPED.TXT, CMPTN.TXT
[Printer job 4-UPED queued, request 302, limit 200, 2 files]
2. Print three files, assigning a jobname and a note for the
header page; postpone the printing. Make 4 copies of one of
the files, and double-space another one.
@PRINT /JOBNAME:COMFIL/NOTE:CONFIDENTIAL/AFTER:12-DEC-85 -
FOO.CTL, HOLMAX.CTL/COPIES:4, INSIDE.RNO/SPACING:DOUBLE
[Printer job COMFIL queued, request #306, limit 27, 3 files]
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER/ALL
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------------
COMFIL 306 27 LATTA /After:12-Dec-85 0:00
/Note:CONFIDENTIAL /Seq:1865
There is 1 job in the queue (none in progress)
3. Print a job in a hurry, by assigning a high priority and
skipping the header and first five pages. Print 10 copies of
the first file, and 18 of the second.
@PRINT /JOBNAME:RUSH /PRIORITY:60/NOHEADER/BEGIN:5/COPIES:1 -
0 RFM.CTL, HOLMAX.CTL/COPIES:18
[Printer job RUSH queued, request #312, limit 27, 2 files]
[Priority has been modified]
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER/ALL
Printer Queue:
2-290
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PRINT)
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------------
* RUSH 312 27 LATTA On Unit:0 /Prio:20
/Seq:1870
Started at 15:00:11, printed 10 of 27 pages
COMFIL 306 27 LATTA /After:12-Dec-79 0:00
/Note:CONFIDENTIAL /Seq:1865
There are 2 jobs in the queue (1 in progress)
4. Print a job with a P90 characteristic on a XEROX 8700 printer
on a VMS system.
@PRINT FILE4.MEM/REMOTE-PRINTER:XEROX/CHARACTERISTIC:P90
[Printer job FILE4 queued, request #33, limit 1 files
5. Print a job on LATserver printer in one of four ways. The
TOPS-20 host has access to a printer service named LASER,
which is attached to port LC14 on a LATserver named LAT97.
o SERVICE name only
@PRINT FILE.DAT/REMOTE-PRINTER:LASER
[Printer job FILE queued, request #43, limit 1 files]
o SERVICE name and SERVER name
@PRINT FILE.DAT/REMOTE-PRINTER:LASER/DESTINATION-NODE:LAT97
[Printer job FILE queued, request #45, limit 1 files]
o PORT name and SERVER name
@PRINT FILE.DAT/REMOTE-PRINTER:LC14/DESTINATION-NODE:LAT97
[Printer job FILE queued, request #53, limit 1 files]
o SERVER name
@PRINT FILE.DAT/DESTINATION-NODE:LAT97
[Printer job FILE queued, request #58, limit 1 files]
2-291
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
2.57 PUNCH
Places requests in a card punch or paper tape punch output queue.
Format
@PUNCH (ONTO) medium (FILES) /switch(es) filespec/switch(es),...
where:
medium is the name of the medium on which you want to
punch your file(s). It can be either
CARDS
or
PAPER-TAPE
switches are keywords, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of PUNCH command options.
These switches are of two kinds: job switches and
file switches.
Job switches apply to all files specified in the
command, no matter where you give the switches.
File switches have different effects depending on
their positions in the command line: placed
before all files in the command, they act as
defaults for all; otherwise they affect only the
nearest preceding file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
filespec is the specification of a file you wish to punch.
You can use wildcard characters (% and *) to
specify more than one file.
Summary of PUNCH Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
Job Switches
(affecting the entire command)
/ACCOUNT:account Default account - your current
account
/AFTER:date and/or time
/DESTINATION-NODE:node-name
/FORMS:forms name Default forms name - NORMAL
2-292
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
/GENERIC
/JOBNAME:6-character name Default - first six characters
of first filename in
request
/LIMIT:n Default n - calculated from
length of files
/METERS:n (PAPER-TAPE only) Default n - calculated from
length of files
/NOTE:12-character message
YES
/NOTIFY:NO
/PRIORITY:n Default n - 10
/SEQUENCE:n
/UNIT:octal number
/USER:user name
File Switches
(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all filespecs)
/COPIES:n Default n - 1
/DELETE Default for files of type .LST
/HEADER
ASCII
BCD
/MODE:BINARY (CARDS only)
IMAGE
ASCII
BINARY
/MODE:IMAGE (PAPER-TAPE only)
IMAGE-BINARY
/NOHEADER
/PRESERVE Default for all files except
those of type .LST
PUNCH Command Switches
Job Switches
(affecting the entire job)
/ACCOUNT:account specifies the account of 39 or fewer
characters to charge for your punching
request. This account must be valid for
your user name.
Default account - your current
account (check
2-293
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
with INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS)
/AFTER:date and/or time or
day of week (or TODAY)
and/or time ensures that the job will not be punched
until after the date and/or time
specified. NOV-12-79 and 18:00
illustrate two arguments to this switch.
If you give both date and time, separate
them with a space. When given alone,
the time may be preceded by a plus sign
(+), which will delay processing by the
indicated length of time from the
present.
Alternatively, you can give a day of the
week (such as MONDAY) or TODAY as
argument; then the job will not be
punched until the beginning of the
following day. If you follow this
argument with a plus sign and a time,
the job will be further delayed by this
amount.
/DESTINATION-NODE:node-name
specifies the IBM remote node on whose
card punch or paper tape punch your
request is to be satisfied. Two colons
(::) following the node name are
optional.
/FORMS:forms name specifies, in six or fewer characters,
the forms (determining the weight and
color of card or paper stock, the size
of banner, header, and trailer sections,
etc.) to use for the punching job.
Using this switch may delay processing
until the operator can mount the proper
forms. Note that your installation may
provide a different default argument to
this switch.
Default forms name - NORMAL
/GENERIC allows any card punch or paper tape
punch to be used for satisfying the
request; use this switch to override a
previous /UNIT switch.
Default
2-294
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
/JOBNAME:name assigns a name (of six or fewer
characters) to the punching job.
Default name - first six characters
of first filename
in the request
/LIMIT:n places a limit of n cards (or n feet of
paper tape) on the output of the
punching job.
Default limits, usually adequate,
are calculated from the
size of the files you want
punched
/METERS:n places a limit of n meters on the output
of the punching job (PAPER-TAPE only).
/NOTE:message labels the header section of output (the
section displaying the jobname) with a
message or notation of up to 12
characters. The message must be
enclosed in double quotation marks if it
contains spaces or non-alphanumeric
characters.
YES
/NOTIFY:NO tells the system whether to send a
message to your terminal when the
request has been satisfied.
Default argument - NO
Default argument (if switch is
given) - YES
/PRIORITY:n assigns a number n, reflecting the
urgency of the punch request. This n
must from 1 to 63, with larger numbers
receiving earlier treatment. Note that
for non-privileged users the maximum
priority that can be specified is lower
(usually 20), and that your installation
may provide a different value both for
this maximum and for the default
priority.
Default n - 10
/SEQUENCE:n specifies sequence number n for the
punch request, which you can use when
modifying or canceling the request.
/UNIT:octal number directs your request to the card punch
2-295
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
or paper tape punch of the specified
octal unit number.
/USER:user name specifies the user who is to be the
owner of the punch request. For
privileged users only.
File Switches
(affecting only the nearest preceding file,
unless placed before all file specifications)
/COPIES:n requests that n copies of the file be
punched; n must be less than or equal to
62.
Default n - 1
/DELETE deletes the file after punching.
Opposite of /PRESERVE.
Default for files of type .LST
/HEADER causes a header section containing the
jobname to be punched before the file
itself is produced.
Default
ASCII
BCD
/MODE:BINARY (CARDS only)
IMAGE designates the mode for punching the
file onto cards. One of the following:
o ASCII treats each word of a disk
file as five seven-bit bytes and
punches each byte into one column of
the card, using the ASCII
translation table for conversion
into Hollerith code.
o BCD is the same as ASCII, except
that it uses the 026 translation
table.
o BINARY treats each group of 26 words
as 78 12-bit bytes and punches each
byte into one column of the card,
from column 3 through column 80;
column 1 contains the octal word
count in rows 12 through 3 and rows
7 and 9 punched, while column 2
2-296
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
contains a 12-bit folded checksum.
o IMAGE treats each group of 27 words
as 81 12-bit bytes and punches each
byte into one column of the card,
ignoring the eighty-first byte.
ASCII
BINARY
/MODE:IMAGE (PAPER-TAPE only)
IMAGE-BINARY designates the mode for punching the
file onto paper tape. One of the
following:
o ASCII treats each word of a disk
file as five seven-bit bytes plus an
even parity bit for each byte, and
punches each byte into one frame of
paper tape; if a vertical or
horizontal tab is punched, it is
followed by a rubout character, and
if a formfeed is punched, it is
followed by 16 null characters.
o BINARY treats each group of 33 words
as 1 control word followed by 32
words of data, where each word (both
control and data) consists of six
6-bit bytes, and punches each byte
into one frame of paper tape after
adding 200 (octal) to the byte; the
control word consists of a folded
checksum in the left half and the
data word count in the right half.
o IMAGE treats each word of a disk
file as one 8-bit byte followed by
28 zeroes, and punches each byte
into one frame of paper tape.
o IMAGE BINARY treats each word as six
6-bit bytes, and punches each byte
into one frame of paper tape after
adding 200 (octal) to each byte.
/NOHEADER prevents the punching of a header
section before the file
/PRESERVE saves the file after punching. Opposite
of /DELETE.
2-297
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
Default for all files
Output
Jobname, Request ID, Limit, Number of Input Files
As soon as you complete a valid PUNCH command, the system
responds by printing, on your terminal, the jobname, request
ID number, the output limit in number of cards or feet of
paper tape assigned to the request, and the number of input
files in the request.
Characteristics
Ordinary Operation - No Switches
For most purposes you can use the PUNCH command with just
the medium and a series of filespecs for arguments.
Switch Defaults Set by System Managers
The defaults shown in the list of switches are correct for
most user sites. However, your system manager can change
some of those default settings. The switches most commonly
affected are: /FORMS, /HEADER and /NOHEADER, /LIMIT, and
/PRIORITY.
Hints
Using the SET DEFAULT Commands
If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
using PUNCH, give the SET DEFAULT CARDS or SET DEFAULT
PAPER-TAPE command to establish them as defaults (at the
current TOPS-20 command level) for the remainder of your
terminal session. The switches will then behave as if you
had typed them directly after the command name. You can
supersede any of these default switches by actually
supplying the switch, with another value, when you give the
PUNCH command. Put SET DEFAULT commands into a file of
specification COMAND.CMD in your log-in directory if you
want these default switches to be in effect for all levels
of future terminal sessions as well.
Special Cases
/SPOOLED-OUTPUT Switch
2-298
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
You can give the special switch, /SPOOLED-OUTPUT, as sole
argument to the PUNCH CARDS or PUNCH PAPER-TAPE command.
This causes any spooled output accumulated so far during
your terminal session to be placed in a card punch or paper
tape punch queue immediately, rather than at log-out time.
The /SPOOLED-OUTPUT switch is useful only if the SET
SPOOLED-OUTPUT DEFERRED command is in effect. Programs that
you run (especially FORTRAN programs) may create spooled
paper tape punch or card punch output. Or you can create it
directly by giving the command, COPY filespec PTP:, or COPY
filespec CDP:, respectively, or by giving a CREF command.
Related Commands
CARDS
CANCEL PAPER-TAPE for withdrawing PUNCH requests
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS
for examining requests in the output
queues
CARDS
MODIFY PAPER-TAPE for changing PUNCH requests before
processing has begun
CARDS
SET DEFAULT PAPER-TAPE for establishing default switches for
subsequent PUNCH commands
Examples
1. Punch a file onto cards.
@PUNCH CARDS ESTMT.DAT
[Card-Punch job ESTMT queued, request-ID 146, limit 30]
2. Punch a file onto paper tape.
@PUNCH PAPER-TAPE REAUMUR.LNS
[Papertape job REAUMU queued, request-ID 12, limit 55]
3. Punch three files onto paper tape, specifying a particular
paper tape punch for two of them and allowing the third to be
punched on any available device.
@PUNCH PAPER-TAPE /UNIT:2 INDX.LTG, PON.LG4/GENERIC, -
BENNETT.TXT
[Papertape job INDX queued, request-ID 149, limit 110, 3 files]
2-299
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUNCH)
4. Punch a file onto paper tape, specifying that the job not
begin for an hour. Check for your requests in the output
queues, then cancel both of your paper tape requests.
@PUNCH PAPER-TAPE FORUM.APR /AFTER:+1:00
[Papertape job FORUM queued, request-ID 150, limit 10]
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS/USER
Papertape Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- -------------------------------
INDX 149 110 SCARNY
FORUM 150 10 SCARNY /After:20-Jul-79 16:20
There are 2 jobs in the queue (none in progress)
Card-Punch Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- -------------------------------
ESTMT 146 30 SCARNY
There is 1 job in the queue (none in progress)
@CANCEL PAPER-TAPE *
[2 Jobs canceled]
2-300
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUSH)
2.58 PUSH
Creates a new level of TOPS-20 inferior to the one from which you give
the PUSH command.
Format
@PUSH (COMMAND LEVEL)
Characteristics
A New Level of TOPS-20
The PUSH command creates an inferior level of the TOPS-20
command processor (EXEC). The system's SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD
file and your login directory's COMAND.CMD file are executed
again, you have a fresh copy of memory and can begin giving
commands as if you had just logged in. However, job-wide
parameters (for example, connected and accessed directories,
logical name definitions, most parameters altered by SET
commands) are unaffected by the PUSH command and retain
their values.
Hints
Creating a Different Copy of an EXEC
You can use the PUSH command to create an inferior level of
an EXEC of your choice. Normally, PUSH creates the EXEC
defined by the system logical name, DEFAULT-EXEC:. Use the
DEFINE command to define a job logical name, DEFAULT-EXEC:,
with the name of the EXEC you want to create each time you
PUSH.
Note that many TOPS-20 programs have their own PUSH
commands. However, only the EXEC and OPR PUSH commands
refer to the job's definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:.
Using CONTINUE STAY With PUSH
You can use the PUSH command to run two programs at once or
to do other work that requires more than one copy of memory.
Simply use the CONTINUE /STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND
command to continue execution of your current program before
using PUSH. After PUSH you can run another program or
otherwise alter memory without affecting memory for the
first program. See Example 2. But see also Warning, below.
2-301
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUSH)
Use of Multiforking Instead of PUSH
The PUSH command allows you to run several programs at once
by running the programs at different EXEC levels. The
EXEC's multiforking feature allows you to run multiple
programs at the same EXEC level. Working from a single EXEC
makes multiprogramming easier to monitor and manage. For
information on multiforking see the KEEP command or the
TOPS-20 User's Guide.
Restrictions
Number of Successive PUSH commands
You can give as many pairs of PUSH and POP commands as
necessary to complete your task. Although there is a limit
to the number of times you can give PUSH without giving
intervening POP commands, this limit is large enough
(approximately 24, although smaller for a heavily loaded
system) not to interfere with most applications. There is a
smaller limit (usually 5) on the number of EXECs that can
give Queue-class commands.
Use the INFORMATION SUPERIORS command to learn how many
superior EXEC levels you have created.
Invalid Definition of DEFAULT-EXEC:
If you define DEFAULT-EXEC: with the name of a nonexistent
EXEC, (if, for example, you make a spelling error in your
DEFINE command), the PUSH command ignores the job's
definition of DEFAULT-EXEC: and creates the EXEC defined by
the system definition.
Withheld Log-out Capability
You can usually log out from a lower level of TOPS-20 than
the one to which you logged in. By doing so, you
simultaneously conclude all processes of your job. However,
if a program (such as, PTYCON) has initialized a level of
the TOPS-20 command processor but has withheld log-out
capability from it, you must use the POP command, followed,
if necessary, by a program command to exit from the program
and return to a higher level of TOPS-20, before you can log
out.
Warning
Competition Between Processes
2-302
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUSH)
If you have two programs running at once after using
CONTINUE /STAY or CONTINUE /BACKGROUND and PUSH commands
(see Hints, above) they may try to access the same files at
the same time. Or, TOPS-20 commands given at the lower
level may be intercepted by a program running at the higher
level. For a discussion of these possibilities, see the
Restrictions section of the CONTINUE command description.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The PUSH command preserves your present memory, gives you a fresh
copy of memory, and leaves your terminal at a new TOPS-20 command
level.
Related Commands
CONTINUE /STAY for beginning execution of a program
before giving the PUSH command
INFORMATION SUPERIORS for displaying the number of superior
EXEC levels.
POP for returning to a previous level of
TOPS-20
Examples
1. Give the PUSH command.
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(28)
2. Run a program, and give a CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20 command
level. Give a CONTINUE /STAY command to resume this
program's execution, and then a PUSH command for a new copy
of the TOPS-20 command language. Repeat this process twice;
now you have three programs running at once. In the lowest
(fourth) level of your job, begin editing a file. (Note:
when running more than one program in this way, be sure that
they do not use the same compiler or the same data base;
otherwise, competition among them could cause unpredictable
situations to develop.)
@RUN TESTF1
^C
@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH
2-303
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(PUSH)
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(28)
@RUN DMN
^C
@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(28)
@RUN PRODUK
^C
@CONTINUE /STAY
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(28)
@EDIT ARTIFI.CTL
3. Define logical name DEFAULT-EXEC: with the name of a
specialized EXEC. Then, run that EXEC with the PUSH command.
@DEFINE DEFAULT-EXEC: SYSTEM:EXTENDED-EXEC.EXE.7
@PUSH
TOPS-20 Command processor 7(6530)
2-304
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(R)
2.59 R
Places an executable system program in memory and starts it.
Format
@R (PROGRAM) filespec /switch
where:
filespec is the file specification of any executable
program.
Default dev:<directory> - SYS:
Default .typ - .EXE
/switch is /USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37
octal) in which your program is to run. You
can use this switch only if your program can
be contained in one section.
Characteristics
Need for R Command
Although in most cases you can run system programs by simply
typing the program name in place of an EXEC command, the R
command is necessary for running a program whose name is the
same as an EXEC command or an abbreviation for an EXEC
command. For example, if your site has a system program
named CONNECT, it must be run with the R command in order to
distinguish it from the EXEC's CONNECT command. If you have
a system program named GE, it must be run with the R command
to distinguish it from the GE abbreviation for the GET
command.
Cancels the Ephemeral Attribute
If a system program has been set ephemeral by the system
manager or, you have given a SET PROGRAM EPHEMERAL command,
you can cancel the ephemeral attribute by running the
program with the R command instead of typing the program
name as an EXEC command.
For more information on the ephemeral attribute, see the
ERUN command.
2-305
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(R)
Hints
Defining SYS:
If you redefine logical name SYS: to be different from the
system-wide definition, you should include SYS: in the
search list if you want to use the R command to run system
programs. For further information, see the section
entitled, Redefining System Logical Names, in the DEFINE
command description.
Effect on Memory
The R command clears any unkept forks, places in memory and
starts the specified program.
Related Commands
INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES for examining the definition of
SYS:
RUN for running executable user
programs
Examples
1. Run the FILCOM system program.
@R FILCOM
*
2. Find out what APL programs are available in logical name
SYS:. Run one of them.
@DIRECTORY SYS:*APL*.EXE
PS:<FIELD-IMAGE>
APL.EXE.1
APLSF.EXE.1
MAPLFL.EXE.1
Total of 3 files
@R APL.EXE
2-306
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RECEIVE)
2.60 RECEIVE
Notifies the system that you are willing to accept communication
links, advice, user messages, and system messages.
Format
@RECEIVE argument
where:
argument is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
naming the kind of communication you are
willing to accept.
RECEIVE Command Arguments
ADVICE allows both assistance and communication
links initiated by another user's ADVISE or
TALK command.
LINK allows communication links established by
another user's TALK command.
SYSTEM-MESSAGES allows notices of new mail and messages of
interest to all users sent by the operator or
other privileged users.
USER-MESSAGES allows messages sent by another user's SEND
command.
Default - LINKS, SYSTEM-MESSAGES, and
USER-MESSAGES
Hint
Typing RECEIVE During Attempted TALK
If your terminal has been set to refuse links and another
user tries to talk to you by using the TALK command, both
terminals will give a series of CTRL/G signals (ringing
bells or beeps) indicating the refused attempt. If you give
the RECEIVE LINKS command before these signals are finished,
the TALK command will succeed.
2-307
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RECEIVE)
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another
user's job
INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE for examining your current terminal
settings
REFUSE for refusing communication links,
advice, and system and user
messages
SEND for sending a message to another
user's terminal
TALK for linking your terminal to
another user's terminal
TERMINAL INHIBIT for refusing all types of terminal
communication including links,
advice, system messages, user
messages, and notices of new mail.
Examples
1. Give the RECEIVE command to accept communication links from
other users.
@RECEIVE LINKS
2. Set your terminal to receive links, at the request (sent via
the MAIL program, not shown here) of another user. Begin a
communication session with this user, during which you give
the RECEIVE ADVICE command also, to allow a demonstration of
the UDP program. Afterwards, set your terminal again to
refuse advice.
@RECEIVE
@
LINK FROM RENQUIST, TTY 127
@;THANKS, BUT IF YOU LET ME DO AN "ADVISE" I CAN SHOW YOU
@;HOW TO RUN THE PROGRAM BY ACTUALLY DOING IT. OKAY?
@;SURE, I'LL FIX MY SETTING.
@RECEIVE ADVICE
@ADVISE LATTA
Escape character is <CTRL>E, type <CTRL>^? for help
LATTA, MISC:<LATTA> Job 33 EXEC
[Advising]
UDP
UDP>LIST/DOCUMENTATION:/CREATED-SINCE:1-1-78 0:0
2-308
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RECEIVE)
UDP>EXIT
@;YOU'LL GET A PRINTED LISTING TOMORROW.
@;DO YOU SEE HOW I DID IT?
@;YES, THANKS. GOODBYE.
@
[Advice terminated]
@REFUSE ADVICE
2-309
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REENTER)
2.61 REENTER
Starts the current fork at its alternate entry point.
Format
@REENTER (PROGRAM)
Characteristics
Using REENTER
The REENTER command starts your program at the address
specified by the second word in the program's entry vector.
For most programs this address is contained in location 124.
Usually the REENTER and START commands start the program at
the same point, but another re-entry point can be provided
to avoid initialization procedures, perform error recovery,
or to use the program in a different way.
Hints
Further Information
For more information about entry vectors, see the TOPS-20
Monitor Calls Reference Manual.
Related Commands
GET for placing an executable program in memory
LOAD for loading a source or object program into memory
START for entering a program at its normal entry point
Examples
1. Give the REENTER command for your current program.
@REENTER
2. Begin running a program, then give a CTRL/C to leave it and
obtain a file. Resume execution of the program at the
alternate entry point.
2-310
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REENTER)
@R DUMPER
DUMPER>^C
@ACCESS PS:<P.SPECCINI>
Password:___
@COPY PS:<P.SPECCINI>USR.FIL
PS:<P.SPECCINI>USR.FIL.1 => USR.FIL.1 [OK]
@END-ACCESS PS:<P.SPECCINI>
@REENTER
DUMPER>
2-311
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REFUSE)
2.62 REFUSE
Notifies the system that you are not willing to accept communication
links, advice, user messages, and system messages.
Format
@REFUSE argument
where:
argument is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
naming the kind of communication you are not
willing to accept.
REFUSE Command Arguments
ADVICE prevents assistance initiated by another
user's ADVISE command.
LINKS prevents both assistance and communication
links from being established by another
user's ADVICE or TALK command.
SYSTEM-MESSAGES prevents notices of new mail and messages of
general interest sent to all users by the
monitor or by the operator or other
privileged users.
USER-MESSAGES prevents messages sent by another user's SEND
command.
Default - ADVICE and LINKS
Hints
Refusing All Communication
Users with Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled can
ADVISE, SEND, and TALK to terminals that have refused
advice, user-messages, and links. To refuse messages and
links from privileged users, use the TERMINAL INHIBIT
command.
Typing RECEIVE During Attempted TALK
If your terminal has been set to refuse links and another
user tries to talk to you by using the TALK command, both
2-312
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REFUSE)
terminals will give a series of CTRL/G signals (ringing
bells or beeps) indicating the refused attempt. If you give
the RECEIVE LINKS command before these signals are finished,
the TALK command will succeed.
Safeguarding Terminal Output
If you want your terminal to print a long file, without
interference, use the TERMINAL INHIBIT command to prevent
all classes of message from being received. Be sure to use
the TERMINAL NO INHIBIT command afterwards to restore the
previous condition of your terminal.
Special Cases
Implicit Refusal of Advice
If you give the REFUSE LINKS command, your terminal will be
set to refuse advice also. However, the INFORMATION
TERMINAL-MODE command may not display this setting unless
you give an explicit REFUSE ADVICE command as well.
Privileged Disregard of REFUSE
A user with enabled Wheel or Operator capabilities can give
the TALK or ADVISE command for any job.
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another
user's job
INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE for examining your current terminal
settings
RECEIVE for receiving communication links,
advice, and system and user
messages
SEND for sending a message to another
user's terminal
TALK for linking your terminal to
another user's terminal
TERMINAL INHIBIT for refusing all types of terminal
communication including links,
advice, system messages, user
messages, and notices of new mail.
2-313
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REFUSE)
Examples
1. Use the REFUSE command to prevent other users from advising
your job.
@REFUSE ADVICE
2. Receive a communication link formed by another user's TALK
command. Confer with him briefly, then set your terminal to
refuse all classes of message over which you have control.
LINK FROM RENQUIST, TTY 127
@!HELLO DAVID. CAN YOU HELP ME WITH EDIT?
@!SORRY, PLEASE BREAK. I'M EXPECTING PRINTOUT AND THIS
@!WILL INTERFERE. WILL GET IN TOUCH LATER.
@!OKAY
@BREAK
@REFUSE LINKS
@REFUSE SYSTEM-MESSAGES
@REFUSE USER-MESSAGES
3. As an alternative to giving three REFUSE commands as in the
previous example, give the TERMINAL INHIBIT command. This
command refuses all types of messages.
@TERMINAL INHIBIT
2-314
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REMARK)
2.63 REMARK
Tells the system to regard the terminal input that follows as comment
only.
Format
@REMARK (MODE)
Type remark. End with CTRL/Z.
Characteristics
Ending Remarks
Until you give a CTRL/Z, the system merely displays what you
type, instead of trying to interpret it as commands.
Hints
Useful During TALK or ADVISE Session
If you have already established contact with another user by
a TALK or ADVISE command before giving REMARK, his terminal
will also display what you type. Give the REMARK command
before sending lengthy comments or demonstrating commands
that you don't want to take effect.
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another user's job
TALK for sending comments to another user
Examples
1. Give the REMARK command.
@REMARK
Type remark. End with CTRL/Z.
2. Receive a communication link from another user. Give the
REMARK command to speak with him. Give a CTRL/Z afterwards
to end the remarks.
LINK FROM P.SPECCINI, TTY 127
@;WHERE ARE THE NOTES FROM THE LAB DEMO THIS A.M.?
2-315
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REMARK)
@REMARK
Type remark. End with CTRL/Z.
HI, PAUL. THEY'RE IN THE LAB'S LIBRARY AREA.
THAT'S CHEM:<P-CHEM.20.NOTES>. I DON'T KNOW
THE TITLE BUT LOOK AT THE DATES WITH A
TDIRECTORY COMMAND. OKAY?
;YES, THANKS. BYE
@BREAK
^Z
2-316
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RENAME)
2.64 RENAME
Changes the name of a file.
Format
@RENAME (EXISTING FILE) old filespec(s) (TO BE) new filespec
where:
old filespec(s) is a single file specification, or a series
of them separated by commas and/or indicated
by wildcard characters (% and *).
new filespec is the new specification under which you want
to store the file(s); the new specification
must be on the same structure; you may
include an asterisk (*) if you gave more than
one old filespec.
Default new filespec - old filespec, but
with a generation number higher
by 1 than the highest existing
generation number
Output
Status of Files
If you use recognition on the new file specification, the
system prints !Old Generation!, !New Generation!, or !New
File!, to describe its status.
Confirmation of Action
As each file is renamed, the system prints its old and new
specification, and the word [Superseding] if it is replacing
previous contents, and finally the word [OK]. The delay
before you see this [OK] indicates how long it took to
rename the file.
Hints
Specifying a New Account and Protection Number
You can specify the new file's protection number and the
account to which its storage fees will be charged. Follow
the new filespec with a semicolon (;) and the letter P
before giving a new 6-digit protection number, and with a
2-317
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RENAME)
semicolon and the letter A before giving a new account.
Ordinarily these values are set to the default file
protection and current account. However, non-default
protection numbers will be maintained for higher generations
of existing files, unless you specify otherwise in the
RENAME command that creates that higher generation.
RENAME Faster Than COPY for Transferring Files
For moving a set of files from one directory to another on
the same structure, the RENAME command is a faster and more
efficient means than COPY. This is because RENAME only
changes the file specifications; it does not copy the
contents of the files. Also, a file transfer with the
RENAME command leaves only one set of files, while a
transfer with the COPY command leaves two sets: the
original copies and the destination copies. The original
copies are often unnecessary and must be deleted.
Restrictions
Renaming Between Structures
You cannot rename a file from one structure to another, but
must use the COPY command to reproduce its contents on the
new structure, then the DELETE command to remove it from the
old structure.
Renaming Open or Mapped Files
You cannot rename a file that is open or mapped into memory.
First give the RESET command, or POP followed by RESET, if
this is the case.
Renaming Archived Files
You can rename an archived file by specifying it as the
first (or old) argument of a RENAME command. It will then
have the second (or new) argument as its specification and
will remain an archived file. However, you cannot give the
specification of an archived file as the second argument of
a RENAME command, as this would replace the file's contents.
If you attempt to do so, the file you specify as the first
argument will be renamed to a generation higher by 1 than
the highest existing generation of the archived file,
leaving the archived file intact.
2-318
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RENAME)
Warning
Replacing Previous Contents of Files
If you rename a file into a specification (including
generation number) that already exists, the previous
contents of the new file are replaced and cannot be
recovered. But see Restrictions - Renaming Archived Files,
above.
Related Commands
COPY for making copies of files
Examples
1. Rename a file.
@RENAME ATM-50.SPC ATM-50.PRL
ATM-50.SPC.1 => ATM-50.PRL.1 [OK]
2. Use a wildcard character to rename all files of a given name.
@RENAME ATM-50.* 1-ATM-50.*
ATM-50.BAK.1 => 1-ATM-50.BAK.1 [OK]
ATM-50.PRL.1 => 1-ATM-50.PRL.1 [OK]
3. Access another user directory and transfer to it the files
renamed in Example 2.
@ACCESS <ORBEN>
Password:___
@RENAME 1-ATM-50.* <ORBEN>
1-ATM-50.BAK.1 => <ORBEN>1-ATM-50.BAK.1 [OK]
1-ATM-50.PRL.1 => <ORBEN>1-ATM-50.PRL.1 [OK]
@END-ACCESS <ORBEN>
2-319
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RESET)
2.65 RESET
Clears memory of the specified forks.
Format
@RESET (FORK) argument
where:
argument is one of the following: Fork name
Fork number
* for all forks
. (period) for the current
fork
Default - all unkept forks
Characteristics
Action of RESET
In addition to clearing memory for the specified forks, the
RESET command closes all files, mapped and unmapped, opened
by the specified forks and their inferior forks. RESET also
simultaneously terminates the specified fork's inferior
forks.
Effect on Memory
The RESET command clears the specified forks from memory.
Related Commands
INFORMATION FILE-STATUS for determining which files are
currently open
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE for determining contents of memory
CONTINUE, FORK, FREEZE other multiforking-class commands
INFORMATION, FORK-STATUS,
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS,
KEEP, RESET, SET NAME,
SET PROGRAM, and UNKEEP
2-320
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RESET)
Examples
1. Give the RESET command to clear all unkept forks from memory.
@RESET
2. Clear all forks, including kept forks, from memory.
@RESET *
3. Display the fork status with INFORMATION FORK-STATUS. Then,
clear the SORTER fork from memory. Redisplay the fork status
to check the result.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EDT (1): Kept, ^C from IO wait at 413773, 0:00:00.0
=> PASCAL (2): Kept, Background, Running at 324004, 0:00:00.8
SORTER (3): HALT at 400370, 0:00:00.6
@RESET 3
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
EDT (1): Kept, ^C from IO wait at 413773, 0:00:00.0
PASCAL (2): Kept, Background, Running 453004, 0:00:01.3
2-321
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RETRIEVE)
2.66 RETRIEVE
Returns an off-line file (magnetic tape copy of a file) to disk.
Format
@RETRIEVE (FILES) filespec,...
where:
filespec is the specification of any off-line file
(archived or not, visible or invisible) to
which you have access; you may include
wildcard characters (% and *).
Output
Acknowledgment of Request
As soon as you complete a valid RETRIEVE command, the system
responds by printing, on your terminal, the specification of
each off-line file for which you requested retrieval,
followed by [OK].
Notice of Retrieval Sent to Requestor
Depending on the procedures at your site, when the files for
which you have requested retrieval have been restored to
their directory on disk, you may receive a mail message that
contains the names of each retrieved file. Remember that,
depending on how frequently your site processes retrieval
requests, this message may not be sent until one or more
days after your request.
Characteristics
Invisibility of Retrieved Files
If you retrieve invisible files, they will remain invisible
(whether archived or not) when restored to disk. Use the
SET FILE VISIBLE command to make invisible files visible.
Until you do so, they will be inaccessible to most TOPS-20
commands.
2-322
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RETRIEVE)
Hints
Using Retrieved Archived Files
As long as a retrieved archived file is visible, you can
inspect it using the TYPE or PRINT command, or list its
specifications using DIRECTORY-class commands. However, you
cannot add to it or change it (for example, by using
APPEND). To make changes to a copy of a retrieved archived
file, first use the COPY command to copy it to a new
specification. If you wish, you can then request archival
for this new file (using the ARCHIVE command) and delete the
old one (using the DELETE command with the ARCHIVED
subcommand). You can return an (unchanged) on-line archived
file to off-line status by using the DELETE command with the
CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand, or withdraw archive status from
the file (make it an ordinary disk file) by using the
DISCARD command.
Using Retrieved Non-archived Files
As long as a retrieved non-archived file is visible, you can
use TOPS-20 commands with it as with any other disk file.
The only difference is that after any command that has
changed the file, the tape copy of the file is no longer
valid. This means that you cannot give the DELETE command
with the CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand to return the file to
off-line status.
Special Cases
Implied Retrieval Requests
If your system has enabled the "automatic retrieval-wait"
feature (give the INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS command to find
out whether it has), and the SET RETRIEVAL-WAIT command is
in effect for your job, any command that attempts to use an
off-line file will create an automatic retrieval request for
that file. Under these conditions, commands such as TYPE or
COPY for which you specify off-line files will not be
executed until those files are retrieved. Implied retrieval
requests are most useful in batch jobs.
Related Commands
ARCHIVE for requesting archival
of specified files
CANCEL RETRIEVE for canceling retrieval
2-323
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RETRIEVE)
requests before they are
filled
DELETE (with CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand)
for deleting the disk
contents only of
retrieved (on-line) files
DIRECTORY (with OFFLINE subcommand) for listing the
specifications of visible
off-line files
DIRECTORY (with OFFLINE and INVISIBLE subcommands)
for listing the
specifications of
invisible off-line files
DIRECTORY (with TIMES TAPE-WRITE subcommand)
for finding out the write
date of the tape copy of
files
DISCARD for giving up the tape
copy of retrieved files
INFORMATION RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS for finding out the
status of retrieval
requests
Examples
1. Retrieve an off-line file.
@RETRIEVE BRCHIVE.TXT
BRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
2. Attempt to use a file. Upon discovering that it is off-line,
retrieve the file. When it has been restored to your
directory, discard the tape copy of the file, and then have
it printed on your terminal.
@TYPE FILBRK.HLP
?File is off-line: FILBRK.HLP.1
@RETRIEVE FILBRK.HLP
FILBRK.HLP.1 [OK]
.
.
.
@DISCARD FILBRK.HLP
FILBRK.HLP.1 [OK]
2-324
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RETRIEVE)
@TYPE FILBRK.HLP
!THIS IS JUST A TEXT FILE TESTER.
3. Get a listing of your archived files. Retrieve one that is
off line, examine it, and return it to off-line status.
@DIRECTORY,
@@ARCHIVE
_@@
MISC:<GOLDEN>
ARCHEK.FIL.1
ARCHIVE.ALSO.1;OFFLINE
.NOT.1;OFFLINE
.TOO.1;OFFLINE
MOOBE.TXT.1;OFFLINE
TESTY.BBN.1,2
Total of 6 files
@RETRIEVE BRCHIVE.TXT
BRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
.
.
.
@TYPE BRCHIVE.TXT
!A TEXT FILE TESTER
@DELETE BRCHIVE.TXT,
@@CONTENTS-ONLY
@@
MISC:<GOLDEN>BRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
MISC:<GOLDEN> [1 page freed]
4. Get an inclusive listing of your off-line files, including
the date the tape copy was written. Retrieve three of them,
and check the requests in the retrieval queue. Cancel one of
the requests.
@DIRECTORY,
@@OFFLINE
@@TIMES TAPE-WRITE
@@
MISC:<GOLDEN>
Tape-write
ARCHIVE.ALSO.1;OFFLINE 8-Jun-85 07:59:08
.NOT.1;OFFLINE 8-Jun-85 07:59:09
DUMPER.MAC.1;OFFLINE 7-Mar-85 05:19:10
2-325
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RETRIEVE)
PRODUK.EXE.4;OFFLINE 7-Mar-85 05:19:13
SQUARE.EXE.1;OFFLINE 7-Mar-85 05:19:14
Total of 5 files
@DIRECTORY,
@@OFFLINE
@@INVISIBLE
@@TIMES TAPE-WRITE
@@
MISC:<GOLDEN>
Tape-write
ARCHIVE.TOO.1;OFFLINE 8-Jun-79 07:59:10
BRCHIVE.TXT.1;OFFLINE 27-Jun-79 04:04:58
ERCHIVE.TXT.1;OFFLINE 8-Jun-79 07:59:11
FRCHIVE.TXT.1;OFFLINE 12-Jul-79 03:23:03
MOOBE.TXT.1;OFFLINE 8-Jun-79 07:59:12
Total of 5 files
@RETRIEVE PRODUK.EXE, FRCHIVE.TXT, MOOBE.TXT
PRODUK.EXE.4 [OK]
FRCHIVE.TXT.1 [OK]
MOOBE.TXT.1 [OK]
@INFORMATION RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS
Retrieval Queue:
Name Req# Tape 1 Tape 2 User
------ ---- ------ ------ -------
MOOBE 507 5329 5520 GOLDEN
PRODUK 505 5538 5583 GOLDEN
FOOBAR 407 5845 5856 TOMCZAK
EE155 442 6279 5883 WRIGHT
BRCHIV 504 5543 7138 GOLDEN
FRCHIV 506 7138 7559 GOLDEN
There are 6 jobs in the queue (none in progress)
@CANCEL RETRIEVE 507
[1 Job canceled]
2-326
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REWIND)
2.67 REWIND
Returns a magnetic tape to its load point (logical beginning, the
beginning of the first file).
Format
@REWIND (DEVICE) dev: /switch
where:
dev: is the name of the tape set or magnetic tape drive
that you want to rewind. The colon after the
device name is optional.
/switch is one of the following:
/CURRENT-VOLUME-ONLY
rewinds tape set to beginning
of currently mounted volume
/ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
rewinds tape set to beginning
of first volume
Default - ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET
Note: these switches can be used only for
devices of the form MTn:, not
MTAn:.
Restrictions
REWIND with Open Files
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has
opened a magnetic tape set and you then give the REWIND
command for that tape set, the system will first ask if you
want to close the associated file. You must do so for
REWIND to succeed, but will probably be unable to continue
the program from that point because the file will now be
closed.
Related Commands
BACKSPACE for moving a magnetic tape backward a specified
number of files or records
DIRECTORY (when used with a magnetic tape device) for
2-327
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(REWIND)
rewinding a tape set, printing a directory of its
files, and again rewinding the tape set
SKIP for moving a magnetic tape forward a specified
number of files or records
UNLOAD for rewinding a magnetic tape completely onto the
source reel
Examples
1. Rewind your magnetic tape.
@REWIND DAY:
2. Mount a tape, and prepare to copy files onto it. (Use the
REWIND command to be sure you are at the beginning.) After
copying the files, rewind the tape and (using the COPY
command) read the first one. Then give TOPS-20 commands to
free the resources you have been using.
@MOUNT TAPE DAY:
[Mount Request DAY Queued, Request-ID 183]
[Tape set DAY, volume DAY mounted]
[DAY: defined as MT0:]
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@ACCESS SNARK:
@REWIND DAY:
@COPY SNARK:FIL-1.TAP DAY:
SNARK:FIL-1.TAP.1 => MT0:FIL-1 [OK]
@COPY SNARK:FIL-2.TAP DAY:
SNARK:FIL-2.TAP.1 => MT0:FIL-2 [OK]
@COPY SNARK:FIL-3.TAP DAY:
SNARK:FIL-3.TAP.1 => MT0:FIL-3 [OK]
@REWIND DAY:
@COPY DAY: TTY:
MT0: => TTY:
!THIS IS THE FIRST FILE.!
@DISMOUNT TAPE DAY:
[Tape dismounted, logical name DAY: deleted]
@END-ACCESS SNARK:
@DISMOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: dismounted
@
2-328
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RUN)
2.68 RUN
Places an executable program in memory and starts it.
Format
@RUN (PROGRAM) filespec /switch
where:
filespec is the file specification of any executable
program.
Default dev:<dir> - DSK:
Default .typ - .EXE
/switch is /USE-SECTION:n
specifies the memory section (from 0 to 37
octal) in which your program is to run. You
can use this switch only if your program can
be contained in one section.
Characteristics
Efficiency of RUN
The RUN command does the work of the pair of commands GET
and START. It is a faster and less expensive means of
executing programs than EXECUTE, or than LOAD and START.
Therefore you should store frequently-run programs in .EXE
files and run them with this command.
Hints
Alternative to RUN command
When you type only a program name, the system looks for a
matching system program. When you precede the program name
with the RUN command, the system looks for the program in
your connected directory. The RUN command can be eliminated
by typing the directory name with the program name. These
two commands for example, each run SORTER located in the
connected directory:
@RUN SORTER.EXE
@<SMITH>SORTER.EXE
2-329
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(RUN)
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The RUN command clears any unkept forks, places the specified
program in memory, starts it and leaves your terminal at command
level in the program (if any), or at TOPS-20 command level.
Related Commands
ERUN for running a system program without disturbing the
program already in memory
EXECUTE for running source or object programs
GET for placing an executable program in memory
R for running executable programs stored on SYS:
SAVE for saving a program in executable (.EXE) format
START for starting the program currently in memory
Examples
1. Run one of your executable programs.
@RUN TESTF1.EXE
2. Mount a structure and access a user's directory on the
structure. Run one of his programs.
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@ACCESS SNARK:<ELDRIDGE>
Password:
@RUN SNARK:<ELDRIDGE>FT.EXE
2-330
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SAVE)
2.69 SAVE
Stores a copy of memory in an executable file.
Format
@SAVE (ON FILE) filespec (PAGES FROM) loc1 (TO) loc2, loc3 loc4, ...
where:
filespec is the file specification under which you want to
store the program.
Default filespec - program name.EXE
loc1 loc2, are pairs of octal numbers or symbolic expressions
loc3 loc4, that specify the span(s) of memory pages you want to
... save.
Default loc1 loc2 - all assigned pages of
memory from 0 to the highest
page number of the highest
existing section
Output
Status of Files
If you use recognition of the file specification, the system
prints !Old Generation!, !New Generation!, or !New File!, to
indicate its status on disk, or !OK! if saved on a non-disk
device.
Hints
Saving Programs Before Running Them
When you load a source or object program using the LOAD
command, save it using SAVE before running it. Then you can
run it in the future using RUN, without first loading it
using a LOAD-class command. This is also true if you save
the program after running it, but it will then be in a
post-run state.
More Information
For more information about saved files, see the TOPS-20
Monitor Calls Reference Manual.
2-331
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SAVE)
Restriction
Saving an Execute-only Compiler
It is illegal to use the SAVE command after using the LOAD
command for an execute-only compiler. An alternative is to
use LINK with the LOAD command and the /SAVE switch.
Related Commands
GET for putting a saved file into memory
LOAD for putting a source or object file into memory
RUN for running a saved program
START for starting the program in memory
Examples
1. Save the program currently in memory.
@SAVE
TESTF1.EXE.6 Saved
2. Mount a magnetic tape in write-enabled mode. Use the GET
command to put an executable program into memory, then save
it (specifying a new filename) on tape and on disk. Finally,
start the program, which is still in memory.
@MOUNT TAPE LAT:/WRITE-ENABLED
[Mount request LAT: queued, request-ID 415]
[Tape set LAT, volume LAT mounted]
[LAT: defined as MT2:]
@GET TESTF1
@SAVE LAT:TAP.EXE
MT2:TAP.EXE Saved
@SAVE
TAP.EXE.1 Saved
@START
THIS IS A TEST.
CPU time: 0.04 Elapsed time: 0.17
2-332
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SEND)
2.70 SEND
Sends a message immediately to another user's terminal.
Format
@SEND (TO) /switch argument message-text
where:
argument is one of the following: a user name
a terminal line number
an asterisk (*) [for all
terminals]
(The asterisk argument requires WHEEL or OPERATOR
privileges.)
message is a message of up to six lines of text followed by
a carriage return.
switch is /NODE:node-name
which specifies a node in the TOPS-20 cluster to
send the message to.
Note that the privileged ^ESEND command can also
send a message to all terminals on all nodes of the
argument (see the TOPS-20 Operator's Command
Language Reference Manual).
Characteristics
Multiple-line Messages
SEND allows you to send multiple-line messages with up to
six 80-character lines of text. Type the message past the
end of the first line and onto the next line without typing
RETURN. SEND will reorganize your message on the receiver's
terminal so that words broken across two lines appear on the
same line.
Refused SEND
You cannot contact a user with SEND if his terminal is set
to refuse messages with the REFUSE USER-MESSAGES command or
the TERMINAL INHIBIT command. Normally, if you attempt to
SEND to a user who has refused user messages, the system
prints the message ?User is refusing messages and/or links.
2-333
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SEND)
However, a user with Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled,
can SEND messages to users who have given a REFUSE
USER-MESSAGES command, but not the TERMINAL INHIBIT command.
Hints
Finding the Receiver's Line Number
To find the terminal line number for the receiver of a SEND
message, give the SYSTAT command with the receiver's user
name as an argument.
Sending Terminal Bells
To get the attention of the user at the receiving terminal,
type a few CTRL/Gs in your message. This will ring the
terminal bell on the receiving terminal.
SEND in a Batch Job
You can place SEND commands in a batch control file to send
messages to your terminal on the condition of a running
batch job. Since your username is associated with your
batch job and your timesharing job, use the line number
argument.
SEND as an Alternative to Mail
The SEND command can be used as an alternative to sending a
message with one of the mail programs. For short messages,
SEND can be more convenient and faster to use than a mail
program. For urgent messages, a SEND message is read
immediately by the receiver, unlike a mail message, which
can be read at the user's leisure.
Special Cases
User Has More Than One Job
If you attempt to SEND a message to a user who is logged-in
on more than one terminal, the system responds with a list
of the user's terminal line numbers and the programs being
run at each terminal. Type your choice of terminal line
number (if available, one running the EXEC) after the TTY:
prompt.
Related Commands
2-334
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SEND)
ADVISE for sending commands to another user's job
RECEIVE USER-MESSAGES
for receiving another user's SEND message
REFUSE USER-MESSAGES
for refusing another user's SEND message
REMARK for telling the system to regard your
terminal input as comment only
TALK for linking your terminal to another user's
terminal
TERMINAL INHIBIT for refusing all types of terminal
communication including links, advice, system
messages, user messages, alerts, and mail
notices
Examples
1. Send a message with the SEND command.
@SEND 141 PAUL, DO YOU HAVE THE TCO TAPE?
2. Send a multiple-line message. Type the message past the end
of the line and onto the next. Press RETURN only at the end
of the message.
@SEND ASMITH AL, I CAN'T MAKE THE NORTH PROJECT MEETING;
HERMAN JUST CALLED A STAFF MEETING. I'LL WRITE MY ENGINE
ERING STATUS AND SEND IT TO YOU BEFORE LUNCH. - BILL
3. Enable your Wheel or Operator privileges and send a message
to all users.
@ENABLE
$SEND * THE LETTER QUALITY PRINTER IS UP
From NELSON on line 127:
[THE LETTER QUALITY PRINTER IS UP]
$DISABLE
@
4. Place SEND commands in your batch control file to monitor the
progress of your batch job.
@IF (ERROR) @SEND 122 Error in PROJEC batch run
.
.
.
2-335
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SEND)
14015 @SEND 122 PROJEC batch job almost done
5. Send a message to a user who has two jobs on two different
terminals. Send the message to the terminal that is running
the EXEC.
@SEND JOHNSON Ready for lunch?
TTY20, running EXEC
TTY4, running PASCAL
TTY: 20
6. Send a message to a user on remote node VENUS.
@SEND /NODE:VENUS ANDERSON Don't forget the meeting!
2-336
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
2.71 SET
Sets or modifies various characteristics of your job, a directory, a
file, a device, or some other entity.
Format
@SET argument(s) setting(s)
where:
argument is a keyword, chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of SET command options.
setting is a word or number, required to complete the
meaning of most SET commands.
Summary of SET Command Arguments (defaults in boldface)
ACCOUNT account remark
ADDRESS-BREAK octal or symbolic memory address,
@@AFTER n Default n - 1
@@ALL
@@EXECUTE
@@NONE
@@READ
@@WRITE
ALERT date/time message
AUTOMATIC
CARD-READER-INPUT-SET name of input set n
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY
---
| CARDS /switch(es)
| COMPILE-SWITCHES file type /switch(es)
| PAPER-TAPE /switch(es)
DEFAULT | PLOT /switch(es)
| PRINT /switch(es)
| SUBMIT /switch(es)
| ---
| | ALLOW
|TAKE | DISALLOW
--- |
| ECHO
| NO ECHO
---
2-337
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
---
| ACCOUNT-DEFAULT dev:<directory> account
| password
|
| ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
| FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> octal code
| password
| Default code - 777700
| GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT
| dev:<directory> n password
| Default n - 1
DIRECTORY | NO ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
| | NO SECURE
| OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory>date or +n
| Default n - 90
| ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory>date or +n
| Default n - 60
| PASSWORD dev:<directory>
| old password
| new password
| new password
|
| PROTECTION dev:<directory> octal protection code
| password
| Default code - 777700
| | SECURE str:<directory>
---
--- ---
ENTRY-VECTOR | octal or symbolic | octal or symbolic length
| memory location | between 1 and 777
--- ---
Default length - 1
---
| ACCOUNT filespecs account
| EPHEMERAL filespecs
| EXPIRED filespecs
| GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT filespecs n Default n - 1
| INVISIBLE
| EPHEMERAL filespecs
| | PERMANENT filespecs
| NO PROHIBIT filespecs
FILE | RESIST filespecs
| | SAVE-BY-BACKUP-SYSTEM filespecs
| | SECURE filespecs
| | PERMANENT filespecs
| | TEMPORARY filespecs
| | UNDELETABLE filespecs
2-338
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
| OFFLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs date or +n
| ONLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs date or +n
| | PERMANENT
| PROHIBIT filespecs
| PROTECTION filespecs octal protection code
| Default code - 777700
| RESIST filespecs
| | SAVE-BY-BACKUP-SYSTEM
| | SECURE filespecs
| | TEMPORARY
| | UNDELETABLE
| VISIBLE
---
---
HOST node-name:: | /CTERM
| /NRT
---
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD
LOCATION node-name Default node-name - your host node
MAIL-WATCH user-name message-count
NAME fork-name
---
| ADDRESS-BREAK
| ALERT
| AUTOMATIC
| CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY
| ---
| | CARDS
| | COMPILE-SWITCHES file type or *
| | PAPER-TAPE
| DEFAULT | PLOT
| | | PROGRAM
| | PRINT
NO | | SUBMIT
| ---
|
| LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD
| MAIL-WATCH user-name
| RETRIEVAL-WAIT
| | STATUS-WATCH
| TIME-LIMIT
| ---
| | <RET>
| TRAP | FILE-OPENINGS
| | ---
| | | /ALL
| | | /DEFINED
| | JSYS| /UNDEFINED
| --- | name
2-339
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
| | number
| ---
| UUO-SIMULATION
---
---
| COPY-ON-WRITE
| EXECUTE
|
| ---
| | COPY-ON-WRITE
PAGE-ACCESS octal page numbers | NO | WRITE
| ---
|
| NONEXISTENT
| READ
| WRITE
---
| PASSWORD dev:<directory>
| old password
| new password
| new password
|
---
| EPHEMERAL
| ---
| | CONTINUE
PROGRAM fork-name | KEEP | REENTER
| | START
| ---
| NO-EPHEMERAL
| NONE
---
CHARACTERISTICS name value
--- --- ---
REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER name | remote queue | | DQS node
| LATserver port | | LAT server
| LATserver service| ---
| alias |
--- ---
SYSTEM-DEFINITIONS
RETRIEVAL-WAIT
SESSION-REMARK remark of up to 39 characters
---
| IMMEDIATE
SPOOLED-OUTPUT | DEFERRED
2-340
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
---
STATUS-WATCH,
@@INTERRUPT
@@NO
@@PAGES
@@TOPS-10-PAGES
---
| ---
| | 200
| | 556
| DENSITY | 800
| | 1600
| | 6250
| | SYSTEM-DEFAULT
| ---
| ---
| | ANSI-ASCII
| | CORE-DUMP
| | HIGH-DENSITY
TAPE | FORMAT | INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE
| | SIXBIT
| | SYSTEM-DEFAULT
| ---
| ---
| | EVEN
| PARITY | ODD
| ---
|
| RECORD-LENGTH n bytes Default n - 512
---
TERMINAL feature or type
TIME-LIMIT n
---
| FILE-OPENINGS
| ---
| | /ALL
| | /DEFINED
| JSYS | /UNDEFINED
| | name
| | number
| ---
| ---
| | <RET>
TRAP | NO| FILE-OPENINGS
| | ---
| | | /ALL
2-341
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
| | | /DEFINED
| | JSYS | /UNDEFINED
| | | name
| | | number
| | ---
| | PROCEED
| ---
| PROCEED
----
---
TYPEOUT MODE | NUMERIC
| SYMBOLIC
---
UUO SIMULATION
SET Command Arguments
ACCOUNT account remark
begins charging the specified account
for the remainder of your current
terminal session or until you use the
command again. You must supply an
alphanumeric account name of 39 or fewer
characters valid for your user name.
Then you can type an optional session
remark, also of 39 or fewer characters,
to be inserted in system accounting data
for your current terminal session.
Check your current account and session
remark with INFORMATION JOB-STATUS.
ADDRESS-BREAK octal or symbolic memory location,
causes the program in memory to be
suspended and a message to be printed on
@@AFTER n your terminal when the memory location
@@ALL you specify is referenced for the
@@EXECUTE indicated operation - execute, read,
@@NONE write, or any of these (ALL). With the
@@READ AFTER subcommand you determine how many
@@WRITE times it must be referenced before the
address break occurs; with NONE you
cancel address breaks for the specified
location, just as with the SET NO
ADDRESS-BREAK command. Each SET
ADDRESS-BREAK command cancels any
previous address break. Check your
current address break with INFORMATION
ADDRESS-BREAK.
Default subcommands - ALL, and
2-342
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
AFTER 1
--- ---
| date and hh:mm |
| hh:mm |
ALERT | +hh:mm | message
| day-of-week and +hh:mm |
| TODAY and +hh:mm |
--- ---
causes the system to ring your terminal
bell andtype a line at the specified
date and time. This line contains the
time of day and your message. The sign
(+), used with the day-of-week and TODAY
arguments, adds the time you specify to
the beginning of the day (00:00:00 or
midnight). For example, the command SET
ALERT THURSDAY +10:00 sets an alert for
Thursday at 10:00 A.M. If you omit the
plus sign after a day-of-week or TODAY
argument, the time is interpreted as
part of the message. When a time
argument is used without a day-of-week
or TODAY argument, the plus sign adds
the specified time to the current time.
For example, the command SET ALERT +1:00
sets an alert for one hour from the time
the command is given.
If the SET AUTOMATIC command is in
effect, this message is sent no matter
what you are doing at your terminal.
Otherwise, you are alerted only when
your terminal is about to type a TOPS-20
prompt ($ or @). Alert settings are
erased when you log out. Therefore, you
should enter this command in your
COMAND.CMD file if you want to be
alerted in the distant future or on a
regular basis. Check the setting of this
command with INFORMATION ALERTS. See
Example 8.
AUTOMATIC allows you to be notified by the system
(as a result of a SET ALERT or SET
MAIL-WATCH command) whether or not your
job is at TOPS-20 command level. Every
five minutes, the system checks to see
if you should be notified. It is
recommended that you enter this command
2-343
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
in the LOGIN.CMD file to ensure coverage
from the time you log in. Check with
INFORMATION ALERTS or INFORMATION
COMMAND-LEVEL.
CARD-READER-INPUT-SET name of input set n
is used by the batch system to associate
the indicated set of punch cards,
beginning with deck n, with system
device CDR:
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY allows any program executed at the
current command level to handle CTRL/C
interrupts itself. You cannot use this
command in a batch job. Check the
current setting with INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default
---
| CARDS /switch(es)
| COMPILE-SWITCHES file-type /switch(es)
| PAPER-TAPE /switch(es)
| PLOT /switch(es)
| PRINT /switch(es)
| ---
| | EPHEMERAL
DEFAULT |PROGRAM | KEEP argument
| | NO-EPHEMERAL
| |NONE
| ---
| SUBMIT /switch(es)
| ---
| | ALLOW
| | DISALLOW
| TAKE | ECHO
| | NO ECHO sets up, as default global arguments to
--- --- the command selected, the arguments you
specify. CARDS refers to the PUNCH
CARDS command, COMPILE- SWITCHES to all
the LOAD-class commands, and PAPER-TAPE
to the PUNCH PAPER TAPE command. These
arguments are any switch or keyword
valid for the given command.
For COMPILE-SWITCHES, you must specify
the type of file you want the switches
applied to by preceding the switches
with one of the following: a file type
(excluding the period), a period for
file specifications with a null
2-344
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
extension, or an asterisk (*) for all
file types. Check current settings with
INFORMATION DEFAULTS.
DIRECTORY ACCOUNT-DEFAULT dev:<directory> default account
PASSWORD:password
sets the account of 39 or fewer
characters to charge for your terminal
session whenever you log in to this
directory without specifying an account.
Check with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
DIRECTORY ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES dev:<directory>
causes on-line files that have expired
to be automatically archived. Check
with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
DIRECTORY FILE-PROTECTION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> octal code
PASSWORD:password
sets a default protection code governing
access to files subsequently created in
the directory. See description of FILE
PROTECTION argument for a list of valid
protection codes. Check with
INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
Default code - 777700
DIRECTORY GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT-DEFAULT dev:<directory> n
PASSWORD:password
prescribes for the directory a default
value for the number of generations of
subsequently-created files to save.
Check with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
Default n - 1
DIRECTORY NO ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES
prevents on-line files that have expired
from being automatically archived
Default
| DIRECTORY NO SECURE str:<directory>
| Specifies that files created in the
| directory are not secure. The Access
| Control Job is not used to verify user
| access to new files in this directory.
| Default
DIRECTORY OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> date or +n
sets the tape expiration date for files
that are to go off line because of
archiving or migration. If you specify
2-345
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
"+n", the expiration date is n days from
the date the files were moved off line.
Default n - 90
DIRECTORY ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT dev:<directory> date or +n
sets the disk expiration date for files
that are to be created in the directory.
If you specify "+n", the expiration date
is n days from the creation date.
Default n - 60
DIRECTORY PASSWORD dev:<directory>
Old password:old password
New password:new password
Retype new password:new password
allows you to change the password of the
directory named. The password can
consist of up to 39 alphanumeric
characters, including hyphens.
DIRECTORY PROTECTION dev:<directory> octal protection code
Password:password
establishes for the directory a
protection code constructed (by
addition) from the values shown below.
Check with INFORMATION DIRECTORY.
77 full access to the directory
40 access to files in the directory (including expunging
individual files), consistent with the file protection of
the files
10 connect to the directory without giving a password, undelete
files, expunge the entire directory, and change times, dates
and accounting information for files. All other access is
governed by the file protection of each file.
04 create files in the directory
00 no access to the directory
Default code - 777700
See the TOPS-20 User's Guide for more
information about protection codes.
| DIRECTORY SECURE str:<directory>
| indicates that any new files created in
| the specified directory be made secure
| by default. When a file is secure, the
| Access Control Job checks to see if the
| user has access to that file before the
| user can read, write, append, rename,
| delete, set secure, or set unsecure that
| file.
2-346
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
--- ---
ENTRY-VECTOR | octal or symbolic | octal or symbolic length
| memory location | from 1 to 777
--- ---
lets you change the entry vector of the
program in memory. Check the current
setting with INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE.
Default length - 1
FILE ACCOUNT filespecs account
specifies the account to charge for
storage of the files named. Check with
the DIRECTORY command and the ACCOUNT
subcommand.
FILE EPHEMERAL filespec assigns an ephemeral attribute to a
system program. The program is placed
in an ephemeral fork only when you run
it by typing just the program name as an
EXEC command. Running an ephemeral
system program with the R command
cancels the ephemeral attribute. For a
description of an ephemeral fork, see
the ERUN command, Characteristics of an
Ephemeral Fork.
Wheel or Operator privileges are
required to set a system program
ephemeral. See Example 11 for setting a
system program ephemeral. See Example
12 for running your own programs by
typing only the program name.
FILE EXPIRED filespecs establishes today as the expiration date
for the specified on-line files. Check
with the DIRECTORY command and the DATES
ONLINE-EXPIRATION subcommand.
FILE GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT filespecs n
tells the system how many generations of
the specified files to save. Check with
the DIRECTORY command and the
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT subcommand.
Default n - 1
FILE INVISIBLE filespecs makes the specified file inaccessible to
most programs and TOPS-20 commands.
Check with the DIRECTORY command and the
INVISIBLE subcommand.
FILE NO EPHEMERAL filespec removes the ephemeral attribute from a
2-347
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
system program. Wheel or Operator
privileges are required to alter a
system program.
You can cancel the ephemeral attribute
for your copy of a system program with
the SET PROGRAM NO-EPHEMERAL command or,
by running the program with the R
command instead of simply typing the
system program name as a command.
| FILE NO PERMANENT filespecs specifies that the file does not exist
| after it is deleted and expunged.
| Default
FILE NO PROHIBIT filespecs allows the system to migrate the
specified file to off-line storage if
disk space becomes low. For privileged
users only. Check with the DIRECTORY
command and the PROHIBIT-MIGRATION
subcommand.
Default
FILE NO RESIST filespecs cancels the effect of the SET FILE
RESIST command. This switch allows the
system to move the specified files to
off-line storage without hesitating.
Check with the DIRECTORY command and the
RESIST-MIGRATION subcommand.
Default
| FILE NO SAVE-BY-BACKUP SYSTEM filespecs
| indicates not to save the specified file
| as indicated by a DUMPER save command.
| For example, a SYSTEM:DUMP.EXE file.
|
| FILE NO SECURE filespecs indicates that specified files are not
| secure. The Access Control Job is not
| used to verify user access to this
| file(s).
|
| FILE NO TEMPORARY filespecs indicates the specified file is not a
| temporary file.
| Default
|
| FILE NO UNDELETABLE filespecs
| specifies that the file can be deleted.
| Default
FILE OFFLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs date or +n
specifies when the contents of an
2-348
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
off-line file can be expunged from
off-line storage. If you specify "+n",
the expiration date is n days from the
date it was moved off line. Check with
the DIRECTORY command and the DATES
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION subcommand.
FILE ONLINE-EXPIRATION filespecs date or +n
establishes the date on which the disk
contents of the specified files will
expire. If you specify "+n", the
expiration date is n days from the
current date. Check with the DIRECTORY
command the DATES ONLINE-EXPIRATION
subcommand.
| FILE PERMANENT filespecs specifies that after a file is deleted
| and expunged, the file name still
| exists. For example, a MAIL.TXT file.
FILE PROHIBIT filespecs tells the system never to migrate the
specified file to off-line storage. For
privileged users only. (Nonprivileged
users should refer to the description of
the SET FILE RESIST command. See also
Hints - Alternative to SET FILE PROHIBIT
for Non-privileged Users, below.) Check
with the DIRECTORY command and the
PROHIBIT-MIGRATION subcommand.
FILE PROTECTION filespecs octal protection code
sets, for the specified files, a
protection code constructed (by
addition) from the octal values shown
below. Check with the DIRECTORY command
and the PROTECTION subcommand.
77 full access to the file
40 read the file
20 write and delete the file
10 execute the program contained in the file
04 append to the file
02 access the file using wildcarded file specifications
00 no access to the file
Default code - 777700
See the TOPS-20 User's Guide for more information about protection
codes.
FILE RESIST filespecs offers nonprivileged users limited
protection against migration. The
2-349
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
specified files will be forced off-line
only when absolutely necessary. Check
with the DIRECTORY command and the
RESIST-MIGRATION subcommand.
| FILE SAVE-BY-BACKUP-SYSTEM filespecs
| indicates that the specified file is
| saved as required by a incremental or
| full DUMPER save command.
| Default
|
| FILE SECURE filespecs indicates that the specified files are
| secure. When a file is secure, the
| Access Control Job checks to see if the
| user has access to that file before the
| user can read, write, append, rename,
| delete, set secure, or set unsecure that
| file.
|
| FILE TEMPORARY filespecs indicates the specified file is
| temporary.
|
| FILE UNDELETABLE filespecs indicates the specified file cannot be
| deleted.
FILE VISIBLE filespecs makes the specified file accessible to
all programs and TOPS-20 commands.
Check with the DIRECTORY command and the
INVISIBLE subcommand.
Default
HOST Due to the number of options in the SET
HOST command, it is described separately
from the SET command. See the SET HOST
command description following the SET
command.
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD instructs the system to disregard all
terminal input made after a line that
causes an error and before the next
prompt. Check the setting for your
current level of TOPS-20 with
INFORMATION COMMAND-LEVEL.
LOCATION node-name:: causes all output device request to be
sent to the specified IBM remote
station. Two colons (::) following the
node name are optional. Check available
nodes with INFORMATION DECNET, and check
your current setting (if different from
your host node [log-in node]) with
2-350
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
INFORMATION JOB-STATUS.
Default node-name - your host node
MAIL-WATCH user-name message-count
checks the MAIL file for the specified
user immediately and every five minutes
thereafter whenever your terminal is
about to type a TOPS-20 prompt (@ or $),
and sends a message notifying you that
the user has new mail if this file
contains unread mail. If you specify
your own user-name, you receive the
message [You have mail from USER-NAME at
00:00:00]. If you specify a user-name
other than your own, you receive the
message [RECEIVER-USER-NAME has mail
from SENDER-USER-NAME at 00:00:00]. You
must have read access to the specified
user's mail file.
The message count argument sets the
number of times you are notified of
unread mail. If the SET AUTOMATIC
command is in effect, this message is
sent no matter what you are doing at
your terminal. The maximum number of
users that you can MAIL-WATCH is five.
See Example 10.
Default user-name - your user-name
Default message-count - 1000
NAME fork-name renames the current fork with the
specified alphanumeric name. Select the
current fork with the FORK command.
Check with INFORMATION FORK-STATUS.
If you give a fork the name of a program
specified in a SET PROGRAM command, the
fork will receive the attributes
assigned in the SET PROGRAM command.
For example, suppose you have given
these two commands:
SET PROGRAM COMPUTE KEEP CONTINUE
SET PROGRAM SQUARE EPHEMERAL
If only COMPUTE is in memory and you
name it SQUARE, the fork will assume the
attributes defined in the SET PROGRAM
SQUARE command and become an ephemeral
fork. The system indicates this with
2-351
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
the message [Assuming attributes of
SQUARE].
A fork must have a unique name. If you
attempt to name a fork with the same
name as another fork, the system appends
a digit to the new name. For example,
if you attempted to name two forks EDIT,
the second fork would be named EDIT0.
NO ALERT date/time removes settings that were established
with the SET ALERT command. You can
specify date and time in the same
formats as with SET ALERT.
Additionally, you can enter BEFORE or
AFTER the date and time to indicate a
time period in which alerts are to be
suppressed. If you specify no date or
time argument, all alert settings are
erased. Alerts are valid only for the
current terminal session and are erased
automatically when you log out.
Default
NO AUTOMATIC causes you to be alerted by the system
(as a result of a SET ALERT or SET
MAIL-WATCH command) only when your
terminal is about to type a TOPS-20
prompt (@ or $). Check with INFORMATION
ALERTS or INFORMATION COMMAND-LEVEL.
Default
NO CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY removes the ability of programs at the
current level of TOPS-20 to prevent your
terminal from returning to the TOPS-20
command processor whenever you type a
CTRL/C; ensures that CTRL/C will return
you to TOPS-20. Check the setting for
your current level of TOPS-20 with
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
---
| CARDS
| COMPILE-SWITCHES file-type
| PAPER-TAPE
| PLOT
NO DEFAULT | PRINT
| ---
| | EPHEMERAL
| PROGRAM | KEEP
| | NO-EPHEMERAL
2-352
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
| | NONE
| ---
| SUBMIT
--- nullifies all default arguments
(established with a previous SET DEFAULT
command) for the indicated command. For
COMPILE-SWITCHES you must specify the
type of file for which you want to clear
the switches with one of the following:
a file type (excluding the period), a
period for file specifications with a
null extension, or an * to clear the
switches for all file types. Check with
INFORMATION DEFAULTS.
NO LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD instructs the system to accept terminal
input made after an error message is
sent to your terminal and before the
next prompt. Check the setting for your
current level of TOPS-20 with
INFORMATION COMMAND-LEVEL.
Default
NO MAIL-WATCH user-name disables periodic checking of the MAIL
file associated with the specified user.
The notice of new mail is still
displayed at log-in time and when you
receive mail, unless you have given the
REFUSE SYSTEM-MESSAGES or REFUSE LINKS
command. You can always check the
status of your MAIL file at any time by
giving the INFORMATION MAIL command.
Default user-name - your user-name
Default
NO RETRIEVAL-WAIT tells the system to send an error
message if your job attempts to use
off-line files.
Default
NO STATUS-WATCH cancels the effect of the SET
STATUS-WATCH command, disabling the
interrupt character or character
sequence that displays the status of all
open, mapped pages.
NO TIME-LIMIT removes any time limit set by a previous
SET TIME-LIMIT command. You cannot use
this command in a batch job.
NO TRAP prevents any trapping that would have
occurred as the result of a SET TRAP
2-353
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
command.
Default
NO TRAP FILE-OPENINGS nullifies the effects of the SET TRAP
FILE-OPENINGS command, disabling the
TOPS-20 feature that causes you to be
notified when a program tries to open a
file.
Default
---
| /ALL
| /DEFINED
NO TRAP JSYS | /UNDEFINED
| name
| number
--- nullifies the effects of the SET TRAP
JSYS command, disabling the TOPS-20
feature that causes traps to occur when
a JSYS is executed.
Default
NO TRAP PROCEED same as TRAP NO PROCEED.
NO UUO-SIMULATION disables the feature of the TOPS-20
monitor that makes it possible to use
programs originally written for the
TOPS-10 operating system. Check the
current setting with INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.
PAGE-ACCESS range of octal page numbers type of access
Sets the type of access allowed to
programs for the specified pages
existing in memory.
COPY-ON-WRITE
provides programs with private copies of
the specified pages (13:17, 21 specifies
pages 13 through 17 and page 21, 6 pages
in all) of current memory whenever they
try to change (write to) them
EXECUTE allows programs accessing these pages to
execute the instructions they may
contain
---
| COPY-ON-WRITE
NO | WRITE
---
prevents programs from performing the
indicated operation on the specified
2-354
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
pages
NONEXISTENT
removes the indicated pages from memory
READ permits programs to examine the
indicated pages of memory
WRITE permits programs to change as well as
examine the indicated pages
Check the status of current memory pages with
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE.
| PASSWORD
| Old password:old password
| New password:new password
| Retype new password:new password
| allows you to change the password of the
| login directory PS:<username>. The
| password can consist of up to 39
| alphanumeric characters, including
| hyphens. This command is identical to
| the SET DIRECTORY PASSWORD command,
| except that PS:<username> is the default
| directory for the SET PASSWORD command.
PROGRAM fork-name EPHEMERAL tells the system to make the specified
fork an ephemeral fork when it is
loaded. For a description of an
ephemeral fork, see the ERUN command,
Characteristics of an Ephemeral Fork.
It is recommended that you enter this
command in your COMAND.CMD file for
programs that you commonly place in
ephemeral forks. Check with INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.
---
| CONTINUE
PROGRAM fork-name KEEP | REENTER
| START
---
tells the system to make the specified
fork a kept fork automatically when the
fork is loaded, or immediately if the
fork is already loaded. A kept fork is
not reset when another fork is loaded
and is not reset by the RESET command
unless the kept fork is explicitly named
2-355
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
or the asterisk (*), or period (.)
argument is specified.
The required KEEP attribute establishes
where the program restarts when you type
the fork name as an EXEC command.
CONTINUE begins the program at the point
where it was interrupted. REENTER
begins the program at its reentry
address (for most programs the reentry
address is the same as the start
address). START begins the program at
its start address. The system informs
you when the fork is "kept" with the
message [Keeping fork-name]. When you
type the kept fork name, the system
responds with [CONTINUING],
[REENTERING], or [STARTING].
This command automatically keeps forks
that are loaded by typing the system
program name or one of the following
commands: CSAVE, GET, R, RUN, and SAVE.
It is recommended that you enter this
command in your COMAND.CMD file for
programs that you commonly place in kept
forks. Check with INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS. See Example 9. For a
restriction on the CONTINUE argument,
see the CONTINUE command description
under Restrictions: Continued Programs
Do Not Prompt for Input.
PROGRAM fork-name NO-EPHEMERAL
disables the ephemeral attribute for
your copy of a system program. Note
that you can also cancel a program's
ephemeral attribute by running the
program with the R command instead of
typing just the program name. It is
recommended that you enter this command
in your COMAND.CMD file. See Example
13.
PROGRAM fork-name NONE cancels the setting established for the
specified fork with the SET PROGRAM
command. If the program is in a kept
fork, the address used when the fork
name is given as a command is changed to
the start address. Check with
2-356
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
CHARACTERISTIC name value
--- --- ---
REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER name | remote queue | | DQS node
| LATserver port | | LAT server
| LATserver service| ---
| alias |
--- ---
SYSTEM-DEFINITIONS
Lets you create a way to directly
specify a queue and a characteristic
parameter when submitting a remote print
request. SET REMOTE-PRINTING commands
can be invoked at command level or
within a command file.
CHARACTERISTIC sets up a string to be
used as input to the PRINT command
/CHARACTERISTIC switch. The system file
SYSTEM:REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD uses this
command to establish the initial system
setting, which equate each
characteristic string to an integer
value. You can rename a system-wide
characteristic setting by re-issuing the
command with a new name and value. You
can undefine a characteristic by issuing
the SET REMOTE-PRINTING CHARACTERISTIC
command with a null value. Multiple
characteristics are separated by commas.
The name argument can be a maximum of 14
characters per characteristic and must
begin with an alphabetic character. The
name can consist of any combination of
the following:
o the letters of the alphabet
o the digits 0 through 9
o the symbols _(underscore) and $
(dollar sign)
To get information about the system
characteristics settings, use the
INFORMATION REMOTE-PRINTING command or
read the SYSTEM:REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD
file.
PRINTER sets up a string to be used as
2-357
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
input to the PRINT command
/REMOTE-PRINTER switch. You can create
keywords (aliases) that designate the
names of remote printers and print
queues or LATprinter ports and services.
This allows you to use simple names for
remote print designations when using the
/REMOTE-PRINTER switch. You can define
an alias for the following:
o an actual remote printer queue (such
as XEROX defining SI$8700 on VAXNOD)
o a LATprinter port or service (such
as LN03 defining LBBNA129 on LAT990)
o another alias (such as FAST defining
XEROX).
The form of the command that includes
the node or server name is used to
define the actual printer or queue.
After this is done, you can use the
other forms of the command to apply
aliases to the defined printer name.
SYSTEM-DEFINITIONS sets up remote
printing information for a job based on
the settings in the system-wide file
SYSTEM:REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD. Invoking
this command provides the complete set
of printers and characteristics
available for remote printing as defined
by the system manager.
RETRIEVAL-WAIT tells the system that your job is
willing to wait for retrieval of
off-line files. Retrieval is then
requested implicitly whenever you or a
program you run attempts to access
off-line files. Use INFORMATION
SYSTEM-STATUS to be sure that automatic
retrieval waits are enabled for the
system before giving this command.
SESSION-REMARK remark lets you insert a note or reminder of up
to 39 characters into system accounting
data. Check with INFORMATION JOB-
STATUS.
---
2-358
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
| IMMEDIATE
SPOOLED-OUTPUT | DEFERRED directs the system either to begin
--- processing your spooled output
requests as soon as you make them, or to
defer them until log-out. You make
spooled output requests not with the
PLOT, PRINT, or PUNCH commands (these
are always processed immediately), but
with a command or program that writes
files to a spooled output device (for
example, a line printer - LPT:,
plotter - PLT:, or card punch - CDP:).
The COPY commands, the /LIST switch for
LOAD class commands, the CREF command,
and the LPT and OUTPUT subcommands for
DIRECTORY-class and SYSTAT commands may
make spooled output requests. Check
with INFORMATION SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION.
Default - IMMEDIATE
STATUS-WATCH, sets an interrupt character that
@@INTERRUPT displays the status of all open,
@@NO non-execute files mapped to the current
@@PAGES The display includes:
@@TOPS-10-PAGES fork.
o the job file number. The JFN
identifies a file to the job. The
user program uses the JFN in all
references to the file.
o the file specification.
o file pages mapped to a process.
o file position and byte size
displayed in the form "Byte nn(mm)""
where nn is the byte pointer and
(mm) is the byte size. Not
displayed if file position is zero.
o file size displayed in the form
"Page nn of mm" where nn is the page
being read and mm is the total
number of pages in the file. If a
single number is displayed, as in
"Page nn", nn is the total number of
pages in the file. For example,
"Page 5 of 9" represents a 9-page
input file where page 5 is currently
being read. "Page 11" represents an
2-359
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
output file where 11 pages have been
created. Note that some programs do
not read the input file
sequentially.
o The mode of access (read, write and
append) for which the file has been
opened.
Although much of the above information
is also provided by the INFORMATION
FILE-STATUS and INFORMATION MEMORY
commands, these commands can only
display information while your terminal
is at EXEC command level. The
STATUS-WATCH interrupt character
functions from EXEC or program level.
In addition, the interrupt character
displays the status of an executing EXEC
command (for example, COPY).
To check the status of pages mapped to a
program, you must specify one of these
subcommands: PAGES, or TOPS-10-PAGES.
The interrupt character always displays
the pages opened by the EXEC, for
example the pages opened by a COPY
command. When an EXEC command is
processing, only the EXEC's pages are
checked. If no command is in progress,
the current fork's address space is
checked. If there is no current fork,
no checking takes place.
For efficiency and to reduce the
overhead of this command, a maximum of
512 pages (not including EXEC pages) are
checked by the interrupt character.
These pages do not have to be contiguous
or in the same section.
To simplify your typing, SET
STATUS-WATCH accepts subcommands as
arguments on the command line.
INTERRUPT "^x" is a required subcommand
that sets a control character or
character sequence that, when typed
during program or EXEC command
execution, displays the status of all
files opened by the current fork. Use
2-360
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
the FORK command to select a different
current fork.
The interrupt character can be a single
control character or a two-character
sequence enclosed in double quotes. For
example, "^B", "DF", "^QW" are valid
interrupt characters. Control
characters that are already used by the
system, such as CTRL/C and CTRL/T,
cannot be redefined by SET STATUS-WATCH.
See Appendix D for a list of defined
system control characters.
A two-character interrupt sequence is
job-wide and can be issued from any EXEC
level. If another program in your job
defines a two-character interrupt
sequence (for example the SET HOST
command with the CTERM-SERVER), this
sequence supersedes the SET STATUS-WATCH
interrupt sequence. A single-character
interrupt applies only to the current
EXEC level. Also, the interrupt
character is not echoed on the terminal.
NO INTERRUPT disables the interrupt
characters.
PAGES nn adds the specified octal pages
(nn) or range of pages (n:m) to the
pages checked by the interrupt
character. Multiple pages and ranges of
pages can be specified by separating the
pages with commas. For example, PAGE
100:40, 350 specifies pages 100 through
140 and page 350.
NO PAGES disables checking for all pages
except pages used by the EXEC.
The total number of mapped pages checked
by the interrupt character (not
including EXEC pages) cannot exceed 512.
Generally, programs map pages within the
range of 0:777.
TOPS-10-PAGES adds the pages used by
PA1050 (for TOPS-10 compatibility) to
the address space checked by the
interrupt character.
2-361
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
It is recommended that you place the SET
STATUS command in your COMAND.CMD file.
See Example 14.
---
| 200
| 556
TAPE DENSITY | 800
| 1600
| 6250
| SYSTEM-DEFAULT
---
instructs the system to read and write
magnetic tapes for your job at the
indicated density (in bits per inch).
SYSTEM-DEFAULT, one of these values
(usually 1600), is established by your
system manager. The value set by this
command can be superseded by commands
within a program. Check with
INFORMATION TAPE-PARAMETERS.
Default - SYSTEM-DEFAULT
---
| ANSI-ASCII
| CORE-DUMP
| HIGH-DENSITY
TAPE FORMAT | INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE
| SIXBIT
| SYSTEM-DEFAULT
---
advises the system that the format to
use in processing tapes is either
ANSI-ASCII, which stores each word of
data as five 7-bit bytes in five frames
of a 9-track type; or CORE-DUMP, which
stores each word of data as a single
36-bit byte in five frames of a 9-track
tape, partially using the fifth frame;
or HIGH-DENSITY, which stores each two
words of data as nine 8-bit bytes in
nine frames of a 9-track tape; or
INDUSTRY-COMPATIBLE, which stores each
word of data as four 8-bit bytes in four
frames of a 9-track tape; or SIXBIT,
which stores each word of data as six
6-bit bytes in six frames of a 7-track
tape. SYSTEM-DEFAULT, one of these
(usually CORE-DUMP), is chosen by your
2-362
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
system manager. See also Restrictions -
Using SET TAPE Commands, in the MOUNT
command description in this manual. See
the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls Reference
Manual for more information about
hardware data modes for magnetic tapes.
Check with INFORMATION TAPE-PARAMETERS.
Default - SYSTEM-DEFAULT
---
| EVEN
TAPE PARITY | ODD tells the system which parity to assume
--- when verifying the accuracy of tape
records. Check with INFORMATION
TAPE-PARAMETERS.
Default - ODD
TAPE RECORD-LENGTH n sets the size, in bytes, for each
physical record on a tape. Check with
INFORMATION TAPE-PARAMETERS. Not
applicable with labeled tapes.
Default n - 512
TERMINAL feature or type same as TERMINAL command.
TIME-LIMIT n tells the system to stop any program or
terminal printout when the given amount
of additional CPU time (in seconds) has
been used, and to inform you with a
fatal error message. This command is
used by the batch system to limit the
runtime of batch jobs. Display the time
limit set for your job with the SYSTAT
command and the LIMIT subcommand.
Display the CPU time used by your job
with CTRL/T or INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.
TRAP FILE-OPENINGS displays a message when any program
attempts to open a file. Check with
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS. See Example
5.
---
| /ALL
| /DEFINED
TRAP JSYS | /UNDEFINED
| name
| number displays a message when any program
--- calls a TOPS-20 JSYS. You can cause
trapping to occur for all JSYSs, for
2-363
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
defined JSYSs only (JSYSs known to the
Monitor), for undefined JSYSs only
(JSYSs not known to the Monitor), or for
the JSYS(s) specified by name or number.
You can specify multiple JSYSs separated
by commas. Check with INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS. See Example 6.
Default - /DEFINED
NOTE
The SET TRAP command is
ineffective for execute-only
programs (those with a
protection code that prohibits
reading and writing the file).
Attempts to run such programs
after a SET TRAP command has
been specified will result in
error messages.
TRAP NO same as SET NO TRAP.
TRAP NO FILE-OPENINGS same as SET NO TRAP FILE-OPENINGS.
---
| /ALL
| /DEFINED
TRAP NO JSYS | /UNDEFINED
| name
| number same as SET NO TRAP JSYS.
---
TRAP NO PROCEED directs the system to terminate the
program after a trap has occurred as a
result of a SET TRAP command. Check
with INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS. See
Example 7.
TRAP PROCEED directs the system to continue a program
after a trap has occurred as a result of
a SET TRAP command. Check with
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default
---
TYPEOUT MODE | NUMERIC
| SYMBOLIC establishes the mode in which memory
--- addresses and contents are to be
typed on your terminal in response, for
example, to a CTRL/T or the commands:
2-364
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
INFORMATION ADDRESS-BREAK, INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS, INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS,
and EXAMINE. Note that only NUMERIC
typeout is displayed for execute-only
programs. Check with INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default - NUMERIC
UUO-SIMULATION allows the system to execute programs
originally written for the TOPS-10
operating system, by calling the TOPS-10
compatibility package, PA1050.EXE.
Check the current setting with
INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
Default
Characteristics
Affect Only Current Terminal Session
The SET command, except for SET DIRECTORY and SET FILE,
applies to the current terminal session only, and in most
cases only to the current level of TOPS-20 in that session.
Therefore put SET DEFAULT, SET CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY, SET
PROGRAM, and other SET commands into your COMAND.CMD file if
you want them to be in effect every time you log in or give
the PUSH command. Place commands that apply to any level of
TOPS-20 in your LOGIN.CMD file.
SYSTEM:REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD
The system-wide file REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD contains SET
REMOTE-PRINTING commands to establish printer aliases and
characteristics values. The SET REMOTE-PRINTING
SYSTEM-DEFINITIONS command sets up remote printing
information for a job based on the settings in
REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD. Internal tables are built that consist
of the command arguments. These tables are used to validate
the /CHARACTERISTIC and /REMOTE-PRINTER switch values
specified by the user.
You can invoke the SET REMOTE-PRINTING SYSTEM-DEFINITONS
command at command level or within a command file.
Hints
Using SET PAGE-ACCESS
A SET PAGE-ACCESS command can take several arguments on the
2-365
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
same line, with cumulative effect; contradictions are
resolved in favor of the last item given. So SET
PAGE-ACCESS 6 EXECUTE NO COPY-ON-WRITE NO WRITE allows a
user to execute page 6 but not to change it; SET PAGE-ACCESS
7 NO WRITE WRITE allows changes to page 7.
To Make Modifiable Copies of Write-protected Programs
Because the SAVE command preserves the write protection of
files, you should use the SET PAGE ACCESS WRITE or SET
PAGE-ACCESS COPY-ON-WRITE command before giving SAVE if you
want to save a modifiable copy of a program.
Using SET TIME-LIMIT
Although the SET TIME-LIMIT command is ordinarily used by
the batch system to limit the runtime of jobs, you can
employ it as a timesharing user to give you a fatal error
message when the specified amount of CPU time has been
spent. To find out how much of this time you have left,
give the SYSTAT . LIMIT and INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
commands. The difference between the SYSTAT . LIMIT time
and the "Used" time reported by INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS
tells you the approximate time remaining.
SET Commands Useful for Debugging Programs
SET ADDRESS-BREAK
SET ADDRESS-BREAK shows you how often and for what
purpose a memory address is referenced. When an
address break occurs, a message will show the memory
location at which execution of your program will
resume.
SET NO CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY, SET UUO-SIMULATION, SET
PAGE-ACCESS
If you are debugging a program, use the SET NO
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY command to ensure that you can use
CTRL/C to leave the program. Test a program that traps
CTRL/Cs by having it trap, say, CTRL/As instead during
debugging. Also, setting NO CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY, NO
UUO-SIMULATION, or PAGE-ACCESS NO WRITE NO
COPY-ON-WRITE will show you what part of the program
(if any) is attempting to use these features.
Alternative to SET FILE PROHIBIT for Non-privileged Users
2-366
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
Even if you do not have sufficient privileges to use the SET
FILE PROHIBIT command, you can still do something to delay
the removal of important files to off-line storage.
Create a file named MIGRATION.ORDER in each directory for
which you wish to control migration. The contents of this
file should be the specifications of files that you want to
be migrated first, when migration is performed. You may use
wildcard characters (* and %) to specify more than one file.
To protect source programs, for example, you could specify
that executable programs and binary files be migrated first,
by listing "*.EXE, *.REL" in MIGRATION.ORDER. To protect
edited files, you could list "*.Q*" (this ensures that
unedited back-up files produced by the EDIT program be
migrated before the edited versions).
Any files not listed in MIGRATION.ORDER will be protected
from migration until all listed files have been migrated.
Remember that, even without being listed in MIGRATION.ORDER,
files are not usually migrated to off-line storage if they
have been used or changed within a period of time specified
by your system manager.
The SET FILE RESIST command also offers limited protection
against involuntary migration.
Using SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER
It is possible that two remote queue names on different
clusters may be the same or that a remote queue name may be
the same as a LAT port or service name. The target node
name or actual name form of the SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER
command resolves this problem. The node name or server name
distinguishes one identically named printer from another.
For example, the following two commands would help avoid
confusion in such an instance:
SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER ODIE LASER LAT1
SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER GARFIELD LASER VAXNOD
Restrictions
Using SET Commands in Batch Jobs
Put SET commands into a BATCH.CMD file in your log-in
directory if you want them to apply to the first (highest)
level of TOPS-20 in batch jobs you submit; put them into
COMAND.CMD in your log-in directory if you want them to
apply to all levels of TOPS-20 in both batch and interactive
jobs. Remember, though, that you must not give SET
2-367
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY, SET NO TIME-LIMIT, or SET TIME-LIMIT
(or the ATTACH command) within any batch job.
Using SET DIRECTORY Commands
You will be able to use the SET DIRECTORY commands only if
your system is instructed at system start-up time to allow
them. Otherwise, the system will send you error messages in
response to SET DIRECTORY commands.
Using SET REMOTE-PRINTING Commands
In supporting host initiated connections to LATprinters,
TOPS-20 users are limited to six character server names.
The remote printer functionality on TOPS-20 does not include
features to allow remote systems to access a printer
facility local to a TOPS-20 system.
Examples
1. Set the LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD parameter for your job.
@SET LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD
2. Find out the placement of your program in memory; set an
address break to occur at location 2412 when the instruction
it contains has been executed six times. Then give the
INFORMATION ADDRESS-BREAK command to see the location and
operation for which the current address break has been set.
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
5. pages, Entry vector loc 400010 len 254000
0-3 Private R, W, E
400 Private R, W, E
@SET ADDRESS-BREAK 2412,
@@AFTER 6
@@EXECUTE
@@
@INFORMATION ADDRESS-BREAK
Address break at 2412 on execute.
3. Set defaults for PRINT command switches, then print a file
immediately by explicitly supplying an /AFTER switch with an
early hour as argument.
@SET DEFAULT PRINT /LOWERCASE/AFTER:17:00
2-368
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
@PRINT /AFTER:+0 4-UPED.TXT
[Job 4-UPED Queued, Request-ID 346, Limit 200]
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- ------------------------
* 4-UPED 346 200 LATTA On Unit:0
Started at 16:11:11, printed 0 of 200 pages
There is 1 Job in the Queue (1 in Progress)
4. Put an executable program into memory and set the page access
of its first page to NO COPY-ON-WRITE; try to deposit a value
(32) in memory location 500 of the page (this fails). Then
set its page access to COPY-ON-WRITE and try once more,
succeeding this time. Give the INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
command again. Notice that you now have your own copy of the
page in memory; it is no longer mapped from the file
TESTF1.EXE in your connected directory.
@GET TESTF1
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
1. pages, Entry vector loc 145 len 254000
0 TESTF1.EXE.3 1 R, CW, E
@SET PAGE-ACCESS 0 NO COPY-ON-WRITE
@DEPOSIT 500 32
?Can't write that page
@SET PAGE-ACCESS 0 COPY-ON-WRITE
@DEPOSIT 500 32
[Shared]
@INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
1. pages, Entry vector loc 145 len 254000
0 Private R, W, E
5. Learn what files are opened when you edit a file.
@SET TRAP FILE-OPENINGS
@EDIT LOGIN.CMD
[Fork EDIT opening SWITCH.INI.3 for reading]
[Fork EDIT opening LOGIN.CMD.33 for reading]
Edit: LOGIN.CMD.33
[Fork EDIT opening EDIT-BUFFER.OUT.100042 for writing]
*EU
[Fork EDIT opening EDIT-BUFFER.OUT.100042 for reading]
[Fork EDIT opening LOGIN.CMD.34 for writing]
2-369
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
[LOGIN.CMD.34]
6. Cause a trap to occur whenever the GTFDB JSYS is executed.
Then edit a file. The EDIT command invokes the GTFDB JSYS
and causes a line to type out in the following format:
[fork "trap" <location>/<jsys name> "Ac's 1-4:" -
<ac contents>]
Note that the location is in symbolic form if you so
specified in the SET TYPEOUT MODE command.
@SET TRAP JSYS GTFDB
@EDIT LOGIN.CMD
[EDIT trap 3515/ GTFDB Ac's 1-4: 11 1000004 20321 424153000000]
[EDIT trap 3562/ GTFDB Ac's 1-4: 11 2000011 4 424153000000]
Edit: LOGIN.CMD.42
*EU
[LOGIN.CMD.43]
7. Specify that program execution is to halt whenever a GTFDB
JSYS causes a trap. Then edit a file. The EDIT command
invokes the GTFDB JSYS, causing a trap to occur, which causes
the EDIT process to immediately halt.
@SET TRAP NO PROCEED
@SET TRAP JSYS GTFDB
@EDIT LOGIN.CMD
[EDIT trap 3515/ GTFDB Ac's 1-4: 10 1000004 20321 424153000000]
8. Arrange for the system to remind you of a future obligation.
Then verify that you will be reminded.
@SET ALERT MONDAY +11:00:00 Turn in time card
@SET AUTOMATIC
@INFORMATION ALERTS
Next alert at 8-Jun-84 16:55:00 - Almost time to go home!!
Other alerts set for:
11-Jun-84 08:55:00 - Project meeting at 9:00
14-Jun-84 11:00:00 - Turn in last week's time card by noon
Alerts are automatic
9. Set the CHANGE and RADIUS programs to be automatically placed
in kept forks when they are run. Then give the INFORMATION
PROGRAM-STATUS command to display all the SET PROGRAM
settings. Finally, run the CHANGE program. Note that the
message [Keeping CHANGE] indicates that the program is being
loaded into a kept fork.
2-370
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
@SET PROGRAM RADIUS KEEP CONTINUE
@SET PROGRAM CHANGE KEEP CONTINUE
@INFORMATION (ABOUT) PROGRAM
Used 0:00:35 in 0:24:09
TOPS-20: 0:00:00.8
SET UUO-SIMULATION (FOR PROGRAM)
SET TYPEOUT MODE NUMERIC
| SET PROGRAM RADIUS KEEP (AND) CONTINUE (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
| SET PROGRAM CHANGE KEEP (AND) CONTINUE (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
SET PROGRAM MS KEEP (AND) START (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
SET PROGRAM DSRPLUS KEEP (AND) START (WHEN INVOKED AS A COMMAND)
=> MS (1): Kept, C from IO wait at 104062, 0:00:01.6
@RUN CAN
[Keeping CAN]
CAN>
10. Arrange for the system to check for new mail in your MAIL
file and the MAIL file of user AI.GROUP. Notice the two
messages indicating that you and AI.GROUP have new mail.
Then, cancel mail watching for user AI.GROUP.
@SET MAIL-WATCH
@SET MAIL-WATCH AI.GROUP
[You have mail from SMITH at 10:12:11]
[AI.GROUP has mail from NELSON at 10:12:14]
@SET NO MAIL-WATCH AI.GROUP
11. Use the DIRECTORY command to learn the name of the directory
that contains a system program. Then enable your Wheel or
Operator privileges and set the system file ephemeral.
@DIRECTORY SYS:ISPELL
RANDOM:<UNSUPPORTED>
ISPELL.EXE.1
@ENABLE
$SET FILE EPHEMERAL RANDOM:<UNSUPPORTED>ISPELL.EXE
RANDOM:<UNSUPPORTED>ISPELL.EXE.1 [OK]
$DISABLE
@
12. Add one of your own directories to the definition of SYS: so
that you can run programs in that directory by typing just
the program name.
@DEFINE SYS: => SYS:, STUDENTS:<DBONIN.TOOLS>
Next, set ephemeral a file in this directory. Run the
program in an ephemeral fork by typing the program name.
Then CTRL/C from the program. Give the INFORMATION
FORK-STATUS command and note that the ephemeral fork CHANGE
2-371
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
has been reset.
@SET FILE EPHEMERAL CHANGE.EXE
@CHANGE
CHANGE>^C
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6253, 0:00:00.6
13. Run an ephemeral system program and disable the program's
ephemeral attribute.
@SET PROGRAM CHANGE NO-EPHEMERAL
@CHANGE
CHANGE>
or
@R CHANGE
CHANGE>
14. Give the SET STATUS-WATCH command with the INTERRUPT
subcommand to specify CTRL/B as the interrupt character.
Then give the PAGES subcommand to specify the range of pages
to be checked by the interrupt character. Display both
settings with the LIST-PARAMETERS subcommand:
@SET STATUS-WATCH,
@@INTERRUPT "^B"
@@PAGES 0:777
@@LIST-PARAMETERS
Enabled on "^B", Checking pages: 1-512
@
Next run the DSRPLUS program and check its status by typing
CTRL/B. This program reads the input file MEMO.RNO and
creates the output file MEMO.MEM. Note that the ^B is not
displayed on the terminal.
@DSRPLUS
DSRPLUS>MEMO.RNO
^B
Connected to BLAZE:<ROBBERTS>
6 PUBLIC:MEMO.RNO.1 [Page 1 of 9. Byte 128(36). Read]
^B
Connected to BLAZE:<ROBBERTS>
7 MEMO.MEM.1 [Page 3. Byte 512(36). Read Write]
6 PUBLIC:MEMO.RNO.1 [Page 4 of 9. Byte 1280(36). Read]
^B
2-372
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET)
Connected to BLAZE:<ROBBERTS>
7 MEMO.MEM.1 [Page 8. Byte 3840(36). Read Write]
6 PUBLIC:MEMO.RNO.1 [Page 8 of 9. Byte 3968(36). Read]
DSRPLUS>
Now look at the above display. The first time CTRL/B is
typed, DSRPLUS is reading the first page of the nine page
input file MEMO.RNO. The second CTRL/B shows that DSRPLUS is
reading page four of the input file and has created three
pages of the output file MEMO.MEM. Nearing its completion,
DSRPLUS has read eight of the nine input pages and has
created an eight page output file.
15. Define the name of the remote printer queue SI$8700 on node
OURVAX to XEROX.
@SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER XEROX SI$8700 OURVAX
@
Now, assign the alias FAST for the name of the same remote
printer queue from XEROX.
@SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER FAST XEROX
@
16. Define the name of a LATprinter connected to port
LBBNA1297Y10X on a server named LAT990 to the alias LN03.
@SET REMOTE-PRINTING PRINTER LN03 LBBNA1297Y10X LAT990
@
Now, direct a print request to the LATprinter:
@PRINT MYFILE.MEM/REMOTE-PRINTER:LN03
17. Set some remote printer characteristics.
@SET REMOTE-PRINTING CHARACTERISTIC P90 52 ;portrait 90 wide
@SET REMOTE-PRINTING CHARACTERISTIC BOLD 61
@
2-373
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET HOST)
2.72 SET HOST
Function
Connects your terminal to another system.
Format 1
@SET HOST node-name:: /switch
Format 2
(Omitting the node name on the command line allows you to define
an interrupt sequence)
@SET HOST /switch
Two character interrupt sequence (^\,<RET>): interrupt-sequence
Node name: node-name::
where:
node-name:: is the name of the remote host that you want
to connect your terminal to. Two colons (::)
following the node name are optional.
/switch is an optional keyword that selects the
service used to connect your terminal to a
remote node.
Default - /CTERM
interrupt-sequence is the characters that switch control of the
terminal back to the local host. You are
prompted for an interrupt sequence only if
you give the /CTERM switch.
Default - CTRL\,<RET>
NOTE
This command description assumes you are connecting to
another TOPS-20 system. For information on accessing
other operating systems, see the DIGITAL Networking
Pocket Guide. This command description also assumes
that you are establishing a connection with the CTERM
program.
2-374
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET HOST)
SET HOST Command Switches
/CTERM connects your terminal to the remote node by
running the CTERM communications program. Both
processors must be running DECnet Phase 4 software
(available under a separate license). The SET
HOST command runs the CTERM communications program
by default. If the remote node does not support
the CTERM protocol, SET HOST attempts the
connection again. In the second attempt however,
SET HOST runs the communications program defined
by the logical name NRT: (Network Remote
Terminal).
Default
/NRT runs the communications service program defined by
the logical name NRT: (Network Remote Terminal).
NRT: can be a system or job logical name. When
both exist, the job definition takes precedence.
Characteristics
Logging into the Remote Node
Once your terminal is connected to the remote node, the
system responds by identifying itself and prompting you to
log in. You can then log in to the system.
Path of Terminal Input and Output
The SET HOST command passes terminal input through the local
host to the remote host. Output from the remote host passes
through the local host to your terminal.
Making a Series of Host Connections
Once you have logged in to a remote node, you can give EXEC
commands and run programs just as you would on your local
node. You can then establish a connection to another remote
node. For example, if your local host is AURORA, you can
give the command SET HOST BOSTON to connect to the node
BOSTON; after logging in to BOSTON, you can use the command
SET HOST DENVER to connect to node DENVER.
Returning to Your Local Host
To return your terminal to your local host, type the
interrupt sequence to temporarily break the connection to
the remote host. Note that the connection to the remote
2-375
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET HOST)
host remains intact until you reset the CTERM program. You
can reconnect your terminal to the remote host by giving the
CONTINUE command.
When you log out of the remote host, the connection is
broken and you are returned to your local host.
If you have established a series of connections, the
interrupt character defined in your first SET HOST command
returns you to your local host. For example, your local
host is AURORA and you SET HOST to BOSTON, specifying the
CTRL\<RET> interrupt sequence to return to AURORA. Then
from BOSTON you connect to DENVER. Typing the CTRL\<RET>
interrupt to DENVER returns you to AURORA, not BOSTON.
Specifying the Interrupt Sequence
o The interrupt sequence can be a combination of two
characters or control characters. For example, KL ^KL,
K^L, and ^K^L are valid interrupt sequences.
o If you specify only one interrupt character, the second
character is ^J. For example if you specify only ^N as
the interrupt sequence, the actual interrupt sequence is
^N^J. If you type only F, the interrupt sequence is
F^J.
o Each interrupt character must be different. For
example, ^K^K is invalid, while ^KK is a valid interrupt
sequence.
o Do not type a comma or a space between interrupt
characters as it will be interpreted as the second
character in the sequence.
o The RETURN key can only be used in the default interrupt
sequence, ^\<RET>.
o The interrupt sequence cannot contain predefined TOPS-20
control characters. For example, if you attempt to
specify an interrupt sequence as ^T^I, the ^T will print
the run status and the ^I will print a tab. See
Appendix D in this manual for a list of TOPS-20 control
characters.
Controlling Scrolling on a Remote Host
On your local host, <CTRL/S> and <CTRL/Q> are the default
control characters that pause and continue scrolling.
Typing <CTRL/Q> continues scrolling whether scrolling paused
because you typed <CTRL/S> or the output paused on an
2-376
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET HOST)
end-of-page.
However, CTERM does not pass these characters to the remote
host. When using <CTRL/S> and <CTRL/Q>, it is the local
host that actually controls scrolling. Therefore if output
from the remote host has paused on an end-of-page, <CTRL/Q>
will not continue scrolling. Other pause and continue
characters are passed to the remote host. You can use
<CTRL/A> to both pause and resume scrolling or you can use
the TERMINAL PAUSE command to assign any two characters of
your choosing to control scrolling. For consistency, it is
recommended that you define the same pause and continue
characters on your local and remote node.
Hints
Listing Available Nodes
Use the INFORMATION DECNET command to display the names of
DECnet nodes accessible to your node.
Effect on Terminal
The SET HOST command connects your terminal to the remote system.
After the remote system's herald message is printed, you can log
in.
Related Commands
CONTINUE for resuming a connection that was broken
with an escape sequence.
INFORMATION DECNET for displaying the names of nodes reachable
from your node.
INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
for displaying the name of the host node and
other information about your job.
INFORMATION LOGICAL-NAMES NRT:
for displaying the name of the communications
program run by /NRT.
SYSTAT for displaying (in the ORIGIN column) the
name of the local system (the system you
connected to before connecting to the current
remote system).
2-377
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET HOST)
Examples
1. Connect your terminal to a remote TOPS-20 node named AURORA
and then login.
@SET HOST AURORA
[Attempting a connection, connect OK, ]
[Remote host is a TOPS-20 system]
[TYPE ^\,<RET> to return to node ROMAX]
AURORA - Claims Tracking System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@LOGIN RSMITH
Job 4 on TTY315 15-Nov-87 09:35:03, Last Login 15-Nov-87 08:18:48
2. Give the INFORMATION DECNET command to find out if node
BOSTON is reachable from your host node. Then give the SET
HOST command without typing the node name on the command
line. Omitting the node name causes the system to prompt you
for an interrupt sequence. After typing your own interrupt
sequence, the system prompts you for the name of the remote
node.
@INFORMATION DECNET BOSTON
Node BOSTON is reachable
@SET HOST
Two character interrupt sequence (^\,<RET>): ^ED
Node name: BOSTON
[Attempting a connection, connect OK, ]
[Remote host is a TOPS-20 system]
[TYPE ^E,D to return to node AURORA]
BOSTON, AI Engineering Center, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@
3. Connect to a remote node named TEAL. After logging in and
doing some work on TEAL, type the ^\<RET> interrupt sequence
to return to your local host.
@SET HOST TEAL
[Attempting a connection, connect OK, ]
[Remote host is a TOPS-20 system]
[TYPE ^\,<RET> to return to node FLYWAY]
TEAL - Migratory Bird Banding, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@LOGIN LOWELL
Job 4 on TTY315 15-Nov-87 09:35:03, Last Login 15-Nov-87 08:18:48
.
.
2-378
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SET HOST)
^\<RET> (Interrupt sequence not displayed on terminal)
[Connection interrupted, back at node FLYWAY,
Type CONTINUE to resume connection]
After working on node FLYWAY, type the CONTINUE command to
reconnect your terminal to node TEAL. Then give the
INFORMATION JOB-STATUS command to verify that you are
connected to TEAL.
@CONTINUE
@INFORMATION JOB-STATUS
Host TEAL
Job 17, TTY4, User LOWELL, REPORTS:<LOWELL>
Account 341
4. Attempt a connection using the CTERM program. The system
attempts the connection and finds that the remote node does
not support CTERM. It then attempts another connection using
the program defined by NRT:
@SET HOST ROMAX
[Attempting a connection, Connect failed -
Host did not accept CTERM connection, trying NRT:
[Attempting a connection, connect OK]
[Remote host is a TOPS-20 system]
[TYPE ^P to return to node AURORA]
ROMAX - Acme's Timesharing System, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21002)
@
2-379
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SKIP)
2.73 SKIP
Moves a magnetic tape set forward over a specified number of files or
records, or to the logical end of the tape set.
Format
@SKIP (DEVICE) dev: n units
where:
dev: is the name of the tape set or magnetic tape drive that
you want to move forward.
n is the number of files or records over which you want
to skip. The colon after the device name is optional.
units is either FILES or RECORDS, where records are sections
of a file; or LEOT, to skip to the logical end of the
tape set, which is the next point on the tape set
having two adjacent EOF (end-of-file) marks.
Default units - FILES
Restrictions
SKIP With Open Files
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has
opened a file in a magnetic tape set and you then give the
SKIP command for that tape set, the system will first ask if
you want to close the associated file. You must do so for
SKIP to succeed, but you will probably be unable to continue
the program from that point because the file will now be
closed.
RECORDS Argument Used for Unlabeled Tapes Only
You cannot use the RECORDS argument to the SKIP command when
using a labeled tape, because read and write operations for
labeled tapes always move the tape to the beginning of a
file.
Warning
Skipping Past LEOT (Unlabeled Tapes Only)
If you specify too large a value for n in the SKIP command
line, you can move past the logical end of tape (LEOT). In
2-380
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SKIP)
this case, the operator may have to intervene before your
tape control commands will have effect again. You must be
sure how many files you have in the tape set if you use SKIP
n rather than SKIP LEOT. This problem can occur for any
tapes mounted on drives of the form MTAn:, or for unlabeled
tapes mounted on drives of the form MTn:.
Related Commands
BACKSPACE for moving a magnetic tape backward a specified number
of files or records
REWIND for returning a magnetic tape to its load point
UNLOAD for rewinding a magnetic tape completely onto the
source reel (only for tapes mounted on drives having
device names of the form MTAn:)
Examples
1. Skip over the next 2 files on the magnetic tape you are using
(mounted on magnetic tape drive MT0: in this case).
@SKIP MT0: 2 FILES
2. Skip over the next two records on an unlabeled tape.
@SKIP MTA0: 2 RECORDS
3. Use the MOUNT command to ask the operator to mount your tape
in write-enabled mode, then copy 3 files to the tape from
your directory on structure SNARK:. Use the REWIND command
to go back to the beginning, and the SKIP command to skip
over the first file. Use the COPY command to have the next
file (FIL-2) printed on your terminal, then give the SKIP
command again to skip to the logical end-of-tape. You are
skipping only one file, FIL-3, in this case.
@MOUNT TAPE DAY:/WRITE-ENABLED
[Mount Request DAY Queued, Request-ID 187]
[Tape set DAY, Volume DAY mounted]
[DAY: defined as MT0:]
@REWIND DAY:
@MOUNT STRUCTURE SNARK:
Structure SNARK: mounted
@ACCESS SNARK:
@COPY SNARK:FIL-1.TAP DAY:
SNARK:FIL-1.TAP.1 => MT0:FIL-1 [OK]
@COPY SNARK:FIL-2.TAP DAY:
2-381
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SKIP)
SNARK:FIL-2.TAP.1 => MT0:FIL-2 [OK]
@COPY SNARK:FIL-3.TAP DAY:
SNARK:FIL-3.TAP.1 => MT0:FIL-3 [OK]
@REWIND DAY:
@SKIP DAY: 1
@COPY DAY: TTY:
T0: => TTY:
!THIS IS THE SECOND FILE.!
@SKIP DAY:LEOT
2-382
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(START)
2.74 START
Begins execution of the program in the current fork.
Format
@START (PROGRAM) location/switch
where:
location is the octal or symbolic address where you want
the program to start.
Default location - the normal starting address,
that is, the first word in the
program's entry vector
switch is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
indicating your choice of START command options.
START Command Switches
/BACKGROUND keeps your terminal at TOPS-20 command level and starts
execution of the program in a "background" fork. When
the program attempts to do terminal input or output, it
halts and displays the message [FORK-NAME wants the
TTY].
/NORMALLY restores your terminal to command level (if any) within
the program
Default
/STAY keeps your terminal at TOPS-20 command level. Output
from the program is sent to the terminal and is
intermixed with whatever output is currently displayed.
When the program attempts to read from the terminal, it
can randomly intercept input intended for the EXEC or
another program. Therefore, use this switch with
programs that, once started, do not request further
terminal input.
Characteristics
Starting a Noncurrent Fork
When you START a noncurrent fork, the fork becomes your
current fork.
2-383
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(START)
Hints
Further Information
The START command is one of the TOPS-20 multiforking-class
commands. For more information about multiforking, see the
section named Running Multiple Programs in the TOPS-20
User's Guide.
For more information about entry vectors, see the TOPS-20
Monitor Calls Reference Manual.
Special Cases
Running COBOL Programs a Second Time
After running a program (with a RUN or EXECUTE command, or
with a GET and START or LOAD and START combination) you can
usually run it again using START. COBOL programs are an
exception: to run them again you must reload them.
Restrictions
Programs Competing for Terminal Input
If you use START /STAY to run a program in a background
fork, either at the current or at a lower EXEC command
level, (see Hints - Using PUSH to Get a New TOPS-20 Command
Level, above), the program can request input from the
terminal while you are giving input to the EXEC or another
program. This input can be randomly intercepted by the
background program when it requests terminal input. Usually
though, the EXEC or the current program receives the input.
When terminal input is intercepted by the background
program, the program usually types input error messages. To
give input to the program, stop the program by typing two
CTRL/Cs or the program's exit command. Then, if the
background program is at a higher EXEC command level, give
POP commands to return to the EXEC level that holds the
background program. (POP terminates the current EXEC and
erases programs in its memory.) Finally, give the CONTINUE
/NORMALLY command; this puts you at program command level so
that you can give the requested input.
Input is intercepted by the background program randomly.
Therefore, you may have to type extra CTRL/Cs, program exit
commands, and POPs. To reduce confusion about the direction
of terminal input, it is recommended that you use START
/STAY only when you plan to work at the current EXEC level
2-384
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(START)
while a program runs in a background fork. Use START
/BACKGROUND when you plan to work at a lower EXEC level or
at another program command level.
When a program started with START BACKGROUND requests
terminal input, it sends the message, [FORK-NAME wants the
TTY]. No input is taken by the background program until you
return to program command level with CONTINUE /NORMALLY.
No I/O Control with Some Programs
Most programs read and write data to the terminal through
standard input and output designators. Some programs
however, use different methods of communicating with the
terminal. Therefore, when you use /BACKGROUND and /STAY to
control terminal input and output from a background fork,
the input and output behavior of programs with nonstandard
designators can be unpredictable.
Execute-only Programs
Programs that are execute-only can only be started at their
normal starting address.
Related Commands
CONTINUE for resuming execution of a halted
program in memory
FORK for changing the current fork
FREEZE for halting a program in a background
fork
GET for placing executable programs in
memory
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for displaying the number and the status
of each fork in your job
KEEP for giving a fork a kept status
LOAD for loading source or object programs
into memory
REENTER for starting the program in memory at
its alternate entry point (if any)
SAVE for saving a loaded program in an .EXE
file
2-385
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(START)
ERUN, RESET, other multiforking-class commands for
SET NAME, SET PROGRAM, performing related functions
UNKEEP
Examples
1. Start the program currently in memory.
@START
2. Put an executable program in memory and start it. Then run
it again.
@GET TESTF1.EXE
@START
THIS IS A TEST.
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.04 ELAPSED TIME: 0.23
EXIT
@START
THIS IS A TEST.
END OF EXECUTION
CPU TIME: 0.02 ELAPSED TIME: 0.02
EXIT
3. Begin using the FILCOM program to compare two files. Give a
CTRL/C to halt FILCOM, then a CTRL/T to determine the
location where it was stopped. Give the DDT command, and do
some work within the DDT program; leave DDT with a CTRL/Z,
returning to TOPS-20 command level. Give the START command
to start FILCOM again, using as argument the address reported
by CTRL/T above.
@FILCOM
*TTY:=DUMPER.MAC, BACKUP.MAC
^C
^T 14:49:03 FILCOM ^C from Running at 400543 Used 0:00:03.1 -
in 0:04.39, Load 2.44 in 0:01:33
@DDT
DDT
3/ PAT..+361,,3066
4/ 56
^Z
@START 400543
2-386
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(START)
No differences encountered
4. Place the CLOCK program (not DIGITAL supported) in memory.
KEEP the CLOCK program so that it will remain in memory when
you run other programs. Then, start the CLOCK program in the
background. CLOCK will display the time every half hour
while you run other programs and EXEC commands.
@GET CLOCK.EXE
@KEEP
@START CLOCK.EXE /STAY
@
.
.
.
[11:30 AM]
2-387
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
2.75 SUBMIT
Enters a command procedure into the batch job queue.
Format
@SUBMIT (BATCH JOB) /switch(es) filespec/switch(es),...
where:
switches are keywords, chosen from the list below, indicating
your choice of SUBMIT command options. These
switches have different effects according to their
position in the command line: placed before all
files in the command, they act as defaults for all;
otherwise they affect only the nearest preceding
file.
Defaults are shown in the list of switches
filespec is the specification of a batch control file (see
the TOPS-20 User's Guide), containing batch commands
and the commands with which you would have done the
job as a timesharing user instead of as a batch user
Default file type - .CTL
Summary of SUBMIT Command Switches (defaults in boldface)
/ACCOUNT:account Default account - your current
account
/AFTER:date and/or time
YES
/ASSISTANCE:NO
APPEND
/BATCH-LOG:SUPERSEDE
SPOOL
/BEGIN:n Default n - 0
/CARDS:n Default n - 1000
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY:dev:<directory>
/DELETE
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n Default n - 0
/DESTINATION-NODE:node name
/FEET:n Default n - 200
/JOBNAME:6-character name Default name - first six characters
of control filename
KEEP
/LOGDISPOSITION:DELETE
/LOGNAME:filespec Default filespec - control
filename, file
2-388
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
type .LOG
YES
/NOTIFY:NO
ALWAYS
/OUTPUT:ERRORS
NOLOG
/PAGES:n Default n - 200
/PRIORITY:n Default n - 10
/PROCESSING-NODE:node name
/READER
NO
/RESTARTABLE:YES Default argument (if switch is
given) - YES
/SEQUENCE:n
/TAG:6-character label
/TIME:hh:mm:ss Default time limit (if switch is
omitted) - 00:05:00
Default hh:mm:ss (if switch is
given without colon or
argument) - 60 (minutes)
/TPLOT:n Default n - 200
NO or 0
/UNIQUE:YES or 1
/USER:user name
SUBMIT Command Switches
/ACCOUNT:account specifies the account of 39 or fewer
characters to charge for your batch
request. This account must be valid
for your user name.
Default account - your current
account (check
with
INFORMATION
JOB-STATUS)
/AFTER:date and/or time, or
day of week (or TODAY)
and/or time ensures that the job will not be
started until after the date and/or
time specified. NOV-12-79, and
18:00:00 illustrate two arguments to
this switch. If you give both date
and time, separate them with a space.
When given alone, the time may be
preceded with a plus sign (+), which
2-389
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
will delay processing by the
indicated length of time from the
present.
Alternatively, you may give a day of
the week (such as MONDAY) or TODAY as
argument; then the batch job will not
be started until the beginning of the
following day. If you follow this
argument with a plus sign and a time,
the job will be further delayed by
this amount.
YES
/ASSISTANCE:NO tells the system whether your job
will require the assistance of the
operator (for example, to mount a
structure or magnetic tape) when it
is run
Default - YES
APPEND
/BATCH-LOG:SUPERSEDE tells the system either to append
SPOOL the log file of the batch job to any
existing log file of the same name,
or to write a new generation of the
log file, or to send the log file to
the spool area only.
Default - APPEND
/BEGIN:n starts processing the control file at
line n of the file. Use this switch
for a control file that can fit
different applications depending on
where processing begins. (See also
the /TAG switch.)
Default n - 0
/CARDS:n limits to n the maximum number of
cards to be punched by the job.
Default n - 1000
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY:dev:<directory>
specifies the connected directory for
the batch job. For privileged users
only.
/DELETE tells the system to delete the
control file after the batch job has
run.
2-390
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT:n sets the job's dependency count to n.
Because a batch job does not get
processed until its dependency count
is 0, you can delay a job by
assigning it a positive dependency
count and then using the MODIFY
command to bring the count to 0 at
the proper time.
Default n - 0
/DESTINATION-NODE:node-name
specifies the IBM remote job entry
station on whose line printer the log
file of your batch job is to be
printed. Two colons (::) following
the node name are optional.
/FEET:n limits to n the maximum number of
feet of paper tape to be punched by
the job.
Default n - 200
/JOBNAME:name assigns a name (of six or fewer
characters) to the batch job.
Default name - first six
characters of
control filename
KEEP
/LOGDISPOSITION:DELETE tells the system whether to delete
the log file after it has been
printed.
Default - KEEP
/LOGNAME:filespec specifies where to place the log file
of the batch job.
Default dev:<directory> - your
connected directory at
the time of the SUBMIT
command
Default filename - control
filename
Default type - .LOG
YES
/NOTIFY:NO tells the system whether to send a
message to your terminal /xp /NOTIFY
switch when the batch job has been
completed.
Default argument - NO
2-391
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
Default argument (if switch is
given) - YES
ALWAYS
/OUTPUT:ERRORS says whether you want the log file to
NOLOG be printed always, or only in the
case of unhandled errors occurring
within the job, or never. No matter
which option you choose, the log file
is always written.
Default - ALWAYS
/PAGES:n limits to n the maximum number of
pages of line printer output to be
printed by the job.
Default n - 200
/PRIORITY:n assigns a decimal number n to the
job, reflecting the urgency of the
batch request. This n must be from 0
to 63, with larger numbers receiving
earlier treatment. The system
acknowledges this switch by
displaying the message [Priority has
been modified].
Default n - 10
/PROCESSING-NODE:node name::
specifies the IBM host system on
whose CPU the JCL batch job is to be
run. Two colons (::) following the
node name are optional.
/READER tells the system that your control
file is composed of card images,
including control cards, on disk.
For details see the TOPS-10/TOPS-20
Batch Reference Manual.
NO
/RESTARTABLE:YES decides whether the job should be
started again if the system crashes
and is restarted.
Default argument - NO
Default argument (if switch is
given) - YES
/SEQUENCE:n specifies that n, instead of a number
supplied by the system, is to be the
sequence number of the job.
2-392
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
/TAG:label starts processing the control file at
the line beginning with label::,
where label is an alphanumeric name
of six or fewer characters. Use this
switch for a control file that can
fit different applications depending
on where processing begins.
/TIME:hh:mm:ss limits the maximum amount of CPU time
available to the job; given in hours,
minutes, and seconds.
Default time limit (if switch is
omitted) - five minutes
Default hh:mm:ss (if switch is
given without colon or
argument) - 60 (minutes)
/TPLOT:n limits to n the maximum number of
minutes of plotter time allowed for
plotter time allowed for the job.
Default n - 200
NO (or 0)
/UNIQUE:YES (or 1) when submitting multiple batch jobs,
tells the system whether to run the
jobs concurrently or at separate
times. The control files must be
submitted while connected to the same
directory; the control files can be
located in any directory. This
switch applies to batch jobs
submitted with a single or multiple
SUBMIT commands. See Example 5.
Default - YES
/USER:user name specifies the user who is to be the
owner of the batch request. For
privileged users only.
Output
Jobname, Request ID, and Time Limit
As soon as you complete a valid SUBMIT command, the system
responds by printing, on your terminal, the jobname, request
ID, and time limit for the job. Each control file you
submit is a separate batch request, and is described on a
separate line.
2-393
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
Characteristics
Switch Defaults Set by System Manager
The defaults shown in the list of switches are correct for
most user sites. However, your system manager can change
some of these default settings. The changes go into effect
during system installation. The switches most commonly
affected are: /CARDS, /FEET, /OUTPUT, /PAGES, /PRIORITY,
/TIME, and /TPLOT.
Disposition of Log Files
The three SUBMIT command switches /BATCH-LOG,
/LOGDISPOSITION, and /OUTPUT, control what happens to the
log file of your batch job.
Where Written
The log file is always written as the job runs, either to
the batch job's connected directory, or to a directory
specified as argument to the /LOGNAME switch, or to the
system's output spooling area (it is written to the spooling
area only if you give the /BATCH-LOG:SPOOL switch). If the
/DESTINATION-NODE switch is also given, the log file will be
written into a directory or spooling area at the specified
node. Remember that a batch job's connected directory is
ordinarily defined to be your connected directory at the
time of the SUBMIT command; privileged users may specify a
batch job's connected directory by using the
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY switch.
How Written, When Printed
The /BATCH-LOG switch's APPEND and SUPERSEDE arguments
describe the manner in which the log file is to be written:
either it is appended to any existing file of the same name
(usually produced by a previous running of the batch job) or
it is written as a new generation of the file. The
/LOGDISPOSITION switch tells the system whether to keep this
file, wherever it is written, once the batch job is
finished. The /OUTPUT switch specifies when you want a
listing of the log file to be printed: either always, or
never, or only if errors occur when the batch job is run.
By using combinations of these switches you can cause any
desirable action. Giving /OUTPUT:ALWAYS along with
/LOGDISPOSITION:DELETE allows a record of your batch job
with only a temporary use of your disk area, and permits you
to monitor the progress of the job while it is running (give
TYPE commands to view the file at your terminal). Giving
just the /BATCH-LOG:SPOOL switch allows a record without any
2-394
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
use of your disk area, although then you must wait for the
printed output to see this record.
Execution of Command Files
As soon as one of your batch jobs logs in, the system
processes your login directory's command files and the
system's command files. The files are processed in this
order:
1. SYSTEM:BATCH.CMD
2. BATCH.CMD
3. SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD
4. COMAND.CMD
If a LOGOUT command is included in the batch control file,
the system processes your login directory's LOGOUT.CMD file
followed by the system's SYSTEM:LOGOUT.CMD file. These
files are not processed if the batch job is logged out
automatically.
Automatic Logout
If the batch control file is not terminated by a LOGOUT
command, the batch job is logged-out automatically and the
message "KILLED BY OPERATOR TTYnn" is printed in the log
file.
Hints
Using SET DEFAULT SUBMIT
If there are switches that you always or usually supply when
using SUBMIT, give the SET DEFAULT SUBMIT command to
establish them as defaults for the remainder of your
terminal session. The switches will then behave as if you
had typed them directly after the word SUBMIT. You can
supersede any of these default switches by actually
supplying the switch, with another value, when you give the
SUBMIT command.
For Future Terminal Sessions
Put SET DEFAULT SUBMIT commands into a file named
COMAND.CMD or LOGIN.CMD in your log-in directory
if you want these default switches to be in effect
for batch jobs you submit during future terminal
sessions as well. If both files exist, the system
reads LOGIN.CMD first.
2-395
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
For Nested Batch Jobs Only
Put SET DEFAULT SUBMIT commands into a file named
BATCH.CMD in your log-in directory if you want
them to be in effect at the log-in time of a
"nested" batch job only, that is, a batch job
started by a SUBMIT command within the control
file of another of your batch jobs. Note,
however, that the system also reads COMAND.CMD at
the log-in time of a batch job if the file exists
in your log-in directory. It reads this file
after BATCH.CMD.
Monitoring the Progress of a Batch Job
You can include the SEND command or the commands that
run the MAIL or DECmail/MS mail programs in your batch
control file. Use these commands to send messages to
your terminal informing you of the status of your batch
job. Since a batch job creates a job in addition to
your timesharing job, use the terminal line number
argument instead of the user name argument in the SEND
command.
More Information
For more information about batch jobs, see the TOPS-10/20
Batch Reference Manual.
Restrictions
Access Rights for Batch Jobs
For Specifying Control Files and Log Files
You cannot use the ACCESS command to obtain the right
to submit control files from another directory, because
your batch jobs are logged in with rights only to your
connected directory and to directories to which you
(through your login directory name) have access as a
group member. The control file, if not in your
connected directory, must be in one to which you have
read access as a group member; the log file
specification, if you give one, must be for your
connected directory or for one to which you have write
access as a group member.
For Use Within the Batch Job
Although it is possible to give CONNECT and ACCESS
2-396
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
commands within a batch job to obtain rights beyond
those mentioned above, you may then have to include
passwords in the job's control file. Because this
practice could endanger system security, it is
generally best to establish and rely on appropriate
group rights when preparing batch jobs for submission.
PUSH During Batch Job Execution
Note that a PUSH command reads the COMAND.CMD file.
Therefore, if your batch control file contains a PUSH
command, only the defaults set in COMAND.CMD are in effect
while in the inferior EXEC.
Editing a Queued Control File
The batch system processes the exact version of the control
file specified in your SUBMIT command. Therefore, if you
edit a file while it is in the batch queue, the new version
of the file will not be processed.
To change the request to process the latest version of the
control file, CANCEL the request and resubmit the job.
Related Commands
CANCEL for withdrawing SUBMIT requests
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS for examining in the batch input
queue
MODIFY for changing SUBMIT requests
before processing has begun
SET DEFAULT SUBMIT for establishing default switches
for subsequent SUBMIT commands
Examples
1. Submit a control file to begin a batch job.
@SUBMIT DIFS.CTL
[Batch job DIFS queued, request-ID 461, limit 0:05:00]
2. Submit two control files (specifying only the filenames) in
the same command. then use the information batch-requests
command (with the /USER switch) to examine your entries in
the batch input queue.
2-397
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
@SUBMIT SUMS, DIFS
[Batch job SUMS queued, request-ID 629, limit 0:05:00]
[Batch job DIFS queued, request-ID 630, limit 0:05:00]
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /USER
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ---- -------- --------
* SUMS 629 00:05:00 C.BURKE In Stream:2
Started at 15:21:01
DIFS 630 00:05:00 C.BURKE
There are 2 jobs in the queue (1 in progress)
3. Connect to another user's directory, then submit two of his
control files. Prevent the printing of a log file for one
job, and allow the second job's to be printed only if errors
occur within the job; make both jobs restartable. Request an
inclusive listing of your entries in the batch queue - notice
that the jobs are logged in under your own user name,
although the log files will be stored in user Holland's
directory. Note also that an asterisk (*) indicates a job
currently in progress.
Connect back to your directory and submit one of your own
control files, specifying a particular jobname, then check on
it.
@CONNECT <HOLLAND>
Password:___
@SUBMIT /RESTARTABLE:YES FLDTST.CTL/OUTPUT:NOLOG, LODT.CTL -
/OUTPUT:ERRORS
[Batch job FLDTST queued, request-ID 464, limit 0:05:00]
[Batch job LODTST queued, request-ID 465, limit 0:05:00]
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ---- -------- --------------------------------
* FLDTST 464 00:05:00 C.BURKE In Stream:2 /Uniq:Yes
/Restart:Yes /Assist:Yes /Seq:1993
Started at 8:40:38
LODTST 465 00:05:00 C.BURKE /Uniq:Yes /Restart:Yes
/Assist:Yes /Seq:1994
There are 2 Jobs in the Queue (1 in Progress)
@CONNECT MISC:<C.BURKE>
@SUBMIT SUMS/JOBNAME:1-SUMS
[Batch job 1-SUMS queued, request-ID 466, limit 0:05:00]
2-398
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /ALL/USER
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ---- -------- --------------------------------
* 1-SUMS 466 00:05:00 C.BURKE In Stream:2 /Uniq:Yes
/Restart:No /Assist:Yes /Seq:1995
Started at 8:41:29
There is 1 job in the queue (1 in progress)
4. Give a SET DEFAULT command to ensure that your batch jobs
will be run after 5:00 P.M. unless you specify otherwise.
Submit a batch job and check that this default is in effect.
Then use a MODIFY command to delay the starting time of this
job till 11:00 P.M. Finally, give the CANCEL command to
withdraw the batch request entirely.
@SET DEFAULT SUBMIT /AFTER:17:00
@SUBMIT SUMS
[Batch job SUMS queued, request-ID 467, limit 0:05:00]
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /USER
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ---- -------- --------------------------------
SUMS 467 00:05:00 C.BURKE /After: 9-Nov-85 17:00
There is 1 Job in the Queue (None in Progress)
@MODIFY BATCH 467 /AFTER:23:00
[1 Job modified]
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS /USER
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ---- -------- --------------------------------
SUMS 467 00:05:00 C.BURKE /After: 9-Nov-85 23:00
There is 1 Job in the Queue (None in Progress)
@CANCEL BATCH 467
[1 Job canceled]
5. Submit two control files, one located in your connected
directory and the other in a directory you are accessing.
Use the /UNIQUE:NO switch to allow the jobs to run
simultaneously. Display the status of the batch queue and
note that both jobs are running.
@SUBMIT NETCOM.CTL, RANDOM:[LOWELL]CLEAN.CTL /UNIQUE:NO
[Batch job CLEAN queued, request 58, limit 0:05:00]
[Batch job NETCOM queued, request 59, limit 0:05:00]
@INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS
2-399
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SUBMIT)
Batch Queue:
Job Name Req# Run Time User
-------- ------ -------- -------------------------
* CLEAN 58 00:05:00 DBONIN In Stream:0
Job# 156 Running EXEC Runtime 0:00:16
* NETCOM 59 00:05:00 DBONIN In Stream:1
Job# 156 Running EXEC Runtime 0:00:08
GTSTK 2 00:15:00 PURRETTA
CIGIDN 3 01:00:00 CSSE.WAIBLE
There are 4 jobs in the queue (2 in progress)
2-400
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
2.76 SYSTAT
Displays information about the jobs on the system.
Format*
@SYSTAT [NODE node name],
@@subcommand
where:
NODE node name is an optional keyword and argument that is used
to display information about the jobs on a
specified node in the TOPS-20 cluster. If an
asterisk is specified as the node name, the
command displays information on all nodes in the
TOPS-20 cluster.
@@subcommand means that, after a comma, you can give one or
more subcommands on successive lines
Summary of SYSTAT Subcommands (defaults in boldface)
ALL
CLASS
| CONNECT-TIME
CONTROLLING
DIRECTORY
HEADER
JOB job number n
LIMIT
LINE octal line number, or DETACHED
LPT
NO subcommand name, or OPERATOR, or .
NODE
ORIGIN
OUTPUT file specification
PROGRAM
STATE
SYSTEM
TIME
USER user name
WHAT
WHERE
WHO
* For information on the in-line subcommand format, see the "Hints"
2-401
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
section below.
SYSTAT Subcommands
ALL gives all available SYSTAT information
CLASS prints the scheduler class in which each job
is running; the share of total CPU time
allotted to the job, expressed as a decimal
fraction; and the fraction of total CPU time
actually used by the job. A job's actual
use may be larger than its allotted share if
some jobs in its class are inactive; it can
be larger still if other classes are
inactive and this unused fraction of CPU
time is being allocated among active jobs.
| CONNECT-TIME prints how long each user has been connected
| to the system.
CONTROLLING prints, in the column headed CJB, the number
of the controlling job (if any), that is, a
job owning a PTY (pseudo-terminal) that
controls the job being described; when used
in a SYSTAT command requesting descriptions
of particular jobs, this subcommand causes
jobs controlled by these jobs to be
described also.
DIRECTORY requests the name of the directory to which
each job is connected, if not the job's
log-in directory.
HEADER calls for a headline identifying the columns
of information printed
Default (unless you are requesting
information about specific
users, jobs, or lines only; in
such cases the default is NO
HEADER.)
JOB n restricts output to description of job
number n; can be used more than once.
LIMIT prints any time limit set for each job with
the SET TIME LIMIT command. Print the
amount of CPU time used by your job with
CTRL/T or INFORMATION PROGRAM-STATUS.
2-402
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
LINE octal line number or DETACHED
restricts output to description of the job
attached to the given line number, or to
descriptions of all detached jobs; can be
used more than once.
LPT sends output to the line printer instead of
to your terminal.
---
| . (period)
| CLASS
| | CONNECT-TIME
| CONTROLLING
| DIRECTORY
| HEADER
| LIMIT
| NODE eliminates the indicated category of
| OPERATOR information, when used with one of the
| ORIGIN keywords shown (. refers to your own job)
NO | STATE
| SYSTEM
| TIME
| WHAT
| WHERE
| WHO
---
NODE displays information about the jobs on the
specified node.
ORIGIN displays the job's originating system, that
is, the system from which the user connected
to this system.
Default
OUTPUT filespec sends the output information to the file you
specify, instead of to your terminal.
Default filespec - SYSTAT.LST
PROGRAM program name restricts SYSTAT output to descriptions of
jobs using the program (or TOPS-20 command)
specified. The argument you supply must be
of six or fewer characters.
STATE prints the current state of each job, for
example RUN (running), or TI (waiting for
terminal input)
SYSTEM [NODE node name]
begins output with system-wide information
2-403
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
(the first two lines of regular output). If
SYSTEM is the only subcommand given, SYSTAT
output is restricted to this. NODE node
name is an optional keyword and argument
that displays information on the specified
node(s) in the TOPS-20 cluster. If you
specify an asterisk as the node name,
information on all nodes in the TOPS-20
cluster appears.
Default (unless you give subcommands
requesting information about
specific users, jobs, or lines
only; in such cases the default
is NO SYSTEM.)
TIME prints the accumulated runtime (CPU time)
for each job
USER user name restricts output to descriptions of jobs
logged in under the given user name; can be
used more than once.
WHAT prints the name of the program that each job
is running; given explicitly only with
subcommand NO, to restrict SYSTAT output.
Default
WHERE prints the line number associated with each
job; given explicitly only with subcommand
NO, to restrict SYSTAT output.
Default
WHO prints the user name under which each job is
logged in; given explicitly only with
subcommand NO, to restrict SYSTAT output.
Default
Output
Sample of SYSTAT Output
The SYSTAT command displays on your terminal columns of
information about all the jobs on the system. Below is a
sample of the output you would receive in response to a
SYSTAT command that eliminates the two rightmost columns
(User and <Directory>):
| @SYSTAT ALL NO WHO NO DIRECTORY NO CONNECT TIME
Tue 14-Aug-79 15:48:37 Up 1:12:59
45+11 Jobs Load av (class 0) 3.70 3.54 3.71
2-404
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
Job CJB Line Program State Time Cls Shr Use
5 25 TV RUN 0:01:02 0 0.01 0.03
7 6 TV TI 0:00:35 0 0.01 0.02
13 35 217 EXEC RUN 0:01:02 1 0.15 0.00
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
First you see the current date and time (in 24-hour
notation: the sample above was obtained 37 seconds after
3:48 P.M.), and the length of time since the system was
started (here, just over 1 hour).
The second line displays the number of user jobs (45) and
operator jobs (11) currently running. The next three
numbers are the "load averages" for the system: these are
weighted averages of the number of runnable processes on the
system over the last minute, 5 minutes, and 15 minutes,
respectively. (If class scheduling is enabled, the three
load averages are the average number of jobs having at least
one runnable process, and apply to the class in which your
job is running.) If you are about to start a job requiring
5 minutes of CPU time, and the load average remains stable
over the period in question, for example, becomes 4.54 (3.54
+ your job = 4.54), then you can count on your job's getting
about 1/4.54 of your class's share of the system's
attention. If your class is assigned one third of the
system's CPU time and you do not receive any windfall
(unclaimed CPU time), your job will be finished in a little
over one hour.
After this comes the line of headings labeling each column
of data that follows. All but the User, Origin and
<Directory> columns of information appear in the sample
above, describing all jobs (rows). The unmodified command
SYSTAT displays the Job, Line, Program, User and Origin
columns. The Origin column displays the job's originating
host followed in parentheses by the network terminal type.
For example, AURORA (CTM) means that the user logged in to
node AURORA and then used the CTERM-SERVER protocol to
connect his terminal to this system. The definitions of the
network terminal types are:
CTM CTERM-SERVER protocol terminal
LAT Local Access Terminal
NRT Network Remote Terminal
| TCP Internet TCP/IP Terminal
By using appropriate subcommands you can select the
categories of information, as well as the specific jobs.
(The Class (Cls) and Share (Shr) categories appear only if
2-405
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
class scheduling is enabled.) User jobs, both timesharing
and batch, are listed first (in ascending order by job
number), and then, after a blank line, operator jobs. The
number of the job attached to your own terminal appears with
an asterisk (*) next to it in the Job column.
Sending Output Elsewhere
By giving the OUTPUT subcommand you can direct SYSTAT
information to a file instead of to your terminal. The
subcommand LPT sends the information to the printer instead
of to your terminal.
Characteristics
Log-in Not Necessary
You do not have to be logged in to give the SYSTAT command.
| However, the system manager can disable the SYSTAT command
| for users not logged in.
Hints
Giving Subcommands as Arguments on the Command Line
To simplify your typing, SYSTAT accepts subcommands as
arguments given on the same line as the command, subject to
these rules:
There will be no @@ prompt: simply type a space
between successive subcommands and between subcommand
names and arguments.
To get information about one or more specific job
numbers, give the numbers only; do not type JOB.
To get information about one or more specific user
names, give the names only; do not type USER. But if
the user name is by coincidence the same as a SYSTAT
command argument, you must use the subcommand mode to
request information about his job.
To get information about one or more specific log-in
directories, give the directory names.[1]
[1] For specific connected directories, specify the directory names
(and structures, if not the public structure) along with either the
ALL or DIRECTORY subcommand.
2-406
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
To get information about your own (attached) job only,
give a period (.) as argument.
To get information about all other jobs logged in under
your user name, give your user name and NO . as
arguments.
The system will not accept the OUTPUT subcommand in
this format; use the subcommand mode instead.
Special Cases
OPERATOR as a User Name
You can request or refuse information about operator jobs by
treating OPERATOR as a user name. The system accepts these
commands:
--------------
@SYSTAT OPERATOR
and
@SYSTAT,
@@USER OPERATOR
as well as the special commands
@SYSTAT NO OPERATOR
and
@SYSTAT,
@@NO OPERATOR
Related Commands
INFORMATION for finding out other information about the
system
Examples
1. Find out the status of all jobs on the system. (Your current
(attached) job is marked with an asterisk (*).)
@SYSTAT
| Thu 17-May-90 12:27:44 Up 9:32:11
2-407
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
| 12+8 Jobs Load av 0.33 0.27 0.20
|
| Job Line Program User Origin
| 135 DET DTRSRV Not logged in
| 136 DET RMSFAL Not logged in
| 137 DET RMSFAL Not logged in
| 138 DET RMSFAL Not logged in
| 139 DET RMSFAL Not logged in
| 142 434 MS BRAITHWAITE LAT70:24008_70(LAT)
| 143 435 MS WONG LAT462:24083_462(LAT)
| 144 437 MS EKLUND LAT75:24052_75(LAT)
| 145 DET EXEC UVA
| 146 436 MS JMCGREAL LAT1:LAT1_17(LAT)
| 147 440 EMACS MONTEIRO LAT1:LAT1_27(LAT)
| 148 441 EXEC JBREWER LAT73:24064_73(LAT)
| 149 314 EXEC GSCOTT klipa.tops20.dec.com(TCP)
| 150 442 EXEC LOMARTIRE LAT1:24087_1_1(LAT)
| 151 443 EXEC GSCOTT LAT1:24086_1(LAT)
| 152 243 NFTP GSCOTT
| 153* 445 SYSTAT ANDERSON LAT423:24081_1_423(LAT)
|
| 129 232 PTYCON OPERATOR
| 130 233 GALAXY OPERATOR
| 131 234 NEBULA OPERATOR
| 132 235 UNIVER OPERATOR
| 133 236 EXEC OPERATOR
| 134 237 MX OPERATOR
| 140 240 DTR OPERATOR
| 141 241 DIU OPERATOR
2. Find out the status of all jobs on the NODE VENUS.
@SYSTAT NODE VENUS
Thu 13-Aug-87 13:08:12
VENUS Up 0:10:33 17+6 Jobs Load av 0.11 0.13 0.12
Job Line Program Node User Origin
231 DET DTRSRV VENUS Not logged in
232 DET RMSFAL VENUS Not logged in
233 DET RMSFAL VENUS Not logged in
234 434 EXEC VENUS DAVE
LAT423:2408_1_423(LAT)
235 435 EXEC VENUS RICH LAT73:24064_73(LAT)
236 436 OPR VENUS GAGNE
LAT75:24067_2_75(LAT)
237 437 EXEC VENUS GSCOTT
klipa.tops20.dec.com(tcp)
238 440 NFT VENUS rich
pmap.tops-20.dec.com(tcp)
239 441 EXEC VENUS BROOKS LAT1:LAT1_27(LAT)
240 442 EXEC VENUS PUCHRIK LAT1:24053_1(LAT)
2-408
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
241 447 EMACS VENUS ROSSELL
LAT473:24112_473(LAT)
242 443 EXEC VENUS PRATT LAT70:24008_70(LAT)
243 444 SYSTAT VENUS RASPUZZI LAT1:24086_1(LAT)
225 232 GALAXY VENUS OPERATOR
226 233 PTYCON VENUS OPERATOR
227 234 DIU VENUS OPERATOR
228 235 MAILS VENUS OPERATOR
229 236 WATCH VENUS OPERATOR
230 237 EXEC VENUS OPERATOR
3. Determine how much CPU time has been charged to the jobs of
two users on the system.
@SYSTAT,
@@TIME
@@USER KONEN
@@USER ALUSIC
@@
27 66 EXEC 0:00:01 ALUSIC
43 11 EXEC 0:00:02 KONEN
4. Repeat Example 2 by giving the subcommands as arguments on
the same line.
@SYSTAT TIME KONEN ALUSIC
27 66 EXEC 0:00:01 ALUSIC
43 11 EXEC 0:00:02 KONEN
5. Find out who is using line 11.
@SYSTAT LINE 11
43 11 EXEC KONEN
6. Ask for information about jobs 5 and 45.
@SYSTAT 5 45
5 56 MACRO D.SCHEIFLER
45 205 PTYCON OPERATOR
7. Set a time limit of 4 seconds for your attached job, then ask
for complete information, including headings, for the job.
(The period (.) specifies your attached job.) The value
reported under the Limit heading is actually the sum of the
time limit you set (4 seconds) and the amount of CPU time
already used at the time of your SET command (2 seconds).
This CPU time is reported as 2 seconds under the Time heading
because you gave the SYSTAT command immediately after SET.
@SET TIME-LIMIT 4
2-409
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
@SYSTAT ALL HEADER .
Job CJB Line Program State Time Cls Shr Use
Limit User, <Directory> Origin
14* 51 207 EXEC RUN 0:00:02 0 0.02 0.02
0:00:06 LATTA, MISC:<LATTA>
8. Ask for system-wide SYSTAT information only.
@SYSTAT SYSTEM
Fri 1-Mar-84 12:35:44 Up 33:43:36
18+15 Jobs Load av (class 0) 5.19 3.36 2.92
Ask for system-wide SYSTAT information for nodes GIDNEY and
CLOYD.
@SYSTAT SYSTEM NODE GIDNEY NODE CLOYD
Thu 13-Aug-87 13:02:00
GIDNEY Up 223:12:12 17+6 Jobs Load av 0.36 0.27 0.14
CLOYD Up 26:34:31 6+8 Jobs Load av 1.33 1.21 0.99
Now ask for system-wide SYSTAT information for all nodes in
the cluster.
@SYSTAT SYSTEM NODE *
Thu 13-Aug-87 13:02:00
GIDNEY Up 223:12:12 17+6 Jobs Load av 0.3 0.27 0.14
VENUS Up 0:10:33 11+5 Jobs Load av 10.36 10.27 10.14
CLOYD Up 26:34:31 6+8 Jobs Load av 1.33 1.21 0.99
RONCO Up 12:13:14 2+5 Jobs Load av 5.01 4.95 4.99
9. Find out only which programs are in use.
@SYSTAT NO WHO NO WHERE NO SYSTEM
| Job Program
| 135 DTRSRV
| 136 RMSFAL
| 137 RMSFAL
| 138 RMSFAL
| 139 RMSFAL
| 142 MS LAT70:2400870(LAT)
| 143 MS LAT462:24083462(LAT)
| 144 MS LAT75:2405275(LAT)
| 145 EXEC
| 146 MS LAT1:LAT117(LAT)
| 147 EMACS LAT1:LAT127(LAT)
| 148 EXEC LAT73:2406473(LAT)
| 149 EXEC klipa.tops20.dec.com(TCP)
| 150 EXEC LAT1:2408711(LAT)
| 151 EXEC LAT1:240861(LAT)
| 153* SYSTAT LAT423:240811423(LAT)
|
2-410
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(SYSTAT)
| 129 PTYCON
| 130 GALAXY
| 131 NEBULA
| 132 UNIVER
| 133 EXEC
| 134 MX
| 140 DTR
| 141 DIU
10. Ask for a list of jobs controlled by job 51. (Your attached
job, marked with an asterisk (*), happens to be one of these;
job 51 itself is the other.)
@SYSTAT 51 CONTROLLING
14* 51 207 EXEC LATTA
51 41 NEWRUN LATTA
|
| 11. Do a SYSTAT command that displays the amount of time each
| user has been connected to the system.
|
| @SYSTAT,
| @@CONNECT-TIME
| @@NO OPERATOR
| @@
| Tue 13-Sep-88 13:05:54 Up 303:54:45
| 10+7 Jobs Load av 0.08 0.10 0.09
|
| Job Line Program Connected User Origin
| 80 434 MS 3:15:04 BRAITHWAITE LAT70:24008_70(LAT)
| 81 435 EXEC 0:32:30 BARR LAT1:LAT1_17(LAT)
| 82 314 MS 118:07:35 GSCOTT klipa.tops20.dec.com(TCP)
| 83 315 EXEC 117:38:41 GSCOTT klipa.tops20.dec.com(TCP)
| 84 440 EXEC 117:26:00 WONG LAT462:24083_462(LAT)
| 85 437 SORT 2:03:23 FONG LAT64:24062_2_64(LAT)
| 86 441 EXEC 22:50:16 JROSSELL LAT462:24085_A_462(LAT)
| 87 444 MS 1:59:40 EKLUND LAT75:24052_75(LAT)
| 88 443 EXEC 22:31:22 JROSSELL SCROOM:TWA94(LAT)
| 89 436 EMACS 1:44:53 FONG MATRIX:TWA14(LAT)
| 90 442 MS 1:28:19 BHAMILTON GNOME:TWA48(LAT)
| 91 445 EXEC 1:18:12 JBREWER LAT73:24064_73(LAT)
| 92* 446 SYSTAT 0:01:22 ANDERSON LAT423:24081_1_423(LAT)
2-411
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TAKE)
2.77 TAKE
Processes a TOPS-20 command file.
Format
@TAKE (COMMANDS FROM) filespec,
@@subcommand
where:
filespec is the specification of the file containing the
commands to be processed.
Default file type - .CMD
@@subcommand means that after a comma you can type one of the
following subcommands:
ALLOW tells the current level of TOPS-20, for
the remainder of the terminal session
(not merely the current command), to
continue processing a command file if
it encounters errors.
DISALLOW tells the current level of TOPS-20, for
the remainder of the terminal session
(not merely the current command), to
ignore any remaining commands in a
command file after it encounters an
error in the file.
Default
ECHO tells the system to print (on your
terminal or in the specified file) the
commands that it carries out while
executing the current TAKE command.
Ordinarily only the output, if any,
produced by the commands is printed.
NO ECHO tells the system not to print the
commands that it carries out while
executing the current TAKE command. A
final message is sent, however,
indicating whether all the commands
were executed. See also
Hints - Suppressing the Final Message,
below.
Default
LOG-FILE filespec
2-412
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TAKE)
tells the system to save the output
from the current TAKE command in the
specified file.
Output
The output from a TAKE command consists of the output for each
command in the command file you specify as argument, followed by
the message, End of filespec, that indicates successful execution
of all the commands in this file.
Characteristics
Running Programs From a Command File
If you put commands that run programs (including the PUSH
command) into a command file, and these programs ask for
arguments, you must be ready to type in these arguments at
your terminal. Only TOPS-20 commands and command arguments
can be put into a command file executed by the TAKE command.
Hints
Suppressing the Final Message
If you want to suppress the final message (of the form, End
of filespec) that indicates successful execution of a
command file by TAKE, give a TAKE command with no arguments
as the last line of your command file.
Special Cases
Nested TAKE Commands
In the case of nested TAKE commands (those given as commands
within command files), the destination for output of
commands given in an inner command file will default to that
specified or assumed for the output of commands given in the
nearest surrounding command file.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The TAKE command affects memory and your terminal according to
the commands stored in the command file you specify as argument.
2-413
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TAKE)
Related Commands
INFORMATION commands (when put into a command file) for
tracing the progress of TAKE
LOGIN for logging in; reads LOGIN.CMD then
COMAND.CMD, in your log-in directory.
PUSH for obtaining a new level of TOPS-20;
reads COMAND.CMD in your log-in
directory.
SUBMIT for processing command files that run
programs and contain program commands as
well as TOPS-20 commands; reads
BATCH.CMD, then COMAND.CMD, in your
log-in directory.
Examples
1. Process a command file.
@TAKE BACKUP.CMD
End of BACKUP.CMD.1
2. Type a command file that reports system statistics, then give
the TAKE command with this filename as argument; send the
output to the line printer. Check for this listing as it is
being printed.
@TYPE STATUS.CMD
INFORMATION DISK-USAGE
INFORMATION MONITOR-STATISTICS
INFORMATION SYSTEM-STATUS
INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
SYSTAT ALL
@TAKE STATUS LPT:
End of STATUS.CMD.1
@INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS /USER
Printer Queue:
Job Name Req# Limit User
-------- ---- ----- -----------------------
EXEC 507 27 LATTA
There is 1 Job in the Queue (None in Progress)
2-414
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TALK)
2.78 TALK
Allows you to converse with other users on your system by linking
terminals.
Format
@TALK (TO) argument
where:
argument is a user name or terminal line number.
Characteristics
Typing TALK Conversation
During a TALK session, you must tell the system to regard
your conversation as comments. Otherwise, the system
interprets your input as attempts to give EXEC commands and
responds with the message ?Unrecognized command. To signal
your input as comments, begin each line with the exclamation
point (!) or semicolon (;) comment character. Or, if your
comment is several lines long, use the REMARK command.
Other Job Not Affected
As soon as you give a successful TALK command, both
terminals begin printing both users' input as well as the
system's responses to that input. Each job, however, will
receive input from its own terminal only.
Ending TALK
To end a conversation link between terminals, either user
can give the BREAK command.
Refused TALK
Terminals can be set to refuse links with other terminals
with the REFUSE LINKS or TERMINAL INHIBIT command. If you
attempt to TALK to a user who has refused links from another
terminal, the system rings the bells on both terminals six
times, and then prints the message, ?Refused, Send mail to
user instead. If the user has refused all terminal
communication with the TERMINAL INHIBIT command, the system
does not ring the bell on his terminal.
If you have Wheel or Operator capabilities enabled, you can
2-415
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TALK)
TALK to any user who has given the REFUSE LINKS command, but
not the TERMINAL INHIBIT command.
Maximum of Four Terminals
By using TALK commands, you can link up to four terminals at
once. For all terminals to share the same display, each
pair of terminals must establish a link. For example, if
terminal A is linked to B and C, terminals B and C will
display only A's input. B and C must establish a link to
display each other's input.
Hints
Signaling a Linked User
Once you have established links with another user's terminal
via the TALK command, you can get his attention by typing a
series of CTRL/Gs. Depending on the kind of terminal he
has, these will be reproduced as ringing bells or
high-pitched beeps. This action can be especially useful
when establishing links with the owner of a display
terminal, as display terminals are silent in ordinary
operation.
Special Cases
User Has More Than One Job
If more than one job is logged in under the user name you
specify, the system responds with a list of that user's
terminal line numbers and the programs being run. Type your
choice of terminal line number (if available, the one
running the EXEC) after the TTY: prompt.
Talking to a Batch Job or PTYCON Job
When you link to a PTY (pseudo-terminal) to talk to the
owner of a batch job or PTYCON job, the system informs you
of this with a message, to which you must reply with a
carriage return to confirm the link. To decline the link,
give a CTRL/C. See also Warning, Talking to a Batch Job,
below.
2-416
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TALK)
Warning
Talking to a Batch Job
Use caution when communicating through a PTY
(pseudo-terminal) that is controlling a batch job: do not
send a question mark (?) or percent sign (%), because these
characters can be attributed to errors occurring within the
job. Also, if an error actually does occur in the batch job
and the batch system's question mark is displaced (by your
remarks) from the beginning of a line, the system may not
recognize it as an error.
Talking Between a VT100 and a VT52
If links between VT100 and VT52 terminals are established
using a TALK (or ADVISE) command, the VT52 may function
improperly during or after the linked interval (such as by
requiring frequent CTRL/Q commands to print multiple lines
of output). Turning the terminal off and then on again
(after the linked interval) will correct this problem.
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another user's job
BREAK for ending communications links involving
your terminal
RECEIVE LINKS for allowing other users to talk to you
REFUSE LINKS for preventing other users from talking to
you
REMARK for telling the system to regard your
terminal input as comment only
SEND for sending a message to another user's
terminal
TERMINAL INHIBIT for refusing all types of terminal
communication including advice, links, system
messages, user messages, and notices of new
mail.
Examples
1. Give the TALK command to establish links to another user.
2-417
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TALK)
@TALK H.DAVIES
| [Link from LATTA, TTY 230]
2. Try to talk to a user who has given the REFUSE LINKS command,
then use the MAIL program to send your message.
@TALK GEBHARDT
| ?Refused, send mail to user instead
@MAIL
To: GEBHARDT
CC: LATTA
Subject: HUNCH
.
.
.
3. Talk to another user, giving the REMARK command immediately
after TALK. (The other user's reply must still be preceded
by semicolons (;) or exclamation marks (!).) Give a CTRL/Z
to end REMARK before typing the BREAK command to end the
conversation.
@TALK CARNAVON
| [Link from LATTA, TTY 230]
@REMARK
Type remark. End with CTRL/Z.
WHERE DO I PUT "REQMD" RECORDS AFTER EXTRACTING THE ID'S?
@;in <accts>deft-77.cbl
@;you should have group access there...
THANKS
^Z
@BREAK
4. Give the TALK command to establish links to a user who has 3
jobs on three different terminals; choose one of the
terminals running the TOPS-20 command processor.
@TALK MCKAY
TTY19, DUMPER
TTY26, EXEC
TTY27, EXEC
TTY: 27
| [Link from LATTA, TTY 230]
2-418
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TDIRECTORY)
2.79 TDIRECTORY
The TDIRECTORY (Time-ordered DIRECTORY) command is equivalent to the
DIRECTORY command with the subcommands CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE, REVERSE,
and TIMES (AND DATES OF) WRITE. Use the same format and subcommands
with TDIRECTORY as with DIRECTORY. For further information, see the
DIRECTORY command description.
When used with magnetic tapes, the TDIRECTORY command is equivalent to
DIRECTORY for magnetic tapes.
Examples
1. Give a TDIRECTORY command, cancel the command with a CTRL/C
after the first few (most recent) files are displayed.
@TDIRECTORY
Write
MISC:<LATTA>
TBATCH.CMD.1 10-May-79 13:11:57
B.DIRECTORY.1 9-May-79 12:54:00
A.DIRECTORY.1 2-May-79 13:14:52
T.CMD.1 ^C
2. Access another user's directory, and request a time-ordered
directory listing of all his files of a certain name.
@ACCESS <DEVRIES>
Password:___
@TDIRECTORY <DEVRIES>SYSTEM.*
Write
MISC:<DEVRIES>
SYSTEM.MEM.1 19-May-79 09:03:48
.TXT.1 19-May-79 09:02:08
.RNO.1 19-May-79 09:02:00
Total of 3 files
@END-ACCESS <DEVRIES>
2-419
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
2.80 TERMINAL
Sets the characteristics of your terminal.
Format
@TERMINAL (FEATURE or TYPE) argument
where:
argument is a keyword, chosen from the list below,
representing your choice of TERMINAL command
options; some arguments further require a decimal
number to complete their meaning.
Summary of TERMINAL Command Arguments (defaults in boldface)
The TERMINAL command arguments are divided into two categories,
feature and type. Feature arguments set individual terminal
characteristics and type arguments set a group of characteristics that
are defined for the model of your terminal.
Feature Arguments
FLAG
FORMFEED
FULLDUPLEX
HALFDUPLEX
HELP
IMMEDIATE
INDICATE
INHIBIT
LENGTH n Default n - 66
LINE-HALFDUPLEX
LOWERCASE
2-420
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
---
| FLAG
| FORMFEED
| IMMEDIATE
| INDICATE
| INHIBIT
NO | LOWERCASE
| PAGE
| ---
| | CHARACTER x y
| PAUSE | COMMAND
| | END-OF-PAGE
| ---
| RAISE
| RECEIVE
|TABS
---
PAGE
PAUSE
RAISE
RECEIVE
---
| 50
| 75
| 110
| 134
| 150
| 100
SPEED | 300
| 600
| 1200
| 1800
| 2400
| 4800
| 9600
---
TABS
TYPE 0-36
WIDTH n Default n - 72
Type Arguments
33
35
37
EXECUPORT
H19
LA120
LA30
2-421
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
LA36
LA38
SYSTEM-DEFAULT
TERMINET
TI
VK100
VT05
VT100
VT102
VT125
VT131
VT200-SERIES
VT300-SERIES
VT50
VT52
Feature Arguments
FLAG instructs the system to print a single
quotation mark (') before it prints an
uppercase character. This takes effect only
if you set the NO LOWERCASE parameter.
FORMFEED informs the system that your terminal has a
form feed mechanism; otherwise, the system
simulates form feeds by printing the correct
number of line feeds (set by the TERMINAL
LENGTH command) if you have set TERMINAL NO
INDICATE, or by printing an ^L if you have
set TERMINAL INDICATE.
FULLDUPLEX instructs the system to send to your terminal
each character as the program reads it. Your
terminal does not print what you type until
the system sends the character back to the
terminal. See also IMMEDIATE.
Default
HALFDUPLEX inhibits the system from sending to your
terminal each character, and assumes that
your terminal prints each character itself;
causes echoing of format control characters
(for example, TAB and line feed). Be sure
also to set any corresponding switch
physically located on your terminal.
HELP prints information about the TERMINAL
command.
2-422
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
IMMEDIATE instructs the system to echo each character
as soon as you type it, instead of waiting
until the program receives the character.
Immediate echoing has effect only when the
FULLDUPLEX parameter is also set.
INDICATE instructs the system to print a ^L instead of
advancing the proper number of lines whenever
encountering a form feed or CTRL/L (ASCII
character 14).
Default
INHIBIT notifies the system that you are not willing
to receive links, advice, system messages,
and user messages. Also stops beep or bell
signals from users attempting to TALK to your
terminal. Only output from your own job is
displayed on your terminal. This command
disables the settings established with the
RECEIVE and REFUSE commands. Reestablish the
RECEIVE and REFUSE settings with NO INHIBIT.
LENGTH n sets the number of lines printed on each
page. (If you have TERMINAL PAUSE
END-OF-PAGE set as well, the system stops
after printing n lines and continues only
when you type CTRL/Q.) If you set the page
length to 0, the system stops printing only
when you type CTRL/S (as long as TERMINAL
PAUSE COMMAND is in effect also); it does not
automatically stop at the end of a page.
Default n - 66
LINE-HALFDUPLEX inhibits the system from sending to your
terminal each character, and assumes that
your terminal prints each character itself;
does not cause echoing of format control
characters (for example, TAB and line feed).
LOWERCASE tells the system that your terminal handles
lowercase output characters properly, by
printing either the lowercase character or
the corresponding uppercase character. When
NO LOWERCASE is set, the system converts
lowercase output characters to the
appropriate uppercase characters before
sending them. See also the FLAG and RAISE
parameters.
Default
NO argument reverses any of the arguments FLAG, FORMFEED,
2-423
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
IMMEDIATE, INDICATE, INHIBIT, LOWERCASE,
PAGE, PAUSE, RAISE, RECEIVE, and TABS
Defaults - NO FLAG, NO FORMFEED, NO
IMMEDIATE, NO INHIBIT, NO
PAUSE END-OF-PAGE, NO TABS
PAGE n instructs the system to stop printing when it
reaches the end of a page, or when you type a
CTRL/S. Continue the output by typing a
CTRL/Q. To set the page length, give the
number n or give a TERMINAL LENGTH command.
If you set the page length to 0, the system
stops printing only when you type a CTRL/S.
Default n - argument of any TERMINAL
LENGTH command given in the
current terminal session, or
the default page length for
your terminal type
---
| CHARACTER x y
PAUSE | END-OF-PAGE
| COMMAND instructs the system to stop sending output
--- whenever it has sent a full page
(END-OF-PAGE), or whenever you type CTRL/S
(COMMAND) or x (CHARACTER).
For argument END-OF-PAGE to stop your output,
argument COMMAND must also be in effect. You
continue the output by typing CTRL/Q or the y
parameter of the CHARACTER argument.
For argument CHARACTER to stop your output,
the COMMAND and END-OF-PAGE arguments must be
in effect. With the CHARACTER argument, you
continue output by typing the y parameter.
You can specify x and y in various ways: as
the octal ASCII code for any character or
control key; as any printing character in
double quotes (" "); as the word "control"
followed by the printing representation of a
control character in double quotation marks
(for example, CONTROL "A"); and as the word
"space" to specify the space bar. If you
specify x and y to be the same, or if you
omit y, you get a toggle effect. You can
specify CTRL/S and CTRL/Q as x and y
parameters, respectively, only on local
terminals. (Network terminal connections do
not allow for CTRL/S and CTRL/Q.) But even
some local terminals require that you select
2-424
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
characters other than CTRL/S and CTRL/Q, for
example, the VT125 and the VT100 with the
printer port option.
The default values for x and y are CTRL/S and
CTRL/Q for local terminals, and CTRL/A/CTRL/A
for network terminals. You can achieve
consistency between local and network
terminals by placing the same TERMINAL PAUSE
CHARACTER command in your LOGIN.CMD files on
the various TOPS-20 systems.
To set the page length, use the TERMINAL
LENGTH command. If you set the page length
to 0, the system stops sending output only
when you type CTRL/S or the x parameter of
the CHARACTER argument.
Default - COMMAND (for all terminal
types)
- END-OF-PAGE (for display
terminals, for
example, VT05,
VT50, VT52,
VT100)
- CHARACTER (for all terminal
types)
RAISE instructs the system to interpret all
lowercase terminal input as the corresponding
upper characters. (This setting converts the
tilde (~) and right brace (}) to the <ESC>
key.)
Default
RECEIVE same as the RECEIVE command. NO RECEIVE is
the same as the REFUSE command.
SPEED n1 n2 sets the baud rate at which the TOPS-20
monitor receives characters from your
terminal (n1) and sends characters to your
terminal (n2). Be sure also to set any
corresponding switch physically located on
your terminal.
Default n1 - 300
n2 - n1
TABS informs the system that your terminal has
mechanical tab stops. Causes the TAB key to
advance the cursor according to the tab stops
on your terminal. (Some terminals let you
select tab stops while others have tab stops
2-425
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
every eight spaces). If NO TABS is set, the
system simulates a tab by printing eight
spaces.
TYPE n instructs the system to treat your terminal
as terminal type n, in accordance with the
table below:
Terminal
Type Characteristics
0 Model 33
1 Model 35
2 Model 37
3 EXECUPORT and TI
4-7 reserved for customer use
8 TERMINET
9 IDEAL (has a TAB and FORMFEED
mechanism, prints lower case, has
infinite line width and infinite
page length)
10 VT05
11 VT50
12 LA30
13 VT52, except for not having tabs,
and having a page length of 30;
used for a Digital Equipment
Corporation GT40.
14 LA36
15 VT52
16 VT100
17 LA38
18 LA120
19-34 reserved for customer use
35 VT125
36 VK100
Default - 8
WIDTH n tells the system the width, in number of
characters, of your terminal line. When the
system prints a line longer than your
terminal width, it prints the first n
positions and advances a line to print the
rest.
Default width - 72
Type Arguments
33 informs the system that your terminal is a
2-426
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
Teletype Model 33, which
o does not have a form feed or tab
mechanism
o prints lowercase letters as uppercase
o needs extra time to print tabs and
certain paper-moving characters (form
feed and vertical tab)
o has a line width of 72
o has a page length of 66
35 informs the system that your terminal is a
Teletype Model 35, which has the same
characteristics as a Model 33, except that it
has a form feed and tab mechanism.
37 informs the system that your terminal is a
Teletype Model 37, which has the same
characteristics as a Model 33, except that it
prints lowercase letters.
EXECUPORT informs the system that your terminal is an
EXECUPORT, which
o does not have a form feed or tab
mechanism
o prints lowercase letters
o needs extra time to perform a carriage
return
o has a line width of 80
o has a page length of 66
H19 informs the system that your terminal is a
Heath Kit H19 terminal. The system assumes
the same characteristics as for the VT52.
LA30 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation LA30, which
o does not have a form feed or tab
mechanism
2-427
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
o prints lowercase letters as uppercase
o needs extra time to perform a carriage
return, line feed, tab, and form feed
o has a line width of 80
o has a page length of 66
LA36 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation LA36, which
o does not have a form feed or tab
mechanism
o prints lowercase letters
o has a line width of 132
o has a page length of 66
LA38 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation LA38, which
o does not have a form-feed mechanism
o prints lowercase letters
o has a line width of 132
o has a page length of 66
LA120 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation LA120, which
o prints lowercase letters
o has a line width of 132
o has a page length of 66
SYSTEM-DEFAULT informs the system that your terminal has
these characteristics (ensuring an acceptable
minimum level of performance for all terminal
types):
o does not have a form feed or tab
mechanism prints lowercase letters
o needs extra time to perform a carriage
return, line feed, tab, and form feed
2-428
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
o has a line width of 72
o has a page length of 66
Default for terminal type
TERMINET informs the system that your terminal is a
TERMINET, which
o does not have a form feed or tab
mechanism
o prints lowercase letters
o needs extra time to perform a carriage
return, line feed, tab, and form feed
o has a line width of 72
o has a page length of 66
TI informs the system that your terminal is a
Texas Instruments terminal, which has the
same characteristics as an EXECUPORT.
VK100 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment VK100 with the same
characteristics as the VT52 and VT100, plus
graphics capability (both black-and-white and
color).
VT05 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT05, which
o does not have a form-feed mechanism
o has a tab mechanism
o prints lowercase letters as uppercase
o needs extra time to perform a linefeed or
formfeed
o has a line width of 72
o has a page length of 20
VT50 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT50, which
o does not have a form feed mechanism
2-429
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
o prints lowercase letters as uppercase
o has a line width of 80
o has a page length of 12
VT52 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT52. The
system assumes the same characteristics as
for a VT50 except that it prints lowercase
letters, and has a page length of 24 lines
instead of 12.
VT100 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT100. The
system assumes the same characteristics as
for a VT52.
VT102 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT102. The
system assumes the same characteristics as
for a VT100.
VT125 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT125, which
has full compatibility with the VT100 and the
capability of business, laboratory, and
scientific graphics in black-and-white or
color.
VT131 informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT131.
VT200-SERIES informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT220, VT240,
or VT241. The system assumes the same
characteristics as a VT100.
VT300-SERIES informs the system that your terminal is a
Digital Equipment Corporation VT330 or VT340.
The system assumes the same characteristics
as a VT100.
Characteristics
TERMINAL Commands Before Log-in
You can use TERMINAL commands, after an initial CTRL/C or
RETURN but before logging in, to adjust your terminal's
characteristics.
2-430
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
Hints
Setting Your Terminal's Speed
If the initial speed setting of your terminal line is not
what you want but your terminal will function at that speed,
you can give a TERMINAL SPEED command even before log-in to
set the proper value. If your terminal will not work at the
initial speed, ask the operator to set an appropriate value.
Using Split Speeds
If you have a terminal that allows split speeds, you can set
the input and output speeds to different values. This will
allow you to take advantage of fast system response, for
example, without providing a needlessly fast input line. A
setting of 150 2400 will accomplish this. Note that you
cannot use split speeds on a terminal that is part of a
DECSYSTEM-2020 system. Note also that using split speeds on
VT100, VT125, or VK100 terminals may cause the "smooth
scrolling" feature to function improperly. See the
appropriate terminal manual, for example, the VT100 User's
Guide, for details.
Special Cases
Terminal Types and Defaults Peculiar to Your System
The preceding pages describe terminal types and system
defaults as they are shipped with TOPS-20. However, by
making changes to the monitor and the TOPS-20 command
processor, your installation can add different terminal
types and change the default characteristics associated with
terminals. Check with your system manager to find out what
changes, if any, are in effect for your system.
Terminal Speed Retained from Last Session
Although most terminal characteristics revert to default
settings when you log in, the terminal line will retain the
value for speed set by the last user of the line, even if he
was using a different kind of terminal. However, if the
system failed and was restarted after the terminal line was
last used, the initial speed will be determined by the
appropriate TERMINAL SPEED command in the system
configuration file. Also, dial-up lines return to the speed
specified in this file after every use.
2-431
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
Restrictions
CTRL/S and CTRL/Q Not Passed to Remote Nodes
CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are always processed by your host node;
they are not sent to a remote node. Therefore, when you are
connected to a remote node with the SETHOST program and
TERMINAL PAUSE (ON) END-OF-PAGE is set on the remote node,
CTRL/Q will not continue scrolling. CTRL/A is the default
control character recognized by the remote node for pausing
and continuing scrolling. You can use the TERMINAL PAUSE
(ON) CHARACTER command to specify the pause and continue
characters of your choosing - except CTRL/S and CTRL/Q. It
is recommended that you define the same pause and continue
scrolling characters on your host and the remote node.
Disabling CTRL/S and CTRL/Q on High Speed Terminals
Some terminal models, when set to a high receive baud rate,
such as 9600, require that the CTRL/S and CTRL/Q pause and
continue characters be enabled in order to correctly format
terminal output. If you must disable CTRL/S and CTRL/Q with
the TERMINAL NO PAUSE COMMAND, manually set the terminal to
fast or "jump" scroll. If the output is still not correctly
formatted, set a slower receive baud rate with the TERMINAL
SPEED command. Then, manually set the same baud rate on the
terminal.
Warning
Setting an Improper Terminal Speed
If you set an incorrect speed for your terminal, for
example, one that is too high, you will be unable to use it
further. A TERMINAL SPEED command in the LOGIN.CMD file in
your log-in directory can cause the same problem. In such a
case, obtain your terminal line number if possible (the
second column of SYSTAT command output consists of line
numbers) and ask the operator to set an appropriate value.
Related Commands
INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE for examining your current terminal
settings
Examples
2-432
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TERMINAL)
1. Declare that your terminal is an VT100.
@TERMINAL VT100
2. Do the same thing, using the corresponding numerical type.
@TERMINAL TYPE 16
3. Prepare your LA36 terminal for you to type in some upper- and
lowercase text files on narrow paper.
@TERMINAL LA36
@TERMINAL NO RAISE
@terminal width 72
4. Find out your terminal's characteristics, then give the
command that causes it to print a full page of blank lines
when you type a CTRL/L (or when it encounters an ^L in a file
it is printing on your terminal).
@INFORMATION TERMINAL-MODE
TERMINAL LA36
TERMINAL SPEED 300
TERMINAL NO INHIBIT (NON-JOB OUTPUT)
RECEIVE LINKS
REFUSE ADVICE
RECEIVE SYSTEM-MESSAGES
RECEIVE USER-MESSAGES
TERMINAL PAUSE (ON) COMMAND
TERMINAL NO PAUSE (ON) END-OF-PAGE
TERMINAL LENGTH 66
TERMINAL WIDTH 132
TERMINAL LOWERCASE
TERMINAL RAISE
TERMINAL NO FLAG
TERMINAL INDICATE
TERMINAL NO FORMFEED
TERMINAL NO TABS
TERMINAL NO IMMEDIATE
TERMINAL FULLDUPLEX
@TERMINAL NO INDICATE
2-433
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TRANSLATE)
2.81 TRANSLATE
Displays the project-programmer number corresponding to a directory
name, or the directory name corresponding to a project-programmer
number.
Format
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY) dev:<directory>
or
@TRANSLATE (DIRECTORY) dev:[project-programmer number]
where:
dev:<directory> is the name of the directory,
enclosed in angle brackets,
that you want translated.
Default dev: - your
connected
structure
dev:[project-programmer number] is the project-programmer
number, enclosed in square
brackets, that you want
translated.
Default dev: - your
connected
structure
Hints
Using Project-programmer Numbers
Use project-programmer numbers instead of directory names
when giving file specifications to programs written for the
TOPS-10 operating system. These include the assembler
MACRO; the FORTRAN, COBOL, and ALGOL compilers; the linking
loader LINK; and utility programs CREF (providing
cross-reference information) and FILCOM (for comparing
files).
If you are unsure whether a system program requires
project-programmer numbers, load it into memory (using the R
command), give a CTRL/C to return to TOPS-20 command level,
and then examine memory with the INFORMATION MEMORY-USAGE
command. If the file PA1050.EXE (the TOPS-10 compatibility
package) is present in memory, then the program was
2-434
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TRANSLATE)
originally written for TOPS-10 and may require a
project-programmer number where you would ordinarily give a
directory name.
Avoiding Project-programmer Numbers
To avoid project-programmer numbers, define a logical name
(of 6 or fewer characters) as the directory in question.
Then use this logical name in place of the directory when
giving file specifications. The system program will accept
the logical name as a device name, and will then be using
the correct directory.
Related Commands
DEFINE for defining a logical name as a directory, to avoid
using a project-programmer number
Examples
1. Find out the project-programmer number associated with your
connected directory.
@TRANSLATE <LATTA>
PS:<LATTA> (IS) PS:[4,261]
2. Verify that the project-programmer number reported in Example
1 does correspond to your directory on PS:.
@TRANSLATE PS:[4,261]
PS:[4,261] (IS) PS:<LATTA>
2-435
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TYPE)
2.82 TYPE
Displays the contents of one or more files on your terminal.
Format
@TYPE (FILE) filespec,...,
@@subcommand
where:
filespec is the specification of the file you want to
display on your terminal.
@@subcommand means that after a final comma you can enter
the following optional subcommand:
UNFORMATTED Disables the formatting of
control characters contained
in the file. Normally, the
TYPE command displays the
graphic equivalent for certain
control characters, for
example, ESCAPE as $ and
CTRL/C as ^C. The UNFORMATTED
subcommand causes characters
to be displayed literally,
allowing graphic text (for
example REGIS files) to be
displayed on the terminal.
Output
Entire Contents of Files
In response to the TYPE command the system prints the entire
contents of a file (up to the EOF (end-of-file) pointer),
including blank lines and line numbers if there are any. If
you specify more than one file, the filespec precedes the
contents of each file.
Hints
Stopping TYPE Output
To stop the TYPE command, type two CTRL/Cs. A CTRL/O will
also stop the output, but will not stop the processing of
the command or the accumulation of CPU charges. Note that a
2-436
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(TYPE)
pair of CTRL/Os causes the system to skip over part of the
output and continue printing.
Related Commands
COPY for copying files to any device
EDIT for examining specific parts of a file
PERUSE for editing files in read-only mode
PRINT for printing files on the line printer
Example
1. Have the system print a file on your terminal.
@TYPE TEST.TXT
! This is file TEST.TXT !
2-437
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNATTACH)
2.83 UNATTACH
Disengages another job from its terminal.
Format
@UNATTACH (USER) name (JOB #) number
PASSWORD:password
where:
name is the user name of the job's owner.
number is the job number.
Default number - the only job, or only job
besides your current
(attached) job, logged in
under the user name you give.
password is the associated password (not requested if you are
currently logged in under the same user name as the
job that you are disengaging).
Characteristics
Log-in Not Necessary
You do not have to be logged in to give the UNATTACH
command.
Hints
Freeing Hung Terminals
The UNATTACH command is useful for freeing a terminal that,
because of program or hardware errors, is no longer under
control of the user. The command UNATTACH n can be more
effective than LOGOUT n for this purpose.
Effect on Memory and Terminal
The UNATTACH command does not affect memory and leaves your own
terminal at TOPS-20 command level. The other job is left in its
current state (usually suspended) and the disengaged terminal is
left in the state before log-in.
2-438
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNATTACH)
Related Commands
ADVISE for sending commands to another job
ATTACH for joining another job to your terminal
DETACH for disengaging your own job from its terminal
Examples
1. Disengage another user's job from its terminal.
@UNATTACH KANE
Password:___
2. From a terminal on which you have not yet logged in, give the
UNATTACH command to disengage your only logged-in job from
its terminal.
BOSTON (KL2871) Development system, TOPS-20 Monitor 7(21722)
@UNATTACH LATTA
Password:___
3. Give a SYSTAT command to find out what jobs you have running.
Give the UNATTACH command for two of them (you must specify a
job number for the first one so the system will know which
one you mean), and check them with another SYSTAT command.
@SYSTAT LATTA
28 26 EXEC LATTA
36* 230 EXEC LATTA
40 27 EXEC LATTA
@UNATTACH LATTA 28
[Attached to TTY26, confirm]
@UNATTACH LATTA
@SYSTAT LATTA
28 DET EXEC LATTA
36* 230 EXEC LATTA
40 DET EXEC LATTA
2-439
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNDELETE)
2.84 UNDELETE
Restores deleted files.
Format
@UNDELETE (FILES) filespec,...
where:
filespec is the specification of the file you want to
restore.
Default .gen - all generations of the specified
files
Restrictions
Erasure of Deleted Files
Ordinarily an UNDELETE command given during the same
terminal session as an original deletion will recover the
deleted files, unless you included the EXPUNGE subcommand to
DELETE or gave a subsequent EXPUNGE command. However, if
any user or a batch job logs out while connect to your
directory, all deleted files are permanently erased. Also,
if available disk space is low on the system, the operator
or the system itself may expunge all deleted files. A
system warning message is usually sent before this happens.
Special Cases
Restoring Files Deleted With CONTENTS-ONLY Subcommand.
Any files deleted by a DELETE command with a CONTENTS-ONLY
subcommand are immediately expunged. You must use the
RETRIEVE command to restore these to disk.
Related Commands
DELETE for deleting files
DIRECTORY-CLASS commands, For obtaining lists of deleted files
with the DELETED subcommand
EXPUNGE for permanently erasing deleted
files
2-440
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNDELETE)
RETRIEVE for restoring off-line files to disk
Examples
1. Undelete a file.
@UNDELETE TEST.FIL
TEST.FIL.1 [OK]
TEST.FIL.2 [OK]
2. Access another user's directory, then restore all his deleted
files of type .FIL.
@ACCESS <CARSON>
Password:___
@UNDELETE <CARSON>*.FIL
<CARSON>MEMO.FIL.1 [OK]
<CARSON>SEARCH.FIL.1 [OK]
<CARSON>TEST.FIL.1 [OK]
<CARSON>VERFY.FIL.1 [OK]
@END-ACCESS <CARSON>
2-441
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNKEEP)
2.85 UNKEEP
Cancels the kept status of a fork.
Format
UNKEEP (FORK) fork
where:
fork is one of the following: Fork name
Fork number
Default - the current fork
Characteristics
Unkept Forks
An unkept fork is a fork that is cleared from memory when
another program is loaded or when the RESET command is
given. Forks are normally unkept unless kept with the KEEP
or SET PROGRAM KEEP commands.
Inferior Forks
The UNKEEP command simultaneously cancels the kept status of
a superior fork and its inferior forks.
Hints
More Information
The UNKEEP command is one of the TOPS-20 multiforking-class
commands. For more information about multiforking, see the
section named Running Multiple Programs in the TOPS-20
User's Guide.
Effect on Memory
The UNKEEP command does not immediately affect memory. It does,
however, allow a fork in memory to be cleared when another
program is loaded or the RESET command is given.
Related Commands
INFORMATION FORK-STATUS for displaying the fork status
2-442
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNKEEP)
KEEP for changing an unkept fork to a
kept fork
RESET for clearing forks from memory
CONTINUE, FORK, FREEZE, other multiforking-related
KEEP, INFORMATION FORK-STATUS, commands
SET NAME, and SET PROGRAM
Examples
1. Give the INFORMATION FORK-STATUS command to display the fork
status. Then, give the UNKEEP command to cancel the kept
status of the current fork and redisplay the fork status.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): Kept, HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6
FILCOM (2): Kept, ^C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.2
@UNKEEP
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6
FILCOM (2): Kept, ^C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.2
2. Display the fork status, and UNKEEP a noncurrent fork. Then,
verify the new fork status.
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6
FILCOM (2): Kept, ^C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.2
@UNKEEP FILCOM
@INFORMATION FORK-STATUS
=> EDIT (1): HALT at 6254, 0:00:00.6
FILCOM (2): ^C from IO wait at 700272, 0:00:00.2
2-443
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNLOAD)
2.86 UNLOAD
Rewinds a magnetic tape until it is returned completely to the source
reel, and puts the associated tape drive offline. Use UNLOAD only for
tapes mounted on drives having device names of the form MTAn:.
Format
@UNLOAD (DEVICE) dev:
where:
dev: is the name of the magnetic tape drive that you want to
unload.
Restrictions
UNLOAD With Open Files
If you have given a CTRL/C to exit from a program that has
opened a magnetic tape drive and you then gave the UNLOAD
command for that tape drive, the system will first ask if
you want to close the associated file. You must do so for
UNLOAD to succeed, but you will probably be unable to
continue the program from that point because the file will
now be closed.
UNLOAD Not for MOUNTed Drives
Use the UNLOAD command for tape drives obtained with the
ASSIGN command. Use DISMOUNT for a tape drive obtained with
MOUNT.
Warning
Cannot Access Tape Again
The UNLOAD command makes it impossible to access your tape
again unless it is reloaded by the operator.
Related Commands
ASSIGN for assigning a tape drive to your job
DISMOUNT for unloading tapes mounted on devices of the form
MTn:
2-444
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(UNLOAD)
REWIND for rewinding a magnetic tape volume or tape set to
its load point (logical beginning)
Example
1. Unload your magnetic tape from drive MTA0:.
@UNLOAD MTA0:
2-445
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
(VDIRECTORY)
2.87 VDIRECTORY
The VDIRECTORY (Verbose DIRECTORY) command is equivalent to the
DIRECTORY command with the subcommands LENGTH, NO HEADING, PROTECTION,
SIZE, and TIMES (AND DATES OF) WRITE. Use the same format and
subcommands with VDIRECTORY as with DIRECTORY. For further
information see the DIRECTORY command description in this manual.
When used with magnetic tapes, the VDIRECTORY command is equivalent to
the DIRECTORY command for magnetic tapes.
Examples
1. Give the VDIRECTORY command, then cut off the output with a
CTRL/C.
@VDIRECTORY
MISC:<LATTA>
4-UPED.TXT.14;P777700 0 0(7) 25-Apr-85 09:58:21
A.DIRECTORY.1;P20200 1 0(0) 2-May-85 13:14:52
ARTIFI.CTL.7;P777700 1 215(7) 24-Apr-85 10:10:10
B.DIRECTORY.1;P20200 1 0(0) 9-May-85 12:54:00
C.EXE.1;P777700 3 1536(36) 13-Apr-85 04:27:59
CONFAB.CTL.1;P777700 1 115(7) 3-May-85 13:34:37
DIVIDE.FOR.4;P777700 1 260(7) 8-Mar-85 15:47:41
DUMPER.MAC.1;P777700 53 134442(7) 8-Nov-85 10:47:04
MAGNIF.CTL.2;P777700 1^C
2. Ask for a VDIRECTORY listing of certain files; include a line
of headings.
@@HEADING
@@
PGS Bytes(SZ) Write
MISC:<LATTA>
TESTF1.FOR.8;P777700 1 115(7) 25-Apr-85 09:44:50
TESTF2.FOR.1;P777700 1 115(7) 20-Apr-85 10:01:56
TESTF3.FOR.1;P777700 1 115(7) 20-Apr-85 10:02:19
Total of 3 pages in 3 file
2-446
APPENDIX A
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
This appendix lists and briefly explains all non-privileged commands
in the TOPS-20 command language, grouping them in categories of
similar use.
A.1 SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
These commands allow you to gain and relinquish access to the system,
to activate and deactivate any special capabilities you have been
given, and to disengage and engage jobs to your terminal.
ATTACH Engages a designated job to your terminal.
DETACH Disengages your current job from your terminal.
DISABLE Deactivates any special capabilities you have been
granted.
ENABLE Activates any special capabilities you have been
granted.
LOGIN Gains access to the TOPS-20 system.
LOGOUT Relinquishes access to the TOPS-20 system.
UNATTACH Disengages another job from its terminal.
A.2 FILE SYSTEM COMMANDS
The file system commands allow you to create, examine, change, and
delete files.
ACCESS Obtains ownership rights to the specified
directory, as well as the group rights of the
A-1
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
directory's owner.
APPEND Adds contents of one or more files to another
file.
ARCHIVE Makes a permanent off-line copy of files.
BUILD Creates, modifies, or deletes a subdirectory.
CLOSE Closes files left open by a program, and releases
unopened JFNs.
CONNECT Connects you to the specified directory.
COPY Duplicates files.
CREATE Invokes your defined editor to create a file.
DEFINE Associates a logical name with one or more
filespecs.
DELETE Marks files for eventual erasure (disk files
only), or erases the files (all other devices).
DIRECTORY Gives information about the files in a directory.
DISCARD Gives up the tape copy of specified on-line files.
EDIT Invokes your defined editor to modify a file.
END-ACCESS Relinquishes ownership rights to the specified
directory.
EXPUNGE Permanently erases any deleted files.
FDIRECTORY Lists all the information about files.
PERUSE Edits files in read-only mode.
RENAME Changes one or more parts of an existing file
specification.
RETRIEVE Restores off-line files to disk.
TDIRECTORY Lists the names and write dates of files in the
order of the date and time they were last changed.
TYPE Prints files on your terminal.
UNDELETE Restores files marked for erasure.
A-2
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
VDIRECTORY Lists the names of files, as well as their
protection, size, and the date and time they were
last changed.
A.3 DEVICE-HANDLING COMMANDS
These commands allow you to reserve a device prior to using it, to
manipulate the device, and to release it once it is no longer needed.
ASSIGN Reserves a device for use by your job.
BACKSPACE Moves a magnetic tape backward.
DEASSIGN Releases a previously assigned device.
DISMOUNT Gives up access to the specified structure or tape
set.
EOF Writes an end-of-file mark on a magnetic tape.
MOUNT Requests use of the specified structure or tape
set.
REWIND Moves a magnetic tape backward to its load point.
SKIP Moves a magnetic tape forward.
UNLOAD Rewinds a magnetic tape until the tape is wound
completely on the source reel.
A.4 PROGRAM CONTROL COMMANDS
The following commands help you run and debug your own programs.
COMPILE Translates a source program using the appropriate
compiler.
CONTINUE Resumes execution of a program (e.g., one
interrupted by a CTRL/C).
CREF Runs the CREF program, which produces a
cross-reference listing and automatically sends it
to the line printer.
CSAVE Saves in a compressed executable format the
program currently in memory. (Usually SAVE is
better for most purposes.)
A-3
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
DDT Merges the loaded debugging program (or if none,
DDT) with the current program and then starts the
debugging program.
DEBUG Compiles a source program, loads it with a
compatible debugging program, and starts the
debugging program.
DEPOSIT Sets the contents of the specified memory
location.
ERUN Runs a system program in an ephemeral fork.
EXAMINE Checks the contents of the specified memory
location.
EXECUTE Compiles, loads, and begins execution of a
program.
FORK Selects the current fork to which TOPS-20 commands
apply.
FREEZE Stops a running fork.
GET Places an executable program in memory.
KEEP Protects a fork from being cleared from memory.
LOAD Compiles a program and loads it into memory.
MERGE Places an executable program in memory and merges
it with the current contents of memory.
POP Finishes a level of TOPS-20 and returns control to
the previous level of TOPS-20.
PUSH Starts a new level of TOPS-20.
R Runs a system program.
REENTER Starts the program currently in memory at the
alternate entry point specified in the program's
entry vector.
RESET Clears memory for the specified fork of your job
and its inferiors.
RUN Places an executable program in memory and starts
it.
SAVE Copies the contents of memory into a file in
A-4
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
executable format.
START Begins execution of the program in memory.
UNKEEP Cancels the kept status of a fork.
A.5 INFORMATION COMMANDS
These commands return information about TOPS-20 commands, your job,
and the system as a whole.
DAYTIME Prints the current date and time of day.
HELP Gives an explanatory message about specific system
programs.
INFORMATION Provides information about your job and its use of
available computing resources, and about the
system.
SYSTAT Gives a summary of information about current jobs
on the system.
TRANSLATE Tells you what project-programmer number is
associated with a directory name, and vice versa.
A.6 TERMINAL COMMANDS
The terminal commands allow you to declare the characteristics of your
terminal, to clear your video screen, and to control linking to
another user's terminal.
ADVISE Sends whatever you type on your terminal as input
to a job engaged to another terminal.
BLANK Clears your display screen and moves the cursor to
line 1.
BREAK Clears communication links.
RECEIVE Allows your terminal to receive communication
links, advice, or system messages from other
users.
REFUSE Denies links, advice, or system messages to your
terminal.
A-5
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
!.pg
REMARK Notifies the system that your terminal is not
sending commands but only comments.
SET Establishes certain job-wide characteristics for
your terminal session.
SET HOST Connects the terminal to another system.
SEND Sends messages to terminals.
TAKE Executes commands contained in the specified file.
TALK Links two terminals so that each user can observe
what the other user is doing, without affecting
his job.
TERMINAL Informs the system of your terminal type, and lets
you determine the setting of its variable
parameters.
A.7 OUTPUT COMMANDS
These commands allow you to request output listings of files on the
plotter, line printer, card punch, or paper tape punch, and to
examine, modify, or withdraw these requests.
CANCEL Withdraws requests from an output
queue (waiting list).
INFORMATION OUTPUT-REQUESTS Lists entries in the output
queues.
MODIFY Changes entries in an output
queue.
PLOT Places requests in a plotter
output queue.
PRINT Places requests in a line printer
output queue.
PUNCH Places requests in a card punch
or paper tape punch output queue.
A-6
FUNCTIONAL GROUPING OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
A.8 BATCH COMMANDS
The TOPS-20 system also has a batch system to which you can submit
jobs for execution.
CANCEL BATCH Withdraws entries from the batch
input queue (waiting list).
INFORMATION BATCH-REQUESTS Lists entries in the batch input
queue.
MODIFY BATCH Changes entries in the batch input
queue.
SUBMIT Places a batch control file in the
batch input queue.
A-7
APPENDIX B
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
This appendix consists of an alphabetical list of TOPS-20 commands and
short descriptions of each. The varieties of argument needed to
complete each command are shown next, in the order that you give them;
parentheses indicate that the argument is optional or can be
defaulted. Last comes the effect of the command on memory - whether
it clears memory (by loading a program or by other means) or otherwise
alters it, or leaves it unaffected. Use this appendix along with the
question mark and recognition features to refresh your memory once you
have become familiar with the contents of this manual.
Effect
on
Command Function Arguments Memory
ACCESS gets ownership rights dev:<directory>, ---
to a directory password
ADVISE sends commands to user name or ---
another user's job terminal number
APPEND adds files onto end filespecs, ---
of another file (subcommands)
ARCHIVE requests off-line filespecs, ---
storage of files (subcommand)
ASSIGN allocates a device device name ---
for your job
ATTACH engages a job to user name, ---
your terminal (job number)
(password)
BACKSPACE moves a magnetic device name, number ---
tape backward of records or files
B-1
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
BLANK clears your video --- ---
terminal screen
BREAK ends links made by a (user name or ---
TALK command line number)
BUILD creates, modifies, or dev:<directory>, ---
deletes a subdirectory subcommands
CANCEL withdraws output queue, jobname ---
or batch requests
CLOSE closes open files JFN ---
COMPILE translates source filespecs, switches loads
programs into object compiler
programs
CONNECT connects your job dev:<directory>, ---
to a directory password
CONTINUE continues a halted NORMALLY or STAY ---
program
COPY makes copies of filespec,filespec ---
a file (subcommands)
CREATE creates a file (switches), loads
filespec EDIT
CREF translates .CRF (filespec) loads
files into listings CREF
CSAVE stores a copy of (filespec, memory ---
memory in a file locations)
(in compressed format)
DAYTIME tells the date and --- ---
time
DDT starts a debugging (switches) merges
program debugging
program
with
existing
memory (if
necessary)
DEASSIGN gives up a previously device name ---
assigned device
B-2
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
DEBUG debugs a program filespec, switches loads
program
and
debugging
program
DEFINE establishes or withdraws logical name, ---
a logical name search list
DELETE marks files for filespecs, ---
later erasure (subcommands)
DEPOSIT changes contents of memory location, changes
a memory location octal number one
location
DETACH disengages a (argument) ---
job from your
terminal
DIRECTORY gives information (dev:<directory>, ---
about files filespecs),
subcommands
DISABLE deactivates --- ---
capabilities
DISCARD gives up tape copy filespecs ---
of on-line files
DISMOUNT gives up access to alias or setname, ---
structure or tape switches
set
EDIT edits existing (switches), loads
files filespec EDIT
ENABLE activates capabilities --- ---
END-ACCESS terminates ownership dev:<directory> ---
rights to a directory
EOF writes an device name ---
end-of-file mark on
a magnetic tape
ERUN runs a system name of system loads
program in an program (switches) program
ephemeral fork
EXAMINE inspects a memory memory location ---
B-3
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
location
EXECUTE compiles, loads and filespec, switches loads
starts a program compiler
and/or
program
EXPUNGE erases all deleted (dev:<directory>, ---
files from a subcommands)
directory
FDIRECTORY DIRECTORY command (dev:<directory>, ---
with subcommands filespecs),
CRAM,EVERYTHING, subcommands
and NO HEADING
FORK specifies what fork name ---
fork is current or number
FREEZE stops a fork name ---
running fork or number
GET places an executable filespec, loads
program in memory (switches) program
HELP presents a short name of system ---
description of a program
system program
INFORMATION gives information arguments ---
about system and job
parameters
KEEP protects a fork fork name ---
from being or number
reset
LOAD compiles and loads filespec, switches loads
a program compiler
and/or
program
LOGIN begins a job user name, ---
password, account
LOGOUT ends a job --- clears
memory
MERGE merges an executable filespec, adds
program with current (switches) program
memory to
B-4
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
existing
memory
MODIFY changes output or queue, jobname, ---
batch requests switches
MOUNT requests use of alias or setname, ---
structure or tape set switches
PERUSE edits files in (switches), loads
read-only mode filespec editor
PLOT plots files on filespecs, switches ---
plotter
POP returns to superior --- clears
TOPS-20 command memory of
level, ending inferior
inferior TOPS-20 process
command level
PRINT prints files on filespecs, switches ---
line printer
PUNCH punches files on filespecs, switches ---
card punch or paper
tape punch
PUSH begins an inferior --- preserves
TOPS-20 command superior
level memory
R runs a system name of system loads
program program, (switches) program
RECEIVE allows communication argument ---
with your terminal
REENTER starts program in --- ---
memory at the
restart address
REFUSE disallows argument ---
communication with your
terminal
REMARK informs the system --- ---
that you are typing
only comments, not
commands
RENAME changes the filespec, filespec ---
B-5
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
specification of a
file
RESET clears the specified fork name or clears
fork from memory number fork
RETRIEVE restores off-line filespecs ---
files to disk
REWIND rewinds a magnetic device name ---
tape to its load
point
RUN places an executable filespec, loads
program in memory (switches) program
and starts it
SAVE stores a copy of (filespec) ---
memory in a file
SEND sends messages line number ---
to terminals
SET sets various job arguments ---
parameters
SET HOST connects the terminal system name,
to another system switches
SKIP moves a magnetic device name, ---
tape forward number of records
or files
START starts program in (memory location) ---
memory at start
address
SUBMIT submits entries (jobs) filespecs, switches ---
to the batch system
SYSTAT gives information arguments, ---
about system and job (subcommands)
status
TAKE starts processing filespec, ---
of a command file (subcommands)
TALK makes communication user name or ---
links with another terminal number
user
B-6
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF TOPS-20 COMMANDS
TDIRECTORY DIRECTORY command (dev:<directory>, ---
with subcommands filespecs),
CHRONOLOGICAL WRITE, subcommands
REVERSE, and TIMES
WRITE
TERMINAL sets various argument ---
terminal
characteristics
TRANSLATE gives directory dev:<directory> or ---
names for ppn's and [project-programmer
vice versa number]
TYPE prints files on your filespecs ---
terminal
UNATTACH disengages another job user name, ---
from its terminal (job number)
(password)
UNDELETE restores deleted filespec ---
files
UNKEEP cancels the kept fork name ---
status of a fork or number
UNLOAD unloads a magnetic device name ---
tape and deassigns
the drive
VDIRECTORY DIRECTORY command (dev:<directory>, ---
with subcommands filespecs),
LENGTH, NO HEADING, subcommands
PROTECTION, SIZE,
and TIMES WRITE
B-7
APPENDIX C
FILE ATTRIBUTES
This appendix lists the attributes that you can include in a file
specification. The DECnet-related attributes are described in detail
in the DECnet documentation. Information on file attributes is also
contained in the TOPS-20 User's Guide, the TOPS-20 Monitor Calls
Reference Manual, and the TOPS-20 Tape Processing Manual.
;A:account System manager defined account string
;BDATA:user data DECnet optional binary data
;BLOCK-LENGTH:n Maximum size of a physical block on a labeled
tape.
;BPASSWORD:password DECnet binary password
;CHARGE:account DECnet account string
;DATA:user data DECnet optional data
;EXPIRATION-DATE:date Date the magnetic tape file can be
overwritten
;FORMAT:F,D,S, or U Magnetic labeled tape record format:
F=fixed-length
D=variable-length
S=spanned
U=undefined
;OFF-LINE Designation for a file that is off-line
because of migration or archiving
;P:n File protection value
;PASSWORD:password DECnet password
;POSITION:n File sequence number for magnetic tape
C-1
FILE ATTRIBUTES
positioning
;RECORD-LENGTH:n Maximum size of a magnetic labeled tape
record
;T Designation for a file that is to be deleted
at log-out time (a temporary file). Only for
files in log-in and/or connected directories.
;USERID:id DECnet user ID string
Note that you can issue TOPS-20 commands as an alternative to
specifying many of the file attributes. For example, SET FILE
PROTECTION, rather than the P attribute, can be used to set the file
protection. Also, such commands as INFORMATION FILE-STATUS and
DIRECTORY (with the EVERYTHING subcommand) display your file attribute
settings.
C-2
APPENDIX D
CONTROL CHARACTERS
This appendix lists the TOPS-20 control characters. To type a control
character, use the CTRL key like the SHIFT key. Hold down the CTRL
key and at the same time type the character key.
CTRL
CHARACTER FUNCTION
CTRL/C Cancels a command when typed during command entry.
Cancels command execution when typed twice during command
execution. (The first ^C does not echo.)
Halts a program and returns to TOPS-20 command level.
Generally, type two CTRL/Cs to halt a program that is
executing; type one CTRL/C to stop a program that is waiting
for input.
CTRL/E Ends an ADVISE command link between two terminals.
CTRL/F Provides recognition input for file specifications and
command names and arguments. Similar to the ESCAPE key,
except that it completes only one field at a time with file
specifications and it does not supply guidewords with
commands.
CTRL/G Rings the terminal bell. Use with SEND and TALK commands to
signal another user.
CTRL/H Reprints a command line up to the field that is in error.
Type immediately after the input error message. Duplicates
the function of the BACKSPACE key.
CTRL/I Duplicates the function of the TAB key.
CTRL/L Advances the paper on a hard-copy terminal to the top of the
next page. To stop the ^L from printing, give the TERMINAL
NO INDICATE command.
D-1
CONTROL CHARACTERS
CTRL/O Stops output to the terminal while the program or command
continues to execute.
Output resumes when:
another CTRL/O is typed
the program or command finishes
the program prompts for input
CTRL/Q Continues scrolling terminal output that was paused by
CTRL/S or a pause on an end of page. Use the TERMINAL PAUSE
(ON) CHARACTER command to define alternate pause and
continue characters. Use the TERMINAL NO PAUSE (ON)
END-OF-PAGE command to stop pause on an end of page. Use
the TERMINAL LENGTH command to set the page length.
CTRL/R Reprints the current command line, incorporating the
corrections made with the DELETE key or CTRL/W. Use on
hard-copy terminals when backslashes and underscores caused
by editing with DELETE and CTRL/W make the command line
difficult to read. Use on video terminals when a system
message covers the command line.
CTRL/S Pauses scrolling of terminal output until CTRL/Q is typed.
Input, though not displayed, is accepted into the input
buffer and processed after a CTRL/Q. Use the TERMINAL PAUSE
(ON) CHARACTER command to define alternate pause and
continue characters.
CTRL/T Displays a line of information that includes:
the time
the name and status of the current fork
the amount of CPU time used
the time elapsed since login
the system's load average
CTRL/U Erases the current command line. On hard-copy terminals,
cancels the command and prints three Xs at the end of the
command line.
CTRL/V Allows special characters (any character other than an
alphanumeric, or the special characters - _ . or $) in file
specifications and directory names. Type CTRL/V before
typing the special character any time you type the file
specification.
Special characters are not accepted by the following system
programs:
ALGOL COBOL CREF FILCOM ISAM
LIBARY LINK MAKLIB RERUN
CTRL/W Erases the previous word. On hard-copy terminals, cancels
D-2
CONTROL CHARACTERS
the previous word and types an underscore.
CTRL/Z Signals an end-of-file for data entered from the terminal.
Use when:
COPYing from your terminal (device TTY:) to a file.
Sending a message with one of the mail programs.
D-3
INDEX
-A- Archived files (Cont.)
renaming, 2-318
ABORT subcommand, 2-28 retrieving, 2-323
/ABORT switch, 2-55, 2-104, 2-170, status of, 2-193
2-221 ARCHIVED subcommand, 2-129
ABSOLUTE-INTERNET-SOCKETS Archiving
subcommand, 2-28 on-line files for, 2-29
ACCESS command, 2-1 preventing automatic, 2-345
Account, 2-229 setting automatic, 2-345
setting default, 2-345 Arguments, 1-1
setting file storage, 2-347 removing default, 2-352
ACCOUNT argument, 2-342 ASCII subcommand, 2-8, 2-9, 2-73,
ACCOUNT subcommand, 2-129 2-74
/ACCOUNT switch, 2-273, 2-283, ASSIGN command, 2-17
2-293, 2-389 /ASSISTANCE switch, 2-390
ACCOUNT-DEFAULT subcommand, 2-28 ATTACH command, 2-19
ADDRESS-BREAK argument, 2-192, AUTOMATIC argument, 2-343
2-342 AVAILABLE argument, 2-193
Advice
receiving, 2-307 -B-
refusing, 2-312
ADVICE argument, 2-307, 2-312 /BACKGROUND switch, 2-65, 2-383
ADVISE command, 2-4 BACKSPACE command, 2-22
/AFTER switch, 2-243, 2-273, /BAK switch, 2-81, 2-148
2-283, 2-294, 2-389 Batch
ALERT argument, 2-343 access rights for, 2-396
Alerts account charge for, 2-389
checking, 2-192 assistance during, 2-390
removing, 2-352 card punch for, 2-390
setting, 2-352 control file, 2-388
ALERTS argument, 2-192 date for job, 2-389
/ALGOL switch, 2-55, 2-104, 2-170, deleting control file, 2-390
2-221 dependency count
ALL subcommand, 2-402 modifying, 2-244
ALLOW subcommand, 2-412 setting, 2-391
ALPHABETICALLY subcommand, 2-129 job name for, 2-393
APPEND command, 2-8 labels in control file, 2-393
ARCHIVE arument, 2-193 line number for, 2-390
ARCHIVE keyword, 2-43 log destination node
ARCHIVE subcommand, 2-115 modifying, 2-244
ARCHIVE-ONLINE-EXPIRED-FILES setting, 2-391
subcommand, 2-28 log file, 2-390, 2-392, 2-394
Archived files processing order, 2-250
appending to, 2-11 restarting after error, 2-392
copying, 2-78 SET commands with, 2-367
deleting, 2-115 time-limit
discarding, 2-139 modifying, 2-249
Index-1
keeping disk copies of, 2-13 setting, 2-393
Index-2
Batch dependency count /CHECK-SETNAME switch, 2-254,
setting, 2-390 2-258
Batch destination-node for, 2-392 CHECKSUM subcommand, 2-129
Batch jobs CHRONOLOGICAL subcommand, 2-130
nested, 2-396 CLASS subcommand, 2-402
submitting, 2-388 CLOSE command, 2-51
talking to, 2-417 CLUSTER argument, 2-194
BATCH keyword, 2-43 .CMD
BATCH-LOG switch, 2-390 file type, 2-412
Batch-requests COBDDT program, 2-98
information about, 2-194 /68-COBOL switch, 2-54, 2-103,
BATCH-REQUESTS argument, 2-194 2-170, 2-220
BATCH.CMD file, 2-231, 2-395 /74-COBOL switch, 2-54, 2-104,
BEFORE subcommand, 2-115, 2-129 2-170, 2-220
/BEGIN switch, 2-244, 2-276, /COBOL switch, 2-55, 2-104, 2-170,
2-286, 2-390 2-221
BINARY subcommand, 2-8, 2-9, 2-73, COMAND.CMD file, 2-229, 2-230,
2-74 2-231, 2-395
/BINARY switch, 2-55, 2-104, Command default
2-170, 2-221 setting, 2-345
BLANK command, 2-24 Command files
/10-BLISS switch, 2-54, 2-103, BATCH.CMD, 2-231, 2-395
2-169, 2-220 COMAND.CMD, 2-229, 2-230, 2-231,
/36-BLISS switch, 2-54, 2-103, 2-395
2-169, 2-220 executing, 2-412
BREAK command, 2-25 LOGIN.CMD, 2-229, 2-230
BUILD command, 2-26 LOGOUT.CMD, 2-235, 2-236
BYTE subcommand, 2-8, 2-9, 2-74 order of processing with LOGIN,
2-230
order of processing with SUBMIT,
-C- 2-395
running programs from, 2-413
/C128 switch, 2-81, 2-148 SYSTEM:BATCH.CMD, 2-231, 2-395
/C64 switch, 2-81, 2-148 SYSTEM:COMAND.CMD, 2-230, 2-231,
CANCEL command, 2-43 2-395
Capabilities SYSTEM:LOGIN.CMD, 2-230
disabling, 2-137 COMMAND-LEVEL argument, 2-194
displaying assigned, 2-155 Commands, 1-1
enabling, 2-155 abbreviating, 1-7
Card images for continuing, 1-3
batch, 2-392 DIRECTORY-class, 1-4
CARD-READER-INPUT-SET argument, guidewords in, 1-6
2-344 help with, 1-8
Cards LOAD-class, 1-3
punching, 2-292 Queue-class, 1-3
CARDS keyword, 2-43 Commas between
/CARDS switch, 2-244, 2-390 filespecs, 2-225
/CHARACTERISTIC: switch, 2-283 Comments
Characters typing on terminal, 2-315
double at-sign, 1-4 Common File System, 2-194
plus sign, 2-59, 2-108
Index-3
question mark, 1-8
Index-4
Compilation CTRL-C
forcing, 2-55, 2-104, 2-170, removing capability of, 2-352
2-221 Current fork, 2-181
preventing, 2-56, 2-105, 2-171, /CURRENT-VOLUME-ONLY switch,
2-222 2-327
COMPILE command, 2-53
/COMPILE switch, 2-55, 2-104, -D-
2-170, 2-221
Compiled programs Date
listing, 2-56, 2-105, 2-222 to display, 2-94
Compiled programs preventing Date arguments
listing, 2-58 formats of, 1-8
Compilers DATES subcommand, 2-130
passing language-switches to, DAYTIME command, 2-94
2-56, 2-105, 2-171, 2-222 DDT command, 2-95
Compiling files together, 2-59, DDT Program
2-174, 2-225 loading, 2-104, 2-170
Compiling multiple programs, DDT program
2-108, 2-174 loading, 2-221
COMPLETE subcommand, 2-130 /DDT switch, 2-55, 2-104, 2-170,
Confidential access capabilities, 2-221
2-29 DEASSIGN command, 2-100
CONFIDENTIAL subcommand, 2-28 DEBUG command, 2-102
CONNECT command, 2-62 /DEBUG switch, 2-55, 2-104, 2-170,
CONNECT-TIME subcommand, 2-402 2-221
Connected directory, 1-3, 2-62 Debugging
/CONNECTED-DIRECTORY switch, SET commands with, 2-366
2-390 specifying debugging program,
CONTENTS-ONLY subcommand, 2-115 2-108
CONTINUE argument, 2-124 Debugging information
CONTINUE command, 2-65 excluding, 2-58, 2-105, 2-221
Control characters, D-1, D-2 Debugging programs, 2-95
CONTROL-C-CAPABILITY argument, /DECIDE switch, 2-81, 2-149
2-344 DECnet nodes
CONTROLLING subcommand, 2-402 displaying accessible, 2-194
/COPIES switch, 2-244, 2-276, setting, 2-350
2-286, 2-296 DECNET NODES argument, 2-194
COPY command, 2-73 DECNET-ACCESS subcommand, 2-28
CPU time-limit DEFAULT argument, 2-344
setting, 2-363 Default arguments, 1-5
CRAM subcommand, 2-130 DEFAULT-FILE-PROTECTION
CREATE command, 2-80 subcommand, 2-29
CREF command, 2-88 Defaults
CREF program, 2-88 displaying, 2-195
/CREF switch, 2-104, 2-170, 2-221 DEFAULTS argument, 2-195
Cross-reference files, 2-55, 2-88, DEFINE command, 2-112
2-104, 2-170, 2-221 DELETE command, 2-115
Cross-reference listing, 2-88 DELETE subcommand, 2-177
/CROSS-REFERENCE switch, 2-55, /DELETE switch, 2-244, 2-276,
2-104, 2-170, 2-221 2-286, 2-296, 2-390
CSAVE command, 2-92 Deleted archived files
Index-5
/CTERM switch, 2-375 recovering, 2-117
Index-6
Deleted files DIRECTORY command, 2-127
restoring, 2-440 Directory for
DELETED subcommand, 2-130 batch, 2-390
Deletion Directory name
of archive requests, 2-43 corresponding
of batch requests, 2-43 project-programmer number,
of files, 2-115, 2-440 2-434
of files at logout, 2-235 DIRECTORY subcommand, 2-115,
of logical names, 2-112 2-402
of mount requests, 2-43 DIRECTORY-class commands, 1-4
of paper-tape requests, 2-43 DIRECTORY-GROUP subcommand, 2-29
of plot requests, 2-43 DISABLE command, 2-137
of print requests, 2-43 DISABLE subcommand, 2-29
of punch card requests, 2-43 DISALLOW subcommand, 2-412
of subdirectories, 2-30 DISCARD command, 2-139
/DENSITY switch, 2-254 Discard command
/DEPENDENCY-COUNT switch, 2-244, undoing, 2-139
2-391 Disk storage quotas
DEPOSIT command, 2-120 infinite, 2-37
/DESTINATION-NODE switch, 2-44, Disk-usage
2-245, 2-274, 2-284, 2-294, information about, 2-197
2-391 DISK-USAGE argument, 2-197
DETACH command, 2-124 DISMOUNT STRUCTURE command, 2-141
Detaching jobs, 2-438 DISMOUNT TAPE command, 2-141
dev:, 1-1 DOUBLESPACE subcommand, 2-130
Device defaults, 1-2 /DPY switch, 2-149
Devices DQS print requests, 2-283
assigning, 2-17 /DRIVE-TYPE switch, 2-254
changing to generic, 2-246
deassigning, 2-100 -E-
displaying available, 2-193
Directories ECHO subcommand, 2-412
deleting, 2-38 ^ECREATE
displaying characteristics of, command, 2-36
2-195 EDIT command, 2-147
permanent disk storage, 2-33 EDIT program, 2-80, 2-147
secure, 2-346 backup files, 2-81, 2-84, 2-151
Directory controlling error messages,
accessing, 2-1 2-81, 2-82, 2-149
connecting to a, 2-62 line numbers in, 2-81, 2-82,
connecting to log-in, 2-229 2-149, 2-150
defaults, 1-2 read-only mode, 2-83, 2-150,
display contents of, 2-127, 2-269
2-180, 2-446 SWITCH.INI file, 2-84, 2-151
displaying contents of, 2-419 Edit program
files-only, 2-38 backup files, 2-148
group rights, 2-231 EDITOR: logical name, 2-85, 2-152
ownership rights, 2-1, 2-231 ENABLE command, 2-155
protection code, 2-33 ENABLE subcommand, 2-29
setting options, 2-337 END-ACCESS command, 2-158
setting protection, 2-346 ENQ-DEQ subcommand, 2-29
Index-7
DIRECTORY argument, 2-195, 2-345 /ENTIRE-VOLUME-SET switch, 2-327
Index-8
Entry vector, 2-383 FILE-STATUS argument, 2-197
changing, 2-347 Files
ENTRY-VECTOR argument, 2-347 See also Command files
EOF command, 2-161 appending, 2-8
Ephemeral file, 2-347 archiving, 2-13
Ephemeral fork changing text type of, 2-246
characteristics of, 2-163 closing, 2-51
Ephemeral program, 2-355 compressed format, 2-92
canceling ephemeral attribute, copying, 2-73
2-305 copying from TTY:, 2-76
Erasing creating, 2-80
deleted files, 2-440 cross-reference, 2-88
Error messages, 1-11 default generation, 2-30
ERUN command, 2-163 deleting, 2-115
ESC key, 1-2 displaying, 2-436
EVERYTHING subcommand, 2-131 displaying status of, 2-197
EXAMINE command, 2-165 editing with EDIT program,
EXEC 2-147
creating an inferior, 2-34, erasing, 2-115, 2-177
2-301 erasing deleted, 2-440
returning to superior, 2-279 indirect, 2-109
EXECUPORT argument, 2-427 making ephemeral, 2-347
EXECUTE command, 2-168 mapped, 2-51
/EXPERT switch, 2-81, 2-149 offline expiration date, 2-32
Expiration date online expiration date, 2-32
setting default file, 2-345 permanent, 2-349
setting file, 2-347 printing, 2-281
EXPIRATION-OF-PASSWORD subcommand, punching on paper tape and
2-30 cards, 2-292
EXPUNGE command, 2-177 renaming, 2-317
EXPUNGE subcommand, 2-115 replacing contents of, 2-319
restoring deleted, 2-440
-F- retrieving offline, 2-322
secure, 2-348, 2-350
/FAIL switch, 2-55, 2-104, 2-170 SWITCH.INI, 2-269
/FAST switch, 2-235 temporary, 2-348, 2-350
FDIRECTORY command, 2-180 trapping openings, 2-363
/FEET switch, 2-245, 2-391 undeletable, 2-350
File FILES argument, 2-22, 2-380
attributes, 1-3, C-1 Files-only directories, 2-38
setting expiration date, 2-347 FILES-ONLY subcommand, 2-30
setting protection, 2-349 Filespecs, 1-1
FILE argument, 2-347 plus signs between, 2-59
File protection FIND subcommand, 2-131
setting default, 2-345 FLAG argument, 2-422
File specifications, 1-1 /FLAG-NON-STANDARD switch, 2-55,
File structures 2-104, 2-171, 2-221
see structures FORGET subcommand, 2-116
/FILE switch, 2-245, 2-286 FORK command, 2-181
File type .CRF, 2-88 FORK-STATUS argument, 2-197
File types with COMPILE, 2-59 Forks
Index-9
File types with LOAD, 2-225 continuing, 2-217
Index-10
Forks (Cont.) -I-
displaying status of, 2-197
keeping, 2-216, 2-356 IBM-node for
limited number of, 2-218 batch, 2-392
making current, 2-181 IMAGE BINARY subcommand, 2-9,
name and number of, 2-181 2-74
renaming, 2-351 IMAGE subcommand, 2-9, 2-74
running ephemeral, 2-163 IMMEDIATE argument, 2-423
stopping, 2-184 /INCREMENT switch, 2-81, 2-149
FORMFEED argument, 2-422 INDICATE argument, 2-423
/FORMS switch, 2-245, 2-274, Indirect files, 2-59, 2-175,
2-284, 2-294 2-225
/FORTRAN switch, 2-56, 2-105, Inferior process, 2-301
2-171, 2-221 INFORMATION command, 2-190
FREEZE command, 2-184 INHIBIT argument, 2-423
FULLDUPLEX argument, 2-422 INTERNET STATUS
information about, 2-198
INTERNET STATUS argument, 2-198
INTERNET-ACCESS subcommand, 2-30
-G- INTERNET-WIZARD subcommand, 2-30
Interrupt sequence, 2-374, 2-376
.gen, 1-1 Interrupts
Generation number, 1-3 displaying, 2-205
defaults, 1-3 Invisible files, 2-14, 2-347
highest, 1-3 INVISIBLE subcommand, 2-131
Generation-retention-count IPCF subcommand, 2-30
setting default, 2-345 /ISAVE switch, 2-81, 2-149
GENERATION-RETENTION-COUNT
subcommand, 2-131 -J-
GENERATIONS subcommand, 2-30
Generic device JFNs, 2-51
changing to, 2-246 Job
/GENERIC switch, 2-246, 2-274, displaying runtime, 2-404
2-284, 2-294 setting options, 2-337
GET command, 2-186 Job class
Group rights, 2-62 displaying, 2-402
Job file numbers, 2-51
JOB subcommand, 2-402
Job time limit
-H- displaying, 2-402
JOB-STATUS argument, 2-198
H19 argument, 2-427 /JOBNAME switch, 2-45, 2-46,
HALFDUPLEX argument, 2-422 2-242, 2-274, 2-284, 2-295,
HEADER subcommand, 2-402 2-391
/HEADER switch, 2-246, 2-276, Jobs
2-287, 2-296 attaching, 2-19
Headers detaching, 2-124
changing to no, 2-247 JSYS trapping, 2-363
HEADING subcommand, 2-131
HELP argument, 2-422 -K-
HELP command, 2-188
Index-11
Hyphen character -, 1-3 KEEP subcommand, 2-116
Index-12
Kept fork Logical names
characteristics, 2-216 defining, 2-112
Kept forks displaying defined, 2-198
see Forks removing, 2-112
Key LOGICAL-NAMES argument, 2-199
escape, 1-8 LOGIN command, 2-229
Keywords, 1-5 LOGIN.CMD file, 2-229, 2-230,
KILL subcommand, 2-30 2-231
/LOGNAME switch, 2-391
-L- LOGOUT command, 2-235
LOGOUT.CMD file, 2-235, 2-236
LA120 argument, 2-428 /LOWER switch, 2-82, 2-149
LA30 argument, 2-427 Lowercase
LA36 argument, 2-428 changing to, 2-247
LA38 argument, 2-428 LOWERCASE argument, 2-423
/LABEL-TYPE switch, 2-254 /LOWERCASE switch, 2-246, 2-285
/LANGUAGE-SWITCHES switch, 2-56, LPT subcommand, 2-131, 2-403
2-105, 2-171, 2-222
LARGER subcommand, 2-116, 2-131
Late-clear-typeahead -M-
displaying status of, 2-194
LATE-CLEAR-TYPEAHEAD argument, /M33 switch, 2-82
2-350 /M37 switch, 2-82
LENGTH argument, 2-423 /MAC switch, 2-56, 2-171, 2-222
LENGTH subcommand, 2-131 /MACHINE-CODE switch, 2-56, 2-171,
LEOT argument, 2-380 2-222
/LIBRARY switch, 2-56, 2-105, MACRO
2-171, 2-222 assembling using, 2-58, 2-171
LIMIT subcommand, 2-402 /MACRO switch, 2-56, 2-105, 2-171,
/LIMIT switch, 2-246, 2-274, 2-222
2-284, 2-295 Magnetic tapes
LINE subcommand, 2-403 See Tapes, 2-22
LINE-HALFDUPLEX argument, 2-423 Mail, 2-199
Line-printer notice of new, 2-199
spacing watching for new, 2-351
changing, 2-249 MAIL Argument, 2-199
Links MAIL-WATCH argument, 2-351
breaking, 2-25 MAINTENANCE subcommand, 2-31
receiving, 2-307 /MAP, 2-56
refusing, 2-312 .MAP files, 2-105, 2-171, 2-222
LINKS argument, 2-307, 2-312 /MAP switch, 2-105, 2-171, 2-222
LIST subcommand, 2-31 Mapped files, 2-51
/LIST switch, 2-56, 2-105, 2-171, renaming, 2-318
2-222 MAXIMUM-SUBDIRECTORIES subcommand,
LOAD command, 2-219 2-31
LOAD switches, 2-220 Memory
LOAD-class commands, 1-3 clearing, 2-320
Loader maps, 2-105, 2-171 displaying status of, 2-199
LOCATION argument, 2-350 modifying, 2-120
LOG-FILE subcommand, 2-412 preserving state of, 2-216
Log-in directory, 1-3 putting an executable program
Index-13
/LOGDISPOSITON switch, 2-391 into, 2-186
Index-14
Memory locations /NODEBUG switch, 2-56, 2-106,
examining, 2-165 2-172, 2-222
Memory sections, 2-95, 2-186, /NODECIDE switch, 2-82, 2-149
2-238, 2-305, 2-329 Nodes
MEMORY-USAGE argument, 2-199 displaying accessible, 2-194
MERGE command, 2-238 /NOFLAG-NON-STANDARD switch, 2-57,
Messages 2-106, 2-172, 2-223
error, 1-11 /NOHEADER switch, 2-247, 2-276,
sending, 2-333 2-287, 2-297
warning, 1-11 /NOLIBRARY switch, 2-57, 2-106,
/METERS switch, 2-295 2-172, 2-223
Migrating files /NOLIST switch, 2-57, 2-106,
delaying, 2-366 2-172, 2-223
off-line, 2-348 /NOMACHINE-CODE switch, 2-57,
preventing, 2-348 2-106, 2-172, 2-223
/MODE switch, 2-246, 2-247, 2-276, /NONUMBER switch, 2-82, 2-149
2-287, 2-296 /NOOPTIMIZE switch, 2-57, 2-106,
Modification 2-172, 2-223
of card requests, 2-241 /NORMALLY switch, 2-65, 2-383
of paper-tape requests, 2-241 /NOSEARCH switch, 2-57, 2-106,
of plot requests, 2-241 2-172, 2-223
of print requests, 2-241 /NOSEPARATORS switch, 2-82, 2-149
of queue and batch requests, /NOSTAY switch, 2-57, 2-106,
2-241 2-172, 2-223
of queue priority, 2-248 /NOSYMBOLS switch, 2-57, 2-106,
MODIFY command, 2-241 2-172, 2-223
Monitor statistics NOT subcommand, 2-32
information about, 2-201 /NOTE switch, 2-247, 2-275, 2-285,
MOUNT command, 2-253 2-295
Mount count, 2-142 /NOTIFY switch, 2-275, 2-285,
MOUNT keyword, 2-43 2-295
MOUNT switches, 2-254 /NOUNLOAD switch, 2-255
Mount-requests /NOVICE switch, 2-150
displaying, 2-201 NOVICE switch, 2-82
MOUNT-REQUESTS argument, 2-201 /NOWAIT switch, 2-141, 2-255
/NOWARNINGS switch, 2-57, 2-172,
-N- 2-223
/NRT switch, 2-375
NAME argument, 2-351 NUMBER subcommand, 2-32
/NEW switch, 2-255 /NUMBER switch, 2-82, 2-150
NO argument, 2-352, 2-424
NO ECHO subcommand, 2-412 -O-
NO subcommand, 2-132, 2-403
/NOBAK switch, 2-82, 2-149 Object file
/NOBINARY switch, 2-56, 2-222 libraries, 2-105, 2-107, 2-222
/NOCOMPILE switch, 2-56, 2-105, Object files, 2-53, 2-168
2-171, 2-222 generating, 2-55, 2-221
/NOCREF switch, 2-56, 2-105, libraries, 2-172
2-171, 2-222 optimized, 2-58
/NOCROSS-REFERENCE switch, 2-56, preventing generating of, 2-58
2-172, 2-222 Off-line expiration date
Index-15
NODE subcommand, 2-403 setting, 2-348
Index-16
Off-line files PERMANENT subcommand, 2-33
waiting for, 2-358 PERUSE command, 2-269
OFFLINE subcommand, 2-132 /PLINES switch, 2-82, 2-150
OFFLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT PLOT command, 2-272
subcommand, 2-32 PLOT keyword, 2-43
/OLD switch, 2-82, 2-150 Plotting
On-line expiration date copies for, 2-276
setting, 2-349 deleting after, 2-276
ONLINE subcommand, 2-132 destination-node for, 2-274
ONLINE-EXPIRATION-DEFAULT forms for, 2-274
subcommand, 2-32 job name for, 2-274
Open files mode for, 2-276
displaying status of, 2-359 preventing header for, 2-276
renaming, 2-318 priority for, 2-275
OPERATOR subcommand, 2-32 saving after, 2-276
/OPTIMIZE switch, 2-57, 2-106, sequence number for, 2-275
2-172, 2-223 setting date for, 2-273
Optimized spooled-output, 2-277
object files, 2-105 starting page number for, 2-276
/OPTION switch, 2-82, 2-150 time limit for, 2-274
Output mode time-limit in batch job, 2-393
changing, 2-247 unit for, 2-275
Output queue Plus signs between
changing, 2-248 filespecs, 2-225
OUTPUT subcommand, 2-132, 2-403 POP command, 2-279
/OUTPUT switch, 2-392 PRESERVE subcommand, 2-33
Output-requests /PRESERVE switch, 2-276, 2-287,
displaying, 2-203 2-297
OUTPUT-REQUESTS argument, 2-203 PRINT command, 2-281
/OVERLAY switch, 2-95, 2-238 PRINT keyword, 2-43
Printing
-P- account charged for, 2-283
copies for, 2-286
PAGE argument, 2-424 deleting file after, 2-286
PAGE-ACCESS argument, 2-354, destination-node for, 2-283
2-365 forms for, 2-284
/PAGES switch, 2-247, 2-392 header for, 2-287
Paper tape job name for, 2-284
changing amount of, 2-246 mode for, 2-287
punching, 2-292 owner for, 2-286
PAPER-TAPE keyword, 2-43 page limit for, 2-284
/PASCAL switch, 2-57, 2-106, preventing header for, 2-287
2-172, 2-223 priority for, 2-285
Password sequence numbers for, 2-286
assigning directory, 2-33 setting date, 2-283
PASSWORD argument, 2-355 spacing during, 2-288
PASSWORD subcommand, 2-33 spooled-output, 2-289
Passwords starting page number for, 2-286
assigning directory, 2-346, text type for, 2-286
2-355 title for, 2-287
PAUSE argument, 2-424 unit for, 2-286
Index-17
Permanent files, 2-349
Index-18
Priority for PTYs logging in to, 2-232
batch, 2-392 PUNCH command, 2-292
/PRIORITY switch, 2-248, 2-275, Punching
2-285, 2-295, 2-392 account charged for, 2-293
Privileges card limit for, 2-295
see Capabilities copies for, 2-296
/PROCESSING switch, 2-248 deleting after, 2-296
/PROCESSING-NODE switch, 2-392 destination-node for, 2-294
Program forms for, 2-294
entry vector, 2-310 header for, 2-296
PROGRAM argument, 2-355 job name for, 2-295
PROGRAM EPHEMERAL argument, 2-355 mode for, 2-296, 2-297
PROGRAM KEEP argument, 2-356 paper tape limit for, 2-295
PROGRAM NO-EPHEMERAL argument, preventing header for, 2-297,
2-356 2-298
PROGRAM subcommand, 2-403 priority for, 2-295
Program-status saving after, 2-297, 2-298
displaying, 2-205 sequence numbers for, 2-295
PROGRAM-STATUS argument, 2-204 setting date for, 2-294
Programs spooled-output, 2-298
compiling, 2-53, 2-168, 2-219 unit for, 2-296
continuing, 2-65 PURGE subcommand, 2-177
debugging, 2-95, 2-102 PUSH command, 2-301
displaying version of, 2-211 PUSH subcommand, 2-34
ephemeral, 2-355
executing, 2-168 -Q-
loading, 2-168, 2-219
merging, 2-238 Queue-class commands, 1-3
monitoring, 2-66
running, 2-305, 2-329 -R-
running from command files,
2-413 R command, 2-305
saving, 2-92, 2-331 /R switch, 2-82, 2-150
starting, 2-168, 2-383 RAISE argument, 2-425
starting at alternate entries, /READ-ONLY switch, 2-256
2-310 /READER switch, 2-392
PROHIBIT-MIGRATION subcommand, /READONLY switch, 2-83, 2-150
2-132 REBUILD subcommand, 2-177
Project-programmer number RECEIVE argument, 2-425
corresponding directory name, RECEIVE command, 2-307
2-434 Recognition, 1-6
Protection RECORDS argument, 2-22, 2-380
setting directory, 2-346 REENTER argument, 2-124
setting file, 2-349 REENTER command, 2-310
PROTECTION subcommand, 2-33, REFUSE command, 2-312
2-132 /RELOCATABLE switch, 2-57, 2-107,
/PROTECTION switch, 2-256 2-173, 2-223
Pseudo-terminals REMARK command, 2-315
advising, 2-5 /REMARK switch, 2-141, 2-256
PSI status Remote node
displaying, 2-205 connecting terminal to, 2-374
Index-19
PSI-STATUS argument, 2-205 Remote print request, 2-357
Index-20
Remote print requests, 2-283, SEMI-OPERATOR subcommand, 2-34
2-285 SEND command, 2-333
REMOTE PRINTING INFORMATION, in batch job, 2-334
2-205 SEPARATE subcommand, 2-132
/REMOTE-PRINTER switch, 2-285 /SEPARATORS switch, 2-83, 2-150
REMOTE-PRINTING.CMD, 2-357 Sequence number for
/REMOTER-PRINTER switch, 2-248 batch, 2-392
/REMOVE switch, 2-142 /SEQUENCE switch, 2-45, 2-83,
RENAME command, 2-317 2-150, 2-242, 2-275, 2-286,
REPEAT-LOGIN-MESSAGES subcommand, 2-295, 2-392
2-34 SESSION-REMARK argument, 2-358
/REPORT switch, 2-248, 2-287 SET command, 2-337
Report title SET HOST command, 2-374
changing, 2-248 /SIMULA switch, 2-58, 2-107,
RESET command, 2-320 2-173, 2-224
RESIST-MIGRATION subcommand, SINCE subcommand, 2-116, 2-132
2-132 SIZE subcommand, 2-132
Restartable status SKIP command, 2-380
changing, 2-248 SMALLER subcommand, 2-116, 2-133
/RESTARTABLE switch, 2-248, 2-392 /SNOBOL switch, 2-58, 2-107,
RETAIN subcommand, 2-13 2-173, 2-224
Retrieval-requests Source files, 2-53, 2-168
information about, 2-206 /SPACING switch, 2-249, 2-288
RETRIEVAL-REQUESTS argument, Special internet queues for
2-206 subdirectories use of, 2-29
RETRIEVAL-WAIT argument, 2-358 SPEED argument, 2-425
RETRIEVE command, 2-322 Spooled output
RETRIEVE keyword, 2-43 information about, 2-206
REVERSE subcommand, 2-132 SPOOLED-OUTPUT argument, 2-359
REWIND command, 2-327 /SPOOLED-OUTPUT switch, 2-46,
/RONLY switch, 2-83, 2-150 2-277, 2-289, 2-298
RUN command, 2-329 SPOOLED-OUTPUT-ACTION argument,
/RUN switch, 2-83, 2-150 2-206
START argument, 2-124
-S- START command, 2-383
/START switch, 2-83, 2-150, 2-257
/SAIL switch, 2-57, 2-107, 2-173, Starting programs, 2-383
2-224 STATE subcommand, 2-403
SAVE command, 2-331 STATUS-WATCH argument, 2-359
/SAVE switch, 2-83, 2-150 /STAY Switch, 2-58
Scratch /STAY switch, 2-65, 2-107, 2-173,
tapes, 2-256 2-224, 2-383
/SCRATCH switch, 2-257 /STEP switch, 2-83, 2-151
Screen Structure
clearing, 2-24 mount count, 2-258
Scrolling STRUCTURE argument, 2-206
with remote host, 2-376 /STRUCTURE-ID switch, 2-142,
/SEARCH switch, 2-58, 2-107, 2-257
2-173, 2-224 Structures
Secure directories, 2-346 dismounting, 2-141
Secure files, 2-348, 2-350 information about, 2-206
Index-21
SECURE subcommand, 2-34 mounting, 2-253
Index-22
Structures (Cont.) -T-
removing, 2-142
renaming files between, 2-318 TABS argument, 2-425
transferring files within, /TAG switch, 2-393
2-317 TAKE command, 2-412
unavailable for mounting, 2-261 TALK command, 2-415
Subcommands, 1-4 Tape
See also individual subcommands density, 2-254
Subdirectories drives, 2-254
creating, 2-26 labels, 2-254
default file protection for, protection, 2-256
2-29 setnames, 2-258
deleting, 2-26 TAPE argument, 2-362
files-only, 2-30 Tape drives
modifying, 2-26 assigning, 2-17
working disk storage for, 2-36 Tape sets
Subdirectory unloading, 2-143
group rights, 2-34 Tape-parameters
groups, 2-30 displaying, 2-209
Subdirectory parameters TAPE-PARAMETERS argument, 2-209
listing, 2-31 Tapes
SUBDIRECTORY-USER-GROUP assigning tape drives, 2-17
subcommand, 2-35 backspacing, 2-22
SUBMIT command, 2-388 creating new file set, 2-255
Subsystem statistics dismounting, 2-141
displaying, 2-207 forwarding, 2-380
SUBSYSTEM-STATISTICS argument, load point, 2-327
2-207 mounting, 2-253
SUPERIOR argument, 2-207 rewind with open files, 2-327
Superior process, 2-279 rewinding, 2-327, 2-444
SUPERSEDE subcommand, 2-74 setting density, 2-362
SWITCH.INI file, 2-84, 2-151 setting format, 2-362
Switches, 1-3 setting parity, 2-363
default, 1-4 setting record-length, 2-363
positioning, 1-4 single volume tape sets, 2-261
Symbol table, 2-107 skipping records and files,
rebuilding, 2-177 2-380
/SYMBOLS switch, 2-58, 2-107, unloading, 2-444
2-173, 2-224 volume identifier, 2-257
SYSTAT command, 2-401 write-enabled mode, 2-258
System mail writing end-of-file on, 2-161
reading, 2-199 TDIRECTORY command, 2-419
System messages Temporary files, 2-348, 2-350
receiving, 2-307 Terminal
refusing, 2-312 connecting to remote node,
SYSTEM MESSAGES argument, 2-312 2-374
System status, 2-401 displaying characteristics of,
displaying, 2-207 2-209
SYSTEM subcommand, 2-404 freeing hung, 2-438
SYSTEM-DEFAULT argument, 2-428 linking to another, 2-415
SYSTEM-MESSAGES argument, 2-307 setting options, 2-337
Index-23
SYSTEM-STATUS argument, 2-207 setting speed of, 2-431
Index-24
Terminal (Cont.) UNKEEP command, 2-442
talking to another, 2-415 Unkept fork, 2-442
to modify characteristics for, UNLOAD command, 2-444
2-426 /UNSEQUENCE switch, 2-83, 2-151
TERMINAL command, 2-420 /UPPER switch, 2-83, 2-151
Terminal lines /UPPERCASE switch, 2-249, 2-286
displaying available, 2-193 /USE-SECTION switch, 2-95, 2-186,
TERMINAL-MODE argument, 2-209 2-238, 2-305, 2-329
TERMINET argument, 2-429 User messages
TI argument, 2-429 receiving, 2-307
TIME refusing, 2-312, 2-334
to display, 2-94 sending, 2-333
Time User name, 2-229
entering in commands, 1-8 USER subcommand, 2-133, 2-404
Time arguments /USER switch, 2-45, 2-249, 2-286,
formats of, 1-8 2-296
relative time, 1-10 USER-MESSAGES argument, 2-307,
Time limit 2-312
removing CPU, 2-353 USER-OF-GROUP subcommand, 2-35
setting batch, 2-393 UUO simulation
setting CPU, 2-363 disabling, 2-354
TIME subcommand, 2-404 UUO-SIMULATION argument, 2-366
/TIME switch, 2-249, 2-393
TIME-LIMIT argument, 2-363, 2-366 -V-
TIMES subcommand, 2-133
Timesharing jobs VDIRECTORY command, 2-446
ending, 2-235 VERSION argument, 2-211
starting, 2-229 Visible files, 2-14, 2-350
TOPS-20 commands in files, 2-412 VK100 argument, 2-429
TOPS10-PROJECT-PROGRAMMER Volid, 2-258
subcommand, 2-35 /VOLIDS switch, 2-257
/TPLOT switch, 2-249 Volume identifier, 2-258
TRANSLATE command, 2-434 Volumes
TRAP argument, 2-363 information about, 2-211
Trapping VOLUMES argument, 2-211
continuing after, 2-364 VT05 argument, 2-429
disabling, 2-353, 2-364 VT100 argument, 2-430
setting, 2-364 VT102 argument, 2-430
.typ, 1-1 VT125 argument, 2-430
TYPE argument, 2-426 VT200-SERIES argument, 2-430
TYPE command, 2-436 VT300-SERIES argument, 2-430
TYPEOUT argument, 2-364 VT50 argument, 2-429
VT52 argument, 2-430
-U-
-W-
UDDT program, 2-96
UNATTACH command, 2-438 /WARNINGS switch, 2-107, 2-224
Undeletable files, 2-350 WHAT subcommand, 2-404
UNDELETE command, 2-440 WHEEL subcommand, 2-35
/UNIQUE switch, 2-249 WHERE subcommand, 2-404
/UNIT switch, 2-249, 2-275, 2-286, WHO subcommand, 2-404
Index-25
2-296 WIDTH argument, 2-426
Index-26
/WINDOW switch, 2-83, 2-151 -X-
WORKING subcommand, 2-35
/WRITE-ENABLED switch, 2-258 XDDT program, 2-95
Index-27